CX2600-220 Command Reference v7.6B Eng PDF

CX2600/200
Multi-Service Aggregation Switch
Command Reference
Notes
Read this manual in advance thoroughly to use this product correctly.
Keep the manual at hand for quick reference.
MADE IN JAPAN
Corresponding versions
Version 07.06
Revision History
Revision History
Rev.
Published date
May 2009
Description
First edition published
Revision History
(Blank page)
Preface
Preface
Preface
Before reading the command reference:
Product name
The CX2600/200 comprise three models, CX2600/220, CX2600/210, and CX2600/202.
In this manual, the "CX2600/220" is sometimes used in equipment setting examples and so on.
In such a case, the contents are also applicable to the "CX2600/210" and "CX2600/202".
Special mention is provided for the sections specific to a particular model; however, the contents
are also applicable to the "CX2600/210" or "CX2600/202" accordingly, unless otherwise
indicated.
This device has three types of modes to use commands.

General mode:
Mode to use display commands and terminal local set commands that
do not involve configuration update (default)
Privileged mode:
Mode to use all commands related to usual maintenance operation such

as display commands and configuration commands
Maintenance mode:
Mode to use commands for file operations

Mode Transition and Command for Transition
General
Mode
enable
Privileged
Mode
disable
maintenance
Maintenance
Mode
end
Marks located at the top of descriptions for each command indicate following meanings:
Privilege
Indicates that this command can be used in privileged mode.
General
Indicates that this command can be used in general mode.

(When both are displayed, the command can be used in both modes.)
Maintenance
Indicates that this command can be used in maintenance mode.

(For details, see 24 Maintenance Mode.)
Save
Indicates that the settings can be saved.

(Without an indication, the settings for the command cannot be saved.)
Synchronize
Indicates that the settings automatically synchronize with the other

system when the device is operated in dual mode.
SBY execution
Indicates that the command can be used by the standby system when
the device is operated in dual mode.
ii
Preface
Notation in Input format includes following meanings.
Parameters enclosed in brackets can be omitted.
When multiple parameters are enclosed in a pair of brackets, all the parameters enclosed can
be omitted.
Example)
[P1]
P1 can be omitted.
[P1 P2]
P1 and P2 can be omitted.
Either one of P1 or P2 cannot be omitted.
[P1[P2]]
: P1 and P2 can be omitted. P2 can be omitted without omitting P1, but P1

cannot be omitted without omitting P2.
Commands described with multiple input formats vary parameters to be specified according to
the settings.
In such a case, the key parameter is indicated as Px (bold italic) with an explanation.
Example)
P1 (aaa/bbb) P2 P3 :
When aaa or bbb is specified by P1, specify P2 and P3.
P1 (ccc) P4 P5
When ccc is specified by P1, specify P4 and P5.
Notation in Parameters includes following meanings.

Braces indicate that one of the keywords delimited by vertical bars must be selected.
indicates that subsequent parameter to be specified varies according to parameters
previously specified.
In such a case, the affected parameter is indicated as indent | (vertical bar).
parameters are affected as long as indent | continues.
All the
* indicates a supplement for the parameter.

A keyword with _ (underline) indicates that the keyword needs to be input upon command
input.
iii
Preface
In command input, use ASCII characters (excluding control characters).
Usable characters:
[space] !"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMN
OPQRSTUVWXYZ [\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~
Also, the following characters can be used as VLAN and PVC names.
Usable characters: (The first character must be an alphabetic character.)
Alphanumeric characters, -, and _
Finer restrictions are applied to some commands.
(For details, see the Note field of each command.)
The port (line) types specified in command entry correspond to the following line module types:
Port (Line) Type
Line Module Type
atm
atm155
atmp
atmp
atmp155
atmp155
fe
fe8-pv, fx8a-pv, fx8b-pv, fx8s-pv
gbe
gbe-pv, gbe-pv2
gmx
(gm8-t), (gm8-x)
tdmp
tdmp
tdmp155
tdmp155
* Line modules in parentheses are not yet supported.
iv
Preface
Cautions
(1) No part of this manual may be reproduced without prior written permission of the publisher.
(2) The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice.
(3) All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of all information in this manual.
If you notice any part unclear, incorrect, or omitted in this manual, contact NEC.
(4) NEC assumes no liability for the result of operations despite (3).
(5) If you find any missing pages or pages out of order in this manual, please contact NEC for a
replacement.
Preface
(Blank page)
vi
Contents
Contents
Preface..............................................................................................i
Before reading the command reference:...................................................................... ii
1 Operation Modes ......................................................................1-1

Logout ....................................................................................................................... 1-2
Switch from general mode to privileged mode .......................................................... 1-3
Switch from privileged mode to general mode .......................................................... 1-4
Switch from privileged mode to maintenance mode .................................................. 1-5
Setting of privileged mode password......................................................................... 1-6
Clearing of privileged mode password ...................................................................... 1-7
Setting of login password .......................................................................................... 1-8
Clearing of login password ........................................................................................ 1-9
Setting of terminal prompt ........................................................................................1-10
Setting of scroll control defaults ...............................................................................1-11
Setting of local terminal scroll control .......................................................................1-12
Setting of autonomous message output ...................................................................1-13
Setting of automatic logout time ...............................................................................1-14
Display of terminal information .................................................................................1-15
Registration of user account.....................................................................................1-16
Display of user account ............................................................................................1-17
Clearing of user account ..........................................................................................1-18
Setting of command mode .......................................................................................1-19
Display of command mode settings .........................................................................1-20
2 Global Configuration ................................................................2-1

Setting of administrator contact................................................................................. 2-2
Setting of system name............................................................................................. 2-3
Setting of system location ......................................................................................... 2-4
Display of system information ................................................................................... 2-5
Setting of date and time ............................................................................................ 2-6
Setting of timezone.................................................................................................... 2-7
Setting of daylight saving time................................................................................... 2-8
Display of date and time...........................................................................................2-11
Clearing of daylight saving time ...............................................................................2-12
vii
Contents
3 Administration Ports ................................................................3-1

Setting of out-band IP address.................................................................................. 3-2
Clearing of out-band IP address................................................................................ 3-3
Setting of in-band IP address .................................................................................... 3-4
Display of in-band port setup information .................................................................. 3-5
Clearing of in-band IP address.................................................................................. 3-6
Setting of default gateway ......................................................................................... 3-7
Clearing of default gateway....................................................................................... 3-8
Setting of static route................................................................................................. 3-9
Display of network information .................................................................................3-10
Clearing of static route .............................................................................................3-12
Block/unblock of in-band port ...................................................................................3-13
Setting of in-band port VLAN....................................................................................3-14
Setting of out-band port speed/communication direction..........................................3-15
Setting of out-band port flow control.........................................................................3-16
Display of out-band port setup information...............................................................3-17
Checking of connection ............................................................................................3-18
Setting of virtual IP address .....................................................................................3-19
Confirmation of connection with host........................................................................3-20
Clearing of virtual IP address ...................................................................................3-21
Setting of in-band mode ...........................................................................................3-22
4 Ports...........................................................................................4-1
Setting of port blocking/unblocking............................................................................ 4-2
Setting of port speed and MDI/MDI-X........................................................................ 4-3
Setting of GbE port media ......................................................................................... 4-5
Setting of flow control ................................................................................................ 4-6
Setting of port link protection time ............................................................................. 4-7
Setting of SNMP link trap transmission ..................................................................... 4-8
Setting of ATM transmission path clock .................................................................... 4-9
Setting of ATM transmission path framing mode......................................................4-10
Display of port setting and status information...........................................................4-11
Display of link trap transmission setting ...................................................................4-16
Display of port link protection time ...........................................................................4-18
Setting of port cable length.......................................................................................4-19
Display of port cable length settings.........................................................................4-21
Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface ................................................................4-23
viii
Contents
Display of TDMP155 port logical interface setting....................................................4-25
Setting of impedance................................................................................................4-26
Display of impedance setting ...................................................................................4-27
Setting of SDH path trace for TDMP155 ..................................................................4-28
Display of SDH path trace setting for TDMP155 ......................................................4-31
Display of port (line) alarm status for TDMP155 port................................................4-36
5 VLAN ..........................................................................................5-1
Setting of tagbase VLAN ........................................................................................... 5-2
Clearing of tagbase VLAN......................................................................................... 5-3
Setting of portbase VLAN.......................................................................................... 5-4
Display of VLAN table per port (line) ......................................................................... 5-5
Display of VLAN table per VLAN............................................................................... 5-7
Setting of portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc .............................................. 5-8
Setting of VLAN tag swapping................................................................................... 5-9
Display of VLAN tag swapping information ..............................................................5-10
Clearing of VLAN tag swapping ...............................................................................5-11
Display of number of VLAN entries ..........................................................................5-12
Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition....................................................5-13
Display of Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition.................................5-14
Setting of VLAN name..............................................................................................5-15
Clearing of VLAN name............................................................................................5-16
6 QoS ............................................................................................6-1
Setting of maximum bandwidth limit operation mode ................................................ 6-2
Display of maximum bandwidth limit operation mode................................................ 6-4
Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN ................................... 6-6
Setting of priority mapping function per input VLAN .................................................. 6-9
Setting of priority discard function per input VLAN ...................................................6-12
Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN..................................6-16
Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN ................................6-19
Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per output VLAN ................................6-21
Setting of priority mapping function per output VLAN...............................................6-24
Setting of priority discard function per output VLAN .................................................6-27
Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per output VLAN ...............................6-32
Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per output VLAN..............................6-35
Setting of priority mapping........................................................................................6-37
Display of priority mapping .......................................................................................6-38
ix
Contents
Creating of priority mapping profile...........................................................................6-40
Display of priority mapping profile ............................................................................6-42
Creating of CoS profile .............................................................................................6-43
Display of CoS profile...............................................................................................6-46
Clearing of CoS profile .............................................................................................6-48
Setting of input CoS priority mapping .......................................................................6-49
Display of input CoS priority mapping ......................................................................6-50
Clearing of CoS priority mapping .............................................................................6-51
Setting of output CoS priority mapping.....................................................................6-52
Display of output CoS priority mapping ....................................................................6-53
Clearing of output CoS priority mapping...................................................................6-54
Setting of output-side fairness control mode function...............................................6-55
Display of output-side fairness control mode function ..............................................6-56
Setting of priority discard function of output-side fairness control function of output
port ...........................................................................................................................6-57
Setting of output-side fairness control function rate of output port ...........................6-60
Setting of output-side fairness control function weight of output port .......................6-62
Setting of upper threshold of output-side fairness control function of output port.....6-64
Display of output-side fairness control function of output port ..................................6-66
Clearing of output-side fairness control function of output port ................................6-69
Setting of default priority mapping ............................................................................6-71
Display of default priority mapping ...........................................................................6-73
Setting of default burst tolerance..............................................................................6-75
Display of default burst tolerance .............................................................................6-78
Setting of subtraction cycle ......................................................................................6-80
Display of subtraction cycle......................................................................................6-81
7 Switch Control ..........................................................................7-1

Setting of frame size.................................................................................................. 7-2
Display of frame size ................................................................................................. 7-3
Setting of maximum MAC learning count mode ........................................................ 7-4
Display of maximum MAC learning count mode........................................................ 7-5
Setting of aging time.................................................................................................. 7-6
Display of aging time ................................................................................................. 7-7
Display of MAC learning count per port..................................................................... 7-8
Display of MAC learning count per VLAN.................................................................7-10
Display of MAC learning count per device................................................................7-11
Display of MAC learning information ........................................................................7-12
Contents
Display of MAC learning information per port...........................................................7-13
Clearing of MAC learning information per port .........................................................7-15
Display of MAC learning information per VLAN........................................................7-16
Clearing of MAC learning information per VLAN ......................................................7-17
Setting of IFG overrate mode ...................................................................................7-18
Display of IFG overrate mode ..................................................................................7-19
8 Route Control............................................................................8-1
Setting of spanning tree protocol enable/disable support.......................................... 8-2
Setting of spanning tree mode .................................................................................. 8-3
Display of spanning tree mode.................................................................................. 8-4
Setting of switch priority ............................................................................................ 8-5
Setting of spanning tree timer ................................................................................... 8-6
Setting of hold count.................................................................................................. 8-7
Display of spanning tree switch information .............................................................. 8-8
Setting of spanning tree enable/disable per port ......................................................8-10
Setting of priority per port .........................................................................................8-11
Setting of path cost per port .....................................................................................8-12
Display of spanning tree port information .................................................................8-13
Setting of edge port ..................................................................................................8-15
Display of edge port .................................................................................................8-16
Setting of point-to-point ............................................................................................8-17
Display of point-to-point............................................................................................8-18
Setting of BPDU transparency enable/disable per VLAN .........................................8-20
Display of BPDU transparency function setting in specified VLAN...........................8-21
Setting of MAC address transparency function ........................................................8-22
Display of MAC address transparency function........................................................8-23
Setting of link aggregation group..............................................................................8-24
Display of link aggregation setting status .................................................................8-26
Clearing of link aggregation group ...........................................................................8-28
Setting of system priority ..........................................................................................8-29
Display of system priority .........................................................................................8-30
Setting of port priority ...............................................................................................8-31
Display of port priority...............................................................................................8-32
Setting of link aggregation protection time ...............................................................8-33
Display of link aggregation protection time...............................................................8-34
Setting of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable ..................................................8-35
Display of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable information ...............................8-36
xi
Contents
Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified MAC .................................................8-37
Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified group address.................................8-38
Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified VLAN................................................8-39
Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified port number......................................8-40
Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified VLAN ..............................................8-41
9 Filters .........................................................................................9-1
Setting/clearing of port isolate ................................................................................... 9-2
Display of port isolate setting state............................................................................ 9-3
Creating of filtering profile ......................................................................................... 9-4
Display of filtering profile ........................................................................................... 9-6
Clearing of filtering profile.......................................................................................... 9-8
Setting of input filtering.............................................................................................. 9-9
Display of input filtering ............................................................................................9-10
Clearing of input filtering...........................................................................................9-12
Setting of output filtering...........................................................................................9-13
Display of output filtering ..........................................................................................9-14
Clearing of output filtering ........................................................................................9-16
Setting of MAC address learning limiting count function ..........................................9-17
Display of MAC address learning count limiting function..........................................9-18
Clearing of MAC address learning count limiting function ........................................9-20
Setting of static MAC address of MAC address learning count limiting function ......9-21
Clearing of static MAC address of MAC address learning count limiting function ....9-22
10 EtherOAM ..............................................................................10-1
Setting of MEG.........................................................................................................10-2
Display of MEG setting information ..........................................................................10-3
Clearing of MEG.......................................................................................................10-5
Setting of MEP .........................................................................................................10-6
Display of MEP setting information ..........................................................................10-8
Clearing of MEP .....................................................................................................10-12
Setting of test target MEP ......................................................................................10-13
Display of test target MEP setting information........................................................10-14
Clearing of test target MEP ....................................................................................10-15
Setting of associated MEP ID.................................................................................10-16
Clearing of associated MEP ID ..............................................................................10-17
Setting of MIP.........................................................................................................10-18
Display of MIP setting information ..........................................................................10-19
xii
Contents
Clearing of MIP ......................................................................................................10-21
Setting of EtherOAM frame common information...................................................10-22
Display of EtherOAM frame common information ..................................................10-23
Setting of Reply frame returning period..................................................................10-24
Display of Reply frame returning period .................................................................10-25
Setting of EtherOAM Continuity Check transmission .............................................10-26
Setting of RDI operation .........................................................................................10-28
Display of final fault information .............................................................................10-29
Display of CCM error cause ...................................................................................10-30
Clearing of CCM error cause..................................................................................10-32
Executing of EtherOAM Loop Back test .................................................................10-33
Executing of EtherOAM Link Trace test .................................................................10-35
Executing of EtherOAM Frame Delay Measurement test.......................................10-37
Executing of EtherOAM Frame Loss Measurement test ........................................10-39
Setting of EtherPS enable/disable..........................................................................10-42
Setting of EtherPS control VLAN............................................................................10-44
Setting of EtherPS lockout .....................................................................................10-45
Setting of EtherPS timer.........................................................................................10-46
Changeover of EtherPS state.................................................................................10-47
Resetting of EtherPS state changeover .................................................................10-48
Display of EtherPS configuration information .........................................................10-49
Display of EtherPS status.......................................................................................10-51
Setting of EtherRing enable/disable .......................................................................10-53
Setting of EtherRing control VLAN .........................................................................10-54
Setting of EtherRing RPL port ................................................................................10-55
Setting of EtherRing timer ......................................................................................10-56
Clearing of EtherRing loop detection status ...........................................................10-57
Display of EtherRing configuration information ......................................................10-58
Display of EtherRing status information .................................................................10-60
11 APS ........................................................................................11-1
Setting of APS enable/disable..................................................................................11-2
Setting of APS lockout..............................................................................................11-4
Setting of APS timer values......................................................................................11-5
Changeover of APS..................................................................................................11-6
Resetting of APS changeover ..................................................................................11-8
Display of APS settings and status ..........................................................................11-9
xiii
Contents
12 ATM Control ..........................................................................12-1

Registration of PVC..................................................................................................12-2
Clearing of PVC .......................................................................................................12-3
Registration of PVC name........................................................................................12-4
Clearing of PVC name..............................................................................................12-5
Setting of PVC blocking/unblocking .........................................................................12-6
Setting PVC blocking/unblocking en bloc .................................................................12-7
Display of PVC setting information...........................................................................12-8
Setting of PVC-VLAN mode ...................................................................................12-10
Setting of VLAN VC................................................................................................12-11
Clearing of VLAN VC settings ................................................................................12-12
Display of VLAN VC setting status per PVC...........................................................12-13
Display of VLAN VC setting status per VLAN.........................................................12-15
Setting/clearing of PVC isolate...............................................................................12-17
Display of PVC isolate setting status......................................................................12-18
Display of MAC learning information per PVC........................................................12-19
Display of MAC learning information per VLAN......................................................12-20
Display of MAC learning count per PVC.................................................................12-22
Display of MAC learning count per VLAN...............................................................12-24
Clearing of MAC learning information per PVC ......................................................12-26
Setting/clearing of ATM loop guard ........................................................................12-27
Display of ATM loop guard setting status ...............................................................12-28
Display of ATM loop trap transmission state ..........................................................12-29
Clearing of ATM loop detection ..............................................................................12-30
Setting of ATMoP mode .........................................................................................12-31
Setting of ATMoP format ........................................................................................12-33
Display of ATMoP format information.....................................................................12-35
Clearing of ATMoP format setting ..........................................................................12-37
Setting of path between ATMs ...............................................................................12-38
Display of path information between ATMs ............................................................12-41
Clearing path setting between ATMs......................................................................12-42
13 ATM-QoS ...............................................................................13-1
Setting of rate mode .................................................................................................13-2
Setting of ATM shaper..............................................................................................13-3
Display of ATM shaper .............................................................................................13-6
Display of effective band ..........................................................................................13-8
xiv
Contents
Clearing of ATM shaper .........................................................................................13-10
Setting of AAL5 mode ............................................................................................13-11
Display of AAL5 mode............................................................................................13-12
Setting of CLP ........................................................................................................13-13
Display of CLP setting ............................................................................................13-14
Clearing of CLP setting ..........................................................................................13-15
Setting of CLP-priority mapping .............................................................................13-16
Display of CLP-priority mapping setting status.......................................................13-18
Setting of CLP conversion mode ............................................................................13-20
Setting of CLP conversion priority ..........................................................................13-21
Display of CLP conversion setting status ...............................................................13-22
14 ATM-OAM ..............................................................................14-1
Setting of ATM-OAM operation ................................................................................14-2
Setting of ATM-OAM flow point ................................................................................14-4
Display of ATM-OAM setting information .................................................................14-6
Display of ATM-OAM status information ..................................................................14-8
15 ATM-IMA ................................................................................15-1
Setting of IMA group.................................................................................................15-2
Display of IMA group setting information..................................................................15-4
Display of IMA group status information...................................................................15-5
Clearing of IMA group ..............................................................................................15-8
Setting of IMA clock mode........................................................................................15-9
Display of IMA clock mode setting information.......................................................15-10
Starting and result display of IMA loopback test.....................................................15-11
16 TDM-Path ...............................................................................16-1
Setting of TDM group ...............................................................................................16-2
Display of TDM group setting information ................................................................16-4
Clearing of TDM group .............................................................................................16-6
Setting of TDM group name .....................................................................................16-8
Display of TDM group name setting .......................................................................16-10
Clearing of TDM group name setting......................................................................16-12
Setting of TDM path ...............................................................................................16-14
Display of TDM path setting information.................................................................16-16
Clearing of TDM path .............................................................................................16-18
xv
Contents
17 TDM over Packet...................................................................17-1

Setting of TDMoP mode ...........................................................................................17-2
Clearing of TDMoP mode setting .............................................................................17-4
Setting of TDMoP group...........................................................................................17-5
Display of TDMoP group setting information ............................................................17-7
Clearing of TDMoP group.........................................................................................17-9
Setting of TDMoP connection.................................................................................17-11
Display of TDMoP connection setting.....................................................................17-13
Clearing of TDMoP connection ..............................................................................17-16
Setting of variation tolerance..................................................................................17-17
Display of variation tolerance .................................................................................17-19
Display of TDMoP path setting status information..................................................17-21
Setting of TDMoP format........................................................................................17-23
Display of TDMoP format setting............................................................................17-25
Clearing of TDMoP format......................................................................................17-28
Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblocking...................................................................17-30
Setting of adaptive clock ........................................................................................17-32
Display of adaptive clock setting ............................................................................17-34
Clearing of adaptive clock ......................................................................................17-35
18 Clock Control ........................................................................18-1

Setting of external clock mode .................................................................................18-2
Setting of reference clock priority .............................................................................18-3
Setting of reference clock operation .........................................................................18-5
Display of reference clock information......................................................................18-6
Resetting of reference clock.....................................................................................18-8
Change of external clock..........................................................................................18-9
19 Network Management ........................................................19-11

Setting of SNMP enable/disable.............................................................................19-12
Setting of SNMP manager......................................................................................19-13
Setting of SNMP trap manager ..............................................................................19-14
Clearing of SNMP manager settings ......................................................................19-15
Clearing of SNMP trap manager settings ...............................................................19-16
Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission.......................................19-17
Display of SNMP setting information ......................................................................19-18
Setting of access list...............................................................................................19-20
xvi
Contents
Display of access list ..............................................................................................19-21
Clearing of access list ............................................................................................19-22
Display of session ..................................................................................................19-23
Clearing of session.................................................................................................19-24
Setting of remote log enable/disable ......................................................................19-25
Setting of syslog server and message facility.........................................................19-26
Display of syslog server configuration information .................................................19-27
Clearing of syslog server........................................................................................19-28
Setting of syslog message level remapping ...........................................................19-29
Display of syslog message level mapping status ...................................................19-30
Clearing of syslog message level remapping .........................................................19-31
Display of local log .................................................................................................19-32
Clearing of local log................................................................................................19-34
Setting of NTP access time ....................................................................................19-35
Setting of IP address of NTP server .......................................................................19-36
Display of NTP server setting information ..............................................................19-37
Clearing of IP address of NTP server.....................................................................19-38
20 Network Test .........................................................................20-1

Setting of M/C management function basics ............................................................20-2
Starting of M/C loopback test ...................................................................................20-3
Prompting of M/C to send M/C status notification ....................................................20-6
Display of M/C information .......................................................................................20-7
Starting of ATM loopback test ..................................................................................20-9
Setting of ATM loopback source ID........................................................................20-13
Display of ATM loopback source ID .......................................................................20-14
Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode.............................................................20-15
Display of ATM loopback monitoring configuration ................................................20-16
Setting of ATM loopback monitoring function .........................................................20-19
Display of ATM loopback monitoring information ...................................................20-21
Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring function.......................................................20-23
21 Monitors.................................................................................21-1
Display of port counter .............................................................................................21-2
Clearing of port counter............................................................................................21-5
Display of discard counter ........................................................................................21-6
Registration of VLAN counter...................................................................................21-9
Display of VLAN counter registration information...................................................21-11
xvii
Contents
Clearing of VLAN counter registration ....................................................................21-13
Display of VLAN counter ........................................................................................21-14
Clearing of VLAN counter.......................................................................................21-19
Registration of PVC counter...................................................................................21-20
Display of PVC counter registration information.....................................................21-21
Clearing of PVC counter registration ......................................................................21-22
Display of byte/frame counter information per PVC ...............................................21-23
Clearing of byte/frame counter information per PVC ..............................................21-26
Display of cell counter information .........................................................................21-27
Display of cell counter information per F4 ..............................................................21-31
Display of cell counter information per F5 ..............................................................21-34
Display of cell counter information per IMA port.....................................................21-37
Clearing of cell counter information ........................................................................21-39
Registration of EtherOAM counter .........................................................................21-40
Display of EtherOAM counter registration information............................................21-41
Clearing of EtherOAM counter registration.............................................................21-43
Display of EtherOAM counter.................................................................................21-44
Setting of mirroring start or stop .............................................................................21-45
Display of mirroring settings ...................................................................................21-47
22 Maintenance and Operation ................................................22-1

Uploading of running configuration to ftp server.......................................................22-2
Uploading of startup configuration to ftp server........................................................22-3
Uploading of system log to ftp server .......................................................................22-4
Uploading of setting information to ftp server ...........................................................22-5
Uploading of fault information to ftp server...............................................................22-6
Downloading of software ..........................................................................................22-7
Downloading of FPGA of UGSW module .................................................................22-8
Downloading of FPGA of line module.......................................................................22-9
Downloading of running configuration from ftp server ............................................22-11
Downloading of startup configuration from ftp server .............................................22-13
Display of running configuration .............................................................................22-14
Display of startup configuration ..............................................................................22-15
Display of configuration difference .........................................................................22-16
Setting of trap transmission selection.....................................................................22-17
Display of trap transmission selection setting status ..............................................22-21
Display of all setting information.............................................................................22-24
Saving of setting information ..................................................................................22-26
xviii
Contents
Clearing of line module configuration .....................................................................22-27
Clearing of startup configuration ............................................................................22-30
Setting of backup server.........................................................................................22-31
Clearing of backup server ......................................................................................22-32
Setting of backup schedule ....................................................................................22-33
Display of backup information ................................................................................22-35
Display of current fault and alarm information ........................................................22-36
Clearing of WR fault ...............................................................................................22-38
Display of past fault information .............................................................................22-39
Clearing of past fault information............................................................................22-41
Display of device installation status and other various statuses.............................22-42
Display of bridge information for device .................................................................22-44
Display of module ID information ...........................................................................22-45
Display of various version information....................................................................22-47
Display of device temperature................................................................................22-49
Setting of autonomous rebooting enable/disable ...................................................22-51
Display of autonomous rebooting settings..............................................................22-52
Display of CPU usage ............................................................................................22-53
Display of memory usage.......................................................................................22-55
23 Device Control ......................................................................23-1

Setting of line module type .......................................................................................23-2
Setting of TDMP line mode ......................................................................................23-3
Setting of ATMP line mode.......................................................................................23-6
Setting of TDMP155 line mode ................................................................................23-8
Setting of GbE line mode .......................................................................................23-10
Display of line mode setting ...................................................................................23-11
Changeover of UGSW module system...................................................................23-13
Resetting of entire device.......................................................................................23-14
Resetting of UGSW module ...................................................................................23-16
Resetting of line module.........................................................................................23-18
Display of reset factor.............................................................................................23-19
OUS setting of UGSW module ...............................................................................23-20
OUS setting of line module.....................................................................................23-21
Removing of external memory ...............................................................................23-22
xix
Contents
24 Maintenance Mode ...............................................................24-1

Downloading of software ..........................................................................................24-2
Downloading of FPGA of UGSW module .................................................................24-3
Downloading of FPGA of line module.......................................................................24-5
Uploading of running configuration to external memory ...........................................24-7
Uploading of startup configuration to external memory ............................................24-8
Uploading of system log to external memory ...........................................................24-9
Downloading of running configuration from external memory ................................24-10
Downloading of startup configuration from external memory .................................24-11
Uploading of fault information to external memory .................................................24-12
Uploading of setting information.............................................................................24-13
Saving of setting status to external memory...........................................................24-14
Switch from maintenance mode to privileged mode...............................................24-15
Display of list of contents in directory .....................................................................24-16
Creating of directory ...............................................................................................24-17
Removing of directory ............................................................................................24-18
Change of current directory....................................................................................24-19
Copying file ............................................................................................................24-20
Change of file name ...............................................................................................24-21
Deleting file ............................................................................................................24-22
Removing of external memory ...............................................................................24-23
Display of asynchronous switch status of UGSW module ......................................24-24
25 Appendix ...............................................................................25-1
Appendix 1
Commands shown by configuration display and show all ...................25-2
Appendix 2 Line module type conditions .............................................................25-12
Index ..................................................................................... Index-1
xx
Operation Modes
1 Operation Modes
1-1
Operation Modes
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
exit
Logout
This command is used for logout from CLI.
Input format
exit
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# exit
Output item
Related
commands
enable
disable
Switch from general mode to privileged mode

Switch from privileged mode to general mode
1-2
Operation Modes
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
enable
Enables you to switch from general mode to privileged mode.
Input format
enable
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
Interactively enter your privileged mode password. When not setting this password,
press [Enter].
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1> enable
Input enable password:
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
exit
disable
Logout
1-3
Operation Modes
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
disable
Enables you to switch from privileged mode to general mode.
Input format
disable
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# disable
*Switch@1>
Output item
Related
commands
exit
enable
Logout
1-4
Operation Modes
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
maintenance
Switch from privileged mode to maintenance mode
Enables you to switch from privileged mode to maintenance mode.
Input format
maintenance
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
If another session is in maintenance mode, you cannot switch from privileged mode to
maintenance mode.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# maintenance
*Switch@1%
Output item
Related
command
end
Switch from maintenance mode to privileged mode
1-5
Operation Modes
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set enable password

Setting of privileged mode password
Sets your privileged mode password.
Input format
set enable password
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
Set your privileged mode password interactively.
Note
Set this password with 4 to 16 ASCII characters other than [space], [!], [?], and [control
character].
Input example
*Switch@1# set enable password

Input old enable password:
Input new enable password:
Retype new enable password:
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
enable
clear enable password

Clearing of privileged mode password
1-6
Operation Modes
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clearing of privileged mode password
Clears your privileged mode password.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
Clear your privileged mode password interactively.
Note
character].
Input example
*Switch@1# clear enable password

Input old password:
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
enable
set enable password

Setting of privileged mode password
1-7
Operation Modes
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set login password

Setting of login password
Sets your login password.
Input format
set login password
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
Set your login password interactively.
Note
character].
Input example
*Switch@1# set login password

Input old password:
Input new password:
Retype new password:
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
exit
clear login password
Logout
Clearing of login password
1-8
Operation Modes
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clearing of login password
Clears your login password.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
Clear your login password interactively.
Note
character].
Input example
*Switch@1# clear login password

Input old password:
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
exit
set login password
Logout
Setting of login password
1-9
Operation Modes
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set terminal prompt

Setting of terminal prompt
Sets a terminal prompt.
Input format
set terminal prompt P1
Parameter
P1: Terminal prompt name (1 to 20 characters)
Default value
P1: Switch
Usage condition
None
Notes
Terminal prompts for other than the set terminal are set at reconnection.
Set this prompt name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character].
When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.
Input example
*Switch@1# set terminal prompt CX2600-220

*CX2600-220@1#
Output item
Related
command
None
1-10
Operation Modes
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set terminal scroll system

Setting of scroll control defaults
Sets scroll control defaults.
Input Formats
- Specifying that screen scroll stop is off

set terminal scroll system P1 (off)
- Specifying that screen scroll stop is on
set terminal scroll system [P1 (on) ] [P2]
Parameters
P1: Scroll control { off | on }

off: Screen scroll stop is off
on: Screen scroll stop is on
* When P1 is omitted, on is assumed.
When on is specified in P1.
P2: Number of scroll lines (1 to 99)
* When P2 is omitted, 22 is assumed.
Default value
P1: on
P2: 22
Usage condition
None
Note
Scroll control defaults are set in all terminals at reconnection.
Input example
*Switch@1# set terminal scroll system on

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show terminal config
Display of terminal information
1-11
Operation Modes
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set terminal scroll local

Setting of local terminal scroll control
Sets local terminal scroll control.
Input Formats
- Specifying that screen scroll stop is off

set terminal scroll local P1 (off)
- Specifying that screen scroll stop is on
set terminal scroll local [P1 (on) ] [P2]
Parameters
P1: Scroll control { off | on }

on: Screen scroll stop is on
* When P1 is omitted, on is assumed.
When on is specified in P1.
P2: Number of scroll lines (1 to 99)
Default value
P1: on
P2: 22
Usage condition
None
Notes
Local terminal scroll control only for the set terminal is set.
A local terminal operates in scroll control default setting at reconnection.
Input example
*Switch@1# set terminal scroll local on

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
1-12
Operation Modes
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set terminal monitor

Setting of autonomous message output
Sets autonomous message output.
Input format
set terminal monitor P1
Parameter
P1: Autonomous message control { enable | disable }

enable: Enables autonomous message output
disable: Disables autonomous message output
Default values
P1: [RS-232C] enable

[telnet] disable
Usage condition
None
Notes
Autonomous message output is suppressed during command execution.

Terminals operate by default at reconnection.
Input example
*Switch@1# set terminal monitor enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
1-13
Operation Modes
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set terminal logout

Setting of automatic logout time
Sets automatic logout time.
Input format
set terminal logout P1
Parameter
P1: Automatic logout time (0 to 60 minutes)

0: Disables automatic logout time setting
Default value
P1: 5 minutes
Usage condition
None
Note
Automatic logout time for other than the set terminal is set at reconnection.
Input example
*Switch@1# set terminal logout 60

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
1-14
Operation Modes
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows terminal information.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show terminal config

Current Terminal Configuration
==============================
Console TimeOut (minutes) : 60
Output Length
: off
Alarm Monitor
: disabled
Default Terminal Configuration
==============================
Console TimeOut (minutes) : 60
Output Length
: 99
*Switch@1#
Output items
Console Timeout (minutes): Automatic logout time

Output Length: Scroll control
XX: Scroll line
Alarm Monitor: Autonomous message output control
enable: Enables autonomous message output
disable: Disables autonomous message output
Related
commands

set terminal logout
Setting of scroll control defaults

Setting of local terminal scroll control
Setting of autonomous message output
Setting of automatic logout time
1-15
Operation Modes
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set user account

Registration of user account
Registers a user account or changes the password of the registered user account.
Input format
set user account P1 P2
Parameters
P1: User account name (1 to 10 characters)

P2: Permission specification { read-only | read-write }
read-only: General mode
read-write: Privileged mode
Default value
None
Usage condition
Set your password interactively.
Notes
Set a user account with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character].
You can register up to six user accounts except the default user account.
You can change the password of the registered user account by specifying the same
user account name and user privilege as the registered user account and entering the
old password.
Set the password with 4 to 16 ASCII characters other than [space], [!], [?], and [control
character].
Input example
*Switch@1# set user account cx2600 read-write

Input password:
Retype password:
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show user account

clear user account
Display of user account

Clearing of user account
1-16
Operation Modes
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show user account

Shows registered user account information.
Input format
show user account
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show user account

User Information
================
User Name Rights
-------------------------------admin
read-write
ippan
read-only
tokken
read-write
cx2600
read-write
*Switch@1#
Output items
User Name: User account name

Rights: Mode rights
read-only: General mode
read-write: Privileged mode
Related
commands
set user account

clear user account

1-17
Operation Modes
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear user account

Clears a user account.
Input format
clear user account P1
Parameter
P1: User account name (1 to 10 characters)
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
You cannot clear the default user account admin.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear user account cx2600

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set user account

show user account

1-18
Operation Modes
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set command-mode
Setting of command mode
Sets command mode.
Input format
set command-mode P1
Parameter
P1: Command mode { normal | safety }

normal: Normal mode
safety: Safety mode
Default value
P1: normal
Usage condition
None
Notes
If command mode is safety mode, the command sequence control function, execution
confirmation function, and overwrite setting suppression function are valid. For the
target commands of each function, refer to Command Mode Functions of Method of
Operating Maintenance and Management Functions in the Instruction Manual.
Input example
*Switch@1# set command-mode safety

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show command-mode
Display of command mode settings
1-19
Operation Modes
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show command-mode
Display of command mode settings
Shows command mode settings.
Input format
show command-mode
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show command-mode

Command Mode Configuration
==========================
Command Mode : normal
*Switch@1#
Output item
Command Mode: Command mode

normal: Normal mode
safety: Safety mode
Related
command
set command-mode
Setting of command mode
1-20
Global Configuration
2 Global Configuration
2-1
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set system contact

Setting of administrator contact
Sets an administrator to contact.
Input format
set system contact P1
Parameter
P1: Administrator to contact (0 to 255 characters)
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
To return the set administrator contact to the default value, set in P1.
Set an administrator contact with ASCII characters (excluding control characters) like
normal command entry.
Input example
*Switch@1# set system contact abc

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show system information
Display of system information
2-2
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set system name

Setting of system name
Sets system name.
Input format
set system name P1
Parameter
P1: System name (0 to 255 characters)
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
To return the set system name to the default value, set in P1.
Set a system name with ASCII characters (excluding control characters) like normal
command entry.
Input example
*Switch@1# set system name CX2600

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
2-3
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set system location

Setting of system location
Sets system location.
Input format
set system location P1
Parameter
P1: System location (0 to 255 characters)
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
To return the set system location to the default value, set in P1.
Set a system location with ASCII characters (excluding control characters) like normal
command entry.
Input example
*Switch@1# set system location NEC

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
2-4
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows system information.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show system information

System Information
==================
SysDescr : NEC CX2600/220 Ver.00.01.07
System Location: NEC
System Name : CX2600/220
System Contact : abc
System Up Time : 0 days, 00:53:41.57
*Switch@1#
Output items
SysDescr: Device information

NEC: Company name (fixed)
CX2600/220: Device name (fixed)
Ver.vv.rr.mm: Software version
vv: Version
rr: Revision
mm: Minor version
System Location: System location
System Name: System name
System Contact: Administrator contact
System Up Time: Elapsed time after system start (unit: 10 ms)
Related
commands
set system contact

set system name
set system location
Setting of administrator contact

Setting of system name
Setting of system location
2-5
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
date
Setting of date and time
Sets system date and time.
Input format
date P1 P2
Parameters
P1: Date (mm/dd/yy)

mm: Month (01 to 12)
dd: Day (01 to 31)
yy: Year (00 to 99)
P2: Time (hh:mm:ss)
hh: Hour (00 to 23)
mm: Minute (00 to 59)
ss: Second (00 to 59)
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
Second input (ss) can be omitted. If omitted, 0 second is assumed.
Input example
*Switch@1# date 04/18/06 12:00

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show system date
Display of date and time
2-6
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set system timezone

Setting of timezone
Sets timezone.
Input format
set system timezone P1
Parameter
P1: Timezone (hh:mm)

: Sign (- or +)
hh: Hour (00 to 23)
Default value
P1: +9:00
Usage condition
Always specify a sign of time difference.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set system timezone +09:00

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
date
show system date

2-7
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set system daylight-time

Setting of daylight saving time
Sets daylight saving time.
Input Formats
- Specifying daylight saving time by date

set system daylight-time P1 (date) P2 P3 P4 [P12]
- Specifying daylight saving time by week
set system daylight-time P1 (week) P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 [P12]
Parameters
P1: Start date (daylight saving time specification by date) specification or daylight saving
time specification by week { first | second | third | fourth | last }
- Start date (daylight saving time specification by date) (mm/dd)
mm: Month (01-12)
dd: Date (01-31)
- Daylight saving time specification by week
first: The first week
second: The second week
third: The third week
fourth: The fourth week
last: The last week
When start date (daylight saving time specification by date) is specified in P1.
P2: Start time (hh/mm)
hh: Hour (00-23)
mm: Minute (00-59)
P3: End date (mm/dd)
mm: Month (01-12)
dd: Date (01-31)
P4: End time (hh:mm)
hh: Hour (00-23)
mm: Minute (00-59)
2-8
When daylight saving time specification by week is specified in P1.
P5: Start day of the week { sunday | monday | tuesday | wednesday | thursday |
friday | saturday }
sunday: Sunday
monday: Monday
tuesday: Tuesday
wednesday: Wednesday
thursday: Thursday
friday: Friday
saturday: Saturday
P6: Start month (1-12)
P7: Start time (hh:mm)
hh: Hour (00-23)
mm: Minute (00-59)
P8: End week { first | second | third | fourth | last }
first: The first week
second: The second week
third: The third week
fourth: The fourth week
last: The last week
P9: End day of the week { sunday | monday | tuesday | wednesday | thursday |
friday | saturday }
sunday: Sunday
monday: Monday
tuesday: Tuesday
thursday: Thursday
friday: Friday
saturday: Saturday
P10: End month (1-12)
P11: End time (hh:mm)
hh: Hour (00-23)
mm: Minute (00-59)
P12: Time difference by daylight saving time (hh:mm)
hh: Hour (00-23)
* When P12 is omitted, 01:00 is assumed.
Default value
None
Usage condition
In date specification, you cannot specify the same date for start/end date of daylight
saving time. Also, in specification of a day of week, you cannot specify the same
month/date/day of week for start/end date of daylight saving time.
2-9
Notes
When daylight saving time starts, the clock is not set to the set start time, moving
forward corresponding to the time difference by daylight saving time.
Example) When the start time is 1:00 and time difference by daylight saving time is 0:30
0:58 -> 0:59 -> 1:30
When daylight saving time ends, the clock is not set to the set end time, moving
backward corresponding to the time difference by daylight saving time.
Example) When the end time is 2:00 and time difference by daylight saving time is 0:30
1:58 -> 1:59 -> 1:30
If daylight saving time is shorter than time difference by daylight saving time, the
specified end date is changed to that of the next year.
If the start date or the end date is Feb. 29, daylight saving time is applied only to leap
years. If Feb. 29 is set as the start date and the daylight saving time is shorter than
time difference by daylight saving time, the end date is changed to that of the next year
of the leap year. If Feb. 29 is set as the end date and the daylight saving time is shorter
than time difference by daylight saving time, the start date is changed to that of the
previous year of a leap year.
During daylight saving time, (DST) is shown in the current time.
Input example
*Switch@1# set system daylight-time first sunday 4 1:00 last saturday 10

2:00 0:30
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
date
show system date
clear system daylight-time

Clearing of daylight saving time
2-10
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show system date

Shows system date and time.
Input format
show system date [P1]
Parameter
P1: Showing type { detail }

detail: Detailed showing
* When P1 is omitted, setting of daylight saving time is not shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show system date detail

System Date
===========
Current Date : 09/21/2006
Current Time : 14:14:47 (DST)
Time Zone : GMT +09:00
Daylight Time Start : 04/02/2006 01:00
Daylight Time End : 10/28/2006 02:00
Daylight Time Offset: 00:30
*Switch@1#
Output items
Date: Date
Time: Time
Time Zone: Time difference from Greenwich mean time
Daylight Time Start: Start date and time of daylight saving time
Daylight Time End: End date and time of daylight saving time
Daylight Time Offset: Time difference by daylight saving time
Related
commands
date
set system timezone

Setting of timezone
2-11
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clearing of daylight saving time
Clears daylight saving time settings.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear system daylight-time

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
date
show system date

2-12
Administration Ports
3 Administration Ports
3-1
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ip address out-band

Setting of out-band IP address
Sets the IP address and subnet mask of an out-band port.
Input format
set ip address out-band P1 P2 P3
Parameters
P1: Switch module number or system { system }

Switch module number: 1 to 2
system: System
P2: IP address
P3: Subnet mask
Default value
None
Usage conditions
You cannot use the network addresses set in the set ip address in-band command
(Setting of in-band IP address) and set ip route command (Setting of static route).
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the IP address. (xxx is any number.)
You cannot set 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the network address.
You cannot set 0 or 1 to all bits of the host part as the IP address.
Note
If you log in via telnet communication, the login session close confirmation message is
output.
Input examples
*Switch@1# set ip address out-band 1 10.40.50.4 255.0.0.0

*Switch@1# set ip address out-band 2 10.40.50.5 255.0.0.0
*Switch@1# set ip address out-band system 10.40.50.6 255.0.0.0
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
clear ip address out-band

set ip route default
set ip route
show ip config
Clearing of output-bound IP address

Setting of default gateway
Setting of static route
Display of network information
3-2
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clearing of out-band IP address
Initializes the IP address of an out-band port.
Input format
clear ip address out-band P1
Parameter

system: System
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
output.
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear ip address out-band 1

*Switch@1# clear ip address out-band 2
*Switch@1# clear ip address out-band system
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

set ip route
show ip config

3-3
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ip address in-band

Setting of in-band IP address
Sets an IP address and subnet mask for the logical interface.
Input format
set ip address in-band P1 P2 P3
Parameters

system: System
P2: IP address
P3: Subnet mask
Default value
None
Usage conditions
You cannot use the network addresses set in the set ip address out-band command
(Setting of out-band IP address) and set ip route command (Setting of static route).
You cannot set 0 or 1 to all bits of the host part as the IP address.
Note
If you log in via telnet communication, the login session disconnection confirmation
message is output.
Input examples
*Switch@1# set ip address in-band 1 1.1.1.1 255.0.0.0

*Switch@1# set ip address in-band 2 1.1.1.2 255.0.0.0
*Switch@1# set ip address in-band system 1.1.1.3 255.0.0.0
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show in-band information

clear ip address in-band
set ip route
show ip config
set in-band vid
Display of in-band port setup information

Clearing of in-band IP address
Setting of in-band port VLAN
3-4
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of in-band port setup information
Shows in-band port setup information.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show in-band information

In-Band Configuration
=====================
Module
Admin
------------------Switch#1 : enabled
Switch#2 : disabled
In-Band VLAN Configuration
==========================
VID : 4094
Name: abcd
*Switch@1#
Output items
Module: Module
Admin: Port block/unblock setting
enabled: Port unblocked
disabled: Port blocked
Related
commands
set in-band admin

set in-band vid
Block/unblock of in-band port

3-5
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clears logical interface settings.
Input format
clear ip address in-band P1
Parameter

system: System
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
output.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear ip address in-band 1

*Switch@1# clear ip address in-band 2
*Switch@1# clear ip address in-band system
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

set ip route
show ip config
set in-band vid

3-6
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets a default gateway.
Input format
set ip route default P1
Parameter
P1: IP address
Default value
None
Usage conditions
If a default gateway is set in in-band communication, a default gateway cannot be

used in out-band communication. If a default gateway is set in in-band
communication, the default gateway that is already set in out-band communication is
disabled.
If a default gateway is set in out-band communication, the default gateway that is
already set in in-band communication is disabled.
If you set 0 or 1 to all bits of the host part as the IP address, this setting may not
provide correct communication.
You can set the network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the
gateway address but this setting does not provide correct communication.
Note
output.
Input example
*Switch@1# set ip route default 10.20.30.40

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

clear ip route default
show ip config

Clearing of default gateway
3-7
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clears a default gateway.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
output.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear ip route default

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

show ip config

3-8
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ip route
Sets a static route.
Input format
set ip route P1 P2 P3 P4
Parameters
P1: Routing domain (1 to 32)

P2: Destination address
P3: Subnet mask
P4: IP address (next hop)
Default value
None
Usage conditions
You cannot use the network addresses set in the set ip address in-band command
(Setting of in-band IP address) and set ip address out-band command (Setting of
out-band IP address).
If you set 0 or 1 to all bits of the host part as the gateway address or set 1 to all bits as
the destination address, this setting may not provide correct communication.
You cannot set the network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the
destination address. Also, you can set the gateway address for the network address
192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correct
communication.
Note
output.
Input example
*Switch@1# set ip route 1 1.2.3.4 255.255.255.0 10.20.30.40

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

clear ip route
show ip config

Clearing of static route
3-9
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show ip config
Shows network information for out-band/in-band.
Input format
show ip config
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage conditions
0.0.0.0 is shown in unset IP address and subnet mask. 00:00:00:00:00:00 is shown

in the MAC addresses of uninstalled switch modules.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show ip config

Out-Band IP Table
=================
Module
MAC Address
IP Address
Netmask
-------------------------------------------------------------System : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:64 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Switch#1 : 00:00:00:00:00:00 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Switch#2 : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:64 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
In-Band IP Table
================
Module
MAC Address
IP Address
Netmask
---------------------------------------------------------------------System : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:a4
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Switch#1 : 00:00:00:00:00:00
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Switch#2 : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:a4
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
IP Routing Table
================
Destination
Gateway
Index Address
Netmask
Address
Port
---------------------------------------------------------------------- 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
10.20.30.40
--In-Band Mode
============
Mode : virtual
VLAN Virtual-Address Table
==========================
Index VID Name
Address
---------------------------------------------------------------------3
300
1.1.1.10
3-10
*Switch@1#
Output items
Module: Module
MAC Address: MAC address
IP Address: IP address
Netmask: Subnet mask
Index: Routing domain
Destination Address: Destination address
Gateway Address: Gateway address
Port: Band
out-band: Out-band communication
in-band: In-band communication
-: No band
Mode: In-band mode
Virtual: User connection test function enabled
Real: Administration port control function enabled
VID: VLAN ID
Name: VLAN name (32 characters)
Address: Virtual IP address
Related
commands

set ip route
clear ip route
set ip in-band mode
set ip virtual-address
clear ip virtual-address

Switching of in-band mode
Setting of virtual IP address
Clearing of virtual IP address
3-11
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear ip route
Clears a static route.
Input format
clear ip route P1
Parameter
P1: Routing domain (1 to 32)
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
After this command is entered, execution is confirmed.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear ip route 1

Would you like to terminate remote session : (Y/N) : y
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ip route
show ip config

3-12
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set in-band admin

Block/unblock of in-band port
Blocks and unblocks an in-band port.
Input format
set in-band admin P1 P2
Parameters
P1: Switch module number (1 to 2)

P2: In-band port block/unblock setting { enable | disable }
enable: Unblocks in-band port
disable: Blocks in-band port
Default value
P2: enable
Usage condition
None
Note
output.
Input example
*Switch@1# set in-band admin 1 enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

set ip route
show ip config
set in-band vid

3-13
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set in-band vid

Sets the VLAN to which the CPU port belongs.
Input format
set in-band vid P1
Parameter
P1: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }

VLAN ID: 1 to 4094
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
Default values
VLAN ID: 1
Usage conditions
The VLAN to which the CPU port belongs is set in the set in-band vid command.
This VLAN transfers all broadcast, multicast, and unknown unicast frames to the CPU
port. To reduce CPU load, use this VLAN separately from user ports (lines).
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set in-band vid 1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

set ip route
show ip config
set in-band admin

Blocking/unblocking of in-band port
3-14
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set out-band speed

Setting of out-band port speed/communication direction
Sets out-band port speed/communication direction.
Input formats
- Specifying port speed (Auto-negotiation)

set out-band speed P1 (auto)
- Specifying the following port speed
-10m-half
-10m-full
-100m-half
-100m-full
set out-band speed P1 (10m-half | 10m-full | 100m-half | 100m-full) [P2]
Parameters
P1: Port speed { 10m-half | 10m-full | 100m-half | 100m-full | auto }

10m-half: 10 Mbps and Half Duplex
10m-full: 10 Mbps and Full Duplex
100m-half: 100 Mbps and Half Duplex
auto: Auto-negotiation
When 10m-half, 10m-full, 100m-half, or 100m-full is specified in P1.
P2: Interface { mdi | mdi-x }
mdi: MDI mode
mdi-x: MDI-X mode
* When P2 is omitted, mdi is assumed.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
output.
Input example
*Switch@1# set out-band speed auto

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show out-band information
Display of out-band port setup information
3-15
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set out-band flowcontrol

Setting of out-band port flow control
Sets out-band port flow control.
Input format
set out-band flowcontrol P1
Parameter
P1: Flow control setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables flow control
disable: Disables flow control
Default value
P1: disable
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set out-band flowcontrol enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
3-16
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows out-band port setup information.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show out-band information

Out-Band Table
==============
Port
Link
Flowcontrol
Flowcontrol
Module
Speed
Status
MDI
Configuration
Status
----------------------------------------------------------------------Switch#1 : auto
100m-full
auto
disabled
disabled
Switch#2 : auto
--auto
disabled
--*Switch@1#
Output items
Module: Module
Port Speed: Port speed setting
10m-half: 10Mbps Half Duplex
10m-full: 10Mbps Full Duplex
Link Status: Port physical link status
link-down: Link down
--- : Uninstalled
Related
commands
set out-band speed

MDI: MDI setting

mdi: MDI mode
mdi-x: MDI-X mode
Flowcontrol Configuration: Flow control
configuration
enabled: Flow control configuration
enabled
disabled: Flow control configuration
disabled
Flowcontrol Status: Flow control status
enabled: Flow control enabled
disabled: Flow control disabled
--- : Flow control uninstalled
Setting of out-band port speed/communication direction

Setting of out-band port flow control
3-17
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
ping
Checking of connection
Checks if connection with the host is correct. To cancel the connection test halfway, press Ctrl + c
combination.
key
Input format
ping P1 [P2]
Parameters
P1: IP address
P2: Execution count (1 to 2147483647)
Default value
None
Usage conditions
To cancel the connection test, press Ctrl + c .

as the IP address. (xxx is any number.) Also, you can set the network addresses
192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correct
communication.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# ping 192.168.1.212

PING 192.168.1.212: 56 data bytes
64 bytes from 192.168.1.212: icmp_seq=0
ttl=255
ttl=255
ttl=255
ttl=255
time<5
time<5
time<5
time<5
ms
ms
ms
ms
--- 192.168.1.212 ping statistics --4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 0.000/0.000/0.000/0.000 ms
*Switch@1#
Output item
ping response information is output.
Related
commands

set ip route

3-18
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
Sets a VLAN ID and virtual IP address in the specified index.
Input format
set ip virtual-address P1 P2 P3
Parameters
P1: Index (1 to 16)

P2: Virtual IP address
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094
Default value
None
Usage condition
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as

the IP address. (xxx is any number.)
If you set 0 or 1 to all bits of the host part as the IP address, this setting may not provide
correct communication.
Notes
You can assign up to 16 virtual IP addresses corresponding to VLAN IDs.

The same virtual IP address can be assigned for another VLAN.
Out-band IP addresses can also be duplicated with virtual IP addresses.
Input example
*Switch@1# set ip virtual-address 3 172.16.1.10 test-vlan-1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show ip config
set ip in-band mode
virtual-ping

Setting of in-band mode
Confirmation of connection with host
3-19
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
virtual-ping
Performs the user connection test on the CX2600/200 side to confirm the connection with the host.
To cancel the user connection test halfway, press [Ctrl]+[c].
Input format
virtual-ping P1 P2 [P3] [P4]
Parameters
P1: Virtual IP address

VLAN ID: 1 to 4094
P3: Consecutive transmission times count (1 to 65535)
P4: Response wait timeout value time (1 to 60 sec)
Default value
None
Usage conditions
You can enter this command when the in-band user connection test function is
enabled (when virtual is effective).
This virtual-ping cannot be transferred beyond a gateway.
Note
The size of ICMP ECHO packet to be transmitted is fixed at 64 bytes.
Input example
*Switch@1# virtual-ping 172.16.1.17 30 count 2 time out 1

PING 172.16.1.17: 64 data bytes
64 bytes from 172.16.1.17: icmp_seq=1 ttl=128 time<5 ms
64 bytes from 172.16.1.17: icmp_seq=2 ttl=128 time<5 ms
--- 172.16.1.17 ping statistics --2 packets transmitted, 2 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 0.000/0.000/0.000/0.000 ms
*Switch@1#
Output item
virtual-ping response information is displayed.
Related
commands
set ip in-band mode


3-20
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
Clears the virtual IP address of the specified index.
Input format
clear ip virtual-address P1
Parameter
P1: Index (1 to 16)
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear ip virtual-address 6

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show ip config
set ip in-band mode
virtual-ping

3-21
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ip in-band mode

Switches in-band mode (real or virtual) to specify whether to enable the in-band user connection test
function or in-band administration port control function.
Input format
set ip in-band mode P1
Parameter
P1: In-band mode specification

real: Enables the in-band administration port control function
virtual: Enables the in-band user connection test function
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
If the set in-band mode command enables the in-band user connection test function,
various in-band telnet/SNMP/NTP/syslog/ftp functions are disabled and the connected
in-band telnet session is disconnected. When the telnet session is disconnected,
interactive confirmation is performed.
An attempt to download running-config including this command in in-band mode will fail
because the connected ftp session is also suspended.
Input example
*Switch@1# set in-band mode virtual

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show ip config
virtual-ping

3-22
Ports
4 Ports
4-1
Ports
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set port admin

Setting of port blocking/unblocking
Blocking a port disables communication due to link down in a physical layer or unblocking it enables
communication.
Input format
set port admin P1 P2 P3
Parameters
P1: Port (line) type { fe | gbe | gmx | atm | atmp | tdmp | atmp155 | tdmp155 }
fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
gmx: GbE-MUX port
atm: ATM155 port
atmp: ATMP port
tdmp: TDMP port
atmp155: ATMP155 port
tdmp155: TDMP155 port
P2: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)
P3: Port blocking/unblocking setting { enable | disable }
enable: Port unblocking
disable: Port blocking
Default value
P3: enable
Usage condition
When port blocking is set, the LINK DOWN message may be displayed. When port
unblocking is set, the LINK UP message may be displayed.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set port admin gbe 10/1 enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show port information
Display of port setting and status information
4-2
Ports
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set port speed

Setting of port speed and MDI/MDI-X
Sets a port speed and electrical interface (MDI/MDI-X) switching. If auto-negotiation is set as the port
speed, you cannot set MDI/MDI-X because the interface is automatically switched.
Input formats
- Setting auto
set port speed P1 P2 P3 (auto)
- When specifying the following port speed
- 10m-full
- 100m-full
- 1000m-full
set port speed P1 P2 P3 (10m-full | 100m-full | 1000m-full) [P4]
Parameters
P1: Port (line) type { fe | gbe | gmx }

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
gmx: GbE-MUX port
P3: Port speed { 10m-full | 100m-full | 1000m-full | auto }
When 10m-full, 100m-full, or 1000m-full is specified in P3.
P4: Interface { mdi | mdi-x }
mdi: MDI mode
mdi-x: MDI-X mode
Default values
P3: auto
<FE (100BASE-TX)>, <GbE>, <GbE-MUX>
100m-full <FE (100BASE-FX)>
Usage conditions
- You can set only 100m-full in the FX (100BASE-FX) line module.

- We recommend you to set auto-negotiation in the GbE/GbE-MUX line module.
Notes
If 100m-full is set in the FE (100BASE-TX) line module, SPEED-LED always goes on

without reference to the port (line) status.
If the port (line) speed is fixed at 1000 Mbps in the GigabitEther electrical interface,
1000 Mbps fixed connection is performed using auto-negotiation. For connection
with an associated device that performs 1000 Mbps fixed connection without
auto-negotiation, 1000m-full link down may become unstable. In 1000 Mbps
connection, auto is always set for mdi/mdi-x because auto-negotiation is always used.
For the optical interface, auto-negotiation is not used in 1000m-full setting. However,
if the associated device performs 1000 Mbps fixed connection using auto-negotiation,
link down may become unstable.
For the optical interface, mdi/mdi-x setting is ignored.
4-3
Ports
Input example
*Switch@1# set port speed fe 1/1 10m-full mdi

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
4-4
Ports
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set port type

Setting of GbE port media
Specifies a port (1000BASE-T or 1000BASE-X) used in the GbE module.
the connected port (line) is automatically selected.
If auto-negotiation is specified,
Input format
set port type P1 P2 P3
Parameters
P1: Port (line) type { gbe }

gbe: GbE port
P3: Interface type { electric | optical | auto }
Electric: 1000BASE-T
optical: 1000BASE-X
Default value
P3: auto
Usage condition
If ports (lines) are connected to both 1000BASE-T and 1000BASE-X when

auto-negotiation is specified, 1000BASE-X precedes 1000BASE-T.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set port type gbe 1/1 electric

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
4-5
Ports
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set port flowcontrol

Setting of flow control
Sets whether to enable or disable the flow control function. When enabled, the flow control port controls
transmission stop and restart between itself and an associated device using a flow control frame (inactive
frame). When the receiving buffer becomes full, the port transmits the inactive frame to the associated
device. When it receives the inactive frame, the port suppresses transmission.
Input format
set port flowcontrol P1 P2 P3
Parameters
P1: Port (line) type { fe | gbe }

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
P3: Flow control setting { enable | disable | auto }
enable: Enables flow control
disable: Disables flow control
Default value
P3: disable
Usage conditions
When setting auto-negotiation in this command, you must specify auto-negotiation as

the port speed in advance.
If the flow control function of the associated device is disabled when auto-negotiation
is specified in this command, flow control cannot be performed.
Note
You cannot enter this command to the GbE-MUX port because this port does not
support the flow control function.
Input example
*Switch@1# set port flowcontrol fe 1/8 enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set port speed


4-6
Ports
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set port protection-time

Setting of port link protection time
Sets the protection time that lasts from when a port link down occurs to when it is recovered.
Input format
set port protection-time P1 P2 P3 P4
Parameters

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
gmx: GbE-MUX port
P3: Link status { link-up | link-down }
link-up: Link up
P4: Link protection time (0 to 7000 msec)
Default value
P4: 3000 (P3=link-up)

500 (P3=link-down)
Usage condition
You can set this protection time (0 to 7000 msec) in increments of 500 msec.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set port protection-time fe 1/2 link-up 0

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show port protection-time
Display of port link protection time
4-7
Ports
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set port link-trap

Setting of SNMP link trap transmission
Sets whether to enable or disable SNMP link trap transmission. This setting corresponds to
ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable setting in the standard MIB ifMIB group.
Input format
set port link-trap P1 P2 P3
Parameters
P1: Port (line) type { fe | gbe | gmx | atm | atmp | tdmp | tdmp155 | atmp155 }
fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
gmx: GbE-MUX port
atm: ATM155 port
atmp: ATMP port
tdmp: TDMP port
P3: SNMP link trap transmission setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables SNMP link trap transmission
disable: Disables SNMP link trap transmission
Default value
P3: enable
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set port link-trap fe 1/1 enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show port trap
Display of link trap transmission setting
4-8
Ports
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set port clock

Setting of ATM transmission path clock
Sets clock supply mode for the ATM transmission path.
Input format
set port clock P1 P2 P3
Parameters
P1: Port (line) type { atm | atmp155 }

atm: ATM155 port
P3: Clock setting { master | slave }
master: Clock independent supply mode
slave: Clock external supply mode
Default values
ATM155 port
P3: slave
ATMP155 port
P3: master
Usage condition
You can set clock supply mode only for the ATM155/ATMP155 port.
Note
None
Input example
Switch@1# set port clock atm 3/1 slave

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

set line type

Setting of line module type
4-9
Ports
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set port frame

Setting of ATM transmission path framing mode
Sets framing mode for the ATM transmission path.
Input formats
- Setting idle cell method

set port frame P1 P2 P3 (idle)
- Setting unassigned idle cell method
set port frame P1 P2 P3 (unassigned) P4
Parameters
P1: Port (line) type { atm | atmp155 }

atm: ATM port
P3: Cell method setting { idle | unassigned }
idle: Idle cell method
unassigned: Unassigned idle cell method
When unassigned is specified in P3.
P4: Framing mode { sdh | sonet }
sdh: SDH physical frame layer
sonet: SONET physical frame layer
Default value
P3: idle
Usage condition
You can set framing mode only for the ATM155/ATMP155 port.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set port frame atm 3/1 idle

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

set line type

4-10
Ports
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows port setup information and the port (line) status.
Input format
show port information [P1]
Parameter
P1: Line module number or port (line) number

Line module number: 1 to 12 (single specification)
Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When P1 is omitted, information on all line module numbers is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show port information 1

Port Information Table
======================
Port
Link
Port Admin
Speed
Status
MDI
-----------------------------------------------------1/1 enabled 10m-full
10m-full
mdi
1/2 enabled 10m-full
10m-full
mdi-x
1/3 enabled 100m-full 100m-full mdi
1/4 enabled 100m-full link-down mdi-x
link-down mdi
link-down mdi-x
1/7 enabled 100m-full link-down mdi
1/8 enabled auto
link-down auto mdi/mdi-x
Flowcontrol
Flowcontrol
Port Configuration Status
-------------------------------1/1 disabled
disabled
1/2 disabled
disabled
1/3 disabled
disabled
1/4 disabled
disabled
1/5 disabled
disabled
1/6 disabled
disabled
1/7 disabled
disabled
1/8 auto
disabled
*Switch@1#
4-11
Ports
Output items
Port: Port (line) number

Admin: Port block/unblock setting
enabled: Port unblocked
disabled: Port blocked
Port Speed: Port speed setting
155s: Single-mode optical fiber
155m: Multi-mode optical fiber
Link Status: Port physical link status
155s: Single-mode optical fiber
155m: Multi-mode optical fiber
1.5m-t1: T1 1.5Mbps
2.048m-e1: E1 2.048Mbps
MDI: Port MDI/MDI-X setting
mdi: mdi setting
mdi-x: mdi-x setting
auto mdi/mdi-x: Automatic recognition (when Speed is auto))
Flowcontrol Configuration: Flow control configuration
enabled: Flow control configuration enabled
disabled: Flow control configuration disabled
auto: Determined from alignment with the associated device
Flowcontrol Status: Flow control status
enabled: Flow control enabled
disabled: Flow control disabled
(The following Type Status is shown only in the GbE module.)
Type Status: Current port (line) type
electric: Electrical module
optical: Optical module
---: Unsupported port (line) type
(The following Type Configuration is shown only in the GbE module.)
Type Configuration: Port (line) type setting
electric: Electrical port (line) selected
optical: Optical port (line) selected
auto: Automatic selection of port (line)
4-12
Ports
(The following SFP type, Tx Error, and Rx Error are shown only in the
GbE/ATMP155/TDMP155 module.)
SFP type: Type of optical module currently being used
1000BASE-SX: 1000BASE-SX module
1000BASE-LX: 1000BASE-LX module
1000BASE-ZX: 1000BASE-ZX module
1000BASE-BX10-D: 1000BASE-BX10-D module
1000BASE-BX10-U: 1000BASE-BX10-U module
OS3-SR: OC3 MultiMode based ShortReach SONET SR compliant
OS3-SR1: OC3 SingleMode based ShortReach SONET SR-1 compliant
OS3-IR1: OC3 SingleMode IntermediateReach SONET IR-1 compliant
OS3-IR2: OC3 SingleMode IntermediateReach SONET IR-2 compliant
OS3-LR1: OC3 SingleMode LongReach SONET LR-1 compliant
Other: Unsupported optical module
Tx Error: Optical module output error detection status
normal: No output error occurred
fail: An output error occurred
Rx Error: Optical module input error detection status
normal: No input error occurred
fail: An input error occurred
SFP Vendor Information: Optical module vendor information
Vendor Name: Manufacturer name
Vendor OUI: OUI
Vendor Part Number: Manufacturing number
Vendor Revision: Version
Vendor Serial Number: Serial number
(The following Clock, Framing, and Cell Padding are shown only in the
ATM155/ATMP155 line module.)
Clock: Clock control
master: Independent mode setting
slave: External supply mode setting
Framing: Physical frame layer setting
sdh: SDH
sonet: SONET
Cell Padding: Cell method
idle: Idle cell method
unassigned: Unassigned idle cell method
(The following F1-F3 Status Tables are shown only in the ATM155/ATMP155 line
module.)
F1 Status Table: F1 alarm status
LOS: Loss of signal
LOF: Loss of frame alignment
MS-AIS: Receiving multiplex section failure
MS-SD: Multiplex section error rate degradation
4-13
Ports
MS-RDI: Sending multiplex section failure
MS-ERR: Receiving multiplex section error
MS-REI: Sending multiplex section error
LOP: AU pointer error
P-AIS: Receiving transmission path error
LCD: Out-of-cell delineation
detect: Alarm detected
---: Alarm not detected
(The following Framing, Frame Type, and Code/Alarm Status are shown only in the
ATMP/TDMP line module.)
Framing: Frame format setting
crc4: CRC4 multiframe
crc4-no-cas: CRC4 multiframe-no-CAS
non-crc4: non-CRC4 (G.704 basic frame)
unframed: unframed
esf: extended superframe
sf: superframe
sf-jpn: superframe-japanese
Frame Type: Frame type setting
t1: T1 port (line)
e1: E1 port (line)
Code: LineCode setting
hdb3: HDB3
ami: AMI
b8zs: B8ZS
Alarm Status: Alarm status
normal: No alarm
los: LOS detection
ais: AIS detection
lof: LOF detection
rai: RAI detection
lcd: LCD detection
(The following Framing, SECTION(RS) Status Table, and LINE(MS) Status Table are
only shown in the TDMP155 line module.)
Framing: Physical frame layer setting
sdh: SDH
sonet: SONET
SECTION(RS) Status Table: RS alarm status
LOS: Foss of frame detection
LOF: Loss of frame alignment continuous detection
OOF: Loss of frame alignment detection
RS-TIM: Detection of mismatch in path trace character string
RS-BIP: BIP error (B1) detected
LINE(MS) Status Table: MS alarm status
MS-AIS: Receiving multiplex section failure detected
MS-EXC: B2 error rate 10-3 or higher detection
MS-DEG: B2 error rate 10-6 or higher detection
4-14
Ports
MS-RDI: Sending multiplex section failure detection
MS-REI: Sending multiplex section error detection
MS-BIP: BIP error (B2) detection
Related
commands
set port admin

set port speed
set port type
set port clock
set port frame

4-15
Ports
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show port trap

Display of link trap transmission setting
Shows whether SNMP link trap transmission setting is enabled or disabled.
Input format
show port trap [P1]
Parameter
P1: Line module number (1 to 12) (single specification)

* When P1 is omitted, the settings of all line module numbers are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# show port trap 1

Port Trap Table
===============
Port Link Trap
------------------------1/1 enabled
1/2 disabled
1/3 enabled
1/4 enabled
1/5 enabled
1/6 enabled
1/7 enabled
1/8 enabled
*Switch@1# show port trap 10
Port Trap Table
===============
Port Link Trap
------------------------10/1 enabled
10/2 enabled
10/3 enabled
10/4 enabled
10/5 enabled
10/6 enabled
10/7 enabled
10/8 enabled
*Switch@1#
4-16
Ports
Output items

Link Trap: Port trap transmission setting
Enabled: Port trap transmission setting enabled
Disabled: Port trap transmission setting disabled
Related
command
set port link-trap
4-17
Ports
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of port link protection time
Shows the protection time that lasts from when a port link down occurs to when it is recovered.
Input format
show port protection-time [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, the protection time for all line module numbers is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show port protection-time 1

Link Protection Time Table
==========================
Port Link Up(msec)
Link Down(msec)
-------------------------------------------------------1/1
3000
500
1/2
0
500
1/3
3000
500
1/4
3000
500
1/5
3000
0
1/6
3000
500
1/7
3000
500
1/8
3000
500
*Switch@1#
Output items

Link Up: Link up protection time (msec)
Link Down: Link down occurrence protection time (msec)
Related
command
4-18
Ports
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set port cable-length

Setting of port cable length
Sets port cable length.
Input format
- Specifying length (short)

set port cable-length P1 P2 (short) [P3]
- Specifying length (long)
set port cable-length P1 P2 (long) [P3] [P4]
- Specifying length (default)
set port cable-length P1 P2 (initial)
Parameters

P2: Length type { short | long | initial }
short: short
long: long
initial: default
When short is specified in P2.
P3: Cable length { 133ft | 266ft | 399ft | 533ft | 655ft }
133ft: 0 to 133 feet
266ft: 134 to 266 feet
399ft: 267 to 399 feet
533ft: 400 to 533 feet
655ft: 534 to 655 feet
* When P3 is omitted, 133ft is assumed.
When long is specified in P2.
P3: Transmission attenuator { 0db | 7.5db | 15db | 22.5db }
0db: 0 db
7.5db: 7.5 db
15db: 15 db
22.5db: 22.5 db
* When P3 is omitted, 0db is assumed.
P4: gain value { gain21db | gain31db }
gain21db: gain 21 db
gain31db: gain 31 db
* When P4 is omitted, gain 31db is assumed.
Default value
If short is specified in P2, P3: 133ft.

If long is specified in P2, P3: 0db, P4: gain 31db.
If initial is specified in P2, the same value as the default when length (short) is specified.
Usage condition
The frame type of a specified port (line) needs to be set to t1.
Note
None
4-19
Ports
Input example
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
set
port
port
port
port
port
port
cable-length
cable-length
cable-length
cable-length
cable-length
cable-length
1/3 short
1/1-2,1/4-8 short 399ft
3/1 long 7.5db
3/2 long gain21db
3/2-4,3/5-8 long 7.5db gain31db
12/1 initial
Output item
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set line mode atmp
show port cable-length
Setting of TDMP line mode

Setting of ATMP line mode
Display of port cable length settings
4-20
Ports
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of port cable length settings
Shows port cable length settings.
Input format
show port cable-length [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, settings of all ports (lines) for which the frame type is set to T1
are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show port cable-length

Cable Length Information Table
==============================
Cable
Receive
Port Kind Length Tx ATT Sensitivity
---------------------------------------3/1 short 133ft ----3/2 short 266ft ----3/3 short 399ft ----3/4 short 533ft ----3/5 short 655ft ----3/6 short 133ft ----3/7 short 133ft ----3/8 short 133ft ----4/1 long --0db
gain21db
4/2 long --0db
gain31db
4/3 long --7.5db gain21db
4/5 long --15db
gain21db
4/6 long --15db
gain31db
*Switch@1#
Output items

Kind: Length type
Cable Length: Cable length
Tx ATT: Transmission attenuator
Receive Sensitivity: Gain value
4-21
Ports
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set line mode atmp

Setting of port cable length
4-22
Ports
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set port logical-interface

Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface
Sets a TDMP155 port logical interface.
Input formats
- Setting frame format

set port logical-interface P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 [P4]
- Clearing frame format setting
set port logical-interface P1 P2 (none)
Parameters
P1: Port (line) number (1/1 to 12/1) (single specification)

P2: Frame type { sdh | sonet | none }
sdh: Specification for the SDH mode
sonnet: Specification for the SONET mode
none: No frame format setting
When sdh or sonet is specified in P2
P3: Logical port number
SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
When sdh is specified in P2
P4: Frame format { crc4 | crc4nocas | non-crc4 | unframed }
crc4nocas: CRC4 multiframe-no-CAS
unframed: unframed
* When P4 is omitted, crc4 is assumed.
When sonet is specified in P2
P4: Frame format { esf | sf | unframed }
sf: superframe
unframed: unframed
* When P4 is omitted, esf is assumed.
Default values
P4: crc4 (for SDH)

esf (for SONET)
4-23
Ports
Usage
conditions
The TDMP155 line mode must have been set.

If either of the following has already been set for the logical port number specified in P3,
an error occurs.
set tdm group
set tdmop group
If the TDM mode is set for the line mode in the TDMP155 line mode setting, unframed
cannot be specified in P4.
If the TDM mode is set for the line mode in the TDMP155 line mode setting, and sonet is
specified in P2 and unframed is specified in P4, the SAToP mode must be set in the
TDMoP operation mode setting.
If the SDH mode is set for the frame type in the TDMP155 line mode setting and
CESoPSN is set for the TDMoP operation mode setting, unframed cannot be specified
in P4.
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
port
port
port
port
logical-interface
logical-interface
logical-interface
logical-interface
1/1
1/1
2/1
2/1
sdh 1/1/1 crc4nocas

sdh 1/1/2
sonet 1/1/1 sf
sonet 1/1/4
Output item
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp155

set tdmop mode
set tdmop group
show port logical-interface
Setting of TDMP155 line mode

Setting of TDMoP mode
Setting of TDMoP group
Display of TDMP155 port logical interface setting
4-24
Ports
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of TDMP155 port logical interface setting
Shows the TDMP155 port logical interface setting.
Input format
show port logical-interface [P1 [P2]]
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
* When P2 is omitted, the TDMP155 port logical interface setting on all frame formats
set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.
* When all parameters are omitted, the TDMP155 port logical interface setting on all
ports (lines) in which the TDMP155 line module is installed is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show port logical-interface

Logical Interface Table
=======================
Logical Frame
Port Port
Format
-----------------------1/1
1/1/1 crc4
1/1
1/1/2 crc4nocas
1/1
1/1/3 unframed
1/1
1/2/1 non-crc4
:
:
:
1/1
3/7/3 crc4
*Switch@1#
Output items

Logical Port: Logical port number
Frame Format: Frame format
Related
commands


4-25
Ports
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set port impedance

Setting of impedance
Sets impedance.
Input format
set port impedance P1 [P2]
Parameters

P2: Impedance setting { e1-75 | e1-120 }
e1-75: 75
e1-120: 120
* When P2 is omitted, e1-120 is assumed.
Default value
P2: e1-120
Usage condition
The frame type of the specified port (line) must be set to the E1 mode.
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
port
port
port
port
impedance
impedance
impedance
impedance
1/1 e1-75
12/2-5 e1-75
5/1-8 e1-120
6/1-5,7,8 e1-120
Output item
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set line mode atmp
show port impedance

Display of impedance setting
4-26
Ports
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
show port impedance

Display of impedance setting
Shows the impedance setting.
Input format
show port impedance [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, the impedance setting of all ports (lines) in which the frame type
is set to the E1 mode is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show port impedance

Port Impedance Information Table
================================
Port Impedance(ohm)
-------------------1/1 e1-120
1/2 e1-120
1/3 e1-75
1/4 e1-120
1/5 e1-75
1/6 e1-75
1/7 e1-120
1/8 e1-75
*Switch@1#
Output items

Impedance(ohm): Impedance value
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set line mode atmp
set port impedance

4-27
Ports
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set port path-trace

Setting of SDH path trace for TDMP155
Sets the character string to be transmitted to or to be received (expected value) from J0/J1/J2 in the frame
header of TDMP155.
Input formats
- Setting the default value (specifying all)

set port path-trace P1 P2 (all) P4 (initial)
- Setting the default value (specifying j0)
set port path-trace P1 P2 (j0) P4 (initial)
set port path-trace P1 P2 (j1) P3 P4 (initial)
set port path-trace P1 P2 (j2) P3 P4 (initial)
- Setting the character string to be transmitted (specifying binary mode)
(specifying all)
set port path-trace P1 P2 (all) P4 (transmit) [P5] [P6] P7 (binary-mode) P8
- Setting the character string to be transmitted (specifying ASCII mode)
(specifying all)
set port path-trace P1 P2 (all) P4 (transmit) [P5] [P6] P7 (ascii-mode) P8
(specifying j0)
set port path-trace P1 P2 (j0) P4 (transmit) [P5] [P6] P7 (binary-mode) P8
(specifying j0)
set port path-trace P1 P2 (j0) P4 (transmit) [P5] [P6] P7 (ascii-mode) P8
(specifying j1)
set port path-trace P1 P2 (j1) P3 P4 (transmit) [P5] [P6] P7 (binary-mode) P8
(specifying j1)
set port path-trace P1 P2 (j1) P3 P4 (transmit) [P5] [P6] P7 (ascii-mode) P8
(specifying j2)
set port path-trace P1 P2 (j2) P3 P4 (transmit) [P5] [P6] P7 (binary-mode) P8
(specifying j2)
set port path-trace P1 P2 (j2) P3 P4 (transmit) [P5] [P6] P7 (ascii-mode) P8
- Setting the character string to be received (expected value) (specifying binary
mode) (specifying all)
set port path-trace P1 P2 (all) P4 (expected) [P5] [P6] P7 (binary-mode) P8
- Setting the character string to be received (expected value) (specifying ASCII
mode) (specifying all)
set port path-trace P1 P2 (all) P4 (expected) [P5] [P6] P7 (ascii-mode) P8
4-28
Ports
mode) (specifying j0)
set port path-trace P1 P2 (j0) P4 (expected) [P5] [P6] P7 (binary-mode) P8
set port path-trace P1 P2 (j0) P4 (expected) [P5] [P6] P7 (ascii-mode) P8
set port path-trace P1 P2 (j1) P3 P4(expected) [P5] [P6] P7 (binary-mode) P8
set port path-trace P1 P2 (j1) P3 P4 (expected) [P5] [P6] P7 (ascii-mode) P8
set port path-trace P1 P2 (j2) P3 P4 (expected) [P5] [P6] P7 (binary-mode) P8
set port path-trace P1 P2 (j2) P3 P4 (expected) [P5] [P6] P7 (ascii-mode) P8
Parameters

P2: Path identifier { all | j0 | j1 | j2 }
all: All path traces
j0: J0 path trace
j1: J1 path trace
j2: J2 path trace
When j1 is specified in P2
P3: Higher path number (single specification)
SDH: 1
SONET: 1-3
SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
P4: Setting type { initial | transmit | expected }
initial: Setting the default value
transmit: Setting the character string to be transmitted
expected: Setting the character string to be received (expected value)
When transmit or expected is specified in P4
P5: CRC check added/not added { crc-on | crc-off }
crc-on: CRC added
crc-off: CRC not added
* When P5 is omitted, crc-on is assumed.
P6: Character string length length { 1 | 16 | 64 }
length 1: 1 byte
length 16: 16 bytes
length 64: 64 bytes
* When crc-on is specified in P5, 1 byte cannot be specified for the character
string length.
* When crc-off is specified in P5, 16 bytes cannot be specified for the
character string length.
4-29
Ports
* When all or j2 is specified in P2, 64 bytes cannot be specified for the
character string length.
P7: Character type { binary-mode | ascii-mode }
binary-mode: Binary mode
ascii-mode: ASCII mode
When binary-mode is specified in P7
P8: Message (2 to 124 digits)
* Odd digits cannot be entered.
* Characters other than 0 to 9, a to f, and A to 'F' cannot be
entered.
* Characters other than 0x00 to 0x7f when two characters are converted
into a hexadecimal number cannot be entered.
When ascii-mode is specified in P7
P8: Message (1 to 62 characters)
* Control characters, double quotations ("), and ? cannot be entered.
* Characters with space must be enclosed in double quotations.
Default values
P5: crc-on
P6: 16
Usage condition
Notes
When initial is specified for the setting type in P4, the following are set for both the
character string to be transmitted and the character string to be received (expected
value).
- CRC check added/not added: crc-on
- Character string length: 16 bytes
- Character type: binary-mode
- Message: All 0s
Input examples
Switch@1# set port path-trace 1/1 all expected crc-on length 16 ascii-mode
"NEC cx2600 v75"
*Switch@1# set port path-trace 12/1 j2 3/7/4 transmit ascii-mode
NECcx2600220v75
*Switch@1#
Output items
Related
commands
show port path-trace

show stm status
Display of SDH path trace setting for TDMP155

Display of port (line) alarm status for TDMP155 port
4-30
Ports
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of SDH path trace setting for TDMP155
Shows the settings of the character string to be transmitted to and to be received (expected value) from and
the character string received from J0/J1/J2 in the frame header of the TDMP155 port.
Input formats
- Specifying j0
show port path-trace P1 P2 (j0)
- Specifying j1
show port path-trace P1 P2 (j1) P3
- Specifying j2
show port path-trace P1 P2 (j2) P3
Parameters

P2: Path identifier { j0 | j1 | j2 }
j0: J0 path trace
j1: J1 path trace
j2: J2 path trace
P3: Higher path number (single specification)
SDH: 1
SONET: 1-3
SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
Default value
None
Usage condition
Note
None
Input examples
Switch@1# show port path-trace 12/1 j0

STM-1 Path Trace Config Table
=============================
Port
: 12/1
J0 Transmit Message
===================
mode
: binary
length : 16 (byte)
crc
: on
message : 4e 45 43 20 43 58 32 36 30 30 20 20 20 20 20
J0 Expected Message
===================
4-31
Ports
mode
length
crc
message
: ascii
: 16 (byte)
: on
: "NEC CX2600
"
J0 Received Message
===================
binary : 4e 45 43 20 43 58 32 36 30 30 20 20 20 20 20
ascii : "NEC CX2600
"
Switch@1#
Switch@1# show port path-trace 12/1 j1 3

=============================
Port
: 12/1
STS-1 : 3
J1 Transmit Message
===================
mode
: binary
length : 64 (byte)
crc
: off
message : 10 10 10 10
20 20 20 20
40 40 40 40
50 50 60 60
10
30
40
60
10
30
40
60
10
30
40
60
10
30
40
60
10
30
50
60
10
30
50
60
20
30
50
60
20
30
50
60
20
30
50
01
20 20 20
30 40 40
50 50 50
02
J1 Expected Message
===================
mode
: binary
length : 64 (byte)
crc
: off
message : 10 10 10 10
20 20 20 20
40 40 40 40
50 50 60 60
10
30
40
60
10
30
40
60
10
30
40
60
10
30
40
60
10
30
50
60
10
30
50
60
20
30
50
60
20
30
50
60
20
30
50
01
20 20 20
30 40 40
50 50 50
02
J1 Received Message
===================
binary : 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 20
20 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 40 40
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
50 50 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 01 02
ascii : "..........
0000000000@@@@@@@@@@PPPPPPPPPP''''''''''.."
Switch@1#
Switch@1# show port path-trace 12/1 j2 3/7/4

=============================
Port
: 12/1
Logical Port : 3/7/4
J2 Transmit Message
4-32
Ports
===================
mode
: ascii
length : 16 (byte)
crc
: on
message : "abcdefghijklmno"
J2 Expected Message
===================
mode
: ascii
length : 16 (byte)
crc
: on
message : "abcdefghijklmno"
J2 Received Message
===================
binary : 4e 45 43 20 43 58 32 36 30 30 20 20 20 20 20
ascii
: "NEC CX2600
"
Switch@1#
Output items

Port: Port number (1/1-12/1)
STS-1: SONET higher path number (1-3)
TUG-3: SDH higher path number (1)
SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
J0 Transmit Message
mode: Type of characters to be transmitted
binary: Binary mode
ascii: ASCII mode
length: Length of characters to be transmitted
1 (byte): 1 byte
16 (byte): 16 bytes
64 (byte): 64 bytes
crc: CRC added/not added for characters to be transmitted
on: CRC added
off: CRC not added
message: Character string to be transmitted
J0 Expected Message
mode: Type of characters to be received (expected value)
binary: Binary mode
ascii: ASCII mode
length: Length of characters to be received (expected value)
1 (byte): 1 byte
16 (byte): 16 bytes
64 (byte): 64 bytes
crc: CRC added/not added for characters to be received (expected value)
on: CRC added
off: CRC not added
message: Character string to be received (expected value)
4-33
Ports
J0 Received Message
binary: Received character string (binary display)
ascii: Received character string (ASCII display)
J1 Transmit Message
binary: Binary mode
ascii: ASCII mode
1 (byte): 1 byte
16 (byte): 16 bytes
64 (byte): 64 bytes
on: CRC added
off: CRC not added
J1 Expected Message
binary: Binary mode
ascii: ASCII mode
1 (byte): 1 byte
16 (byte): 16 bytes
64 (byte): 64 bytes
on: CRC added
off: CRC not added
J1 Received Message
J2 Transmit Message
binary: Binary mode
ascii: ASCII mode
1 (byte):1 byte
16 (byte): 16 bytes
on: CRC added
off: CRC not added
4-34
Ports
J2 Expected Message
binary: Binary mode
ascii: ASCII mode
1 (byte): 1 byte
16 (byte): 16 bytes
on: CRC added
off: CRC not added
J2 Received Message
Related
commands
set port path-trace

Setting of SDH path trace for TDMP155

4-35
Ports
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show stm status

Display of port (line) alarm status for TDMP155 port
Shows the port (line) alarm detection status for a TDMP155 port.
Input format
show stm status [P1 [P2]]
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
* When P2 is omitted, the port (line) alarm detection status for all logical ports set for
the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.
* When all parameters are omitted, the port (line) alarm detection status for all ports
(lines) to which the TDMP155 line module is installed is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
The TDMP155 line mode must be set.
Note
None
Input example
Switch@1# show stm status 12/1

STM Path Alarm Status Table
===========================
Alarm Status
============
Port HO-PATH LO-PATH PDH
-----------------------------12/1 ------HO-PATH Status
==============
Port TUG-3 AU-AIS AU-LOP
--------------------------12/1
1 ----
Port TUG-3 HP-TIM HP-UNEQ HP-PLM HP-EXC HP-DEG HP-REI HP-RDI
HP-BIP
----------------------------------------------------------------------12/1
1 ----------------
LO-PATH Status
==============
Logical
Port Port
TU-AIS TU-LOP TU-LOM
-------------------------------------
4-36
Ports
12/1
1/1/1 ---
---
---
Logical
Port Port
LP-TIM LP-UNEQ LP-PLM LP-EXC LP-DEG LP-REI LP-RDI
LP-BIP
----------------------------------------------------------------------12/1
1/1/1 ----------------
PDH Status
==========
Logical
Port Port
AIS
LOF
RAI
SEF
FAS
CRC
------------------------------------------------------------12/1
1/1/1 ------------
Output items
Alarm Status: Outline display of alarm status

HO-PATH: Higher path alarm detection status
LO-PATH: Lower path alarm detection status
PDH: PDH alarm detection status
detect: Detection status
---: No detection status
HO-PATH Status: Detailed display of higher path alarms
TUG-3/STS-1: TUG-3/STS-1 number
AU-AIS: AU-AIS alarm detection status
AU-LOP: AU-LOP alarm detection status
HP-TIM: HP-TIM alarm detection status
HP-UNEQ: HP-UNEQ alarm detection status
HP-PLM: HP-PLM alarm detection status
HP-EXC: HP-EXC alarm detection status
HP-DEG: HP-DEG alarm detection status
HP-REI: HP-REI alarm detection status
HP-RDI: HP-RDI alarm detection status
HP-BIP: HP-BIP alarm detection status
LO-PATH Status: Detailed display of lower path alarms
SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
TU-AIS: TU-AIS alarm detection status
TU-LOP: TU-LOP alarm detection status
TU-LOM: TU-LOM alarm detection status
4-37
Ports
LP-TIM: LP-TIM alarm detection status
LP-UNEQ: LP-UNEQ alarm detection status
LP-PLM: LP-PLM alarm detection status
LP-EXC: LP-EXC alarm detection status
LP-DEG: LP-DEG alarm detection status
LP-REI: LP-REI alarm detection status
LP-RD: LP-RDI alarm detection status
LP-BIP: LP-BIP alarm detection status
PDH Status: Detailed display of PDH alarms
Port: Port number
SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
AIS: AIS alarm detection status
LOF: LOF alarm detection status
RAI: RAI alarm detection status
SEF: SEF alarm detection status
FAS: FAS alarm detection status
CRC: CRC alarm detection status
Related
command
4-38
VLAN
5 VLAN
5-1
VLAN
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set vlan tagbase

Setting of tagbase VLAN
Sets a tagbase VLAN.
Input format
set vlan tagbase P1 [P2]
Parameters
P1: Port (line) number (single specification)

VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When P2 is omitted, no VLAN member is assumed.
Default value
None
Usage conditions
If VLAN tag swapping is set in a port, you cannot set a VLAN ID that is already being
used as the swapping destination VLAN ID.
If command mode is safety mode, the following conditions are applied:
1) When setting a tagbase VLAN in a port (line) where a portbase VLAN is set, you
cannot set a VLAN ID. You can set a VLAN ID only when no VLAN exists.
2) When setting a tagbase VLAN in the VLAN tag swapping setting port (line), you
cannot set a VLAN ID that is duplicated with the swapping source VLAN ID.
The following conditions are applied when a tagbase VLAN is set in the GbE-MUX line
module.
1) You can register up to 32 VLANs per port (line).
2) In the same line module, you cannot set a VLAN ID that is duplicated with any of
the following VLAN IDs in several ports (lines):
- VLAN ID for which a tagbase VLAN is set
- Swapping source VLAN ID for which VLAN tag swapping is set
Note
If the set vlan tagbase command without a VLAN ID is entered to the portbase VLAN
setting port (line) when command mode is safety mode, execution is confirmed.
Input example
*Switch@1# set vlan tagbase 12/1 4094

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
clear vlan tagbase

show vlan table port
show vlan table vid
Clearing of tag base VLAN

Display of VLAN table per port (line)
Display of VLAN table per VLAN
5-2
VLAN
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear vlan tagbase

Clearing of tagbase VLAN
Clears a tagbase VLAN.
Input format
clear vlan tagbase P1 [P2]
Parameters

VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification)
* When P2 is omitted, all VLANs are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
If P2 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear vlan tagbase 12/1

Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set vlan tagbase

show vlan table vid

5-3
VLAN
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set vlan portbase

Setting of portbase VLAN
Sets a portbase VLAN.
Input format
set vlan portbase P1 P2 [P3]
Parameters

P3: Frame type { admit-all | untag }
admit-all: All frames are transmissive
untag: Frames without tags and tags whose Ethernet types are not 0x8100 are
transmssive
* When P3 is omitted, admit-all is assumed.
Default value
P3: admit-all
Usage conditions
You cannot set untag as the frame type for the ports (lines) where an Ethernet type
other than 0x8100 is set.
If command mode is safety mode, you can set a portbase VLAN only in ports (lines)
where tagbase VLAN without VLAN ID is set.
Note
To clear a portbase VLAN, set a tagbase VLAN (no VLAN).
Input example
*Switch@1# set vlan portbase 1/1 1 admit-all

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

show vlan table vid

5-4
VLAN
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows a VLAN table per port (line).
Input format
show vlan table port [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, all ports (lines) are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show vlan table port

VLAN Table
==========
Port Base VID Name
Frame-Type
-------------------------------------------------------------1/1 port
1 VLAN0001
admit-all
1/2 port
1 VLAN0001
admit-all
1/3 port
1 VLAN0001
admit-all
1/4 port
1 VLAN0001
admit-all
1/5 port
1 VLAN0001
admit-all
1/6 port
1 VLAN0001
admit-all
1/7 port
1 VLAN0001
admit-all
1/8 port
1 VLAN0001
admit-all
4/1 port
2
untag
12/1 tag 4094 VLAN4094
--*Switch@1#
Output items

Base: VLAN type
port: Portbase VLAN
tag: Tagbase VLAN
swap: VLAN tag swapping
VID: VLAN ID
Name: VLAN name
Frametype: Frame type
admit-all: All frames are transmissive
untag: Untagged frames or frames whose Ethernet types are not 0x8100 are
transmissive
5-5
VLAN
Related
commands
set vlan tagbase

clear vlan tagbase
set vlan portbase
set vlan swap
clear vlan swap

Setting of VLAN tag swapping
Clearing of VLAN tag swapping
5-6
VLAN
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show vlan table vid

Shows a VLAN table per VLAN.
Input format
show vlan table vid [P1]
Parameter
P1: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID|VLAN name }

* When P1 is omitted, all VLANs are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show vlan table vid 4094

VLAN Table
==========
VID : 4094 Name : VLAN4094
----------------------------------------------------------------------Portbase Ports : 1/1-8,12/1
Tagbase Ports :
*Switch@1#
Output items
VID: VLAN ID
Name: VLAN name
Portbase Ports: Portbase VLAN ports (lines)
Tagbase Ports: Tagbase VLAN ports (lines)
Related
commands
set vlan tagbase

clear vlan tagbase
set vlan portbase
set vlan name
clear vlan name

Setting of VLAN name
Clearing of VLAN name
5-7
VLAN
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set vlan member

Setting of portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc
Sets the portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc.
Input format
-Setting portbase VLAN en bloc

set vlan member P1 P2
-Setting tagbase VLAN en bloc
set vlan member P1 P3
-Setting portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc
set vlan member P1 P2 P3
Parameters

P2: Portbase VLAN port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)
portbase port (line) number
P3: Tagbase VLAN port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)
tagbase port (line) number
Default value
None
Usage conditions
You cannot set the same port (line) number in the portbase VLAN (port) number and
tagbase VLAN port (line) number.
You cannot set a port (line) where the total number of tagbase VLANs and VLAN tag
swapping settings exceeds 100 as a portbase VLAN port (line).
The usage conditions of the portbase VLAN setting command are applied to the
portbase VLAN in this command. The usage conditions of the tagbase VLAN setting
command are applied to the tagbase VLAN in this command.
If the portbase VLAN is set, admit-all (default value) is set as the frame type.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set vlan member 100 portbase 1/1-8,3/1,5/1 tagbase 4/1-4,6/1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

show vlan table vid
clear vlan tagbase

5-8
VLAN
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set vlan swap

Sets VLAN tag swapping.
Input format
set vlan swap P1 P2 P3
Parameters

P3: Swapping destination VLAN ID
Default value
None
Usage conditions
You cannot reassign the VLAN ID that is already being used as the swapping
destination VLAN ID in the port to another VLAN as the swapping destination VLAN ID.
If command mode is safety mode, the following conditions are applied:
1) You cannot set VLAN tag swapping for the portbase VLAN setting port (line).
2) When setting VLAN tag swapping in the tagbase VLAN setting port (line), you
cannot set a swapping source VLAN ID that is duplicated with the VLAN ID.
3) When setting VLAN tag swapping in the VLAN tag swapping setting port (line), you
cannot overwrite the VLAN ID that is already being used as the swapping source
VLAN ID.
The following conditions are applied when VLAN tag swapping is set in the GbE-MUX
line module.
1) You can register up to 32 VLANs per port (line).
2) In the same line module, you cannot set a VLAN ID that is duplicated with any of
the following VLAN IDs in several ports (lines):
- VLAN ID for which a tagbase VLAN is set
- Swapping source VLAN ID for which VLAN tag swapping is set
3) In the same port (line), you cannot set the swapping destination VLAN ID that is
the same as the swapping destination VLAN ID for which VLAN tag swapping.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set vlan swap 1/1 1 4094

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

show vlan swap
clear vlan swap

Display of VLAN tag swapping information
5-9
VLAN
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show vlan swap

Shows VLAN tag swapping information.
Input format
show vlan swap [P1 [P2]
Parameters

* When P1 is omitted, all ports (lines) are shown.
* When P2 is omitted, all VLAN names are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show vlan swap 1/1 VLAN100

VLAN Swap Table
===============
Port : 1/1 Ether-Type : 0x0600
VID Name (Interior)
VID (Exterior)
----------------------------------------------------------------------100 VLAN100
200
*Switch@1#
Output items

Ethertype: Ethernet type value
VID: VLAN ID
Name (Interior): VLAN name
VID (Exterior): Swapping destination VLAN ID
Related
commands
set vlan swap

clear vlan swap

5-10
VLAN
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear vlan swap

Clears VLAN tag swapping.
Input format
clear vlan swap P1 [P2]
Parameters

* When P2 is omitted, all VLAN names are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
Input example
*Switch@1# clear vlan swap 1/1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

set vlan swap
show vlan swap

5-11
VLAN
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show vlan summary

Display of number of VLAN entries
Shows the number of VLAN entries.
Input format
show vlan summary
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show vlan summary

VLAN Summary Information
========================
Total VLAN Entry : 2
*Switch@1#
Output item
Total VLAN Entry: Number of VLAN entries
Related
commands
set vlan tagbase

clear vlan tagbase
set vlan portbase
set vlan name
clear vlan name

5-12
VLAN
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set vlan ethertype

Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition
Sets the Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition.
Input format
set vlan ethertype P1 P2
Parameters
P1: Port (line) number or line module number

Line module number: 1 to 12 (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Ethernet type value (0x0600 to 0xffff)
Default value
P2: 0x8100
Usage conditions
If untag is specified as the frame type in the port (line) where a portbase is set, you
cannot set an Ethernet type value other than 0x8100 in the port (line).
If a portbase is specified in the PVC-VLAN mode setting command when the ATM line
module is set, you cannot set an Ethernet type value other than 0x8100.
For GbE-MUX, you can specify only a line module number.
For other line module types, you can specify only a port (line) number.
Note
If the Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition is set in GbE-MUX with line module
number specification, the Ethernet type values of all ports (lines) belonging to the line
module are set to the same value.
Input example
*Switch@1# set vlan ethertype 1/1 0x0600

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set vlan tagbase

set vlan swap
show vlan swap
show vlan ethertype

Display of Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition
5-13
VLAN
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show vlan ethertype

Display of Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition
Shows Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition.
Input format
show vlan ethertype [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, all port (line) numbers are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show vlan ethertype

VLAN Ether-Type Table
=====================
Port Ether-Type
----------------------------1/1
0x600
1/2
0x8100
1/3
0x8100
1/4
0x8100
1/5
0x8100
1/6
0x8100
1/7
0x8100
1/8
0x8100
12/1
0xffff
*Switch@1#
Output items

Ethertype: Ethernet type value
Related
command
set vlan ethertype
Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition
5-14
VLAN
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set vlan name

Sets a VLAN name in a VLAN ID.
Input format
set vlan name P1 P2
Parameters
P1: VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification)

P2: VLAN name (1 to 32 characters)
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set vlan name 4094 VLAN4094

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

show vlan table vid
show vlan summary
clear vlan name

5-15
VLAN
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear vlan name

Clears a VLAN name.
Input format
clear vlan name P1
Parameter

Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear vlan name 4094

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

show vlan table vid
show vlan summary
set vlan name

5-16
QoS
6 QoS
6-1
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set qos maximum-mode

Setting of maximum bandwidth limit operation mode
Sets maximum bandwidth limit operation mode.
Input format
set qos maximum-mode P1 P2
Parameters
P1: Line module number (1 to 12) (Multiple values can be specified.)

P2: Maximum bandwidth limit operation mode { in | out | both }
in: Maximum bandwidth limit operation mode for input
out: Maximum bandwidth limit operation mode for output
both: Maximum bandwidth limit operation mode for both input and output
Default value
P2: both
Usage conditions
If the maximum bandwidth limit function is set, you cannot change maximum bandwidth
limit operation mode.
If the port type is ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155, an error occurs
when this command is entered.
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# set qos maximum-mode 1-3 in

*Switch@1# set qos maximum-mode 2,4,5 out
*Switch@1# set qos maximum-mode 6 both
*Switch@1#
Output item
6-2
QoS
Related
commands
show qos maximum-mode

set qos in-rate maximum
set qos in-class-map maximum
set qos in-priority maximum
clear qos in-rate maximum
show qos in-rate maximum
set qos out-rate maximum
set qos out-class-map maximum
set qos out-priority maximum
show qos out-rate maximum
clear qos out-rate maximum
6-3
Display of maximum bandwidth limit operation

mode
Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per
input VLAN
Setting of priority mapping function per input VLAN
Setting of priority discard function per input VLAN
Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per
input VLAN
Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per
input VLAN
output VLAN
Setting of priority mapping function per output
VLAN
Setting of priority discard function per output VLAN
output VLAN
output VLAN
QoS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of maximum bandwidth limit operation mode
Shows maximum bandwidth limit operation mode.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show qos maximum-mode

Line Maximum Mode Table
=======================
Slot Mode
---------4 in
6 out
7 both
*Switch@1#
Output items
Slot: Line module number

Mode: Maximum bandwidth limit operation mode
in: Maximum bandwidth limit operation mode for input
out: Maximum bandwidth limit operation mode for output
both: Maximum bandwidth limit operation mode for both input and output
6-4
QoS
Related
commands
Setting of maximum bandwidth limit operation

mode
input VLAN
Setting of priority mapping function per input
VLAN
input VLAN
input VLAN
output VLAN
VLAN
Setting of priority discard function per output
VLAN
output VLAN
output VLAN

6-5
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN
Sets the maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN.
Input formats
- Specifying VLAN
set qos in-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (maximum bandwidth limit value)
- Specifying Remaining-VLAN
set qos in-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (maximum bandwidth limit value)
- Specifying separate mode (specifying VLAN)
set qos in-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate mode)
[P6] [P7] [P8] [P9]
- Specifying separate mode (specifying Remaining-VLAN)
set qos in-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate mode)
[P6] [P7] [P8] [P9]
Parameters

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
gmx: GbE-MUX port
P3: VLAN specification { vid | remain }
vid: VLAN identifier specification
remain: Remaining-VLAN specification
When vid is specified in P3.
6-6
QoS
P5: Maximum bandwidth limit value or separate mode { separate | separate-red }
Maximum bandwidth limit value (Kbps)
FE port: 0 to 100000 (Kbps)
GbE port: 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)
* The setting granularity is 25 (Kbps).
* If you do not specify a multiple of the setting granularity, this parameter results in an
error.
Separate mode
separate: Separate mode
separate-red: Separate mode (RED use)
When separate mode { separate | separate-red } is specified in P5.
P6: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class A
FE port: class-a 0 to 100000 (Kbps)
GbE port: class-a 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)
P7: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class B
FE port: class-b 0 to 100000 (Kbps)
GbE port: class-b 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)
P8: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class C
FE port: class-c 0 to 100000 (Kbps)
GbE port: class-c 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)
P9: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class D
FE port: class-d 0 to 100000 (Kbps)
GbE port: class-d 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)
* The setting granularity in P6 to P9 is 25 (Kbps).
* When any of P6 to P9 is set, the parameter results in an error if you do not
specify a multiple of the setting granularity.
Default values
P5 to P9: 100000 (FE), 1000000 (GbE)

* The default values depend on port (line) type (fe/gbe) specification.
Usage conditions
The number of VLANs that can be registered on a corresponding port depends on the
maximum bandwidth limit operation mode to be set. The following table shows the
number of VLANs that can be set for one port in the specified maximum bandwidth limit
operation mode.
Maximum band limitation of input port
Maximum bandwidth limit

operation mode
FE port
GbE port
Input/output mode (both)
64
1024
Input mode (in)
128
2048
Output mode (out)
In input mode (in) and input/output mode (both), one place is used for Remaining-VLAN
among the number of settable VLANs.
Notes
If P6 to P9 are omitted, the values that are already set are retained.
If P6 to P9 are omitted when maximum bandwidth limit operation mode is switched, the
default values are set.
6-7
QoS
Input examples
*Switch@1# set qos in-rate maximum fe 3/7 vid 100 separate-red class-a 1000
class-b 2000
*Switch@1# set qos in-rate maximum gbe 5/1 vid VLAN200 separate class-c 3000
class-d 4000
*Switch@1# set qos in-rate maximum fe 1/7 vid 50 10000
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set vlan tagbase

set vlan swap

mode
mode
VLAN
input VLAN
input VLAN

6-8
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets the priority mapping function per input VLAN.
Input format
- Specifying VLAN
set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12
P13
set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11
P12 P13
set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate mode) P6 (class-a)
P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13
set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate mode) P6 (class-a)
P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13
- Specifying default (specifying VLAN)
set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)
- Specifying default (specifying Remaining-VLAN)
set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)
- Specifying default (RED use) (specifying VLAN)
set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)
- Specifying default (RED use) (specifying Remaining-VLAN)
set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)
Parameters

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
gmx: GbE-MUX port
P5: Setting mode { separate | separate-red }
* P5 (setting mode) can be specified only when separate mode is specified in the set
qos in-rate maximum command.
When P5 is omitted.
6-9
QoS
P6: Class A priority { class-a } or default setting { initial }
class-a: Class A priority specification
initial: Default specification
When class-a is specified in P6.
P7: Priority specification { priority | none }
priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.)
none: Unset
P8: Class B priority { class-b }
none: Unset
P10: Class C priority { class-c }
none: Unset
P12: Class D priority { class-d }
none: Unset
When P5 is specified.
Class-a: Class A priority specification
P7: Priority specification { priority | broadcast | multicast | bc+mc | none }
broadcast: Broadcast
multicast: Multicast
bc+mc: Broadcast & multicast
none: Unset
none: Unset
none: Unset
P12 Class D priority { class-d }
none: Unset
6-10
QoS
* For priority specification of classes A to D (P7, P9, P11, and P13), you can
specify broadcast/multicast/bc+mc respectively only once in one of classes A to
D. Also, you cannot specify other priorities in the class where
broadcast/multicast/bc+mc is specified.
* You cannot specify none for priority specification of classes A to D (P7, P9, P11, and
P13). Specify priority for any of classes A to D.
* The priority to be specified in any of classes A to D cannot be duplicated with the
priority specified in any other class. For example, you can set broadcast and
multicast in different classes but cannot set broadcast&multicast in a different class
because it is duplicated.
* The priority not specified in any of classes A to D does not belong to any class (No
Entry). Because a (No Entry) frame, frame that a priority does not belong to any
class, is not assigned to any classes, it becomes out of control and is discarded.
Default values
P7: 6, 7
P9: 4, 5
P11: 0, 3
P13: 1, 2
Usage conditions
You can set the priority mapping function per input VLAN after setting the maximum
bandwidth limit function per input VLAN in the set qos in-rate maximum.
You cannot specify mode different from the mode set in the set qos in-rate maximum.
Notes
To inhibit a priority from belonging to a class, specify none explicitly. (You cannot
omit none.)
Selecting the default specification (initial) sets the value set in the set qos
initial-class-map in-maximum command.
Input examples
*Switch@1# set qos in-class-map maximum fe 1/5 vid 100 separate-red class-a
1,2,3 class-b 0,5-7 class-c broadcast class-d multicast
*Switch@1# set qos in-class-map maximum gbe 4/1 vid 100 separate class-a
0-4 class-b 5-7 class-c bc+mc class-d none
*Switch@1# set qos in-class-map maximum gbe 5/1 vid 100 initial
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set vlan tagbase

set vlan swap

Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per input
VLAN
Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per input
VLAN
Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per input
VLAN
6-11
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets the priority discard function per input VLAN.
Input format

set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 [P5 (separate)]
[P6 (burst tolerance for class-a)] [P7] [P8] [P9]
set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) [P5 (separate)]
[P6 (burst tolerance for class-a) ] [P7] [P8] [P9]
- Specifying separate mode (RED use) (specifying VLAN)
set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate-red)
[P6 (burst tolerance (upper threshold) for class-a) P7 [P8]] [P9 P10 [P11]] [P12 P13
[P14]] [P15 P16 [P17]]
- Specifying separate mode (RED use) (specifying Remaining-VLAN)
set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate-red)
[P14]] [P15 P16 [P17]]
set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)
set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)
set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)
set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)
Parameters

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
gmx: GbE-MUX port
When separate is specified in P5 or P5 is omitted.
6-12
QoS
P6: Burst tolerance specification for class A { class-a 1 to 127 } or default setting
{ initial }
Burst tolerance specification for class A: class-a 1 to 127 (Kbyte)
When burst tolerance for class A is specified in P6.
P7: Burst tolerance specification for class B class-b (1 to 127) (Kbyte)
P8: Burst tolerance specification for class C class-c (1 to 127) (Kbyte)
P9: Burst tolerance specification for class D class-d (1 to 127) (Kbyte)
* When burst tolerance specification for classes A to D (P6 to P9) is omitted, the
values that are already set are retained.
When separate-red is specified in P5.
P6: Burst tolerance specification for class A or default setting { initial }
Burst tolerance A for class A (upper threshold)
FE port: class-a 1 to 3000 (Kbyte)
GbE port: class-a 1 to 30000 (Kbyte)
When burst tolerance (upper threshold) for class A is specified in P6.
P7: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class A or burst lower
threshold/probability disable { disable }
Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class A
FE port: 1 to 2999 (Kbyte)
GbE port: 1 to 29999 (Kbyte)
disable: Burst lower threshold/probability disable
When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class A is specified in P7.
P8: Probability A (1 to 32)
P9: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class B
FE port: class-b 1 to 3000 (Kbyte)
GbE port: class-b 1 to 30000 (Kbyte)
P10: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B or burst lower
Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B
When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B is specified in P10.
P11: Probability B (1 to 32)

P12: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class C
FE port: class-c 1 to 3000 (Kbyte)
GbE port: class-c 1 to 30000 (Kbyte)
P13: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C or burst lower
Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C
When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C is specified in P13.
P14: Probability C (1 to 32)
P15: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class D
6-13
QoS
FE port: class-d 1 to 3000 (Kbyte)
GbE port: class-d 1 to 30000 (Kbyte)
P16: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D or burst lower
Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D
When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D is specified in P16.
P17: Probability D (1 to 32)
* When burst tolerance (upper/lower threshold) of classes A to D and probability
values (P6 to P17) are omitted, the values that are already set are retained.
Default values
When separate is specified in P5 or P5 is omitted:

P6: 127 (Kbytes), P7: 64 (Kbytes), P8: 32 (Kbytes), P9: 16 (Kbytes),
When separate-red is specified in P5:
P6: 127 (Kbytes), P6, P8: disable
P9: 64 (Kbytes), P10, P11: disable
P12: 32 (Kbytes), P13: 16 (Kbytes), P14: 32 (Kbytes)
P15: 16 (Kbytes), P16: 8 (Kbytes), P17: 32 (Kbytes)
Usage conditions
You can set the priority discard function per input VLAN after setting the maximum
bandwidth limit function per input VLAN in the set qos in-rate maximum.
You cannot specify mode different from the mode set in the set qos in-rate maximum.
Notes
If P5 is omitted, arbitrarily specify P6 to P9 per class (omissible).

If separate is specified in P5, you can arbitrarily specify P6 to P9 per class as separate
mode { separate } (omissible).
If separate-red is specified in P5, you can arbitrarily specify P6 to P17 per class as
separate mode (RED use) (omissible).
If P5 is specified, you cannot specify mode different from the mode specified in the set
If separate-red is specified in P5, you cannot set a value greater than the value set in
P6 in P7.
You cannot also set a value greater than the value set in P6 in P9, P10, P12, P13, P15,
and P16.
If P6 is specified, the value set in the set qos initial-priority (in-maximum /
in-maximum-red) command is used.
Input examples
*Switch@1# set qos in-priority maximum fe 1/1 vid 100 separate-red class-a
3000 20 4 class-b 1500 disable
*Switch@1# set qos in-priority maximum gbe 3/1 vid 70 separate-red class-c
48 disable class-d 8 1 32
*Switch@1# set qos in-priority maximum fe 1/8 vid 1000 separate-red class-a
127 disable class-b 64 disable class-c 3000 16 10 class-d 2000 8 5
*Switch@1# set qos in-priority maximum gbe 6/1 vid 100 separate class-a 1
class-b 1 class-c 127 class-d 127
*Switch@1# set qos in-priority maximum gbe 5/1 vid 100 initial
*Switch@1#
Output item
6-14
QoS
Related
commands


input VLAN
input VLAN
input VLAN
6-15
QoS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN
Shows the maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN.
Input format
- Displaying specified port/specified VLAN

show qos in-rate maximum [P1 [P2 (vid) P3]]
- Displaying specified port/specified Remaining-VLAN
show qos in-rate maximum [P1 [P2 (remain)]]
- Displaying specified VLAN
show qos in-rate maximum [P2 (vid) P3]
- Displaying specified Remaining-VLAN
show qos in-rate maximum [P2 (remain)]
Parameters

* Multiple VLAN IDs can be specified only if P1 is omitted.
* When P1 is omitted, information for all the VLANs and Remaining-VLANs set in all the
ports is shown. If P2 and P3 are specified, information is displayed in ascending
order of VLAN IDs. Within the same VLAN, information is displayed in ascending
order of ports.
* When P2 is omitted, information for all the VLANs and Remaining-VLANs set in the
port specified in P1 is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
6-16
QoS
Input example
*Switch@1# show qos in-rate maximum

QoS Input Port Maximum Table
============================
Port Registered-VID
Available-VID
------------------------------------------------------6/1
2
1022
QoS Input VLAN Maximum Table
============================
Port : 6/1
VID : 100
Mode : separate
===================
Rate
MaximumMinimumPriority
(Kbps)
Burst(KByte) Burst(KByte) Probability
----------------------------------------------------------------------Class-All : ----------Class-A : broadcast
1000000 127
----Class-B : multicast
1000000 127
----Class-C : none
1000000
1
----Class-D : 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 1000000
1
----No Entry : none
--------Port : 6/1
VID : remain
Mode : normal
===================
Rate
(Kbps) Burst(KByte) Burst(KByte)
Probability
----------------------------------------------------------------------Class-All : --1000000
------Class-A : 6,7
--127
----Class-B : 4,5
--64
----Class-C : 0,3
--32
----Class-D : 1,2
--16
----No Entry : none
--------*Switch@1#
6-17
QoS
Output items
(QoS Input Port Maximum Table)

Registered-VID: Number of VLANs registered in maximum bandwidth limit mode
Available-VID: Number of VLANs that can be registered
(QoS Input VLAN Maximum Table)
VID: VLAN ID
Mode: Setting mode
normal: Normal mode
separate-RED: Separator mode (RED use)
Priority: Class mapping
---: Unset
broadcast: Broadcast setting
multicast: Multicast setting
bc+mc: Broadcast and multicast setting
none: Priority does not belong to any class
Numeric value: Priority
Rate: Maximum bandwidth limit value per class
If Mode is Normal, the maximum bandwidth limit value is shown in Class-All.
Maximum-Burst: Maximum burst tolerance
Minimum-Burst: Minimum burst tolerance
Probability: Probability
Related
commands

mode
mode
input VLAN
VLAN
input VLAN

6-18
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN
Clears the maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN.
Input formats
- Clearing maximum bandwidth limit setting of specified port/specified VLAN

clear qos in-rate maximum P1 P2 [P3 (vid) P4]
- Clearing maximum bandwidth limit setting of specified port/specified
Remaining-VLAN
clear qos in-rate maximum P1 P2 [P3 (remain)]
Parameters

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
gmx: GbE-MUX port
* If Remaining-VLAN is specified in P3 when a VLAN has already been registered in
the specified port, you cannot clear the maximum bandwidth limit function per input
VLAN.
* When P3 is omitted, the setting of the maximum bandwidth limit function of all the
VLANs and the Remaining-VLAN in the port specified in P2 are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes

The priority mapping function setting of the specified VLAN and the priority discard
function setting are also cleared.
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear qos in-rate maximum fe 4/1 vid 100

*Switch@1# clear qos in-rate maximum gbe 5/1 vid 200
*Switch@1# clear qos in-rate maximum gbe 3/1
*Switch@1#
Output item
6-19
QoS
Related
commands

mode
mode
input VLAN
VLAN
input VLAN

6-20
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per output VLAN
Sets the maximum bandwidth limit function per output VLAN.
Input formats
- Specifying VLAN
set qos out-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (maximum bandwidth limit value)
set qos out-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (maximum bandwidth limit value)
set qos out-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate mode)
[P6] [P7] [P8] [P9]
set qos out-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate mode)
[P6] [P7] [P8] [P9]
Parameters

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
gmx: GbE-MUX port
P5: Maximum bandwidth limit value or separate mode { separate | separate-red }
Maximum bandwidth limit value
FE port: 0 to 100000 (Kbps)
GbE port: 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)
* If you do not specify a multiple of the setting granularity, this parameter results in
an error.
Separate mode
When separate mode { separate | separate-red } is specified in P5.
P6: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class A
FE port: class a 0 to 100000 (Kbps)
GbE port: class a 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)
P7: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class B
FE port: class-b 0 to 100000 (Kbps)
GbE port: class-b 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)
6-21
QoS
P8: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class C
FE port: class-c 0 to 100000 (Kbps)
GbE port: class-c 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)
P9: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class D
FE port: class-d 0 to 100000 (Kbps)
GbE port: class-d 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)
* The setting granularity in P6 to P9 is 25 (Kbps).
* When any of P6 to P9 is set, the parameter results in an error if you do not
specify a multiple of the setting granularity.
Default values
P5 to P9: 100000 (FE), 1000000 (GbE)

* The default values depend on port (line) type (fe/gbe) specification.
Usage conditions
The number of VLANs that can be registered on a corresponding port depends on the
maximum bandwidth limit operation mode to be set. The following table shows the
number of VLANs that can be set for one port in the specified maximum bandwidth limit
operation mode.
Maximum band limitation of output port
Maximum bandwidth limit

operation mode
FE port
GbE port
Input/output mode (both)
64
1024
Input mode (in)
128
2048
Output mode (out)
In output mode (in) and input/output mode (both), one place is used for
Remaining-VLAN among the number of settable VLANs.
Notes
If P6 to P9 are omitted, the values that are already set are retained.
If P6 to P9 are omitted when maximum bandwidth limit operation mode is switched, the
default values are set.
Input examples
*Switch@1# set qos out-rate maximum fe 3/7 vid 100 separate-red class-a 1000
class-b 2000
*Switch@1# set qos out-rate maximum gbe 5/1 vid VLAN200 separate class-c
3000 class-d 4000
*Switch@1# set qos out-rate maximum fe 1/7 vid 50 10000
*Switch@1#
Output item
6-22
QoS
Related
commands
set vlan tagbase

set vlan swap
6-23

mode
mode
VLAN
output VLAN
output VLAN
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Setting of priority mapping function per output VLAN
Sets the priority mapping function per output VLAN.
Input formats
- Specifying VLAN
set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11
P12 P13
set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11
P12 P13
set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate mode) P6 (class-a)
P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13
set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate mode) P6 (class-a)
P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13
set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)
set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)
set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)
set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)
Parameters

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
gmx: GbE-MUX port
* P5 (setting mode) can be specified only when separate mode is specified in the set
6-24
QoS
When P5 is omitted.
none: Unset
none: Unset
none: Unset
none: Unset
When P5 is specified.
none: Unset
none: Unset
none: Unset
6-25
QoS
none: Unset
* For priority specification of classes A to D (P7, P9, P11, and P13), you can
specify broadcast/multicast/bc+mc respectively only once in one of classes A to
D. Also, you cannot specify other priorities in the class where
broadcast/multicast/bc+mc is specified.
* You cannot specify none for priority specification of classes A to D (P7, P9, P11, and
P13). Specify priority for any of classes A to D.
* The priority to be specified in any of classes A to D cannot be duplicated with the
priority specified in any other class. For example, you can set broadcast and
multicast in different classes but cannot set broadcast&multicast in a different class
because it is duplicated.
* The priority not specified in any of classes A to D does not belong to any class (No
Entry). Because a (No Entry) frame, frame that a priority does not belong to any
class, is not assigned to any classes, it becomes out of control and is discarded.
Default values
P7: 6, 7
P9: 4, 5
P11: 0, 3
P13: 1, 2
Usage conditions
You can set the priority mapping function per output VLAN after setting the maximum
bandwidth limit function per output VLAN in the set qos out-rate maximum.
You cannot specify mode different from the mode set in the set qos out-rate maximum.
Notes
omit none.)
Selecting the default specification (initial) sets the value set in the set qos
initial-class-map out-maximum command.
Input examples
*Switch@1# set qos out-class-map maximum fe 1/5 vid 100 separate-red class-a
1,2,3 class-b 0,5-7 class-c broadcast class-d multicast
*Switch@1# set qos out-class-map maximum gbe 6/1 vid 100 separate class-a
bc+mc class-b none class-c 0-4 class-d 5-7
*Switch@1# set qos out-class-map maximum gbe 5/1 vid 100 class-a 0-1 class-b
2-3 class-c 4-5 class-d 6-7
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

mode
mode
output VLAN
output VLAN
output VLAN

6-26
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets the maximum band priority discard function per output VLAN.
Input formats

set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 [P5 (separate)]
set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) [P5 (separate)]
- Specifying separate mode (RED use) (specifying VLAN)
set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate-red)
[P14]] [P15 P16 [P17]]
- Specifying separate mode (RED use) (specifying Remaining-VLAN)
set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate-red)
[P14]] [P15 P16 [P17]]
set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)
set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)
set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)
set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)
6-27
QoS
Parameters

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
gmx: GbE-MUX port
When separate is specified in P5 or P5 is omitted.
P6: Burst tolerance specification for class A { class-a 1 to 127 } or default setting
{ initial }
When burst tolerance for class A is specified in P6.
* When burst tolerance specification for class A to class D (P6 to P9) is omitted,
the values that are already set are retained.
When separate-red is specified in P5.
P6: Burst tolerance specification for class A or default setting { initial }
Burst tolerance A for class A (upper threshold)
When burst tolerance (upper threshold) for class A is specified in P6.
P7: Burst tolerance A (lower threshold) for class A or burst lower
Burst tolerance A (lower threshold) for class A
6-28
QoS
When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class A is specified in P7.
P9: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class B
P10: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B or burst lower
Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B
When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B is specified in P10.
P12: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class C
P13: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C or burst lower
Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C
When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C is specified in P13.
P15: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class D
P16: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D or burst lower
Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D
When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D is specified in P16.
* When burst tolerance (upper/lower threshold) of classes A to D and probability
values (P6 to P17) are omitted, the values that are already set are retained.
6-29
QoS
Default values
When separate is specified in P5 or P5 is omitted:

P6: 127 (Kbyte)
P7: 64 (Kbyte)
P8: 32 (Kbyte)
P9: 16 (Kbyte)
When separate-red is specified in P5:
P6: 127 (Kbyte)
P7, P8: disable
P9: 64 (Kbyte)
P10, P11: disable
P12: 32 (Kbyte)
P13: 16 (Kbyte)
P14: 32 (Kbyte)
P15: 16 (Kbyte)
P16: 8 (Kbyte)
P17: 32 (Kbyte)
Usage conditions
You can set the priority discard function per output VLAN after setting the maximum
bandwidth limit function per output VLAN in the set qos out-rate maximum.
You cannot specify mode different from the mode set in the set qos out-rate maximum.
Notes
If P5 is omitted, arbitrarily specify P6 to P9 per class (omissible).

If separate is specified in P5, you can arbitrarily specify P6 to P9 per class as separate
mode (separate) (omissible).
If separate-red is specified in P5, you can arbitrarily specify P6 to P17 per class as
separate mode (RED use) (omissible).
If P5 is specified, you cannot specify mode different from the mode specified in the set
If separate-red is specified in P5, you cannot set a value greater than the value set in
P6 in P7.
You cannot also set a value greater than the value set in P6 in P9, P10, P12, P13, P15,
and P16.
If P6 is specified, the value set in the set qos initial-priority (in-maximum /
in-maximum-red) command is used.
Input examples
*Switch@1# set qos out-priority maximum fe 1/1 vid 100 separate-red class-a
3000 20 4 class-b 1500 disable
*Switch@1# set qos out-priority maximum gbe 3/1 vid 70 separate-red class-c
48 disable class-d 8 1 32
*Switch@1# set qos out-priority maximum fe 1/8 vid 1000 separate-red class-a
127 disable class-b 64 disable class-c 3000 16 10 class-d 2000 8 5
*Switch@1# set qos out-priority maximum gbe 5/1 vid 100 class-a 1 class-b
1 class-c 127 class-d 127
*Switch@1#
Output item
6-30
QoS
Related
commands

6-31

mode
mode
output VLAN
VLAN
output VLAN
output VLAN
QoS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per output VLAN
Shows the maximum bandwidth limit function per output VLAN.
Input formats

show qos out-rate maximum [P1 [P2 (vid) P3]]
show qos out-rate maximum [P1 [P2 (remain)]]
- Displaying specified VLAN
show qos out-rate maximum [P2 (vid) P3]
- Displaying specified Remaining-VLAN
show qos out-rate maximum [P2 (remain)]
Parameters

* About displayed data if P1 is omitted.
Information for all the VLANs and Remaining-VLANs set in all the ports is shown.
If P2 and P3 are specified, information is displayed in ascending order of VLAN IDs.
Within the same VLAN, information is displayed in ascending order of ports.
* When P2 is omitted, information for all the VLANs and Remaining-VLANs set in the
port specified in P1 is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
6-32
QoS
Input example
*Switch@1# show qos out-rate maximum

QoS Output Port Maximum Table
=============================
Port Registered-VID Available-VID
----------------------------------6/1
2
1022
QoS Output VLAN Maximum Table
=============================
Port : 6/1
VID : 100
Mode : separate
===================
Rate
(Kbps) Burst(KByte) Burst(KByte) Probability
----------------------------------------------------------------------Class-All : ----------Class-A : bc+mc
100
127
----Class-B : none
100
64
----Class-C : 0,1,2,3,4
100
32
----Class-D : 5,6,7
100
16
----No Entry : none
--------Port : 6/1
VID : remain
Mode : normal
===================
Rate
(Kbps) Burst(KByte) Burst(KByte) Probability
----------------------------------------------------------------------Class-Al l : --1000000
------Class-A : 6,7
--127
----Class-B : 4,5
--64
----Class-C : 0,3
--32
----Class-D : 1,2
--16
----No Entry : none
--------*Switch@1#
6-33
QoS
Output Items
(QoS Output Port Maximum Table)

Registered-VID: Number of VLANs registered in maximum bandwidth limit mode
Available-VID: Number of VLANs that can be registered
(QoS Input VLAN Maximum Table)
VID: VLAN ID
Mode: Setting mode
normal: Normal mode
separate-RED: Separator mode (RED use)
---: Unset
broadcast: Broadcast setting
multicast: Multicast setting
bc+mc: Broadcast and multicast setting
Rate: Maximum bandwidth limit value per class
If Mode is Normal, the maximum bandwidth limit value is shown in Class-All.
Maximum-Burst: Maximum burst tolerance
Minimum-Burst: Minimum burst tolerance
Related
commands

6-34

mode
mode
output VLAN
VLAN
VLAN
output VLAN
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per output VLAN
Clears the maximum bandwidth limit function per output VLAN.
Input format
- Clearing maximum bandwidth limit setting of specified port/specified VLAN

clear qos out-rate maximum P1 P2 [P3 (vid) P4]
- Clearing maximum bandwidth limit setting of specified port/specified
Remaining-VLAN
clear qos out-rate maximum P1 P2 [P3 (remain)]
Parameters

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
gmx: GbE-MUX port
* If a VLAN is already registered in the specified port when Remaining-VLAN is
specified in P3, you cannot clear the maximum bandwidth limit function per output
VLAN.
* When P3 is omitted, the setting of the maximum bandwidth limit function of all the
VLANs and the Remaining-VLAN in the port specified in P2 are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes

The priority mapping function setting of the specified VLAN and the priority discard
function setting are also cleared.
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear qos out-rate maximum fe 6/1 vid 100

*Switch@1# clear qos out-rate maximum gbe 5/1 vid 100
*Switch@1# clear qos out-rate maximum gbe 4/1
*Switch@1#
Output item
6-35
QoS
Related
commands

6-36

mode
Display of maximum bandwidth limit Operation
mode
output VLAN
VLAN
VLAN
output VLAN
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set qos class-map

Setting of priority mapping
Sets priority mapping.
Input format
- Specifying port (line) number

set qos class-map P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3
- Specifying line module
set qos class-map P1 (line module number) P3
Parameters
P1: Port (line) type { fe | gbe } or line module number

Port (line) type specification
fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
When port (line) type is specified in P1.
P3: Profile number (1 to 4)
* If the port type is ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155, line module
numbers are used for specification.
Default value
P3: 1
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# set qos class-map fe 1/1-3 2

*Switch@1# set qos class-map gbe 6/1 4
*Switch@1# set qos class-map 3 2
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show qos class-map

set qos class-map profile
show qos class-map profile
Display of priority mapping

Creating of priority mapping profile
Display of priority mapping profile
6-37
QoS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show qos class-map

Shows priority mapping.
Input format
- Displaying specified port

show qos class-map [P1 (port (line) number)]
- Displaying specified line module
show qos class-map [P1 (line module number)]
Parameter
P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) or line module number (1 to
12) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When a port (line) number is specified in P1, the priority profile number set in the
specified port is shown.
* When a line module number is specified in P1, the priority profile number set in the
specified module is shown.
(You can specify a line module number only when the port type is ATM155, ATMP,
TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155.)
* When P1 is omitted, the priority profile numbers set in all the ports and those set in
all the line module numbers are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show qos class-map

QoS Priority Mapping Table
==========================
Port Slot
Profile No.
----------------------1/1 --1
1/2 --2
1/3 --2
1/4 --1
1/5 --1
1/6 --1
1/7 --1
1/8 --1
--10
3
*Switch@1#
Output items

Slot: Module number
Profile No.: Profile number
6-38
QoS
Related
commands
set qos class-map


6-39
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Creates a priority mapping profile.
Input formats
- Specifying device initial value

set qos class-map profile P1 P2 (default)
- Setting priority mapping profile
set qos class-map profile P1 P2 (class-a) P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9
Parameters

P2: Class A priority specification { class-a } or device initial value specification { default }
default: Device initial value specification
P3: Priority specification or unset { priority | none }
none: Unset
none: Unset
none: Unset
none: Unset
* You cannot specify none for all classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8).
Specify priority for any of classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8).
* The priority to be specified in any of classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8) cannot
be duplicated with the priority specified in any other class.
* The priority not specified in any of classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8) does not
belong to any class.
Default values
P3: 6, 7
P5: 4, 5
P7: 0, 3
P9: 1, 2
Usage condition
None
6-40
QoS
Notes
omit none.)
If the output-side fairness control mode function is disabled, class mapping does not
function.
Input examples
*Switch@1# set qos class-map profile 4 class-a none class-b 1,3,5 class-c
2,4,6 class-d 0,7
*Switch@1# set qos class-map profile 3 default
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set qos class-map

show qos class-map

6-41
QoS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows a priority mapping profile.
Input format
show qos class-map profile [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, information for all the profiles is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show qos class-map profile 1

QoS Class Mapping Profile Table
===============================
Profile No. : 1
===============
Priority
-------------------------Class-A : 6,7
Class-B : 4,5
Class-C : 0,3
Class-D : 1,2
No Entry : none
*Switch@1#
Output items
Profile No.: Profile number

Related
commands
set qos class-map

show qos class-map

6-42
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set qos cos-map profile

Creating of CoS profile
Creates a CoS profile.
Input formats
- Specifying CoS
set qos cos-map profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 (cos) P4 P5 P6
- Specifying IPv4ToS / IPv6TC
set qos cos-map profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 (v4tos/v6tc) P4 P5
- Specifying ether-type
set qos cos-map profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 (ether-type) P4 P5
- Specifying other
set qos cos-map profile P1 P2 (other) P3
6-43
QoS
Parameters

P2: Index number or others { other }
Index number: 1 to 31
other: Others
* Only index numbers can be omitted.
If an index number is omitted, a free and smaller number index number is used.
(However, if there is an index number that is already registered, that number is
used.)
* If the command where P2 is omitted is entered when all P2 index numbers has
already been set, it is treated as an error because there are no free index numbers,
and the setting is not configured.
When P2 is omitted or an index number is specified.
P3: Service type { cos | v4tos | v6tc | ether-type }
cos: CoS specification
v4tos: IPv4 ToS specification
v6tc: IPv6 TC specification
ether-type: Ethernet type specification
When cos is specified in P3.
P4: Tag type { inner | outer }
inner: Inner tag specification
outer: Outer tag specification
P5: Pre-change priority or untag { untag }
Priority: 0 to 7
untag: Untag specification
P6: Post-change priority (0 to 7)
When v4tos or v6tc is specified in P3.
P4: ToS type { IP-Precedence specification | DSCP specification | Full bit
specification }
IP-Precedence specification: ip-precedence 0 to 7
DSCP specification: dscp 0 to 63
Full bit specification: fullbit 0 to 255
P5: Post-conversion CoS value (0 to 7)
When ether-type is specified in P3.
P4: EtherType value (0x0600 to 0xffff)
When other is specified in P2.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
You can overwrite a registered index but cannot reregister it.

At initial setup, post-conversion CoS value 0 is automatically set to the setting of other.
6-44
QoS
Input examples
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
set
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
cos-map
cos-map
cos-map
cos-map
cos-map
cos-map
profile
profile
profile
profile
profile
profile
10
10
10
10
10
10
2 cos inner 3 5
cos inner untag 7
v4tos fullbit 110 0
5 v6tc dscp 63 2
other 3
ether-type 0x8100 7
Output item
Related
commands
show qos cos-map profile

clear qos cos-map profile
set qos in-port cos-map
show qos in-port cos-map
clear qos in-port cos-map
set qos out-port cos-map
show qos out-port cos-map
clear qos out-port cos-map
Display of CoS profile

Clearing of CoS profile
Setting of input CoS priority mapping
Display of input CoS priority mapping
Clearing of input CoS priority mapping
Setting of output CoS priority mapping
Display of output CoS priority mapping
Clearing of output CoS priority mapping
6-45
QoS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows a CoS profile.
Input format
show qos cos-map profile [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, information for all the profiles registered in the device is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show qos cos-map profile

CoS Profile Table
=================
Profile No. : 1
=================
Before
Convert
Index Field Type Kind
Data
Data
----------------------------------------------------------------------1 cos
inner
3
5
10 v4tos
ip-precedence
5
3
15 v6tc
fullbit
200
4
20 ether-type --0x600
6
Other ------2
*Switch@1#
Output items
Profile No: Profile number

Index: Profile index
Field Type: Service type
cos: CoS specified
v4tos: IP v4 ToS specified
v6tc: IP v6 TC specified
ether-type: ether-type specified
Kind: Tag type/ToS type
Inner: Inner tag specified (when CoS is specified)
Outer: Outer tag specified (when CoS is specified)
IP Precedence specified (when v4tos/v6tc is specified)
DSCP specified (when v4tos/v6tc is specified)
Full bit specified (when v4tos/v6tc is specified)
Before Data: Pre-change priority or Untag specified (CoS)/pre-conversion data
(v4tos/v6tc)
Convert Data: Post-change priority (CoS)/post-conversion CoS value (v4tos/v6tc)
6-46
QoS
Related
commands


6-47
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clears a CoS profile.
Input format
clear qos cos-map profile [P1 [P2]]
Parameters

P2: Index number (1 to 31)
* When all the parameters are omitted, all the registered CoS profiles are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
If command mode is safety mode, you cannot clear the profiles that are already mapped.
Notes
If P1 and P2 are omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.
If no profile is registered in the index number specified in P2, an error occurs.
No error occurs even if the profile number specified in P1 does not exist.
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear qos cos-map profile 3 34

*Switch@1# clear qos cos-map profile 3
*Switch@1# clear qos cos-map profile
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands


6-48
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets input CoS priority mapping.
Input format
set qos in-port cos-map P1 P2 P3 P4
Parameters
P1: Port (line) type { atm | fe | gbe | gmx }

atm: ATM155 port
fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
gmx: GbE-MUX port
Default value
None
Usage condition
If command mode is safety mode, you cannot specify an unregistered profile.
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# set qos in-port cos-map fe 4/1 VLAN100 128

*Switch@1# set qos in-port cos-map gbe 6/1 100 1
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands


6-49
QoS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows input CoS priority mapping.
Input format
show qos in-port cos-map [P1]
Parameter
P1: Port (line) number or VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }

* When P1 is omitted, the CoS profile lists set in all the VLANs of all the ports are
shown.
* When P1 is omitted or a port (line) number is specified, input CoS priority mapping is
shown per port.
* When a VLAN identifier is specified in P1, input CoS priority mapping is shown per
VLAN.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show qos in-port cos-map

Input CoS Priority Mapping Table
================================
Port VID
Profile
-------------------------------4/1 100
128
6/1 100
1
*Switch@1#
Output items

VID: VLAN ID
Profile: Profile number
Related
commands


6-50
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clearing of CoS priority mapping
Clears CoS priority mapping.
Input format
clear qos in-port cos-map P1 P2 [P3]
Parameters
P1: Port (line) type { atm | fe | gbe | gmx }

atm: ATM155 port
fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
gmx: GbE-MUX port
* When P3 is omitted, the CoS priority mapping settings of all the VLANs of the port
specified in P2 are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear qos in-port cos-map fe 4/1 VLAN100

*Switch@1# clear qos in-port cos-map gbe 6/1 100
*Switch@1# clear qos in-port cos-map gbe 3/1
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands


6-51
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets output CoS priority mapping.
Input format
set qos out-port cos-map P1 P2 P3 P4
Parameters

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
Default value
None
Usage condition
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# set qos out-port cos-map fe 1/7 100 10

*Switch@1# set qos out-port cos-map gbe 6/1 VLAN100 1
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands


6-52
QoS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows output CoS priority mapping.
Input format
show qos out-port cos-map [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, the CoS profile lists set in all the VLANs of all the ports are
shown.
* When P1 is omitted or a port (line) number is specified, output CoS priority mapping
is shown per port.
* When a VLAN identifier is specified in P1, output CoS priority mapping is shown per
VLAN.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show qos out-port cos-map

Output CoS Priority Mapping Table
=================================
Port VID
Profile
---------------------------------4/1 100
128
6/1 100
1
*Switch@1#
Output items

VID: VLAN ID
Related
commands


6-53
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clears output CoS priority mapping.
Input format
clear qos out-port cos-map P1 P2 [P3]
Parameters

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
* When P3 is omitted, the CoS priority mapping settings of all the VLANs of the port
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear
*Switch@1# clear
*Switch@1# clear
Would you like to
*Switch@1#
qos out-port cos-map fe 1/5 30

qos out-port cos-map gbe 1/5 30
qos out-port cos-map gbe 1/5
clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y
Output item
Related
commands


6-54
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set qos out-fairness-mode

Setting of output-side fairness control mode function
Sets the output-side fairness control mode function.
Input format
set qos out-fairness-mode P1
Parameter
P1: Output fairness control mode { enable | disable }

enable: Enables output fairness control mode
disable: Disables output fairness control mode
Default value
P1: disable
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set qos out-fairness-mode enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show qos out-fairness-mode

set qos out-priority fairness
set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port

set qos out-weight fairness
show qos out-weight fairness
clear qos out-weight fairness
6-55
Display of output-side fairness control mode

function
Setting of priority discard function of
output-side fairness control function of
output port
Setting of upper threshold of output-side
fairness control function of output port
Setting of output-side fairness control
function weight of output port
Display of output-side fairness control
function of output port
Clearing of output-side fairness control
QoS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of output-side fairness control mode function
Shows the output-side fairness control mode function.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show qos out-fairness-mode

QoS Out Fairness Mode Table
===========================
Port Status
---------------------all enabled
*Switch@1#
Output items
Port: all (all ports)

Status: Output-side fairness control mode
enabled: Enabled
disabled: Disabled
Related
commands


6-56
Setting of output-side fairness control mode

function
output port
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Setting of priority discard function of output-side fairness control function of
output port
Sets the priority discard function of the output-side fairness control function of an output port.
Input formats
- Specifying VLAN
set qos out-priority fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (vid) P4
[P5 (burst tolerance for class-a))] [P6] [P7] [P8]
set qos out-priority fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (remain)
- Specifying VLAN (ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155)
set qos out-priority fairness P1 (line module number) P3 (vid) P4
- Specifying Remaining-VLAN (ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155)
set qos out-priority fairness P1 (line module number) P3 (remain)
set qos out-priority fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (initial)
set qos out-priority fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (remain) P5 (initial)
(ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155)
set qos out-priority fairness P1 (line module number) P3 (vid) P4 P5 (initial)
set qos out-priority fairness P1 (line module number) P3 (remain) P5 (initial)
6-57
QoS
Parameters
P1: Port (line) type specification { fe | gbe } or line module number specification
fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
* A line module number can be specified only when the port type is ATM155, ATMP,
TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155.
When a port (line) type is specified in P1.
FE port: 1/1 to 4/8
GbE port: 3/1 to 10/1
P5: Burst tolerance specification for class A { class-a 1 to 127 } or default setting { initial }
Initial: Default specification
When P5 is omitted or burst tolerance for class A is specified.
* The granularity for burst tolerance is 1 (Kbyte).
* When burst tolerance specification for class A to class D (P5 to P8) are omitted, the
current values are kept.
Default value
P5: 127 (Kbyte), P6: 64 (Kbyte), P7: 32 (Kbyte), P8: 16 (Kbyte)
Usage condition
If the output-side fairness control mode function is disable, you cannot set this function.
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1#
20
*Switch@1#
30
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set qos out-priority fairness fe 1/3 vid 100 class-a 10 class-b

set qos out-priority fairness gbe 9/1 vid 200 class-a 20 class-b
set qos out-priority fairness 3 vid 100 class-a 10 class-b 20
set qos out-priority fairness 10 remain initial
Output item
6-58
QoS
Related
commands

6-59
Setting of priority discard function per

output VLAN
Setting of output-side fairness control mode
function
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set qos out-weight rate

Setting of output-side fairness control function rate of output port
Sets the output-side fairness control function rate of an output port.
Input formats
- Specifying VLAN
set qos out-weight rate P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5
set qos out-weight rate P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (remain) P5
set qos out-weight rate P1 (line module number) P3 (vid) P4 P5
set qos out-weight rate P1 (line module number) P3 (remain) P5
Parameters
fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
FE port: 1/1 to 4/8
P6: Rate value
FE: 0 to 100000 (Kbps)
GbE, ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, TDMP155: 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)
* The granularity is 25 (Kbps).
error.
Default value
None
Usage condition
Note
If the GbE line mode function is se to FE in GbE-PV2, the maximum number of VLANs
that can be set for one port is the same as the maximum number of FE ports.
6-60
QoS
Input example
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
qos
qos
qos
qos
out-weight
out-weight
out-weight
out-weight
rate
rate
rate
rate
fe 1/1 vid 1 1000

gbe 6/1 vid VLAN100 1000000
3 vid 100 1
3 remain 0
Output item
Related
commands


6-61

output port
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Setting of output-side fairness control function weight of output port
Sets the output-side fairness control function weight of and output port.
Input formats
- Specifying VLAN
set qos out-weight fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5
set qos out-weight fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (remain) P5
set qos out-weight fairness P1 (line module number) P3 (vid) P4 P5
set qos out-weight fairness P1 (line module number) P3 (remain) P5
Parameters
fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
FE port: 1/1 to 4/8
P5: Weight value (0 to 40000)
* The setting granularity is 1 (Weight).
* The default are fe, gbe, atm155, atmp, tdmp, atmp155, and tdmp155: 1 (Weight).
* Maximum number of registrations: gbe, atm155, atmp, tdmp, atmp155, and tdmp155
= 2047 (+1)/fe=255 (+1)
(+1) is for Remaining-VLAN.
* Remaining-VLAN is registered when the output-side fairness control mode function is
enabled.
* You cannot clear Remaining-VLAN.
Default value
P5: fe, gbe, atm155, atmp, tdmp, atmp155, tdmp155: 1 (Weight)
Usage condition
6-62
QoS
Note
If the GbE line mode function is se to FE in GbE-PV2, the maximum number of VLANs
that can be set for one port is the same as the maximum number of FE ports.
Input examples
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
qos
qos
qos
qos
out-weight
out-weight
out-weight
out-weight
fairness
fairness
fairness
fairness
fe 4/1 vid 100 40000

gbe 6/1 vid VLAN100 0
3 vid 100 1
3 remain 0
Output item
Related
commands

6-63

output port
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Setting of upper threshold of output-side fairness control function of output port
Sets the upper threshold of the output-side fairness control function of an output port.
Input formats
- Setting specified port/the upper threshold of the output-side fairness control

function
set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3
- Setting specified line module/ the upper threshold of the output-side fairness
control function (ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155)
set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port P1 (line module number) P3
Parameters
fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
FE port: 1/1 to 4/8
P3: Rate value
FE: 1000 to 100000 (Kbps)
GbE, ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, TDMP155: 1000 to 1000000 (Kbps)
error.
Default values
P3:
fe: 100 (Mbps)
gbe, atm155, atmp, tdmp, atmp155, tdmp155: 1 (Gbps)
Usage condition
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port fe 1/1 30000

*Switch@1# set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port gbe 6/1 1000000
*Switch@1# set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port 3 50000
*Switch@1#
Output item
6-64
QoS
Related
commands

Setting of priority discard function of output-side

Setting of output-side fairness control function weight
of output port
Display of output-side fairness control function of
output port
Clearing of output-side fairness control function of
output port
6-65
QoS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of output-side fairness control function of output port
Shows the output-side fairness control function of an output port.
Input formats
- Displaying specified port/all VLANs

show qos out-weight fairness [P1 (port (line)number)]
- Displaying specified line module/all VLANs
show qos out-weight fairness [P1 (line module number)]
show qos out-weight fairness [P1 (port (line)number) [P2 (vid) P3]]
show qos out-weight fairness [P1 (port (line)number) [P2 (remain)]]
- Displaying specified line module/specified VLAN
show qos out-weight fairness [P1 (line module number) [P2 (vid) P3]]
- Displaying specified line module/specified Remaining-VLAN
show qos out-weight fairness [P1 (line module number) [P2 (remain)]]
- Displaying all ports/specified VLAN
show qos out-weight fairness [P2 (vid) P3]
- Displaying all VLANs/specified Remaining-VLAN
show qos out-weight fairness [P2 (remain)]
Parameters
P1: Port (line) number or line module number specification

Port (line) number: 1/1 to 10/8 (single specification)
* When all the parameters are omitted, information for all the VLANs set in all the ports
and Remaining-VLANs, and information for all the VLANs set in all the line module
numbers are shown.
* About displayed data if P2 is omitted.
If a port (line) number is specified in P1, information for all the VLANs set in the
specified port and Remaining-VLANs are shown per port.
If a line module number is specified in P1, information for all the VLANs set in the
specified line module number is shown per line module.
* When P1 is omitted, information is shown per VLAN.
6-66
QoS
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show qos out-weight fairness 6/1

QoS Output Port Fairness Table
==============================
Maximum- Real-Maximum- Total-25KbpsRegistered Available
Port Slot Rate(Kbps) Rate(Kbps)
basedRate(Kbps) -VID
-VID
----------------------------------------------------------------------6/1 --1000000
1000000
25
2
2046
QoS Output VLAN Fairness Table
==============================
Port
: 6/1
VID
: 100
Priority Profile : 1
=========================
25Kbps-based- RealPriority
Weight Rate(Kbps)
Rate(Kbps) Burst(KByte)
----------------------------------------------------------------------Class-All : -0
0
0.00
--Class-A : 6,7
------127
Class-B : 4,5
------64
Class-C : 0,3
------32
Class-D : 1,2
------16
No Entry : none
--------Port
: 6/1
VID
: remain
Priority Profile : 1
=========================
25Kbps-based- RealPriority
Weight Rate(Kbps)
Rate(Kbps) Burst(KByte)
----------------------------------------------------------------------Class-All : --1
25
1000000.00
--Class-A : 6,7
------127
Class-B : 4,5
------64
Class-C : 0,3
------32
Class-D : 1,2
------16
No Entry : none
--------*Switch@1#
6-67
QoS
Output items
(QoS Output Port Fairness Table)

Slot: Line (slot) module number
Maximum-Rate: Upper threshold of line
Real-Maximum-Rate: Real upper threshold of line
Total-25Kbps- based-Rate: Total rate value (1weight=25Kbps)
Registered-VID: Number of VLANs that are already set
Available-VID: Number of remaining available VLANs
(QoS Output VLAN Fairness Table)
VID: VLAN ID
Priority Profile: Profile number
Weight: Weight value
25Kbps-based-Rate: Rate value (1weight=25Kbps)
Real-Rate: Real rate value
Burst: Burst tolerance
Related
commands

6-68

output port
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clearing of output-side fairness control function of output port
Clears the output-side fairness control function of an output port.
Input formats
- Clearing specified port/VLAN-output-side fairness control setting

clear qos out-weight fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 [P3]
- Clearing specified line module/VLAN-output-side fairness control setting
clear qos out-weight fairness P1 (line module number) [P3]
Parameters
fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
FE port: 1/1 to 4/8
* When P3 is omitted, the fairness control settings of all the VLANs registered in the
specified port are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear qos out-weight fairness fe 1/1 70

*Switch@1# clear qos out-weight fairness gbe 6/1 VLAN100
*Switch@1# clear qos out-weight fairness 3 500
*Switch@1# clear qos out-weight fairness 3
*Switch@1#
Output item
6-69
QoS
Related
commands

6-70

output port
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set qos initial-class-map

Setting of default priority mapping
Sets default priority mapping.
Input formats
- Setting default
set qos initial-class-map P1 P2 (default)
- Setting default priority mapping
set qos initial-class-map P1 P2 (class-a) P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9
Parameters
P1: Band specification { in-maximum | in-fairness | out-maximum }

in-maximum: Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of input port
in-fairness: Specification of input-side fairness control function of multiport
out-maximum: Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of output port
* Specification of input-side fairness control function of multiport is unsupported in P1.
P2: Class A priority specification { class-a } or device initial value specification { default }
When class A priority is specified in P2.
none: Unset
class-b: Class B priority
none: Unset
class-c: Class C priority
none: Unset
class-d: Class D priority
none: Unset
* You cannot specify none for all classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8).
Specify priority for any of classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8).
* The priority to be specified in any of classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8)
cannot be duplicated with the priority specified in any other class.
* The priority not specified in any of classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8) does
not belong to any class.
* When P2 (default) is specified, the device initial value is assumed.
Default value
P2: 6,7 P4: 4,5 P6: 0,3 P8:1,2
6-71
QoS
Usage condition
None
Notes
To inhibit a priority from belonging to a class, specify none explicitly.

If command mode is safety mode, execution is confirmed after this command has been
entered.
Input examples
*Switch@1# set qos initial-class-map in-maximum class-a 4,5,7 class-b 0

class-c 1,2,3,6 class-d none
*Switch@1# set qos initial -class-map out-maximum class-a 4-6 class-b 1,2
class-c 0,3 class-d 7
*Switch@1# set qos initial -class-map fairness default
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set qos class-map

show qos initial-class-map

Display of default priority mapping
6-72
QoS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of default priority mapping
Shows default priority mapping.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
The default priority mapping of the maximum bandwidth limit function of an input port is
shown.
The default priority mapping of the maximum bandwidth limit function of an output port is
shown.
The default priority mapping of the multiport fairness control function is shown.
* Because the default priority mapping of the multiport fairness control function is
unsupported function, the default value is shown.
Input example
*Switch@1# show qos initial-class-map

QoS Default Class Mapping Table
===============================
In-Maximum
In-Fairness
Out-Maximum
(Priority)
(Priority)
(Priority)
----------------------------------------------------------------------Class-A : 6,7
6,7
6,7
Class-B : 4,5
4,5
4,5
Class-C : 0,3
0,3
0,3
Class-D : 1,2
1,2
1,2
No Entry : none
--none
*Switch@1#
Output items
In-Maximum: Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of input port

In-Fairness: Specification of multiport fairness control function
Out-Maximum: Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of output port
Class-A to Class-D: Class mapping
6-73
QoS
Related
commands

set qos class-map
show qos class-map
6-74

VLAN
VLAN
Setting of default priority mapping
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set qos initial-priority

Setting of default burst tolerance
Sets default burst tolerance.
Input formats
- Setting default burst tolerance

set qos initial-priority P1 (band specification) P2 (burst tolerance for class-a) P3 P4
P5
- Setting default
set qos initial-priority P1 (band specification) P2 (default)
- Setting default burst tolerance (RED use)
set qos initial-priority P1 (band specification (RED use)) P2
P3 (burst tolerance (upper threshold) for class-a) P4 [P5] P6 P7 [P8] P9 P10 [P11]
P12 P13 [P14]
- Setting default (RED use)
set qos initial-priority P1 (band specification (RED use)) P2 P3 (default)
Parameters
P1: Band specification { in-maximum out-maximum in-fairness out-fairness } or

band specification (RED use) { in-maximum-red | out-maximum-red }
in-maximum: Specification of maximum band limitation of input port
out-maximum: Specification of maximum band limitation of output port
in-fairness: Specification of input-side fairness control of multiport
out-fairness: Specification of output-side fairness control of output port
in-maximum-red: Specification of maximum band limitation of input port (RED use)
out-maximum-red: Specification of maximum band limitation of output port (RED use)
* Specification of input-side fairness control function of multiport is unsupported in P1.
When band specification is specified in P1.
P2: Burst tolerance A specification or device initial value specification { default }
Burst tolerance A: class-a 1 to 127 (Kbyte)
When burst tolerance A is specified in P2.
When band specification (RED use) is specified in P1.
fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
P3: Burst tolerance A (upper threshold) specification or device initial value
specification { default }
Burst tolerance A (upper threshold)
6-75
QoS
When burst tolerance A (upper threshold) is specified in P3.
P4: Burst tolerance A (lower threshold) or probability disable { disable }
Burst tolerance A (lower threshold)
disable: Probability disable
When burst tolerance A (lower threshold) is specified in P4.
P6: Burst tolerance B (upper threshold)
P7: Burst tolerance B (lower threshold) or probability disable { disable }
Burst tolerance B (lower threshold)
When burst tolerance B (lower threshold) is specified in P7.
P9: Burst tolerance C (upper threshold)
P10: Burst tolerance C (lower threshold) or probability disable { disable }
Burst tolerance C (lower threshold)
When burst tolerance C (lower threshold) is specified in P10.
P12: Burst tolerance D (upper threshold)
P13: Burst tolerance D (lower threshold) or probability disable { disable }
Burst tolerance D (lower threshold)
When burst tolerance D (lower threshold) is specified in P13.
Default value
None
Usage
condition
None
Notes
You cannot set a value greater than the value set in P3 in P4. You cannot also set a
value greater than the values set in P3 in P6, P7, P9, P10, P12, and P13.
If command mode is safety mode, execution is confirmed after this command has been
entered.
6-76
QoS
Input example
*Switch@1# set qos initial-priority in-maximum class-a 96 class-b 64 class-c

2 class-d 1
*Switch@1# set qos initial-priority out-maximum default
*Switch@1# set qos initial-priority in-maximum-red gbe class-a 30000 29999
32 class-b 5000 4000 16 class-c 3000 2000 2 class-d 1000 500 1
*Switch@1# set qos initial-priority out-maximum-red fe class-a 96 disable
class-b 64 32 10 class-c 3000 20 32 class-d 2000 10 1
*Switch@1# set qos initial-priority out-maximum-red gbe default
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

show qos initial-priority
Setting oft priority discard function per input VLAN

Setting of priority discard function of output-side
Display of default burst tolerance
6-77
QoS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of default burst tolerance
Shows default burst tolerance.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
* Because the default burst tolerance of input-side fairness control function of multiport
(in-fairness) is unsupported function, the default value is shown.
Input example
*Switch@1# show qos initial-priority

QoS Initial Burst Table
=======================
In-Maximum In-Fairness Out-Fairness Out-Maximum
(KByte)
(KByte)
(KByte)
(KByte)
-----------------------------------------------------------Class-A :
127
14
127
127
Class-B :
64
14
64
64
Class-C :
32
14
32
32
Class-D :
16
14
16
16
QoS Initial Burst(RED) Table
============================
In-Maximum(FE)
==============
Maximum-Burst(KByte) Minimum-Burst(KByte) Probability
----------------------------------------------------------------------Class-A :
127
disabled
disabled
Class-B :
64
disabled
disabled
Class-C :
32
16
32(100%)
Class-D :
16
8
32(100%)
In-Maximum(GbE)
===============
----------------------------------------------------------------------Class-A :
127
disabled
disabled
Class-B :
64
disabled
disabled
Class-C :
32
16
32(100%)
Class-D :
16
8
32(100%)
Out-Maximum(FE)
6-78
QoS
===============
----------------------------------------------------------------------Class-A :
127
disabled
disabled
Class-B :
64
disabled
disabled
Class-C :
32
16
32(100%)
Class-D :
16
8
32(100%)
Out-Maximum(GbE)
================
----------------------------------------------------------------------Class-A :
127
disabled
disabled
Class-B :
64
disabled
disabled
Class-C :
32
16
32(100%)
Class-D :
16
8
32(100%)
*Switch@1#
Output items
(QoS Initial Burst Table)

In-maximum: Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of input port
In-fairness: Specification of input-side fairness control function of multiport
Output-fairness: Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of output port
Out-maximum: Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of output port
Class-A to Class-D: Burst tolerance
(QoS Initial Burst (RED) Table)
In-Maximum(FE): Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of input (FE port)
Maximum-Burst: Upper threshold burst tolerance
Minimum-Burst: Lower threshold burst tolerance
In-Maximum(GBE): Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of input (GbE
port)
Out-Maximum(FE): Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of output port (FE
port)
Out-Maximum(GBE): Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of output port
(GBE port)
Related
command
Setting of default burst tolerance
6-79
QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set qos measure-cycle

Setting of subtraction cycle
Sets a subtraction cycle.
Input format
set qos measure-cycle P1
Parameter
P1: Subtraction cycle { short | long }

short: Short cycle specification
long: Long cycle specification
Default value
P1:long
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# set qos measure-cycle short

*Switch@1# set qos measure-cycle long
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show qos measure-cycle
Display of subtraction cycle
6-80
QoS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of subtraction cycle
Shows a subtraction cycle.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# set qos measure-cycle short

*Switch@1# show qos measure-cycle
QoS Measure Cycle Table
=======================
Cycle : short
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# set qos measure-cycle long
*Switch@1# show qos measure-cycle
QoS Measure Cycle Table
=======================
Cycle : long
*Switch@1#
Output items
Cycle: Subtraction cycle

short: Short cycle specification
long: Long cycle specification
Related
command
Setting of subtraction cycle
6-81
QoS
(Blank page)
6-82
Switch Control
7 Switch Control
7-1
Switch Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set frame-size
Setting of frame size
Sets a frame size.
Input format
set frame-size P1 P2
Parameters
P1: Target port type { fe | gbe | atm }

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
atm: ATM transmission path
P2: Frame size maximum value
fe 64 to 1536 (byte)
gbe 64 to 9000 (byte)
atm 64 to 1536 (byte)
Default value
P2: 1536
Usage condition
None
Notes
Tagbase VLAN port: Allowable frame size = Command specification value + 4 (Byte)
In a GbE line module for which the line module operation is set to FE, even if the value
set for the frame size exceeds 1536 bytes, it is dealt as 1536 bytes.
Input example
*Switch@1# set frame-size fe 1536

*Switch@1# set frame-size gbe 9000
*Switch@1# set frame-size atm 1536
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show frame-size
Display of frame size
7-2
Switch Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show frame-size
Display of frame size
Shows a frame size.
Input format
show frame-size
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
Tagbase VLAN port: Allowable frame size = Command specification value + 4 (Byte)
Input example
*Switch@1# show frame-size

Frame Size Value (Byte)
=======================
FE-Port : 1536
GbE-Port : 9000
ATM-Port : 1536
*Switch@1#
Output items
FE-Port: Frame value of FE port

GbE-Port: Frame value of GbE port
ATM-Port: Frame value of ATM transmission path
Related
command
set frame-size
Setting of frame size
7-3
Switch Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set fdb table mode

Setting of maximum MAC learning count mode
Sets the maximum MAC learning count mode.
Input format
set fdb table mode P1
Parameter
P1: Maximum learning count { 16k | 512k }

16k: 16K entry mode
512k: 512K entry mode
Default value
P1: 512k
Usage condition
This setting is reflected after the "write memory" command is executed and the device is
restarted.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set fdb table mode 16k

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show fdb table mode

set ether-ring
Display of maximum MAC learning count mode

Setting of EtherRing enable/disable
7-4
Switch Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show fdb table mode

Display of maximum MAC learning count mode
Shows the maximum MAC learning count mode currently set.
Input format
show fdb table mode
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show fdb table mode

FDB Table Mode Information
==========================
Present : 512k
Reserve : 16k
*Switch@1#
Output items
Present: Maximum MAC learning count mode (Current)

Reserve: Maximum MAC learning count mode (After restart)
Related
command
set fdb table mode
Setting of maximum MAC learning count mode
7-5
Switch Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set fdb agingtime

Setting of aging time
Sets FDB aging time.
Input format
set fdb agingtime P1
Parameter
P1: Aging time (10 to 1000000 seconds)
Default value
P1: 300 seconds
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set fdb agingtime 1000000

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show fdb agingtime
Display of aging time
7-6
Switch Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show fdb agingtime

Display of aging time
Shows the currently set FDB aging time.
Input format
show fdb agingtime
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show fdb agingtime

FDB AgingTime Configuration
===========================
AgingTime
(sec) : 1000000
(hh:mm:ss) : 277:46:40
*Switch@1#
Output items
Agingtime(sec): Aging time value (second)

Agingtime(hh:mm:ss): Aging time value (hour:minute:second)
Related
command
set fdb agingtime
Setting of aging time
7-7
Switch Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show fdb count port

Display of MAC learning count per port
Shows the MAC learning count per port.
Input format
show fdb count port [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, the MAC learning counts for all ports are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
When MAC learning information learned is shown in ATMP and TDMP line modules, of
the port (line) numbers in the same line module, the lowest port (line) number serves as
the pilot port (line) number, and the display is as follows.
- When specifying a port (line) number
All the MACs learned in the same line module are shown on the assumption that they
are learned using a pilot port (line) number. For this reason, even if a pilot port (line)
number and a specified port (line) number are different, the pilot port (line) number is
shown.
- When omitting a port (line) number
are learned using a pilot port (line) number.
* A pilot port (line) number is the lowest port (line) number in the same line module.
Input example
*Switch@1# show fdb count port 1/1-8

FDB Learned Entry
=================
Port Learned-Entry
----------------------------1/1
1
1/2
0
1/3
0
1/4
0
1/5
0
1/6
0
1/7
0
1/8
0
*Switch@1#
Output items

Learned-Entry: FDB learning count
7-8
Switch Control
Related
commands
show fdb count vid

show fdb count all
show fdb table port
show fdb table vid
Display of MAC learning count per VLAN

Display of MAC learning count per device
Display of MAC learning information per port
Display of MAC learning information per VLAN
7-9
Switch Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show fdb count vid

Shows the MAC learning count per VLAN.
Input format
show fdb count vid [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, the MAC learning counts for all the VLANs are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show fdb count vid 1-5

FDB Learned Entry
=================
VID Name
Learned-Entry
------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 VLAN0001
1
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
*Switch@1#
Output items
VID: VLAN ID
Name: VLAN name
Learned-Entry: FDB learning count
Related
commands
show fdb count port

show fdb count all
show fdb table port
show fdb table vid

7-10
Switch Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show fdb count all

Shows the MAC learning count per device.
Input format
show fdb count all
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show fdb count all

FDB Learned Entry
=================
Total Learned Entry : 15000
*Switch@1#
Output item
Total Learned Entry: FDB learning count
Related
commands
show fdb count port

show fdb count vid
show fdb table port
show fdb table vid

7-11
Switch Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show fdb table

Display of MAC learning information
Shows the MAC learning information.
Input format
show fdb table
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
For ATMP and TDMP line modules, specify a pilot port (line) number only.
Notes
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show fdb table

Data Transferring......
FDB Learning Table
==================
Port MAC Address
VID Name
--------------------------------------------------------------1/1 00:00:00:00:00:01
1 VLAN0001
4/1 00:00:00:00:40:94 4094 VLAN4094
12/1 00:00:00:00:00:03
1 VLAN0001
*Switch@1#
Output items

Related
commands
show fdb count all

clear fdb table port
clear fdb table vid
VID: VLAN ID
Name VLAN name
7-12
Switch Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show fdb table port

Shows MAC learning information per port.
Input format
show fdb table port [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, MAC learning information for all the ports is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
the pilot port (line) number, and the display is as follows.
- When specifying a port (line) number
are learned using a pilot port (line) number. For this reason, even if a pilot port (line)
number and a specified port (line) number are different, the pilot port (line) number is
shown.
- When omitting a port (line) number
are learned using a pilot port (line) number.
Input example
*Switch@1# show fdb table port

Data Transferring.
Data Searching..
FDB Learning Table
==================
Port MAC Address
VID Name
--------------------------------------------------------------1/1 00:00:00:00:00:01
1 VLAN0001
4/1 00:00:00:00:40:94 4094 VLAN4094
12/1 00:00:00:00:00:03
1 VLAN0001
*Switch@1#
Output items

VID: VLAN ID
Name: VLAN name
7-13
Switch Control
Related
commands
show fdb count port

show fdb count all

Clearing of MAC learning information per port
7-14
Switch Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clearing of MAC learning information per port
Clears MAC learning information for the specified port.
Input format
clear fdb table port [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, MAC learning information for all the ports is cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes

For ATMP and TDMP line modules, the operation is as follows.
If the VLAN ID that is the same as that set in the specified port (line) number is set in
another port in the same line module when MAC learning information is cleared per port,
the MAC learning information relating to the VLAN ID is also cleared.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear fdb table port

Would you like to clear the information? :(Y/N): y
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show fdb table port
7-15
Switch Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show fdb table vid

Shows MAC learning information per VLAN.
Input format
show fdb table vid [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, MAC learning information for all the VLANs is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
the pilot port (line) number. All the MACs learned in the same line module are shown
on the assumption that they are learned using a pilot port (line) number.
Input example
*Switch@1# show fdb table vid

Data Transferring.
Data Searching..
FDB Learning Table
==================
VID Name
MAC Address
Port
--------------------------------------------------------------1 VLAN0001
00:00:00:00:00:01 1/1
1 VLAN0001
00:00:00:00:40:94 12/1
4094 VLAN4094
00:00:00:00:00:03 4/1
*Switch@1#
Output items
VID: VLAN ID
Name: VLAN name
Related
commands
show fdb count vid

show fdb count all
clear fdb table vid

Clearing of MAC learning information per VLAN
7-16
Switch Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear fdb table vid

Clearing of MAC learning information per VLAN
Clears MAC learning information for the specified VLAN.
Input format
clear fdb table vid P1
Parameter

Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear fdb table vid 1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show fdb table vid
7-17
Switch Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ifg over-rate

Setting of IFG overrate mode
Sets IFG overrate mode.
Input format
set ifg over-rate P1
Parameter
P1: IFG overrate mode { enable | disable }

enable: Enables IFG overrate mode
disable: Disables IFG overrate mode
Default value
P1: disable
Usage condition
None
Note
This function is valid only when the frame that flowed in from the port set in the portbase
VLAN goes out of the port (line) set in the tagbase VLAN of the GbE line module.
Input example
*Switch@1# set ifg over-rate enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show ifg over-rate
Display of IFG overrate mode
7-18
Switch Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show ifg over-rate

Display of IFG overrate mode
Shows IFG overrate mode.
Input format
show ifg over-rate
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show ifg over-rate

IFG Over-Rate Configuration
===========================
Over-Rate : enabled
*Switch@1#
Output items
Over-Rate: enabled: IFG overrate mode enabled

Disabled: IFG overrate mode disabled
Related
command
set ifg over-rate
Setting of IFG overrate mode
7-19
Switch Control
(Blank page)
7-20
Route Control
8 Route Control
8-1
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set spantree
Setting of spanning tree protocol enable/disable support
Sets whether to enable or disable spanning tree protocol support.
Input format
set spantree P1
Parameter
P1: Spanning tree protocol support setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables spanning tree protocol support
disable: Disables spanning tree protocol support
Default value
P1: disable
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set spantree enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show spantree mode
Display of spanning tree mode
8-2
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set spantree mode

Setting of spanning tree mode
Sets spanning tree mode.
Input format
set spantree mode P1
Parameter
P1: Spanning tree mode { rstp | stp }

rstp: RSTP mode
stp: STP mode
Default value
P1: rstp
Usage condition
You can enter this command only when spanning tree protocol support is disabled.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set spantree mode stp

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show spantree mode

show spantree info

Display of spanning tree switch information
8-3
Route Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show spantree mode

Shows spanning tree mode.
Input format
show spantree mode
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show spantree mode

Spantree Mode Information
=========================
Mode : RSTP
Status : disabled
*Switch@1#
Output items
Mode: Mode type

RSTP: RSTP mode
STP: STP mode
Status: Spanning tree enable/disable status
enabled: Spanning tree enabled
disabled: Spanning tree disabled
Related
command
set spantree mode
8-4
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set spantree priority

Setting of switch priority
Sets a switch priority.
Input format
set spantree priority P1
Parameter
P1: Priority
RSTP mode: 0 to 61440 * Setting granularity: 4096
STP mode: 0 to 65535
* If the priority is not a multiple of the setting granularity, this parameter results in an
error.
Default value
P1: 32768
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set spantree priority 61440

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show spantree info
Display of spanning tree switch information.
8-5
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set spantree time

Setting of spanning tree timer
Sets a spanning tree timer.
Input formats
- Default specification
set spantree time P1 (default)
- Type setting (hello time/maximum aging time/forward delay time)
set spantree time P1 (hello | maxage | forward) P2
Parameters
P1: Setting type specification { default | hello | maxage | forward }

default: Default setting
hello: Hello time
maxage: Maximum aging time
forward: Forward delay time
* Multiple setting of hello, maxage, and forward is possible.
* When entering all the hello, maxage, and forward parameters, you must enter them
in any of the following orders:
hello->maxage->forward, maxage->hello->forward, and forward->hello->maxage
When hello, maxage, or forward is specified in P1.
P2: Time setting (seconds)
When hello is specified: 1 to 10
When maxage is specified: 6 to 40
When forward is specified: 4 to 30
Default values
P1: default
Hello time: 2 seconds
Maximum aging time: 20 seconds
Forward delay time: 15 seconds
Usage
conditions
The spanning tree timer to be set must meet the following:

2 (forward delay time - 1) maximum aging time
Maximum aging time 2 (hello time + 1)
Note
An unspecified type is not set.
Input example
*Switch@1# set spantree time hello 4 maxage 10 forward 12

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show spantree info
8-6
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set spantree txholdcount

Setting of hold count
Sets a hold count.
Input format
set spantree txholdcount P1
Parameter
P1: Maximum BPDU transmission count (1 to 10 times)
Default value
P1: 3
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set spantree txholdcount 10

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show spantree info
8-7
Route Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show spantree info

Shows spanning tree switch information.
Input format
show spantree info
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show spantree info

STP Global Information
======================
Spanning Tree Version
: IEEE802.1W(RSTP)
STP Priority
: 61440
Time Since Topology Change (sec) : --STP Topology Changes
: --STP Designated Root
: --STP Root Cost
: --STP Root Port Number
: --STP MAX Age
(sec): --STP Hello Time
(sec): --STP Hold Time
(sec): --STP Forward Delay
(sec): --Local Switch Information
========================
STP Bridge MAX Age
(sec): 20
STP Bridge Hello Time
(sec): 2
STP Bridge Forward Delay
(sec): 15
STP TX Hold Count
: 10
*Switch@1#
8-8
Route Control
Output items
Spanning Tree Version: Spanning tree version

STP Priority: Spanning tree switch priority
Time Since Topology Change (sec): Topology post-change time
STP Topology Changes: Topology change count
STP Designated Root: Spanning tree root switch
STP Root Cost: Spanning tree root cost
STP Root Port Number: Spanning tree root port number
STP MAX Age (sec): Maximum aging time of spanning tree
STP Hello Time (sec): Hello time of spanning tree
STP Hold Time (sec): Hold time of spanning tree
STP Forward Delay (sec): Forward delay time of spanning tree
STP Bridge MAX Age (sec): Maximum aging time
STP Bridge Hello Time (sec): Hello time
STP Bridge Forward Delay (sec): Forward delay time
STP TX Hold Count: Transmission hold count value
Related
commands
set spantree mode

set spantree time

Setting of switch priority
Setting of spanning tree timer
Setting of hold count
8-9
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set spantree port

Setting of spanning tree enable/disable per port
Sets whether to enable or disable the spanning tree per port.
Input format
set spantree port P1 P2
Parameters

P2: Spanning tree per port setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables spanning tree per port
disable: Disables spanning tree per port
Default value
P2: disable
Usage condition
None
Note
Disabled ports are excluded from the spanning tree.
Input example
*Switch@1# set spantree port 9/1 enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show spantree port
Display of spanning tree port information
8-10
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set spantree port priority

Setting of priority per port
Sets a priority per port.
Input format
set spantree port priority P1 P2
Parameters

P2: Priority
RSTP mode: 0 to 240 * Setting granularity: 16
STP mode: 0 to 255
* If the priority is not a multiple of the setting granularity, this parameter results in an
error.
Default value
P2: 128
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set spantree port priority 8/1 240

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show spantree port
8-11
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set spantree port cost

Setting of path cost per port
Sets path cost per port.
Input format
set spantree port cost P1 P2
Parameters

P2: Port cost value or automatic setting { auto }
RSTP mode: 1 to 200000000
STP mode: 1 to 65535
Automatic setting: auto
Default value
P2: auto
Usage condition
None
Note
When setting auto, the port cost value depends on the port speed.
- Actual default values when auto is set:
RSTP mode
STP mode
10Mbps: 2000000
10Mbps: 100
100Mbps: 200000
100Mbps: 19
1Gbps: 20000
1Gbps: 4
Input example
*Switch@1# set spantree port cost 9/1 auto

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show spantree port
8-12
Route Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show spantree port

Shows spanning tree port information.
Input format
show spantree port [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, spanning tree port information for all the ports is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show spantree port

RSTP Port Configuration Table
=============================
Port
Priority Status
Edge
Cost
----------------------------------------------------------1/1
128 disabled disabled
auto
1/2
auto
1/3
auto
1/4
auto
<Omission>
8/1
9/1
10/1
11/1
12/1
128
128
128
128
128
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
RSTP Port Status Table

======================
DES
DES DES
Port Status
Role
Cost Bridge
Cost Port TC
----------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 discarding disabled
200000 800000004cb47c7f
0 8001 0
1/2 discarding disabled
200000 800000004cb47c7f
0 8002 0
200000 800000004cb47c7f
0 8003 0
200000 800000004cb47c7f
0 8004 0
<Omission>
200000 800000004cb47c7f
200000 800000004cb47c7f
200000 800000004cb47c7f
8-13
0 8039
0 8041
0 8049
0
0
0
Route Control
200000 800000004cb47c7f
200000 800000004cb47c7f
0 8051
0 8059
*Switch@1#
Output items

STP(RSTP) Port Configuration Table:
Priority: Priority per port
Status: Spanning tree status per port
enabled: Spanning tree enabled
disabled: Spanning tree disabled
Edge: Edge port status
enabled: Edge port enabled
disabled: Edge port disabled
Cost: Port path cost value or auto
STP(RSTP) Port Status Table:
Status: Spanning tree status per port
disabled: Disabled spanning tree
discarding: Discarding spanning tree
learning: Learning spanning tree
forwarding: Forwarding spanning tree
Role: Port role status
disabled: Disabled port
alternate: Alternate port
designated: Designated port
root: Root port
backup: Backup port
Cost: Path cost value per port
DES Bridge: Specified bridge information
DES Cost: Specified port cost
DES Port: Specified port number
TC: Topology change count
Related
commands
set spantree port

Setting of spanning tree enable/disable per port

8-14
0
0
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set spantree port edge

Setting of edge port
Sets an edge port.
Input format
set spantree port edge P1 P2
Parameters

P2: Edge port setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables edge port
disable: Disables edge port
Default value
P2: disable
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set spantree port edge 12/1 enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show spantree port

show spantree port edge

Display of edge port
8-15
Route Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of edge port
Shows an edge port.
Input format
show spantree port edge [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, all edge ports are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show spantree port edge

RSTP Operational Status of Edge Port Table
==========================================
Port Oper
Admin
------------------------------------1/1 disabled disabled
1/2 disabled disabled
*Switch@1#
Output items

Oper: Edge port status
enabled: Edge port enabled
disabled: Edge port disabled
Admin: Edge port settings information
enabled: Edge port settings enabled
disabled: Edge port settings disabled
Related
command
8-16
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set spantree port point-to-point

Setting of point-to-point
Sets point-to-point.
Input format
set spantree port point-to-point P1 P2
Parameters

P2: Point-to-point setting { enable | disable | auto }
enable: Enables point-to-point setting
disable: Disables point-to-point setting
auto: Automatic point-to-point setting
Default value
P2: auto
Usage conditions
If the port is full duplex when auto is set in P2, point-to-point setting is enabled.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set spantree port point-to-point 1/1 enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show spantree port point-to-point
8-17
Display of point-to-point
Route Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of point-to-point
Shows point-to-point information.
Input format
show spantree port point-to-point [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, point-to-point setting information for all the ports is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show spantree port point-to-point

RSTP Operational Status of Point-To-Point Table
===============================================
Port Oper
Admin
--------------------------------------------------1/1 enabled
auto
1/2 enabled
auto
1/3 enabled
auto
1/4 enabled
auto
1/5 enabled
auto
1/6 enabled
auto
1/7 enabled
auto
1/8 enabled
auto
3/2 enabled
auto
3/3 enabled
auto
3/4 enabled
auto
3/5 enabled
auto
3/6 enabled
auto
3/7 enabled
auto
3/8 enabled
auto
8/1 enabled
auto
9/1 enabled
auto
12/1 enabled
auto
*Switch@1#
8-18
Route Control
Output items

Oper: Point-to-point status
enabled: Point-to-point enabled
disabled: Point-to-point disabled
Admin: Point-to-point setting information
enabled: Point-to-point setting enabled
disabled: Point-to-point setting disabled
auto: Automatic point-to-point setting
Related
command
8-19
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu

Setting of BPDU transparency enable/disable per VLAN
Sets whether to enable or disable BPDU transparency per VLAN.
Input formats
- Specifying all VLANs

set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu P1 (all) P3
- Specifying individual VLAN
set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu P1 (vid) P2 P3
Parameters
P1: Individual specification { vid } or all specification { all }

vid: Individual VLAN specification
all: All VLAN specification
When vid is specified in P1
P3: Flooding setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables flooding
disable: Disables flooding
Default value
P3: disable
Usage conditions
To enable the BPDU transparency function, enable the spanning tree function. If the
BPDU transparency function is enabled when the spanning tree function is enabled, the
BPDUs to be made transparent are excluded from the spanning tree function.
Notes
The frames to which this function is to be applied are frames that comply with
IEEE802.1D and have the destination MAC address 01:80:C2:00:00:00.
Tagged BPDU reception does not comply with IEEE802.1D but the appropriate switch
is supported.
Input example
*Switch@1# set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu vid 100-105 enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show l2p-transparent stp-bpdu
Display of BPDU transparency function setting in

specified VLAN
8-20
Route Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of BPDU transparency function setting in specified VLAN
Shows all the VLAN IDs for which the BPDU transparency function was set.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show l2p-transparent stp-bpdu

L2P BPDU Transparent Configuration
==================================
BPDU Transparent VID : 100-105
*Switch@1#
Output item
BPDU Transparent VID: All VLAN IDs set as the BPDU transparency function
Related
command
Setting of BPDU transparency enable/disable per

VLAN
8-21
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set l2p-transparent reserved-mac

Setting of MAC address transparency function
Sets the MAC address transparency function.
Input formats
- Disabling MAC address transparency

set l2p-transparent reserved-mac P1 P2 P3 (disable)
- Enabling MAC address transparency
set l2p-transparent reserved-mac P1 P2 P3 (enable) [P4 P5] [P6 P7]
Parameters
P1: Port (line) type { atm | fe | gbe }

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
P3: MAC transparent mode { enable | disable }
enable: Enables MAC transparent mode
disable: Disables MAC transparent mode
When enable is selected in P3
P4: BPDU discard mode specification { bpdu }
P5: BPDU discard mode { admit | block }
admit: Transparency specification
block: Discard specification
P6: LACP discard mode specification { lacp }
P7: LACP discard mode { admit | block }
Default value
P3: disable
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# set l2p-transparent reserved-mac fe 2/1 enable bpdu block lacp

block
*Switch@1# set l2p-transparent reserved-mac gbe 8/1 enable lacp block
*Switch@1# set l2p-transparent reserved-mac atm 3/1 enable bpdu block
Output item
Related
command
show l2p-transparent reserved-mac
8-22
Display of MAC address transparency function
Route Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of MAC address transparency function
Shows the MAC address transparency function.
Input format
show l2p-transparent reserved-mac [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, the MAC address transparency functions set in all the ports are
shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show l2p-transparent reserved-mac 2/1-8

L2P Reserved-MAC Transparent Configuration Table
================================================
Port Transparent BPDU LACP
----------------------------------------------2/1 enabled
block block
2/2 enabled
admit block
2/3 enabled
admit admit
2/4 disabled
----2/5 disabled
----2/6 disabled
----2/7 disabled
----2/8 disabled
----*Switch@1#
Output items

Transparent: MAC transparent mode
enabled: MAC transparent mode enabled
disabled: MAC transparent mode disabled
BPDU: BPDU discard mode
admit: Transparency specified
block: Discard specified
LACP: LACP discard mode
Related
command
8-23
Setting of MAC address transparency function
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set aggregation group

Setting of link aggregation group
Sets a link aggregation group.
Input format
set aggregation group P1 P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] P6 [P7]
Parameters
P1: Group index (1 to 32)

P3: Number of valid ports (1 to 8)
* Specify the number of ports to be made valid in the group.
* When P3 is omitted, all the grouped ports are made valid.
P4: Standby filtering { standby-block | standby-admit }
standby-block: Discard receiving frames in the standby port
standby-admit: Admit receiving frames in the standby port
* Set either discarding (standby-block) or admitting (standby-admit) receiving frames
except LACP in the standby port.
* You can specify standby-admit only when local is selected in P5.
* When P4 is omitted, standby-block is assumed.
P5: Aggregation mode { local | dot3ad | passive }
local: Simple aggregation mode
dot3ad: LACP link aggregation mode
passive: Passive mode
* When P5 is omitted, local is assumed.
P6: Distribution setting { both-mac | src-mac | dst-mac }
both-mac: XOR values of source MAC address and destination MAC address
src-mac: Source MAC address
dst-mac: Destination MAC address
P7: Group name (1 to 32 characters)
* When P7 is omitted, no group name is assumed.
Default values
P3: 8,
P4: standby-block,
P5: local
Usage condition
None
Note
When configuring link aggregation, specify two or more ports (lines).

If no parameter is specified when the setting is overwritten, the default values are set.
Input example
*Switch@1# set aggregation group 32 1/1,1/2,1/3 2 standby-admit local

both-mac Index32
*Switch@1#
Output item
8-24
Route Control
Related
command
show aggregation group
Display of link aggregation setting status
8-25
Route Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of link aggregation setting status
Shows the link aggregation setting status.
Input format
show aggregation group [P1]
Parameter
P1: Group identifier { group-index group-name }

group-index: 1 to 32
group-name: 1 to 32 characters
* When P1 is omitted, all the set groups are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show aggregation group 32

Switch Aggregate Table
======================
Aggregated Ports/
Active/ Mode
Distribute/
Index Name
Filter
Time(msec)
----------------------------------------------------------------------32 1/1-3
2
local
both-mac
index32
standby-admit
10000
Switch Aggregate Port Information
=================================
Partner Port
Port Status Status Priority
-------------------------------1/1 active NO-LACP
128
1/2 active NO-LACP
128
1/3 standby NO-LACP
128
*Switch@1#
8-26
Route Control
Output items
Index: Group index

Aggregated Ports: Port (line) number set as link aggregation
Name: Group name
Active-numbers: Number of active ports
Standby-filter: Standby filtering
standby-block: Discards receiving frames except LACP
standby-admit: Admits receiving frames except LACP
Mode: Aggregation mode
local: Simple aggregation
dot3ad: LACP link aggregation mode
passive: Passive mode
Time(msec): Link aggregation protection time setting
Distribute Type: Distribution type setting
both-mac: XOR values of source MAC address and destination MAC address
src-mac: Source MAC address
dst-mac: Destination MAC address
Status: block/down/active/standby status per port
block: Port blocked
down: Port unblocked and port physical link down
active: Active port
standby: Standby port
Partner Status: Partner status
LACP: LACP received
NO-LACP: LACP not received
Port Priority: Port priority
Related
command
8-27
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear aggregation group

Clearing of link aggregation group
Clears a link aggregation group.
Input format
clear aggregation group P1
Parameter
P1: Group identifier { group-index

Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
Clearing a group by specifying its group name requires that the group name be
registered in the set link aggregation in advance.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear aggregation group 1

*Switch@1#
group-name }
Output item
Related
command
8-28
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set aggregation system priority

Setting of system priority
Sets a link aggregation system priority.
Input format
set aggregation system priority P1
Parameter
P1: System priority (0 to 65535)
Default value
P1: 32768
Usage condition
If a link aggregation group is already set in the device, you are not allowed to set the
system priority.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set aggregation system priority 65535

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show aggregation system priority
8-29
Display of system priority
Route Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of system priority
Shows the link aggregation system priority.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show aggregation system priority

LAG System Priority
===================
System Priority: 65535
*Switch@1#
Output item
LAG System Priority: Link aggregation system priority value
Related
command
Setting of system priority
8-30
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set aggregation port priority

Setting of port priority
Sets a link aggregation port priority.
Input format
set aggregation port priority P1 P2
Parameters

P2: Priority (0 to 255)
Default value
P2: 128
Usage condition
Setting for a port to which the link is down in the link aggregation group cannot be
allowed.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set aggregation port priority 1/1 255

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show aggregation port priority
Display of port priority
8-31
Route Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of port priority
Shows a link aggregation port priority.
Input format
show aggregation port priority [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, the priorities of all the installed ports are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
If P1 is omitted, the priorities of all the installed ports (lines) are shown.
No link aggregation port priority is shown for GbE-MUX and ATM line module ports.
Input example
*Switch@1# show aggregation port priority 1/1

LAG Port Information
====================
Port Index Priority
------------------1/1
255
*Switch@1#
Output items

Index: Group index
Priority: Port priority value
Related
command
8-32
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set aggregation protection-time

Setting of link aggregation protection time
Sets link aggregation protection time.
Input format
set aggregation protection-time P1 P2
Parameters
P1: Group identifier { group-index | group-name }

P2: Link aggregation protection time (0 to 10000 ms)
* The setting granularity is 100 ms.
error.
Default value
P2: 0
Usage condition
None
Note
The link aggregation protection time function is effective for the link aggregation group
that operates in simple aggregation and for which standby-admit is set.
Input example
*Switch@1# set aggregation protection-time 32 10000

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show aggregation protection-time
8-33
Display of link aggregation protection time
Route Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of link aggregation protection time
Shows link aggregation protection time.
Input format
show aggregation protection-time [P1]
Parameter
P1: Group identifier { group-index | group-name }

* When P1 is omitted, link aggregation protection times for group indexes 1 to 32 are
shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
Switch@1# show aggregation protection-time 32

LAG Protection Time Information
===============================
Index Name
Time(msec)
----------------------------------------------------------------------32 index32
10000
Switch@1#
Output items
Index: Group index

Name: Group name
Time(msec): Link aggregation protection time (msec)
Related
command
Setting of link aggregation protection time
8-34
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set igmp
Setting of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable
Sets whether to enable or disable the IGMP Snooping function.
Input formats
- Disabling IGMP Snooping function

set igmp P1 (enable) [P2]
- Enabling IGMP Snooping function
set igmp P1 (disable)
Parameters
P1: IGMP Snooping function setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables IGMP Snooping function
disable: Disables IGMP Snooping function
When enable is selected in P1
P2: IPv4/IPv6 specification { ipv4 | ipv6 }
ipv4: IPv4
ipv6: IPv6
* When P2 is omitted, ipv4 is assumed.
Default value
P1: disable
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set igmp enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show igmp status
Display of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable information
8-35
Route Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show igmp status

Shows IGMP Snooping function enable/disable information.
Input format
show igmp status
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show igmp status

IGMP Snooping Status
====================
igmp: ipv4 enabled
*Switch@1#
Output items
Igmp: IGMP Snooping function mode setting

ipv4 enabled: IGMP Snooping function enabled (IPv4)
ipv6 enabled: IGMP Snooping function enabled (IPv6)
disabled: IGMP Snooping function disabled
Related
command
set igmp
8-36
Route Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show igmp mac

Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified MAC
Shows the IGMP Snooping entry for the specified MAC.
Input format
show igmp mac [P1]
Parameter
P1: MAC address

* When P1 is omitted, IGMP Snooping entry for all the MAC addresses is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show igmp mac

IGMP Snooping Multicast MAC Table
=================================
IGMP Group Address : 01:00:5e:0a:0b:0c
IGMP Group Ports
: 1/6
VLAN ID
: 1
Total Number of Ports: 1
*Switch@1#
Output items
IGMP Group Address: IGMP Snooping MAC address

IGMP Group Ports: Port (line) number registered as the multicast entry
VLAN ID: VLAN ID
Total Number of Ports: Number of ports (lines) allocated to the same group
Related
command
None
8-37
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear igmp mac

Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified group address
Clears the IGMP Snooping entry for the specified group address.
Input format
clear igmp mac P1 [P2]
Parameters
P1: Group address

* P2 is omitted, IGMP Snooping entries of all the VLANs are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear igmp mac 01:00:5e:01:01:01 10

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set igmp
show igmp status
clear igmp vid

Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified VLAN
8-38
Route Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show igmp vid

Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified VLAN
Shows the IGMP Snooping entry for the specified VLAN.
Input format
show igmp vid [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, IGMP Snooping entries of all the VLANs are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show igmp vid

=================================
VLAN ID
: 1
IGMP Group Ports
: 1/6
Total Number of Ports: 1
*Switch@1#
Output items
VLAN ID: VLAN ID

Related
command
None
8-39
Route Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show igmp port

Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified port number
Shows the IGMP Snooping entry for the specified port number.
Input format
show igmp port [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is o omitted, all the IGMP Snooping entries are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show igmp port

=================================
IGMP Group Ports
: 1/6
VLAN ID
: 1
Total Number of Ports : 1
*Switch@1#
Output items
VLAN ID: VLAN ID
Related
command
None
8-40
Route Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear igmp vid

Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified VLAN
Clears the IGMP Snooping entry for the specified VLAN.
Input format
clear igmp vid [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, IGMP Snooping entries of all the VLANs are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear igmp vid 10

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set igmp
show igmp status
clear igmp mac

Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified group address
8-41
Route Control
Blank page
8-42
Filters
9 Filters
9-1
Filters
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set isolate port

Setting/clearing of port isolate
Sets and clears port isolate.
Input format
set isolate port P1 P2 P3
Parameters
P1: Receiving port (line) number or receiving line module number

Receiving port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)
Receiving line module number: 1 to 12 (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Destination port (line) number or destination line module number
Destination port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)
Destination line module number: 1 to 12 (Multiple values can be specified.)
P3: Port isolate setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables port isolate
disable: Disables port isolate
Default values
All the destination port (line) numbers are disabled that correspond to all the receiving
port (line) numbers.
Usage conditions
You cannot simultaneously set a receiving port (line) number and a receiving line
module number in P1.
You cannot simultaneously set a destination port (line) number and a destination line
module number in P2.
If the line module type is ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, TDMP155, or GbE-MUX, only the
line module number can be specified.
If the line module type is other than the above, only the port (line) number can be
specified.
Notes
Specifying enable in P3 disables transfer of the inflow frame from the specified receiving
port (line) to the specified destination port (line).
If enable is specified, the configuration that is already set is not affected because the
destination port (line) number or destination line module number specified in P2 is
added to the receiving port (line) number or receiving line module number specified in
P1.
If disable is specified, the other configurations that are already set are not affected
because only the destination port (line) number or destination line module number in P2
corresponding to the receiving port (line) number or receiving line module number
specified in P1 is disabled.
Input example
*Switch@1# set isolate port 1/1-8/1 1/1-8/1 enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show isolate port
Display of port isolate setting status
9-2
Filters
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show isolate port

Display of port isolate setting state
Shows the port isolate setting state.
Input format
show isolate port [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, the port isolate setting states of all the ports are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show isolate port

Port-Isolate Configuration
==========================
State of Port-Isolate of Port: 1/1
Transfer-Blocking Port
: 1/2-8/1
----------------------------------------------------------------------State of Port-Isolate of Port: 2/1
: 1/1-1/8,2/2-8/1
:
:
*Switch@1#
Output items
State of Port-Isolate of Port: Receiving port

Transfer-Blocking Port: Destination port whose port isolate setting in the receiving port is
enabled
Related
command
set isolate port
Setting/clearing of port isolate
9-3
Filters
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set filter profile

Creating of filtering profile
Creates a filtering profile.
Input formats
- Setting other
set filter profile P1 P2 (other) P3
- Selecting dest-mac/src-mac in the filter setting
set filter profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 P4 (dest-mac | src-mac) P5 P6
- Selecting ether-type in the filter setting
set filter profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 P4 (ether-type) P5
- Selecting proto-type in the filter setting
set filter profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 P4 (proto-type) P5
- Selecting dest-ip/src-ip in the filter setting
set filter profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 P4 (dest-ip | src-ip) P5 P6
Parameters

P2: Index number or others { other }
Index number: 1 to 31
other: Others
* When P2 is omitted, a free and smaller number index is used.
(However, if there is an index number that is already registered, that number is
used.)
P3: Filtering mode { admit | block }
P4: Filter setting { dest-mac | src-mac | ether-type | proto-type | dest-ip | src-ip }
dest-mac: Destination MAC Address
src-mac: Source MAC Address
ether-type: Ether-Type
proto-type: IPv4 Protocol Type
dest-ip: IPv4 Destination IP Address
src-ip: IPv4 Source IP Address
When dest-mac or src-mac is selected in P4
P5: MAC address
P6: MAC address mask
When ether-type is selected in P4
P5: Ethernet type (0x600 to 0xffff)
When proto-type is selected in P4
P6: Protocol type { tcp | udp | ospf | icmp } or user specification
tcp: TCP
udp: UDP
ospf: OSPF
icmp: ICMP
User specification: 0 to 255
9-4
Filters
When dest-ip or src-ip is selected in P4
P5: IP address
P6: Net mask
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
You can set overwrite for a registered index but cannot reregister the index.
Input examples
*Switch@1# set filter profile 1 1 admit dest-mac 10:20:30:40:50:60

ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:00
*Switch@1# set filter profile 1 10 admit ether-type 0x9100
*Switch@1# set filter profile 2 5 block proto-type tcp
*Switch@1# set filter profile 5 admit proto-type 128
*Switch@1# set filter profile 10 1 block dest-ip 10.20.30.40 255.255.255.0
*Switch@1# set filter profile 20 other block
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show filter profile

clear filter profile
set filter in-port
show filter in-port
clear filter in-port
set filter out-port
show filter out-port
clear filter out-port
Display of filtering profile

Clearing of filtering profile
Setting of input filtering
Display of input filtering
Clearing of input filtering
Setting of output filtering
Display of output filtering
Clearing of output filtering
9-5
Filters
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show filter profile

Shows a filtering profile.
Input format
show filter profile [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, information for all the profiles registered in the device is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show filter profile

Filter Profile Table
====================
Profile No. : 1
=================
Index Mode Field Type Field Type Information Mask Information
----------------------------------------------------------------------1 admit dest-mac
01:02:03:04:05:06
ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:00
10 block ether-type 0x9000
--15 block proto-type tcp
--20 block dest-ip
110.120.130.140
255.255.255.0
Other admit ------Profile No. : 5
=================
Index Mode Field Type Field Type Information Mask Information
----------------------------------------------------------------------1 admit dest-mac
10:20:30:40:50:60
ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:00
5 block proto-type udp
--6 block proto-type 250
--10 block dest-ip
10.20.30.40
255.255.255.0
Other admit ------*Switch@1#
9-6
Filters
Output items
Profile No: Profile number

Index: Profile index
Mode: Mode specification
Field Type: Filter type
dest-mac: Destination MAC Address specified
ether-type: Ether-Type specified
proto-type: IPv4 Protocol Type specified
dest-ip: IPv4 Destination IP Address specified
Field Type Information: Filter contents
MAC address: The MAC address is shown when Field Type is dest-mac.
Ethernet type: The Ethernet type is shown when Field Type is ether-type.
Protocol type: The protocol type is shown when Field Type is proto-type.
IP address: The IP address is shown when Field Type is dest-ip.
Mask Information: Mask information
MAC address mask: The MAC mask is shown when Field Type is dest-mac.
Subnet mask: The subnet mask is shown when Field Type is dest-ip.
Related
commands
set filter profile

set filter in-port
show filter in-port
set filter out-port

9-7
Filters
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clears a filtering profile.
Input format
clear filter profile [P1 [P2]]
Parameters

P2: Index number (1 to 31)
* When only P2 is omitted, all the settings of the specified profile are cleared.
* When all the parameters are omitted, all the registered filtering profiles are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
If command mode is safety mode, you cannot clear the profiles that are already mapped.
Notes
If P1 and P2 are omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.
If the index number specified in P2 is not registered, an error occurs.
No error occurs even if the profile number specified in P1 does not exist.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear filter profile 1 10

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set filter profile

show filter profile
set filter in-port
show filter in-port
set filter out-port

9-8
Filters
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set filter in-port

Sets input filtering.
Input format
set filter in-port P1 P2 P3 P4
Parameters

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
* If no profile is registered, all data is made transparent.
Default value
None
Usage condition
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# set filter in-port fe 1/1 100 10

*Switch@1# set filter in-port gbe 6/1 VLAN100 128
*Switch@1# set filter in-port atm 3/1 200 20
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set filter profile

show filter profile
show filter in-port
set filter out-port

9-9
Filters
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show filter in-port

Shows input filtering.
Input format
show filter in-port [P1]
Parameters

* When a port (line) number is specified, input filtering is shown per port.
* When a VLAN ID is specified, input filtering is shown per VLAN.
* When all the parameters are omitted, the input filtering profile lists of all the VLANs set
in all the ports are shown.
* When all the parameters are omitted, input filtering is shown per port.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show filter in-port 1/1-3,1/5

Input Filter Table
==================
Port VID Profile
---------------------------------1/1
1
1
1/1
10
10
1/1 100
1
1/3 100
5
1/3 200
20
1/3 1000
100
1/5 100
20
*Switch@1#
Output items

VID: VLAN ID
9-10
Filters
Related
commands
set filter profile

show filter profile
set filter in-port
set filter out-port

9-11
Filters
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clears input filtering.
Input format
clear filter in-port P1 P2 [P3]
Parameters

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094
* When P3 is omitted, the input filtering settings of all the VLANs of the port specified
in P2 are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear filter

Would you like to clear
*Switch@1#
in-port fe 1/1 10
in-port gbe 6/1 VLAN100
in-port gbe 6/1
the configuration? :(Y/N): y
in-port atm 3/1 2
Output item
Related
commands
set filter profile

show filter profile
set filter in-port
show filter in-port
set filter out-port

9-12
Filters
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set filter out-port

Set output filtering.
Input format
set filter out-port P1 P2 P3 P4
Parameters

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
* If no profile is registered, all data is made transparent.
Default value
None
Usage condition
If command mode is safety mode, you cannot specify unregistered profiles.
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# set filter out-port fe 1/1 100 10

*Switch@1# set filter out-port gbe 6/1 VLAN100 128
*Switch@1# set filter out-port atm 3/1 200 2
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set filter profile

show filter profile
set filter in-port
show filter in-port

Clearing of input filtering.
9-13
Filters
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows output filtering.
Input format
show filter out-port [P1]
Parameters

* When a port (line) number is specified, output filtering is shown per port.
* When a VLAN ID is specified, output filtering is shown per VLAN.
* When all the parameters are omitted, the output filtering profile lists of all the VLANs
set in all the ports are shown.
* When all the parameters are omitted, output filtering is shown per port.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show filter out-port 1/1-7

Output Filter Table
===================
Port VID Profile
----------------------------------1/1
1
1
1/1
10
10
1/1 100
1
1/2
15
30
1/2
30
30
1/3 100
5
1/3 200
20
1/3 1000
100
1/7 200
1
*Switch@1#
Output items

VID: VLAN ID
9-14
Filters
Related
commands
set filter profile

show filter profile
set filter in-port
show filter in-port
set filter out-port

9-15
Filters
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clears output filtering.
Input format
clear filter out-port P1 P2 [P3]
Parameters

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094
* When P3 is omitted, the output filtering settings of all the VLANs of the port specified
in P2 are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
Input examples

Would you like to clear
*Switch@1#
out-port fe 1/1 20
out-port gbe 6/1 VLAN100
out-port gbe 6/1
the configuration? :(Y/N): y
out-port atm 3/1 200
Output item
Related
commands
set filter profile

show filter profile
set filter in-port
show filter in-port
set filter out-port

9-16
Filters
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set fdb limiter

Setting of MAC address learning limiting count function
Sets the MAC address learning limiting count function.
Input format
set fdb limiter P1 P2 P3 P4
Parameters

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
P4: MAC address learning limiting count (1 to 8192)
* If the MAC address learning limiting count is 1 to 16, the setting granularity is 1. If
the MAC address learning limiting count is 16 to 8192, the setting granularity is 16.
error.
* You can set up to 8192 counts per card.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
You can register up to 8192 counts for MAC address learning limit per line module.
If a Static MAC address is already registered, you cannot change the MAC address
learning limiting count.
Input examples
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
fdb
fdb
fdb
fdb
limiter
limiter
limiter
limiter
fe 1/1 100 11
gbe 3/1 VLAN 200 7
gbe 5/1 VLAN 200 32
atm 7/1 VLAN 300 64
Output item
Related
commands
show fdb limiter

clear fdb limiter
set fdb limiter static
clear fdb limiter static
Display of MAC address learning count limiting function

Clearing of MAC address learning count limiting function
Setting of static MAC address of MAC address learning
limiting count function
Clearing of static MAC address of MAC address learning
limiting count function
9-17
Filters
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show fdb limiter

Shows a MAC address learning count limiting function.
Input format
show fdb limiter [P1]
Parameters

* When a port (line) number is specified or P1 is omitted, the MAC address learning
count limiting functions are shown per port.
* When a VLAN ID is specified, the MAC address learning count limiting functions are
shown per VLAN.
* When all the parameters are omitted, the MAC address learning count limiting
functions set in all the VLANs of all the ports are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show fdb limiter

MAC Limiter Line Table
======================
Module
Registered-Block Available-Block
-------------------------------------------------------------------Line#1 :
----Line#2 :
----Line#3 :
----Line#4 :
32
480
Line#5 :
none
none
Line#6 :
16
496
Line#7 :
----Line#8 :
----Line#9 :
----Line#10 :
----Line#11 :
----Line#12 :
----MAC Limiter Port Table
======================
Port VID Registered-MAC Static-MAC
-------------------------------------------------------------4/1
1
512
1
6/1 100
256
1
9-18
Filters
MAC Limiter Port Static Address Table
=====================================
Port VID Static-MAC Address
-----------------------------------------------------------------4/1
1 00:00:00:00:00:01
6/1 100 00:00:00:00:00:02
*Switch@1#
Output items
(MAC Limiter Line Table)

Module: Line module (1 to 10)
Registered-Block: Number of MAC limiting blocks.
Available-Block: Number of available MAC limiting blocks
(MAC Limiter Port Table)
VID: VLAN ID
Registered-MAC: Number of MAC limiting blocks set per port number and VLAN ID
Static-MAC: Number of registered static MAC addresses of MAC address learning count
limiting functions
(MAC Limiter Port Static Address Table)
VID: VLAN ID
Static-MAC Address: Setting of static MAC address of MAC address learning count
limiting function
Related
commands
set fdb limiter

clear fdb limiter
Setting of MAC address learning count limiting function

count limiting function
9-19
Filters
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear fdb limiter

Clears a MAC address learning count limiting function.
Input format
clear fdb limiter P1 P2 [P3]
Parameters

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
* When P3 is omitted, the MAC address learning count limiting functions of all the
VLANs of the port specified in P2 are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes

The static MAC addresses of MAC address learning count limiting functions are also
cleared.
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear fdb limiter fe 1/1 100

*Switch@1# clear fdb limiter gbe 3/1 200
*Switch@1# clear fdb limiter atm 5/1 300
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set fdb limiter

show fdb limiter

9-20
Filters
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Setting of static MAC address of MAC address learning count limiting function
Sets the static MAC address of a MAC address learning count limiting function.
Input format
set fdb limiter static P1 P2 P3 P4
Parameters

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
P4: Source MAC address
00:00:00:00:00:00 to ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
Default value
None
Usage condition
If no MAC address learning count limiting function is set, you cannot set this function.
Note
You can register up to 16 static MAC addresses of MAC address learning count limiting
functions per VLAN.
Input examples
*Switch@1# set fdb limiter static fe 1/1 100 00:00:00:00:00:01

*Switch@1# set fdb limiter static gbe 6/1 100 00:00:00:00:00:02
*Switch@1# set fdb limiter static atm 5/1 200 00:00:00:00:00:03
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set fdb limiter

show fdb limiter
clear fdb limiter

9-21
Filters
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clearing of static MAC address of MAC address learning count limiting function
Clears the static MAC address of a MAC address learning count limiting function.
Input format
clear fdb limiter static P1 P2 [P3 [P4] ]
Parameters

fe: FE port
gbe: GbE port
* When P3 is omitted, the static MAC addresses registered in all the VLANs of the port
P4: Source MAC address
00:00:00:00:00:00 to ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
* When P4 is omitted, all static MAC addresses registered in the specified VLAN of
the port specified in P2 or P3 are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
If P3 or P4 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear fdb limiter static fe 1/1 100 00:00:00:00:00:01

*Switch@1# clear fdb limiter static gbe 1/1 200
*Switch@1# clear fdb limiter static gbe 10/1
*Switch@1# clear fdb limiter static atm 5/1 100 00:00:00:00:00:03
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set fdb limiter

show fdb limiter
clear fdb limiter

9-22
EtherOAM
10 EtherOAM
10-1
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ether-oam meg

Setting of MEG
Creates MEG.
Input format
set ether-oam meg P1 P2 P3 [P4]
Parameters
P1: MEG index (1 to 1536)

P2: MEG ID (1 to 13 characters or 32 to 32 digits (hexadecimal))
* Range that can be set for 32-digit specification
0x00000000000000000000000000000000 to 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
P3: MEG level (0 to 7)
P4: CC transmission period period { 3.33ms | 10ms | 100ms | 1s | 10s | 60s }
period 3.33ms: 3.33 milliseconds
period 10ms: 10 milliseconds
period 100ms: 100 milliseconds
period 1s: 1 second
period 10s: 10 seconds
period 60s: 60 seconds
* When P4 is omitted, 1s is assumed.
Default value
P4: 1s
Usage
conditions
You cannot register the same MEG ID to two or more MEG indexes. If the specified
MEG ID has already been registered, an error occurs.
If the MEP data of the specified MEG index exists, you cannot execute update.
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# set ether-oam meg 10 NEC0000000001 1 period 10s

*Switch@1# set ether-oam meg 10 0x0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef 1 period
10s
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show ether-oam meg

clear ether-oam meg
set ether-oam mep
show ether-oam mep
Display of MEG setting information

Clearing of MEG
Setting of MEP
Display of MEP setting information
10-2
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show ether-oam meg

Shows the setting information of MEG.
Input format
show ether-oam meg [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, all MEG setting information is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# show ether-oam meg 10

Ether OAM MEG Information
=========================
MEG Index MEG ID
MEG Level ETH-CC Period
----------------------------------------------------------------------10 NEC0000000002
3 10sec
MEP Index
----------------------------------------------------------------------5,10,25,30
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show ether-oam meg
=========================
Total number of entries:3
MEG Index MEG ID
MEG Level ETH-CC Period
----------------------------------------------------------------------1 NEC0000000001
2 1sec
10 NEC0000000002
3 10sec
100 0x0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef
4 3.33msec
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show ether-oam meg
=========================
No entry in the table.
*Switch@1#
10-3
EtherOAM
Output items
Total number of entries: Number of registered MEG

MEGIndex: MEG index
MEG ID: MEG ID
MEG Level: MEG level
ETH-CC Period: Transmission period
MEP Index: Value of the MEP index of the MEP which includes the MEG index specified
with the command (Only when P1 is specified)
Related
commands
set ether-oam meg

clear ether-oam meg
Setting of MEG
Clearing of MEG
10-4
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear ether-oam meg

Clearing of MEG
Clears MEG.
Input format
clear ether-oam meg P1
Parameter
Default value
None
Usage
conditions
If the MEP data of the specified MEG index exists, you cannot clear it.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear ether-oam meg 10

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ether-oam meg

show ether-oam meg
set ether-oam mep
show ether-oam mep
Setting of MEG
Setting of MEP
10-5
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ether-oam mep

Setting of MEP
Creates MEP.
Input format
set ether-oam mep P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6
Parameters
P1: MEP index (1 to 1536)

P3: VLAN ID or Untag specification { untag }
untag: Untag specification
P5: Transmission direction { inside | outside }
inside: Transmission directed to the inside of the switch
outside: Transmission directed to the outside of the switch
P6: MEP ID (1 to 8191)
Default value
None
10-6
EtherOAM
Usage
conditions
If the line module type of the specified port (line) number is ATMP155 or TDMP155, you
must disable APS.
If the MEG data of the specified MEG index does not exist, or if the MEP data of the
specified MEP index has already been registered, you cannot execute registration.
If the maximum number of the MEP data has already been registered for the specified
port (line) number, you cannot execute registration.
If the MEG data transmission period of the specified MEG index is 3.33ms, 10ms, or
100ms, your can register MEP only when the line module type is GbE-PV2.
If you specify untag for the tagbase VLAN port, you must specify outside for the
transmission direction.
If the line module type of the specified port (line) number is ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or
TDMP155, you must specify inside for the transmission direction.
If redundant configuration by EtherPS or EtherRing is set for the specified port (line)
number, the following cannot be set.
- inside MEP setting
- Multiple MEP settings
- Untag MEP setting (* In redundant configuration by EtherRing, you can register MEP
by specifying Untag for VLAN ID.)
- MEP setting on a VLAN other than the one when EtherPS or EtherRing control
VLAN is set
- MEP setting with MEG LEVEL other than the one when EtherPS control VLAN is set
If the line module type of the specified port (line) number is TDMP or TDMP155, the line
mode must have been set.
You can register the maximum number of MEPs per line module (the maximum number
of MEPs: GbE-PV2 [EtherPS/EtherRing disabled] [64], GbE-PV2 [EtherPS/EtherRing
enabled] [1], ATMP [64], TDMP [64], ATMP155 [128], TDMP155 [128]). If the line
module type is ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155, however, you can register only
one MEP per VLAN.
Notes
The specified VLAN ID must have been set for the specified port (line).
If the VLAN tag swapping is set for the specified port (line) number, execute this setting
specifying the swapping destination VLAN ID.
If the VLAN tag swapping is set for the specified port (line) number and the swapping
destination VLAN ID is 0, MEP cannot be set for the VLAN ID 0.
When you register MEP to the specified port (line) number using the same VLAN ID as
that for the control VLAN of EtherRing, set the MEG level of the MEP smaller than that
for the control VLAN of EtherRing.
Input example
*Switch@1# set ether-oam mep 20 1/1 333 10 inside 2000

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ether-oam meg

clear ether-oam meg
show ether-oam mep
clear ether-oam mep
set ether-oam peer-mep
set ether-oam lm
Setting of MEG
Clearing of MEG
Clearing of MEP
Setting of associated MEP ID
Setting of test target MEP
10-7
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show ether-oam mep

Shows the setting information of MEP.
Input formats
- Specifying port (line)

show ether-oam mep P1 (port) [P2]
- Specifying index
show ether-oam mep P1 (index) [P2]
Parameters
P1: Port (line) specification { port } or index specification { index }

port: Port (line) specification
index: Index specification
When port is specified in P1
P2: Port (line) number
* When P2 is omitted, setting information of all ports is shown.
When index is specified in P1
* When P2 is omitted, setting information of all indexes is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
To refer to MEP fault information (ETH-CC Fault Table) and associated MEP/RDI fault
information (Ether OAM Peer MEP Information), specify index in P1 and MEP index in
P2.
Input examples
*Switch@1# show ether-oam mep port

Ether OAM MEP Information
=========================
Port : 1/1 MEP Index : 10
=============================
VID
: 10
MEG Level
: 4
MEG Index
: 1
MEG ID
: 0x01020304050607080910111213141516
Position
: outside
MEP ID
: 300
CC Priority
: 7
Transmit
: enabled
Receive
: enabled
Kind
: multicast
DES MAC Address : 01:00:00:00:00:04
RDI
: enabled
Port : 2/1 MEP Index :
1
=============================
10-8
EtherOAM
VID
: 20
MEG Level
: 3
MEG Index
: 2
MEG ID
: NEC0000000002
Position
: outside
MEP ID
: 180
CC Priority
: 7
Transmit
: disabled
Receive
: enabled
Kind
: --DES MAC Address : --RDI
: enabled
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show ether-oam mep port 1/1

=========================
=============================
VID
: 10
MEG Level
: 4
MEG Index
: 1
MEG ID
: 0x01020304050607080910111213141516
Position
: outside
MEP ID
: 300
CC Priority
: 7
Transmit
: enabled
Receive
: enabled
Kind
: multicast
DES MAC Address : 01:00:00:00:00:04
RDI
: enabled
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show ether-oam mep index

=========================
MEP Index :
1 Port : 2/1
=============================
VID
: 20
MEG Level
: 3
MEG Index
: 2
MEG ID
: NEC0000000002
Position
: outside
MEP ID
: 180
CC Priority
: 7
Transmit
: disabled
Receive
: enabled
Kind
: --DES MAC Address : --RDI
: enabled
MEP Index : 10 Port : 1/1
=============================
10-9
EtherOAM
VID
: 10
MEG Level
: 4
MEG Index
: 1
MEG ID
: 0x01020304050607080910111213141516
Position
: outside
MEP ID
: 300
CC Priority
: 7
Transmit
: enabled
Receive
: enabled
Kind
: multicast
DES MAC Address : 01:00:00:00:00:04
RDI
: enabled
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show ether-oam mep index 10

=========================
MEP Index : 10 Port : 1/1
=============================
VID
: 10
MEG Level
: 4
MEG Index
: 1
MEG ID
: 0x01020304050607080910111213141516
Position
: outside
MEP ID
: 300
CC Priority
: 7
Transmit
: enabled
Receive
: enabled
Kind
: multicast
DES MAC Address : 01:00:00:00:00:04
RDI
: enabled
ETH-CC Fault Table
==================
Status : mismerge,unexpected-mep,loc
Ether OAM Peer MEP Information
==============================
Peer MEP ID Condition RDI-Received
-----------------------------------10 normal
rdi
28 loc
no-rdi
123 normal
rdi
7001 other
no-rdi
*Switch@1#
10-10
EtherOAM
Output items

MEP Index: MEP index
VID: VLAN ID: In the case of untagMEP, untag is shown.
MEG Index: MEG index
MEG ID: MEG ID
MEP ID: MEP ID
Position: Frame transmission direction
CC Priority: CC frame priority
Transmit: Enabling/disabling setting of CC frame sending
Receive: Enabling/disabling setting of CC frame receiving
Kind: CC frame transmission type
DES MAC Address: CC frame destination address of
RDI: RDI transmission setting
Status: MEP fault information
Peer MEP ID: Associated MEP ID
Condition: Associated MEP fault information
normal: No LOC fault, when no VLAN is set
loc: LOC fault
disabled: Receiving check is stopped
RDI-Received: RDI fault information
no-rdi: No RDI fault
rdi: RDI fault
disabled: RDI operation disabled
Related
commands
set ether-oam meg

clear ether-oam meg
set ether-oam mep
clear ether-oam mep
clear ether-oam peer-mep
set ether-oam cc
set ether-oam rdi
Setting of MEG
Clearing of MEG
Setting of MEP
Clearing of MEP
Clearing of associated MEP ID
Setting of EtherOAM Continuity Check transmission
Setting of RDI operation
10-11
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear ether-oam mep

Clearing of MEP
Clears MEP.
Input format
clear ether-oam mep P1
Parameter
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
If the associated MEP ID has been registered for the specified MEP index, the setting of
the associated MEP ID is also cleared when the MEP index is cleared.
If the specified MEP index has been registered as a test target MEP, the setting of the
test target MEP is also cleared when the MEP index is cleared.
During ETH-CCM operation (either of sending or receiving is currently enabled), the
MEP of the specified MEP index cannot be cleared.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear ether-oam mep 20

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
clear ether-oam meg

set ether-oam mep
show ether-oam mep
set ether-oam lm
clear ether-oam lm
Clearing of MEG
Setting of MEP
Clearing of test target MEP
10-12
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ether-oam lm
Sets a test target MEP.
Input format
set ether-oam lm P1 [P2]
Parameters

P2: Test target frame priority specification or all priorities specification { all }
Specifying test target frame priority (0 to 7)
all: Specifying all priorities
* When P2 is omitted, all is assumed.
Default value
P2: all
Usage
conditions
If the MEP data of the specified MEP index has not been registered, you cannot execute
registration.
If the test target MEP has already been registered, you cannot execute registration.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set ether-oam lm 15 all

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ether-oam meg

clear ether-oam meg
set ether-oam mep
clear ether-oam mep
show ether-oam lm
clear ether-oam lm
Setting of MEG
Clearing of MEG
Setting of MEP
Clearing of MEP
Display of test target MEP
10-13
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show ether-oam lm
Display of test target MEP setting information
Shows the test target MEP setting information.
Input format
show ether-oam lm
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show ether-oam lm

Ether OAM Loss Measurement Information
======================================
MEP Index
: 15
Target Priority : all
Port
: 5/1
MAC Address
: 00:30:13:a1:0f:3c
VID
: 100
MEG ID
: A
MEP ID
: 15
MEG Level
: 1
*Switch@1#
Output items

Target Priority: Priority of measurement target frame
MAC Address: MAC address of test target port
VID: VLAN ID
For untagMEP, untag is displayed.
MEG ID: MEG ID
MEP ID: MEP ID
Related
commands
set ether-oam meg

clear ether-oam meg
set ether-oam mep
clear ether-oam mep
set ether-oam lm
clear ether-oam lm
Setting of MEG
Clearing of MEG
Setting of MEP
Clearing of MEP
10-14
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear ether-oam lm
Clears a test target MEP.
Input format
clear ether-oam lm
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear ether-oam lm

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ether-oam meg

clear ether-oam meg
set ether-oam mep
clear ether-oam mep
set ether-oam lm
show ether-oam lm
Setting of MEG
Clearing of MEG
Setting of MEP
Clearing of MEP
Display of test target MEP setting information
10-15
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets the associated MEP ID.
Input format
set ether-oam peer-mep P1 P2 [P3]
Parameters

P2: Associated MEP ID (1 to 8191) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P3: CCM receiving setting { receive-enable | receive-disable }
receive-enable: Enables CCM receiving
receive-disable: Disables CCM receiving
* When P3 is omitted, receive-enable is assumed.
Default value
P3: receive-enable
Usage
conditions
registration.
You can register the maximum number of associated MEPs per line module (the
maximum number of associated MEPs: GbE-PV2 [EtherPS/EtherRing disabled] [1024],
GbE-PV2 [EtherPS/EtherRing enabled] [1], ATMP [64], TDMP [64], ATMP155 [128],
TDMP155 [128]). If the line module type is ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155,
however, you can register only one associated MEP per MEP.
Note
To enable CCM receiving monitoring, you must set receive-enable for ETH-CC
transmission setting to allow receiving. If receive-enable is set for ETH-CC
transmission setting to allow receiving, you can clear the associated MEP faults by
changing the CCM reception setting from enable to disable. When a fault is being
occurred, a fault recovery trap reports it per MEP.
Input example
*Switch@1# set ether-oam peer-mep 10 3000,4000

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ether-oam meg

clear ether-oam meg
set ether-oam mep
show ether-oam mep
clear ether-oam mep
Setting of MEG
Clearing of MEG
Setting of MEP
Clearing of MEP
10-16
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clears the associated MEP ID.
Input format
clear ether-oam peer-mep P1 [P2]
Parameters

P2: Associated MEP ID (1 to 8191) (single specification)
* When P2 is omitted, all the associated MEP IDs are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
You can clear the associated MEP ID of the specified MEP index only in the following
conditions. Otherwise, you cannot clear it.
Conditions:
[1] If the receiving setting of the MEP is disabled, all the associated MEP IDs of the
MEP can be cleared.
[2] If the receiving setting of the MEP is enabled and that of an associated MEP is
disabled, only the associated MEP ID of the MEP can be cleared.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear ether-oam peer-mep 10 3000

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ether-oam meg

clear ether-oam meg
set ether-oam mep
show ether-oam mep
clear ether-oam mep
Setting of MEG
Clearing of MEG
Setting of MEP
Clearing of MEP
10-17
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ether-oam mip

Setting of MIP
Creates MIP.
Input format
set ether-oam mip P1 P2 P3 P4
Parameters
P1: MIP index (1 to 96)

P3: VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (Multiple values can be specified.)
Default value
None
Usage
conditions
If the MIP data of the specified MIP index has already been registered, you cannot
execute registration.
If the maximum number of the MIP data shown below has already been registered for
the specified port (line) number, you cannot execute registration.
Up to 8 MIPs can be registered per port. Up to 4094 VLANs can be specified for one
MIP.
Only the GbE-PV2 card can operate.
If the same VLAN ID as that for EtherRing control VLAN is specified in P3, you cannot
execute registration.
Notes
The specified VLAN ID must have been set for the specified port (line).
If the VLAN tag swapping is set for the specified port (line) number, execute this setting
specifying the swapping destination VLAN ID.
Input example
*Switch@1# set ether-oam mip 96 2/1 444 2

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ether-oam meg

clear ether-oam meg
show ether-oam mip
clear ether-oam mip
Setting of MEG
Clearing of MEG
Display of MIP setting information
Clearing of MIP
10-18
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show ether-oam mip

Shows the setting information of MIP.
Input formats
- Specifying port (line)

show ether-oam mip P1 (port) [P2]
- Specifying index
show ether-oam mip P1 (index) [P2]
Parameters
P1: Port (line) specification { port } or index specification { index }

port: Port (line) specification
index: Index specification
* When P2 is omitted, setting information of all ports is shown.
When index is specified in P1
* When P2 is omitted, setting information of all indexes is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show ether-oam mip port

Ether OAM MIP Information
=========================
Port MIP Index MEG Level VID
----------------------------------------------------------------------1/1
10
5 10-20
2/1
2
1 1
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show ether-oam mip index
Ether OAM MIP Information
=========================
MIP Index Port MEG Level VID
----------------------------------------------------------------------2
2/1
1 1
10
1/1
5 10-20
*Switch@1#
10-19
EtherOAM
Output items

Index: MEP index
VID: VLAN ID
Related
commands
set ether-oam meg

clear ether-oam meg
set ether-oam mip
clear ether-oam mip
Setting of MEG
Clearing of MEG
Setting of MIP
Clearing of MIP
10-20
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear ether-oam mip

Clearing of MIP
Clears MIP.
Input format
clear ether-oam mip P1 [P2]
Parameters

P2: VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification)
* When P2 is omitted, all the VLANs which correspond with the MIP index are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear ether-oam mip 96

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ether-oam meg

clear ether-oam meg
set ether-oam mip
show ether-oam mip
Setting of MEG
Clearing of MEG
Setting of MIP
10-21
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ether-oam frame

Setting of EtherOAM frame common information
Sets the common information of EtherOAM frame.
Input formats
- Specifying DA Multicast MAC address

set ether-oam frame P1
- Specifying protocol type
set ether-oam frame P2
- Specifying both conditions
set ether-oam frame P1 P2
Parameters
P1: DA Multicast MAC address (01:00:00:00:00:00 to 01:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff)

* When P1 is omitted, nothing is specified.
P2: Protocol type (0x0600 to 0xffff)
* When P2 is omitted, nothing is specified.
Default values
P1: 01:80:c2:00:00:30
P2: 0x8902
Usage condition
None
Notes
Execute this setting before performing ETH-CC, ETH-LB, ETH-LT, ETH-DM, and
ETH-LM tests.
The following MAC addresses cannot be set in P1.
01:00:5E:00:00:00 - 01:00:5E:7F:FF:FF
01:80:C2:00:00:00 - 01:80:C2:00:00:2F
01:19:A7:00:00:00 - 01:19:A7:00:00:FF
Since the MEG Level is automatically set for the last 4 bits of the MAC address specified
in P1, the last 4 bits specified with this command is not reflected.
For the automatic setting of the MEG Level, refer to Setting EtherOAM frame common
information of EtherOAM function in the Instruction Manual.
Input example
*Switch@1# set ether-oam frame 01 :02 :03 :04 :05 :06 0x0600
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show ether-oam frame
Display of EtherOAM frame common information
10-22
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of EtherOAM frame common information
Shows the common information of EtherOAM frame.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show ether-oam frame

Ether OAM Frame Multicast MAC Address
=====================================
Class1 : 01:80:c3:00:00:70
Class2 : 01:80:c3:00:00:78
Ether OAM Frame Protocol Type
=============================
Protocol Type : 0xfffe
*Switch@1#
Output items
Multicast MAC address(class1): Destination Multicast MAC address for Ether CC/LB
frame
Multicast MAC address(class2): Destination Multicast MAC address for Ether LT frame
Protocol type: Protocol type
Related
command
set ether-oam frame
Setting of Ether-OAM frame common information
10-23
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ether-oam reply-period

Setting of Reply frame returning period
Sets the returning period of Reply frame.
Input format
set ether-oam reply-period P1 P2
Parameters
P1: Reply frame type { loopback | linktrace }

loopback: ETH-LBR
linktrace: ETH-LTR
P2: Reply frame returning period { random | immediately }
random: Random
immediately: Immediate
Default values
P2: random (for loopback)

immediately (for linktrace)
Usage condition
None
Note
ETH-LBR can be applied only when the multicast ETH-LBM is received.
Input example
*Switch@1# set ether-oam reply-period loopback random

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show ether-oam reply-period
Display of Reply frame returning period
10-24
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of Reply frame returning period
Shows the returning period of Reply frame.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show ether-oam reply-period

Ether OAM Reply Period Information
==================================
Reply Frame Reply Period
------------------------ETH-LBR
immediately
ETH-LTR
random
*Switch@1#
Output items
Reply Frame: Reply frame type

Reply Period: Reply frame returning period
Related
command
Setting of Reply frame returning period
10-25
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ether-oam cc
Setting of EtherOAM Continuity Check transmission
Sets the transmission of EtherOAM Continuity Check.
Input formats
- Starting transmission
set ether-oam cc P1 P2 (transmit-enable) [P3] P4 [P5]
- Stopping transmission
set ether-oam cc P1 P2 (transmit-disable) P3
Parameters

P2: Transmission type { transmit-enable | transmit-disable }
transmit-enable: Starts ETH-CCM transmission
transmit-disable: Stops ETH-CCM transmission
When transmit-enable is specified in P2
P3: Destination MAC address
* When P3 is omitted, the multicast transmission is assumed.
P4: Receiving allowance { receive-enable | receive-disable }
receive-enable: Starts ETH-CCM receiving check
receive-disable: Stops ETH-CCM receiving check
P5: Priority: priority (0 to 7)
When transmit-disable is specified in P2
P3: Receiving allowance { receive-enable | receive-disable }
receive-enable: Starts ETH-CCM receiving check
receive-disable: Stops ETH-CCM receiving check
Default values
P2: transmit-disable
P4: receive-disable
P5: 7
Usage condition
this setting.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set ether-oam cc 20 transmit-enable 00 :03 :06 :09 :12 :15

receive-enable priority 4
*Switch@1#
Output item
10-26
EtherOAM
Related
commands
set ether-oam meg

clear ether-oam meg
set ether-oam mep
show ether-oam mep
clear ether-oam mep
Setting of MEG
Clearing of MEG
Setting of MEP
Clearing of MEP
10-27
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ether-oam rdi

Sets RDI transmission.
Input format
set ether-oam rdi P1 P2
Parameters

P2: RDI operation { enable | disable }
enable: Enables RDI operation
disable: Disables RDI operation
Default value
P2: disable
Usage condition
registration.
Note
To enable RDI transmission, you must enable ETH-CCM transmission starting.
Input example
*Switch@1# set ether-oam rdi 1 enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ether-oam meg

clear ether-oam meg
set ether-oam mep
show ether-oam mep
clear ether-oam mep
set ether-oam cc
Setting of MEG
Clearing of MEG
Setting of MEP
Clearing of MEP
Setting of Ether-OAM Continuity Check transmission
10-28
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show ether-oam fault last-change

Display of final fault information
Shows the LOC/LOC recovery/RDI/RDI recovery information detected last.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show ether-oam fault last-change

Ether OAM CCM DB Final Fault Information
========================================
Date : 01/01/2000 00:00:00
Fault : LOC DETECT MEP INDEX:1
*Switch@1#
Output items
Date: Date
Fault: Fault information
LOC DETECT: LOC detection
LOC RECOVER: LOC recovery
RDI DETECT: RDI detection
RDI RECOVER: RDI recovery
MEP INDEX: MEP index
Related
command
None
10-29
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show ether-oam fault reason

Display of CCM error cause
Shows the detailed information about CCM error cause of the port.
Input format
show ether-oam fault reason [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, detailed information of error causes for all the ports is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show ether-oam fault reason

Ether OAM CCM Fault Table Information
=====================================
1
=============================
Fault
: unexpected-level
MAC Address : 01:02:03:04:05:06
Value
: 4
Port : 2/1 MEP Index : --=============================
Fault
: --MAC Address : --Value
: --.
. (omission)
.
=============================
Fault
: unexpected-period
MAC Address : 03:03:03:03:03:03
Value
: 10sec
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show ether-oam fault reason 3/1
Ether OAM CCM Fault Table Information
=====================================
3
=============================
Fault
: mismerge
MAC Address : 01:01:01:01:01:01
Value
: [01 20 0d] ABCDEFGHIJKLM
10-30
EtherOAM
*Switch@1#
Output items

Fault: Fault cause
unexpected-level: Receive ETH-CCM frames with different MEG Level
mismerge: Receive ETH-CCM frames with different MEG ID
unexpected-mep: Receive ETH-CCM frames with associated MEP ID different from
the one specified with the set ether-oam peer-mep command
unexpected-period: Receive ETH-CCM frames with different Period
MAC Address: Source MAC address
Value: Fault detailed information
unexpected-level: MEG level
mismerge: MEG ID
[01 20 0d] is added at the beginning when MEG ID has 1 to 13 characters.
unexpected-mep: MEP ID
unexpected-period: Period value
3.33 msec, 10 msec, 100 msec, 1 sec, 10 sec, 60 sec, 10 min
Related
command
clear ether-oam fault reason
Clearing of CCM error cause
10-31
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear ether-oam fault reason

Clearing of CCM error cause
Clears the detailed information about CCM error cause of the port.
Input format
clear ether-oam fault reason [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, detailed information of error cause for all the ports is cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear ether-oam fault reason 1/1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
Display of CCM error cause
10-32
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
loopback ether-oam
Executing of EtherOAM Loop Back test
Executes ETH-LB and displays the execution result.
Input format
loopback ether-oam P1 [P2 [P3] [P4]] [P5] [P6]
Parameters

* When P2 is omitted, the multicast transmission is assumed.
P3: LBM transmission count count (1 to 127)
P4: Transmission period (sec) period (1 to 10) (sec)
P5: PDU size size (46 to 8982)
P6: Priority priority (0 to 7)
Default values
P3: 4
P4: 1
P5: 46
P6: 7
Usage
conditions
If the MEP data of the specified MEP index does not exist, you cannot execute this
command.
You cannot activate two or more of this command simultaneously. Also, you cannot
activate this command and any/all of the ETH-LT execution command, the ETH-DM
execution command, or/and the ETH-LM execution command simultaneously.
For a ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155 line module, a value exceeding 2026 cannot
be specified in P5.
Note
None
10-33
EtherOAM
Input example
*Switch@1# loopback ether-oam 1 00:30:13:41:77:70

Ether OAM Loopback Port Information
===================================
Port
: 1/1
MAC Address : 00:30:13:41:77:d0
VID
: 1
MEG ID
: NEC000001
MEP ID
: 1
MEG Level : 1
result 00:30:13:41:77:70 seq=1 bytes=46 time<5ms
*Switch@1# loopback ether-oam 1 00:30:13:41:77:70
Ether OAM Loopback Port Information
===========================================================
request = 4, test ok = 4, fail = 0 (0% failure)
delay minimum = 5msec, maximum = 5msec, average = 5msec
delay variation = 0msec
*Switch@1#
Output items
port: Port (line) number

MAC Address: Destination MAC address
VID: VLAN ID
MEG ID: MEG ID
MEP ID: MEP ID
Related
commands
set ether-oam meg

clear ether-oam meg
set ether-oam mep
clear ether-oam mep
Setting of MEG
Clearing of MEG
Setting of MEP
Clearing of MEP
10-34
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
linktrace ether-oam
Executing of EtherOAM Link Trace test
Executes ETH-LT and displays the execution result.
Input format
linktrace ether-oam P1 P2 [P3] [P4] [P5]
Parameters

P3: ETH-LTR monitoring time wait-time { 5s | 10s }
wait-time 5s: 5 seconds
wait-time 10s: 10 seconds
* When P3 is omitted, 5s is assumed.
P4: TTL ttl (1 to 255)
Default values
P3: 5s
P4: 255
P5: 7
Usage
conditions
command.
activate this command and any/all of the ETH-LB execution command, the ETH-DM
Note
None
10-35
EtherOAM
Input example
*Switch@1# linktrace ether-oam 1 00:30:13:b0:01:03

Ether OAM Link Trace Port Information
=====================================
Port
: 1/1
MAC Address : 00:30:13:b0:01:01
VID
: 3
MEG ID
: NEC000001
MEP ID
: 1
MEG Level
: 1
Ether OAM Link Trace Result Information for 00:30:13:b0:01:03
=============================================================
TTL MAC Address
Relay Action
-----------------------------------254 00:30:13:b0:01:03 RlyHit
Trace Complete
*Switch@1#
Output items
port: Port (line) number

MAC Address: Destination MAC address
VID: VLAN ID
MEG ID: MEG ID
MEP ID: MEP ID
TTL: Time To Live
MAC Address: Source MAC address of ETH-LT returning
Relay Action: Relay Action
Related
commands
set ether-oam meg

clear ether-oam meg
set ether-oam mep
clear ether-oam mep
Setting of MEG
Clearing of MEG
Setting of MEP
Clearing of MEP
10-36
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
dm ether-oam
Executing of EtherOAM Frame Delay Measurement test
Executes ETH-DM and displays the execution result.
Input format
dm ether-oam P1 P2 [P3] [P4] [P5]
Parameters

P3: Frame delay measurement count count (1 to 500)
P4: Transmission period of ETH-DMM (sec or msec)
Transmission period (sec): second-period (1 to 10) (sec)
Transmission period (msec): milli-period (100 to 1000) (msec)
* Setting granularity: 100 (msec)
error.
* When P4 is omitted, 1 (sec) is assumed.
Default values
P3: 4
P4: 1
P5: 7
Usage
conditions
command.
activate this command and any/all of the ETH-LB execution command, the ETH-LT
Note
None
10-37
EtherOAM
Input example
*Switch@1# dm ether-oam 1 00:30:13:41:37:a3 count 10 second-period 1

Ether OAM Delay Measurement Port Information
============================================
Port
: 1/1
MAC Address : 00:30:13:41:37:fd
VID
: 1
MEG ID
: NEC000001
MEP ID
: 1
MEG Level
: 1
During an ETH-DM examination........
Ether OAM Delay Measurement Result Information for 00:30:13:41:37:a3
====================================================================
Request DMM
: 10
Receive DMR
: 10
Delay Minimum(msec) : 0.11
Delay Maximum(msec) : 0.11
Delay Average(msec) : 0.11
Delay Variation(msec) : 0.00
Error Count
: 0
Result
: complete
*Switch@1#
Output items

VID: VLAN ID
MEG ID: MEG ID
MEP ID: MEP ID
Request DMM: Sending DMM count
Receive DMR: Receiving DMR count
Delay Minimum(msec): Delay time (Minimum)
Delay Maximum(msec): Delay time (Maximum)
Delay Average(msec): Delay time (Average)
Delay Variation(msec): Delay time (Deviation)
Error Count: Error count
Result: Result
complete: ETH-DMM transmission of the set count has been completed.
over flow: Stop due to overflow
forced stop: Stop by Ctrl-C
link down: Stop due to link down
close line: Stop due to line module blocking
change switch: Stop due to system switchover of switch
illegal line state: Line module is in the state in which ETH-DM cannot be executed.
failed: Stop because ETH-DMR is not received three consecutive times
Related
commands
set ether-oam meg

clear ether-oam meg
set ether-oam mep
clear ether-oam mep
Setting of MEG
Clearing of MEG
Setting of MEP
Clearing of MEP
10-38
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
lm ether-oam
Executing of EtherOAM Frame Loss Measurement test
Executes ETH-LM and displays the execution result.
Input format
lm ether-oam P1 P2 [P3] [P4] [P5]
Parameters

P3: Frame loss measurement count count (1 to 500)
P4: Transmission period of ETH-LMM (sec or msec)
Transmission period (sec): second-period (1 to 10) (sec)
Transmission period (msec): milli-period (100 to 1000) (msec)
error.
* When P4 is omitted, 1 (sec) is assumed.
Default values
P3: 4
P4: 1
P5: 7
Usage
conditions
If the test target MEP data of the specified MEP index does not exist, you cannot
execute this command.
activate this command and any/all of the ETH-LB execution command, the ETH-LT
execution command, or/and the ETH-DM execution command simultaneously.
Note
When a Loss Measurement test is performed, the counter value used as a base for
calculating frame loss is obtained using ETH-LMM/LMR. Therefore, Request
LMM/Receive LMR in the execution result is frame loss measurement count + 1.
10-39
EtherOAM
Input example
*Switch@1# lm ether-oam 15 00:30:13:a1:0f:0a

Ether OAM Loss Measurement Port Information
===========================================
Port
: 5/1
MAC Address : 00:30:13:a1:0f:7c
VID
: 100
MEG ID
: A
MEP ID
: 15
MEG Level
: 1
During an ETH-LM examination.....
Ether OAM Loss Measurement Result Information for 00:30:13:a1:0f:0a
===================================================================
Examination MEP Index : 15
Examination MEP ID
: 15
Target Priority
: all
Request LMM
: 5
Receive LMR
: 5
Transmit Frame Near
: 10
Receive Frame Far
: 9
Transmit Frame Far
: 10
Receive Frame Near
: 8
Sum of Frame Loss Far : 0
Rate of Frame Loss Far : 10.00%
Sum of Frame Loss Near : 0
Rate of Frame Loss Near: 20.00%
Error Count
: 0
Result
: complete
*Switch@1#
10-40
EtherOAM
Output items

VID: VLAN ID
MEG ID: MEG ID
MEP ID: MEP ID
Examination MEP Index: Test target MEP Index
Examination MEP ID: Test target MEP ID
Target Priority: Measurement target frame priority
Request LMM: Transmitting ETH-LMM count
Receive LMR: Receiving ETH-LMR count
Transmit Frame Near: Number of transmitted frames at testing device side
Receive Frame Far: Number of received frames at tested device side
Transmit Frame Far: Number of transmitted frames at tested device side
Receive Frame Near: Number of received frames at testing device side
Sum of Frame Loss Far: Transmitting frame loss count
Rate of Frame Loss Far: Transmitting frame loss rate
Sum of Frame Loss Near: Receiving frame loss count
Rate of Frame Loss Near: Receiving frame loss rate
Error Count: Error count
Result: Result
complete: ETH-LMM transmission of the set count has been completed.
over flow: Stop due to overflow
forced stop: Stop by Ctrl-C
link down: Stop due to link down
close line: Stop due to line module blocking
change switch: Stop due to system switchover of switch
illegal line state: Line module is in the state in which ETH-LM cannot be executed.
failed: Stop because ETH-LMR is not received three consecutive times
Related
commands
set ether-oam meg

clear ether-oam meg
set ether-oam mep
clear ether-oam mep
set ether-oam lm
clear ether-oam lm
Setting of MEG
Clearing of MEG
Setting of MEP
Clearing of MEP
10-41
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ether-ps
Setting of EtherPS enable/disable
Sets whether to enable or disable the EtherPS function.
Input formats
- Enabling EtherPS
set ether-ps P1 P2 (enable) P3 P4 P5
- Disabling EtherPS
set ether-ps P1 P2 (disable)
Parameters
P1: Port (line) number (single specification) { 1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1 }
P2: EtherPS function setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables EtherPS function
disable: Disables EtherPS function
When enable is specified in P2
P3: Switchover method { 1:1 }
1:1: 1:1 method
P4: Direction { bi }
bi: bi-directional
P5: Switchback mode { revertive | non-revertive }
revertive: Automatic switchback
non-revertive: Manual switchback
Default value
P2: disable
Usage
conditions
If two or more MEPs have been registered, the MEP transmission direction is other than
outside, or the VLAN of the MEP is registered with Untag specification to the specified
port (line) number, you cannot execute this setting. If two or more associated MEPs
are set for the registered MEP, you cannot execute this setting.
If a link aggregation group is set, the spanning tree port is enabled, or EtherRing is
enabled for the specified port (line) number, this command cannot be set. If the greater
slot number of the specified line module has already been configured, you cannot set
EtherPS.
Notes
To modify the setting, disable EtherPS once. If EtherPS is disabled, the configuration
for the greater number slot is cleared.
If the line type of the specified port (line) is GbE, the line mode must have been set to
the GbE mode.
Input example
*Switch@1# set ether-ps 1/1 enable 1:1 bi revertive

*Switch@1#
Output item
10-42
EtherOAM
Related
commands
set ether-ps control-vlan

set ether-ps time
set ether-ps lockout
change ether-ps
change ether-ps reset
show ether-ps config
show ether-ps status
Setting of EtherPS control VLAN

Setting of EtherPS timer
Setting of EtherPS lockout
Changeover of EtherPS state
Resetting of EtherPS state changeover
Display of EtherPS configuration information
Display of EtherPS status
10-43
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets EtherPS control VLAN.
Input formats
- Enabling EtherPS control VLAN

set ether-ps control-vlan P1 P2 (enable) P3 P4 [P5]
- Disabling EtherPS control VLAN
set ether-ps control-vlan P1 P2 (disable)
Parameters
P2: EtherPS control VLAN setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables EtherPS control VLAN
disable: Disables EtherPS control VLAN
P3: Control VLAN (1 to 4094)
Default values
P2: disable
P5: 7
Usage
conditions
If EtherPS of the specified port (line) number is not enabled, you cannot execute this
setting.
If MEP has been registered for the specified port (line) number, set the same value for
Control VLAN and MEG level.
Note
To modify the setting, disable EtherPS control VLAN once.
Input example
*Switch@1# set ether-ps control-vlan 1/1 enable 1000 7 7

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ether-ps

10-44
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets EtherPS lockout.
Input format
set ether-ps lockout P1 P2
Parameters
P2: EtherPS lockout setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables EtherPS lockout
disable: Disables EtherPS lockout
Default value
P2: disable
Usage condition
setting.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set ether-ps lockout 1/1 enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ether-ps

10-45
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ether-ps time

Sets the EtherPS timer.
Input format
set ether-ps time P1 P2 P3
Parameters
P2: Change timer type { wtr }
wtr: Recovery standby protection time
P3: Time (0 to 12) (min)
* 0, and 5 to12 can be specified.
Default value
P3: 5
Usage
conditions
setting.
If EtherPS of the specified port (line) number is set to the non-revertive mode, you
cannot execute this setting.
Note
If you set the recovery standby protection time to 0, it will be infinite.
Input example
*Switch@1# set ether-ps time 1/1 wtr 12

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ether-ps

10-46
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
change ether-ps
Changes the EtherPS state.
Input format
change ether-ps P1 P2
Parameters
P2: Change mode { lockout | forced | manual | exercise }
lockout: Lockout
forced: Forced change
manual: Manual change
exercise: Test request
Default value
None
Usage
conditions
setting.
If EtherPS lockout for the specified port (line) number is enabled, you cannot execute
this setting.
Note
You may be unable to execute this command depending on the EtherPS state. Refer
to EtherPS Functions in the Instruction Manual.
Input example
*Switch@1# change ether-ps 1/1 forced

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands


10-47
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Resets the EtherPS state changeover.
Input format
change ether-ps reset P1
Parameter
Default value
None
Usage
conditions
setting.
If EtherPS lockout for the specified port (line) number is enabled, you cannot execute
this setting.
Note
You may be unable to execute this command depending on the EtherPS state. Refer
to EtherPS Functions in the Instruction Manual.
Input example
*Switch@1# change ether-ps reset 1/1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
change ether-ps

10-48
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows the EtherPS configuration information.
Input format
show ether-ps config [P1]
Parameter
P1: Port (line) number { 1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1 } (single specification)
* When P1 is omitted, the EtherPS configuration information on all EtherPS ports
(lines) is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show ether-ps config

Ether PS Config
===============
Change
Revertive
Protection
Port ETH-PS
Mode
Direction
Mode
WTR(min) Time(msec)
----------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 enabled 1:1
bi-direction revertive
12
--2/1 enabled 1:1
bi-direction non-revertive
----Ether PS Frame Config
=====================
Multicast MAC Address : 01:80:c2:00:00:30
Protocol Type
: 0x8902
=========================================
Port Control VID MEG Level Priority
-------------------------------------1/1
1000
7
7
2/1
10
7
7
*Switch@1#
10-49
EtherOAM
Output items
Items to be displayed for Ether PS Config

ETH-PS: EtherPS enable/disable setting
enabled: EtherPS enabled
disabled: EtherPS disabled
Change Mode: Change mode
1:1: 1:1 method
Direction: Direction
bi-direction: Bi-directional
Revertive Mode: Switchback mode
non-revertive: Manual switchback
WTR: Recovery standby protection time
0, 5-12: 0, 5-12 (min)
Protection Time: Protection time for associated device switch
---: No setting
Items to be displayed for Ether PS Frame Config
Multicast MAC Address: Destination Multicast MAC address
Protocol Type: Protocol type
Control VID: VLAN ID
Priority: Priority
Related
commands
set ether-ps
set ether-ps time

10-50
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows the EtherPS status information.
Input format
show ether-ps status [P1]
Parameter
* When P1 is omitted, the EtherPS status information on all EtherPS ports (lines) is
shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show ether-ps status

Ether PS Status
===============
Port Status Name
ETH-PS Status
Request
Lockout
----------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 active working
no-request
local-nr
disabled
3/1 standby protection no-request
local-nr
disabled
2/1 standby working
signal-fail-for-working local-sf
disabled
4/1 active protection signal-fail-for-working local-sf
disabled
Ether PS Alarm
==============
Port FOP-PMb FOP-NR FOP-CM FOP-PMa FOP-PMd FOP-PMr
-------------------------------------------------------1/1 ------------2/1 ------------*Switch@1#
10-51
EtherOAM
Output items
Items to be displayed for Ether PS Status

Status: Line status
active: ACT status
standby: SBY status
Name: Port operation status
working: Active system
protection: Standby system
ETH-PS Status: EtherPS status
Refer to EtherPS Functions in the Instruction Manual.
Request: Status change cause
Items to be displayed for Ether PS Alarm
---: Not detected
detect: Detected
Related
commands
set ether-ps
change ether-ps

10-52
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ether-ring
Sets whether to enable or disable the EtherRing function.
Input formats
- Enabling EtherRing
set ether-ring P1 P2 (enable) P3 P4 P5
- Disabling EtherRing
set ether-ring P1 P2 (disable)
Parameters
P1: Ring index (1 to 6) (single specification)

P2: EtherRing setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables EtherRing
disable: Disables EtherRing
P3: Ring configuration port (line) number 1 (1/1 to 12/1) (single specification)
P4: Ring configuration port (line) number 2 (1/1 to 12/1) (single specification)
P5: Switchback mode { revertive }
Default value
P2: disable
Usage
conditions
If the same port (line) number is specified for ring configuration port numbers 1 and 2,
you cannot execute this setting.
If a link aggregation group is set, the spanning tree port is enabled, or EtherPS is
enabled for the specified ring configuration port (line) number, you cannot execute this
setting.
If a ring index has already been registered for the specified ring configuration port (line)
number, you cannot execute this setting.
If two or more MEPs have been set for the specified ring configuration port (line)
number, the transmission direction of MEP is other than outside, or two or more
associated MEPs are set for the registered MEP, you cannot execute this setting.
Note
To modify the setting, disable EtherRing once.
Input example
*Switch@1# set ether-ring 1 enable 5/1 6/1 revertive

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ether-ring control-vlan

set ether-ring rpl-owner
set ether-ring time
show ether-ring config
show ether-ring status
Setting of EtherRing control VLAN

Setting of EtherRing RPL port
Setting of EtherRing timer
Display of EtherRing configuration information
Display of EtherRing status information
10-53
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets control VLAN for the EtherRing function.
Input formats
- Enabling EtherRing control VLAN

set ether-ring control-vlan P1 P2 (enable) P3 P4 P5 [P6]
- Disabling EtherRing control VLAN
set ether-ring control-vlan P1 P2 (disable)
Parameters

P2: EtherRing control VLAN setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables EtherRing control VLAN
disable: Disables EtherRing control VLAN
P3: Ring ID (0 to 255)
P4: Control VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification)
Default values
P2:disable
P6: 7
Usage
conditions
If the EtherRing function of the specified ring index is not enabled, you cannot execute
this setting
If MEP has already been registered for the ring configuration port (line) number of the
specified ring index, you cannot execute this setting when different values are set for the
VLAN ID specified for the MEP and the control VLAN ID or when the MEP is not untag
MEP.
You cannot set the same value for the control VLAN ID as the VLAN ID set for MIP.
Notes
To modify the setting, disable EtherRing control VLAN once.

Set "1" for Ring ID since only the single ring is supported.
When you register MEP to the specified port (line) number using the same VLAN ID as
that for the control VLAN of EtherRing, set the MEG level of the MEP smaller than that
for the control VLAN of EtherRing.
Input example
*Switch@1# set ether-ring control-vlan 1 enable 1 4094 7 7

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ether-ring

10-54
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets the RPL port for the EtherRing function.
Input formats
- Enabling EtherRing RPL port

set ether-ring rpl-owner P1 P2 (enable) P3
- Disabling EtherRing RPL port
set ether-ring rpl-owner P1 P2 (disable)
Parameters

P2: EtherRing RPL port setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables EtherRing RPL port
disable: Disables EtherRing RPL port
P3: Port (line) number (1/1 to12/1) (single specification)
Default value
P2: disable
Usage
conditions
this setting.
If you specify a port (line) number which is not set for the specified ring index, you
cannot execute this setting.
Note
To modify the setting, disable EtherRing RPL port once.
Input example
*Switch@1# set ether-ring rpl-owner 1 enable 5/1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ether-ring

10-55
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ether-ring time

Sets the timer for the EtherRing function.
Input formats
- Setting EtherRing recovery standby protection time

set ether-ring time P1 P2 (wtr) P3
- Setting EtherRing status change protection time
set ether-ring time P1 P2 (guard) P3
Parameters

P2: Change timer type { wtr | guard }
wtr: Recovery standby protection time
guard: Status change protection time
When wtr is specified in P2
P3: Time (5 to 12) (min)
When guard is specified in P2
P3: Time (10 to 2000) (msec)
* If you do not specify a multiple of the setting granularity, this parameter
results in an error.
Default values
P3: 5 (min) when P2=wtr

P3: 500 (msec) when P2=guard
Usage
conditions
this setting.
If you specify the recovery standby protection time, you cannot execute this setting
when RPL port is not enabled.
Note
To set the status change protection time, specify a multiple of the setting granularity.
Input example
*Switch@1# set ether-ring time 1 wtr 12

*Switch@1# set ether-ring time 1 guard 2000
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ether-ring

10-56
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear ether-ring loop-detection

Clearing of EtherRing loop detection status
Clears the loop detection status of the EtherRing function.
Input format
clear ether-ring loop-detection [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, the loop detection statuses for all ports (lines) are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear ether-ring loop-detection 5/1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
10-57
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows the configuration information of the EtherRing function.
Input format
show ether-ring config [P1]
Parameter
P1: Ring index (1 to 6) (Multiple values can be specified.)

* When P1 is omitted, the configuration information on all ring indexes is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show ether-ring config

Ether Ring Config
=================
Revertive
RPL
Guard
Index Port
Mode
Owner WTR(min) Time(msec)
-----------------------------------------------------------1 5/1,6/1
revertive
5/1
12
2000
Ether Ring Frame Config
=======================
Multicast MAC Address : 01:19:A7:00:00:(RingID)
Protocol Type
: 0x0600
===============================================
Index RingID Control VID MEG Level Priority
----------------------------------------------1
1
4094
7
7
*Switch@1#
10-58
EtherOAM
Output items
Items to be displayed for Ether Ring Config

Index: Ring index
Port: Ring configuration port (line) number
Revertive Mode: Recovery mode
revertive: Automatic recovery
RPL Owner: RPL port number
Port (line) number
---: No RPL port setting
WTR: Recovery standby protection time
5-12: 5-12 (min)
---: No RPL port setting
Guard Time: Status change protection time
10-2000: 10-2000 (msec)
Items to be displayed for Ether Ring Frame Config
Multicast MAC Address: Destination multicast MAC address
Protocol Type: Protocol type
Index: Ring index
RingID: Ring ID
Control VID: VLAN ID
Priority: Priority
Related
commands
set ether-ring
set ether-ring time

10-59
EtherOAM
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows the status information of the EtherRing function.
Input format
show ether-ring status [P1]
Parameter
P1: Ring index (1 to 6) (Multiple values can be specified.)

* When P1 is omitted, the status information on all ring indexes is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show ether-ring status

Ether Ring Status
=================
Port
Node
Index Port Status
Status
Request
--------------------------------------------------1 5/1 rpl-block
idle
local-nr
6/1 forward
idle
local-nr
Ether Ring Port Information
===========================
Loop
Port Detection
--------------5/1 --6/1 --*Switch@1#
10-60
EtherOAM
Output items
Items to be displayed for Ether Ring Status

Index: Ring index
Port Status: Port status
Node Status: Node status
Request: Status change cause
* For the port status, the node status, and the status change cause, refer to "EtherRing
Function" in the "Instruction Manual".
Items to be displayed for Ether Ring Port Information
Loop Detection: Loop detection status
---: Not detected
detect: Detected
Related
commands
set ether-ring
clear ether-ring loop-detection

Clearing of EtherRing loop detection status
10-61
EtherOAM
(Blank page)
10-62
APS
11 APS
11-1
APS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set aps
Setting of APS enable/disable
Sets whether to enable or disable APS and operation mode.
Input formats
- Annex-A (Bi-directional and Uni-directional specification)

set aps P1 P2 (enable) [P3 (annex-a) [P4]]
- Annex-B specification
set aps P1 P2 (enable) [P3 (annex-b)] [P4]]
- Disable setting specification
set aps P1 P2 (disable)
Parameters
P1: Port (line) number { 1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1 }
P2: APS setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables APS
disable: Disables APS
P3: Operation mode { annex-a | annex-b }
annex-a: Annex-A (SDH) of ITU-T G.783/G.841, Annex-A (SONET) of
GR-253
annex-b: Annex-B of ITU-T G.783/G.841
* When P3 is omitted, annex-b is assumed.
When annex-a is specified in P3
P4: Changeover mode { bi | uni }
bi: Bi-directional
uni: Uni-directional
* When P4 is omitted, bi is assumed.
When annex-b is specified in P3
P4: Changeover mode { bi }
bi: Bi-directional
* When P4 is omitted, bi is assumed.
Default value
P2: disable
P3: annex-b
P4: bi
Usage conditions
If the ATM line module is not installed in the smaller number slot of the slots whose line
module type is NONE and which take redundant configuration, you cannot set APS.
If the line module type is not ATM155, ATMP155, or TDMP155, you cannot set APS.
You cannot specify Annex-B for ports whose frame mode is set to SONET.
If the greater slot number of the specified line module has already been configured, you
cannot set APS.
If MEP has already been set for the specified line module, you cannot set APS.
If the TDMP155 line mode (SDH/SONET) is not set for the TDMP155 line module, you
cannot set APS.
11-2
APS
Notes
To modify APS settings, disable APS once.

If APS is enabled when the ATM line module installed in the greater slot, the greater slot
is initialized. If the greater slot cannot be initialized because it is in contention with
another event, however, the line module is installed with OUS status.
Reinitialize the line module installed with OUS status by using the reset line command
after this command has ended.
Input example
*Switch@1# set aps 9/1 enable annex-a

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set port frame

set ether-oam mep
set aps lockout
set aps time
change aps
change aps reset
show aps information
reset line

Setting of MEP
Setting of APS lockout
Setting of APS timer values
Changeover of APS
Resetting of APS changeover
Display of APS settings and status
Resetting of line module
11-3
APS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set aps lockout

Sets APS target line module lockout.
Input format
set aps lockout P1 P2
Parameters
P2: APS lockout setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables APS lockout
disable: Disables APS lockout
Default value
P2:disable
Usage conditions
If APS is disabled, this setting is cleared.

You can set APS lockout when APS is enabled.
Set the same APS lockout for the local office and associated office. If the associated
office does not have the APS lockout function, do not set APS lockout because it may
not support lockout setting.
Note
If APS lockout is set for only the local office or associated office, the APS status of the
local office may not match the APS status of the associated office or vice versa.
However, you can solve this mismatch by clearing the APS lockout settings.
Input example
*Switch@1# set aps lockout 9/1 enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set aps
change aps
change aps reset

Changeover of APS
11-4
APS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set aps time

Sets APS changeover response wait time and recovery standby protection time.
Input formats
- Changeover response wait time specification

set aps time P1 P2 (response) P3
- Recovery standby protection time specification
set aps time P1 P2 (recover) P3
Parameters
P2: Timer { response | recover }
response: Changeover response wait time
recover: Recovery standby protection time (you cannot specify recover when APS
mode is set to Annex-A)
When response is specified in P2
P3: Time (500 to 1000 msec)
When recover is specified in P2
P3: Time (30 to 600 msec)
Default values
When response is specified in P2: 1000 (msec)

When recover is specified in P2: 300 (sec)
Usage conditions
You can set changeover response wait time and recovery standby protection time when
APS is enabled.
Note
If APS is disabled, this setting is cleared.
Input examples
*Switch@1# set aps time 9/1 response 1000

*Switch@1# set aps time 9/1 recover 330
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set aps

11-5
APS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
change aps
Changeover of APS
Changes APS.
Input formats
- APS changeover mode (forced change/manual change)

change aps P1 [P2 (forced / manual) P3]
- APS changeover mode (lockout/test request)
change aps P1 [P2 (lkop / exercise)]
Parameters
P2: Change mode { forced | manual | lkop | exercise }
forced: Forced change
manual: Manual change
lkop: Lockout (LKOP)
exercise: Test request
When forced or manual is specified in P2
P3: Change port { master | reserve }
master: Smaller-number line module specification
reserve: Greater-number line module specification
Default value
None
Usage conditions
You can enter this command when APS is enabled.

If APS lockout is enabled, you cannot enter this command.
If APS mode is Annex.B, you cannot specify P2 and P3.
If APS mode is Annex.A Uni-directional, you cannot specify exercise in P2.
If APS mode is Annex.A and exercise or lkop is specified in P2, you cannot specify P3.
Notes
If forced is specified in P2 or APS mode is Annex.B, APS is changed forcedly.

If manual is specified in P2, APS is changed manually.
If exercise is specified in P2, standby port validity test is performed. Changeover
operation and APS status change are not performed.
If lkop is specified in P2, LKOP changeover is performed.
Depending on the following, APS may be unable to be changed:
- Switch destination line module status
- Port (line) status
- APS status
- ACT system specification in P3
If the APS status is changed despite the fact that APS is not changed by this command,
you must reset APS changeover with the change aps reset command, because APS
changeover due to a port (line) failure is disabled. If APS mode is Annex.B, the APS
name is also changed when APS changeover is reset.
11-6
APS
Input examples
*Switch@1# change aps

APS exercise result
===================
Port : 9/1
Result : succeeded
Cause : ---
9/1
9/1
9/1
9/1
lkop
forced master
manual reserve
exercise
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set aps
set aps lockout
set aps time
change aps reset

11-7
APS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
change aps reset

Resets APS changeover to enable the system to accept APS changeover resulting from a port (line) failure.
If APS mode is Annex.B, this reset also involves name change.
Input format
change aps reset P1
Parameter
Default value
None
Usage conditions
You can enter this command when APS is enabled.

You cannot enter this command when APS lockout is enabled.
Note
Use this command when resetting APS changeover is required after APS changeover
by the change aps command is performed.
Input example
*Switch@1# change aps reset 9/1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set aps
set aps lockout
change aps

Changeover of APS
11-8
APS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows the APS settings and status.
Input format
show aps information [P1]
Parameter
P1: Port (line) number { 1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1, 6/1, 9/1, 10/1 }
* When P1 is omitted, information of 1/1, 2/1, 5/1, 6/1, 9/1, and 10/1 is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
If APS is disabled, APS Alarm information and APS Status information of the
corresponding port are not shown.
Input example
Switch@#1 show aps information

APS Config
==========
Response
Recover
Port APS
Time (msec) Time (sec) Mode
-------------------------------------------------------9/1 enabled
1000
300 annex-a(sdh/uni)
APS Alarm
==========
Port CMF FPF PSBF
TAF
TDF
--------------------------------------9/1 --- ---- detect ------APS Status
==========
Port Status Name
APS Status
Lockout
---------------------------------------------------------------------9/1 standby working
forced-switch
disabled
11/1 active protection forced-switch
disabled
Switch@#1
11-9
APS
Output items
Items displayed in APS Config

APS: APS setting
enabled: APS enabled
disabled: APS disabled
Response Time: Response confirmation time
500: 500 (msec)
1000: 1000 (msec)
Recover Time: Recovery standby protection time
30-600: 30-600 (sec) *in increments of 30 sec
Mode: Operation mode
annex-a(sdh/bi): Annex.A SDH Bi-directional
annex-a(sdh/uni): Annex.A SDH Uni-directional
annex-a(sonet/bi): Annex.A SONET Bi-directional
annex-a(sonet/uni): Annex.A SONET Uni-directional
annex-b(sdh/bi): Annex.B SDH Bi-directional
Items shown in APS Alarm
CMF: Channel Mismatch Failure
FPF: Far end Protection Line Failure
PSBF: Protection Switch Byte Failure
TAF: Type of Architecture Failure
TDF: Type of Direction Failure
---: Not detected
detect: Detected
Items displayed in APS Status
Status: Line status
active: ACT status
standby: SBY status
Name: Port operation status
Working: Active system
Protection: Standby system
APS Status: APS status
Refer to Appendix in the Instruction Manual.
Lockout: Lockout status
enabled: Enabled
disabled: Disabled
Related
commands
set aps
set aps time
set aps lockout
change aps
change aps reset

Changeover of APS
11-10
ATM Control
12 ATM Control
12-1
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set pvc static

Registration of PVC
Registers a PVC.
Input format
set pvc static P1 P2
Parameters

P2: VPI value/VCI value or VPI value
VPI value/VCI value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.)
VPI value (single specification)
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set pvc static 3/1 0/32

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
clear pvc static

show pvc information
Clearing of PVC
Display of PVC setting information
12-2
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear pvc static

Clearing of PVC
Clears a PVC.
Input format
clear pvc static P1
Parameter
P1: PVC identifier { port (line) number VPI value/VCI value | port (line) number [VPI
value] | PVC name }
- Port (line) number (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name: 1 to 32 characters
* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all the PVCs for the specified port (line)
number are cleared.
* When VPI value is specified or omitted, execution confirmation is shown after
inputting the command.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
If a PVC is cleared, other settings using the PVC are also cleared.
If the clear pvc static command with single specification of PVC identifier is executed
when no PVC is registered, an error occurs. If P1 is omitted, this command terminates
normally.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear pvc static 3/1 0/32

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set pvc static

Registration of PVC
12-3
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set pvc name

Registration of PVC name
Registers a PVC name.
Input format
set pvc name P1 P2 P3
Parameters

P2: VPI value/VCI value or VPI value
VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
P3: PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
Default value
None
Usage condition
If no PVC is registered, you cannot use this function.
Note
When a PVC is cleared, the PVC name is automatically cleared.
Input example
*Switch@1# set pvc name 3/1 0/32 pvc32

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set pvc static

clear pvc static
clear pvc name
Registration of PVC
Clearing of PVC
Clearing of PVC name
12-4
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear pvc name

Clears a PVC name.
Input format
clear pvc name P1
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all the PVC names for the specified port (line)
number are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
If the clear pvc name command with single specification of PVC identifier is executed
when no PVC is registered, an error occurs. If P1 is omitted, this command terminates
normally.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear pvc name 3/1 0/32

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set pvc static

clear pvc static
set pvc name
Registration of PVC
Clearing of PVC
12-5
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set pvc admin

Setting of PVC blocking/unblocking
Sets whether to block or unblock a PVC.
Input format
set pvc admin P1 P2
Parameters
P1: PVC identifier { port (line) number VPI value/VCI value | port (line) number VPI value
| PVC name }
- VPI value/VCI value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.)
P2: Blocking/unblocking setting { enable | disable }
enable: Unblocks PVC
disable: Blocks PVC
Default value
P2: enable
Usage condition
Note
When the PVC is cleared, this function is automatically cleared.
Input example
*Switch@1# set pvc admin 3/1 0/32 disable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set pvc static

clear pvc static
set pvc port admin
Registration of PVC
Clearing of PVC
Setting PVC blocking/unblocking en bloc
12-6
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set pvc port admin

Sets PVC blocking/unblocking en bloc.
Input format
set pvc port admin P1 P2
Parameters

P2: Setting blocking/unblocking en bloc { enable | disable }
disable: Blocks PVC
Default value
P2: enable
Usage condition
None
Notes

Entering this command applies PVC blocking/unblocking en bloc to all the PVCs
registered in the specified port.
Input example
*Switch@1# set pvc port admin 3/1 disable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set pvc static

clear pvc static
set pvc admin
Registration of PVC
Clearing of PVC
12-7
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows PVC setting information.
Input format
show pvc information [P1]
Parameter
P1: Line module number or PVC identifier

PVC identifier { port (line) number VPI value/VCI value | port (line) number [VPI value]
| PVC name }
- VPI value (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all PVC setting information for the specified
port (line) number is shown.
* When port (line) number is omitted, all PVC setting information for the ATM
transmission paths of the entire device is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
None
12-8
ATM Control
Input example
*Switch@1# show pvc information

PVC System Connection Count
===========================
Configured
Configurable
------------------------------------3
381
PVC Connection Count
====================
Slot Enabled Disabled Configured Configurable
------------------------------------------------3
1
0
1
255
10
1
1
2
126
PVC Table
=========
Port VPI/VCI Name
Admin
----------------------------------------------------------------------3/1
0/32 ab123456789012345678901234567890 enabled
10/1
1/255 cd098765432109876543210987654321 enabled
10/1 255/255
disabled
*Switch@1#
Output items
PVC System Connection Count

Configured: Number of registered PVCs in the entire device
Configurable: Number of remaining registerable PVCs in the entire device
PVC Connection Count
Enabled: Number of unblocked PVCs
Disabled: Number of blocked PVCs
Configured: Number of registered port (line) PVCs
Configurable: Number of remaining registerable port (line) PVCs
PVC Table
VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value
Name: PVC name
Admin:
disable: Blocks PVC
Related
commands
set pvc static

clear pvc static
set pvc name
clear pvc name
set pvc admin
set pvc port admin
Registration of PVC
Clearing of PVC
12-9
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set pvc-vlan mode

Setting of PVC-VLAN mode
Sets an ATM transmission path portbase or tagbase.
Input format
set pvc-vlan mode P1 P2
Parameters

P2: PVC-VLAN mode setting { portbase | tagbase }
portbase: Portbase setting
tagbase: Tagbase setting
Default value
P2: portbase
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set pvc-vlan mode 3/1 tagbase

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show pvc-vlan table pvc

show pvc-vlan table vid
Display of VLAN VC setting status per PVC

Display of VLAN VC setting status per VLAN
12-10
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set pvc-vlan table

Setting of VLAN VC
Sets a VLAN VC.
Input format
set pvc-vlan table P1 P2
Parameters
P1: PVC identifier { port (line) number VPI value/VCI value | PVC name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094
Default value
None
Usage condition
Note
Input example
*Switch@1# set pvc-vlan table 3/1 0/32 100

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set pvc static

clear pvc static
clear pvc-vlan table
Registration of PVC
Clearing of PVC
Clearing of VLAN VC settings
12-11
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clears VLAN VC settings.
Input format
clear pvc-vlan table P1
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all the VLAN VC settings for the specified port
(line) number are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
If the clear pvc-vlan table command with single specification of PVC identifier is
executed when no PVC is registered, an error occurs. If P1 is omitted, this command
terminates normally.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear pvc-vlan table 3/1 0/32

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set pvc-vlan table

Setting of VLAN VC
12-12
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows the VLAN VC setting status per PVC.
Input format
show pvc-vlan table pvc [P1]
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all the VLAN VC setting statuses for the
specified port (line) number are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show pvc-vlan table pvc

PVC-VLAN Mode Table
===================
Port Base
------------------------3/1 port
4/1 tag
PVC-VLAN Table
==============
Port VPI/VCI VID VLAN-Name
----------------------------------------------------------------------3/1 255/255
1 ab123456789012345678901234567890
4/1 25/1638 4094 cd123456789012345678901234567890
*Switch@1#
Output items
PVC-VLAN Mode Table

Base: PVC-VLAN mode
port: Portbase
tag: Tagbase
PVC-VLAN Table
VID: VLAN ID
VLAN-Name: VLAN name
12-13
ATM Control
Related
commands
set vlan name

set pvc static
clear pvc static
set pvc-vlan mode
set pvc-vlan table

Registration of PVC
Clearing of PVC
Setting of VLAN VC
12-14
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows the VLAN VC setting status per VLAN.
Input format
show pvc-vlan table vid [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, the VLAN VC setting statuses of all the VLANs are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show pvc-vlan table vid 1

PVC-VLAN Mode Table
===================
Port Base
-----------------3/1 port
4/1 tag
PVC-VLAN Table
==============
VID Port VPI/VCI PVC-Name
----------------------------------------------------------------------1 3/1
1/255 ab123456789012345678901234567890
1 3/1 255/255 cd123456789012345678901234567890
1 4/1
0/32
*Switch@1#
Output items
PVC-VLAN Mode Table

Base: PVC-VLAN mode
port: Portbase
tag: Tagbase
PVC-VLAN Table
VID: VLAN ID
PVC-Name: PVC name
12-15
ATM Control
Related
commands
set pvc static

clear pvc static
set pvc name
set pvc-vlan mode
set pvc-vlan table
Registration of PVC
Clearing of PVC
Setting of VLAN VC
12-16
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set isolate pvc

Setting/clearing of PVC isolate
Sets or clears PVC isolate.
Input format
set isolate pvc P1 P2
Parameters

P2: PVC isolate setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables PVC isolate
disable: Disables PVC isolate
Default value
P2: disable
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set isolate pvc 3/1 enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show isolate pvc
Display of PVC isolate setting status
12-17
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show isolate pvc

Display of PVC isolate setting status
Shows the PVC isolate setting status.
Input format
show isolate pvc [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, the PVC isolate setting statuses of all the ports (lines) are
shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show isolate pvc

PVC-Isolate Configuration
=========================
Port Status
------------------3/1 enabled
4/1 disabled
*Switch@1#
Output items
PVC-Isolate Configuration
Status:
enabled: PVC isolate enabled
disabled: PVC isolate disabled
Related
command
set isolate pvc
Setting of PVC isolate
12-18
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show atm-fdb table pvc

Display of MAC learning information per PVC
Shows MAC learning information per PVC.
Input format
show atm-fdb table pvc [P1]
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
* When P1 is omitted, MAC learning information of all the PVCs is shown.
* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, MAC learning information of all the PVCs for
the specified port (line) number is shown.
* When port (line) number is omitted, MAC learning information of all the PVCs for the
ATM transmission path in the entire device is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show atm-fdb table pvc 10/1

FDB Learning Table
==================
Port VPI/VCI MAC Address
VID VLAN-Name
----------------------------------------------------------------------10/1
1/32 00:00:00:00:00:01 4093 ab123456789012345678901234567890
10/1 255/255 00:00:00:00:00:02 4094 cd123456789012345678901234567890
*Switch@1#
Output items

Related
commands
show atm-fdb table vid

show atm-fdb count pvc
show atm-fdb count vid
clear atm-fdb table pvc
VID: VLAN ID

Display of MAC learning count per PVC
Clearing of MAC learning information per PVC
12-19
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows MAC learning information per VLAN.
Input format
show atm-fdb table vid [P1] [P2]
Parameters

* When P1 is omitted, MAC learning information of all the ports (lines) is shown.
* When P2 is omitted, MAC learning information of all the VLANs is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
If P2 (VLAN identifier) is omitted, MAC learning information of all the VLANs for the
specified port (line) number is shown. If P1 (port (line) number) is omitted, MAC
learning information of the specified VLAN for the ATM transmission path in the entire
device is shown. If P1 (port (line) number) and P2 (VLAN identifier) are omitted, MAC
learning information of all the VLANs for the ATM transmission path in the entire device
is shown.
Input examples
*Switch@1# show atm-fdb table vid

FDB Learning Table
==================
Port VID MAC Address
VPI/VCI PVC-Name
----------------------------------------------------------------------3/1
1 00:00:00:00:00:0a
0/32 ab123456789012345678901234567890
3/1
2 00:00:00:00:00:0b
0/33
10/1 4093 00:00:00:00:00:01
0/32 ab123456789012345678901234567890
10/1 4094 00:00:00:00:00:02 255/255 cd123456789012345678901234567890
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show atm-fdb table vid 10/1 4093
FDB Learning Table
==================
Port VID MAC Address
VPI/VCI PVC-Name
----------------------------------------------------------------------10/1 4093 00:00:00:00:00:01
0/32 ab123456789012345678901234567890
*Switch@1#
Output items

VID: VLAN ID

PVC-Name: PVC name
12-20
ATM Control
Related
commands


12-21
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows the MAC learning count per PVC.
Input format
show atm-fdb count pvc [P1]
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, the MAC learning counts of all the PVCs for
the specified port (line) number are shown.
* When port (line) number is omitted, the MAC learning counts of all the PVCs for the
ATM transmission path in the entire device is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# show atm-fdb count pvc

Total Learned Entry
===================
Port Learned-Entry
-------------------------------3/1
2000
10/1
1000
FDB Learned Entry
=================
Port VPI/VCI PVC-Name
Learned-Entry
----------------------------------------------------------------------3/1
0/32 ab012345678901234567890123456789
1500
3/1
1/32
500
10/1 255/255
1000
*Switch@1# show atm-fdb count pvc 10/1 255/255
FDB Learned Entry
=================
Port VPI/VCI PVC-Name
Learned-Entry
----------------------------------------------------------------------10/1 255/255
1000
*Switch@1#
12-22
ATM Control
Output items
Total Learned Entry

Learned-Entry: MAC learning count
FDB Learned Entry
PVC-Name: PVC name
Related
commands


12-23
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows the MAC learning count per VLAN.
Input format
show atm-fdb count vid [P1] [P2]
Parameters

* When P1 is omitted, the MAC learning counts of all the ports (lines) are shown.
* When P2 is omitted, the MAC learning counts of all the VLANs are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
If P2 (VLAN identifier) is omitted, the MAC learning counts of all the VLANs for the
specified port (line) number are shown. If P1 (port (line) number) is omitted, the MAC
learning count of the specified VLAN for the ATM transmission path in the entire device
is shown. If P1 and P2 are omitted, the MAC learning counts of all the VLANs for the
ATM transmission path in the entire device are shown.
12-24
ATM Control
Input examples
*Switch@1# show atm-fdb count vid

Total Learned Entry
===================
Port Learned-Entry
------------------------------------5/1
600
9/1
1000
10/1
1500
FDB Learned Entry
=================
Port VID VLAN-Name
Learned-Entry
----------------------------------------------------------------------5/1
1 ab012345678901234567890123456789
100
5/1 4094
500
9/1 4093
1000
10/1
1 ab012345678901234567890123456789
1500
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show atm-fdb count vid 5/1 4094
FDB Learned Entry
=================
Port VID VLAN-Name
Learned-Entry
----------------------------------------------------------------------5/1 4094
500
*Switch@1#
Output items
Total Learned Entry

FDB Learned Entry
VID: VLAN ID
Related
commands


12-25
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clears MAC learning information of the specified PVC.
Input format
clear atm-fdb table pvc P1
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, the MACs learned in all the PVCs for the
specified port (line) number are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear atm-fdb table pvc 3/1 0/32

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands


12-26
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set atm-loop
Setting/clearing of ATM loop guard
Sets and clears an ATM loop guard.
Input format
set atm-loop P1 P2 P3
Parameters

P3: ATM loop guard { enable | disable }
enable: Enables ATM loop guard
disable: Disables ATM loop guard
Default value
P3: disable
Usage condition
You can register only the ATM loop guards mapped to the VLAN-VC.
Note
When a PVC is cleared, or when the setting of a VLAN-VC is cleared, the ATM loop
guard is automatically cleared.
Input example
*Switch@1# set atm-loop 3/1 100,200,300 enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show atm-loop config
Display of ATM loop guard setting status
12-27
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of ATM loop guard setting status
Shows the ATM loop guard setting status.
Input format
show atm-loop config [P1] [P2]
Parameters

* When P1 is omitted, the ATM loop guard setting statuses of all the ports (lines) are
shown.
* When P2 is omitted, the ATM loop guard setting statuses of all the VLANs are
shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
Only the ATM loop guard setting statuses are shown that are mapped to the VLAN-VC.
Input example
*Switch@1# show atm-loop config

ATM-Loop Configuration Table
============================
Port VID ATM-Loop
-------------------------------3/1 4094 enabled
10/1 4094 disabled
*Switch@1#
Output items

VID: VLAN ID
ATM-Loop: ATM loop guard setting status
Related
command
set atm-loop
12-28
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show atm-loop information

Display of ATM loop trap transmission state
Shows the ATM loop trap detection result.
Input format
show atm-loop information [P1]
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
* When VPI value or VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all ATM loop trap transmission
states for the specified port (line) number are shown.
* When PVC identifier is omitted, all ATM loop trap transmission states for the entire
device are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show atm-loop information

ATM-Loop Information Table
==========================
Port VPI/VCI VID Detect
--------------------------------------------3/1
1/32 4094 detect
10/1 255/32 4000 --10/1 255/100 4001 detect
r2/1 255/32 4000 --r2/1 255/100 4001 --*Switch@1#
Output items

Related
command
clear atm-loop
VID: VLAN ID
Detect: ATM loop trap transmission state
Clearing of ATM loop detection
12-29
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear atm-loop
Clearing of ATM loop detection
Clears the ATM loop detection result.
Input format
clear atm-loop P1
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all ATM loop detection results for the specified
port (line) number are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
If the specified PVC has not been registered, you cannot execute this command.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear atm-loop 3/1 0/32

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
Display of ATM loop trap transmission state
12-30
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set atmop mode

Setting of ATMoP mode
Sets ATMoP mode.
Input formats
- Specifying c-tag
set atmop mode P1 P2 (c-tag) [P6 (control-word) P7]
- Specifying udp-ip
set atmop mode P1 P2 (udp-ip) P3 [P4 (port-mode) P5] [P6 (control-word) P7]
Parameters

P2: Packet format { c-tag | udp-ip }
c-tag: Supports ATM over Ether with double tag VLAN
udp-ip: Supports ATM over UDP/IP with single tag VLAN
When udp-ip is specified in P2
P3: Source IP address
P4: Port mode specification { port-mode }
port-mode: Port mode specification
P5: Port mode { source | destination }
source: Source port mode
destination: Destination port mode
P6: Control word specification { control-word }
control-word: Control word specification
P7: Control word setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enable
disable: Disable
Default values
P2: c-tag
P5: source
P7: disable
Usage
conditions
If ATMoP format has already been set, an error occurs.

If a path between ATMs has already been set, an error occurs.
The following IP addresses cannot be used.
IP address which applies to 0.xxx.xxx.xxx, 127.xxx.xxx.xxx, 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to
255.xxx.xxx.xxx, 192.168.128.0/24, or 192.168.129.0/24.
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# set atmop mode 1 c-tag control-word enable

*Switch@1# set atmop mode 2 udp-ip 1.2.3.4 port-mode destination
*Switch@1#
Output item
12-31
ATM Control
Related
commands
set atmop format

clear atmop format
show atmop format
set pvc connection
clear pvc connection
show pvc connection
Setting of ATMoP format

Clearing of ATMoP format setting
Display of ATMoP format information
Setting of path between ATMs
Clearing path setting between ATMs
Display of path information between ATMs
12-32
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set atmop format

Sets ATMoP format.
Input formats
- Specifying c-tag for ATMoP mode

set atmop format P1 [P2] P3 P4 (outer) P5 P6 (inner) P7
- Specifying udp-ip for ATMoP mode
set atmop format P1 [P2] P3 P4 (outer) P5 P8 P9 [P10]
Parameters
| PVC name }
P2: Conversion VPI value/VCI value (single specification) or conversion VPI value
(single specification)
P4: VLAN identifier 1
outer: VLAN identifier 1
When c-tag is specified in P2 for ATMoP mode
P6: VLAN identifier 2 { inner }
inner: VLAN identifier 2
When udp-ip is specified in P2 for ATMoP mode
P8: Destination IP address
P9: Destination port number (1024 to 65535)
P10: TTL value (1 to 255)
Default value
P10: 128
Usage
conditions
If the specified PVC has not been set, you cannot execute this command.
A PVC identifier used for path connection between ATMs cannot be set.
If the settings do not match the ATM mode which has already been set, an error occurs.
* Specify inner VLAN (P6 and P7) when the ATMoP mode is c-tag.
* Specify the destination IP address and destination UDP port number (P8 and P9)
when the ATMoP mode is udp-ip.
If the connection types (VP connection/VC connection) of the registered PVC and the
specified PVC do not match, an error occurs.
You cannot specify the broadcast address, multicast address, local address and the
address entirely composed of 0s.
12-33
ATM Control
The following IP addresses cannot be used.
IP address which applies to 0.xxx.xxx.xxx, 127.xxx.xxx.xxx, 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to
255.xxx.xxx.xxx, 192.168.128.0/24, or 192.168.129.0/24.
A VLAN ID which has already been registered for TDMoP, PVC-VLAN or the like cannot
be set. This is for VLAN identifier 1.
If this function has already been set, the same combination cannot be set in a card.
The following combination patterns are available for this setting.
- When the ATMoP mode is c-tag, combination of specified PVC and Inner-VLAN
- When the ATMoP mode is udp-ip and source UDP port number check is specified,
combination of specified PVC, destination IP address, and source UDP port number
- When the ATMoP mode is udp-ip and destination UDP port number check is specified,
combination of specified PVC, destination IP address, and destination UDP port
number
* The specified PVC means the conversion PVC (P2).
When the conversion PVC is omitted, it means the PVC (P1).
If path connection is set between ATMs, the same combination of values cannot be
set. The following combination patterns are available for path connection between
ATMs.
- When the ATMoP mode is c-tag, you cannot set the same values for the following
combinations of the PVC and the VLAN ID.
"PVC identifier 1 (P1) and Inner-VLAN identifier 1 (P5)",
"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and Inner-VLAN identifier 1 (P5)", and
"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and Inner-VLAN identifier 2 (P10)"
- When the ATMoP mode is udp-ip, you cannot set the same values for the following
combinations of the PVC and the UPD port number.
"PVC identifier 1 (P1) and UDP port number 1 (P5)",
"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and UDP port number 1 (P5)", and
"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and UDP port number 2 (P10)"
* The combination condition is checked by the VPI value for VP connection.
Note
When the PVC is cleared, this setting is also cleared.

If the ATMoP mode is UDP/IP and the port mode is source, the destination port number
is 2142 and the source port number is the value specified with this command.
If the ATMoP mode is UDP/IP and the port mode is destination, the destination port
number is the value specified with this command and the source port number is 2142.
Input example
*Switch@1# set atmop format 3/1 0/32 5/100 00:00:00:00:00:01 outer 200 inner
3000
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set atmop mode

clear atmop format
show atmop format
set pvc connection
show pvc connection

12-34
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show atmop format

Shows the ATMoP format information.
Input format
show atmop format [P1]
Parameter

Line module: 1 to 12 (single specification)
PVC identifier { port (line) number VPI value/VCI value | port (line) number [VPI value] |
PVC name }
- VPI value/VCI value (multiple specification)
- VPI value (multiple specification)
* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all ATMoP format setting information for the
specified port (line) number is shown.
* When PVC identifier is omitted, all ATMoP format setting information for the ATMP
ports of the entire device is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show atmop format 10/1 0/32

ATMoP Table
===========
Source
Packet Source
Control
Slot MAC Address
Format IP Address
Port Mode
Word
----------------------------------------------------------------------10 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa c-tag ----disabled
*00:30:13:a1:2a:ab
ATMoP L2-Header Table
=====================
VPI/VCI VPI/VCI Destination
Outer Inner
Port (ATM)
(ATMoP) MAC Address
VID
VID
------------------------------------------------------10/1
0/32
5/10 00:00:00:00:00:01 1000 2000
=====================
VPI/VCI Source
Destination
Destination
Port (ATM)
UDP Port IP address
UDP Port
TTL
------------------------------------------------------10/1
0/32 ---------
12-35
ATM Control
*Switch@1#
Output items
ATMoP Table
Slot: Slot number
Source MAC Address: Source MAC address
* When the APS mode is enabled, two MAC addresses are displayed. One
displayed with * is used as the source MAC address.
Packet Format: Allowed packet format
Source IP Address: Source IP address
Port Mode:
source: UDP port mode source
destination: UDP port mode destination
Control Word:
enabled: Adds Control Word
disabled: Do not add Control Word
VPI/VCI(ATM): VPI/VCI value
VPI/VCI(ATMoP): Conversion VPI/VCI value
Destination MAC Address: Destination MAC address
Outer VID: VLAN identifier 1
Inner VID: VLAN identifier 2
VPI/VCI(ATM): VPI/VCI value
Source UDP Port: Source port number
Destination IP Address: Destination IP address
Destination UDP Port: Destination port number
TTL: TTL value
Related
commands
set atmop mode

set atmop format
clear atmop format

12-36
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear atmop format

Clears the ATMoP format setting.
Input format
clear atmop format P1
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
- VPI value (single specification )
* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all the ATMoP format settings for the specified
port (line) number are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
If this command is executed with single specification when no ATMoP format setting is
registered, an error occurs. If P1 is omitted, this command terminates normally.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear atmop format 3/1 0/32

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set atmop mode

set atmop format
show atmop format

12-37
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set pvc connection

Sets a path between ATMs.
Input formats
- Specifying c-tag for ATMoP mode

set pvc connection P1 P2 (outer) P3 P4 (inner) P5 P6 [P7 P8 (outer) P9 (inner) P10]
- Specifying udp-ip for ATMoP mode
set pvc connection P1 P2 (outer) P3 P4 (udp-port) P5 P6
P7 P8 (outer) P9 (udp-port) P10]
Parameters
| PVC name }
P2: VLAN identifier 1 { outer }
P4: VLAN identifier 2 { inner } or UDP port number 1 { udp-port }
udp-port: UDP port number 1
When inner is specified in P4
When udp-port is specified in P4
P5: UDP port number 1 (1024 to 65535)
P6: PVC identifier 2 { port (line) number VPI value/VCI value | port (line) number VPI
value | PVC name }
P7: VLAN identifier 3 { outer }
P9: VLAN identifier 4 { inner } or UDP port number 2 { udp-port }
udp-port: UDP port number 2
12-38
ATM Control
When inner is specified in P9
When udp-port is specified in P9
P10: UDP port number 2 (1024 to 65535)
Default value
None
Usage
conditions
If the specified PVC has not been set, you cannot execute this command.
A PVC identifier used for ATMoP format or for this function cannot be set.
If the settings do not match the ATMoP mode which has already been set, an error
occurs.
* Specify VLAN identifiers in P5 and P10 when the ATMoP mode is c-tag.
* Specify UDP port numbers in P5 and P10 when the ATMoP mode is udp-ip.
If the connection types (VP connection/VC connection) of the registered PVC and the
specified PVC do not match, an error occurs.
If the PVC connection types of the source and the destination do not match, an error
occurs.
A VLAN ID which has already been registered for TDMoP, PVC-VLAN or the like cannot
be set. This is for VLAN identifiers 1 and 3.
For combinations of physical ports and PVCs to be specified in P1 and P6, the following
can be set, depending on conditions. (Note 1)
(1) Same physical port, same PVC
(2) Same physical port, different PVC
(3) Different physical port, same PVC
(4) Different physical port, different PVC
Note 1) The settings are not allowed under the following conditions.
- When the ATMoP mode is c-tag, you cannot set the same values for the following
combinations of the PVC and the VLAN ID.
"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and Inner-VLAN identifier 1 (P5)", and
"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and Inner-VLAN identifier 2 (P10)"
Also, if the above combination is the same as that for the ATMoP format, the setting
is not allowed.
- When the ATMoP mode is udp-ip, you cannot set the same values for the following
combinations of the PVC and the UPD port number.
"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and UDP port number 1 (P5)", and
"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and UDP port number 2 (P10)"
Also, if the above combination plus the source IP address specified in the ATMoP
mode is the same as that for the ATMoP format, the setting is not allowed.
* The PVC identifier in the above combination conditions does not include port (line)
number.
* When the PVC identifier 1 and PVC identifier 2 are the same in the above
combination conditions, the same combination can be set.
* The combination condition is checked by the VPI value for VP connection.
* The above combination condition is checked by the VPI value for VP connection.
12-39
ATM Control
Notes
When the PVC is cleared, this setting is also cleared.
Input example
*Switch@1# set pvc connection 3/1 0/32 outer 200 inner 3000 5/1 1/40 outer
400 inner 4000
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set atmop mode

show pvc connection
set atmop format
show atmop format

12-40
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show pvc connection

Shows the information of the path between ATMs.
Input format
show pvc connection [P1]
Parameter
| PVC name }
* When PVC identifier is omitted, all path setting information between all ATMs for the
ATMP ports of the entire device is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show pvc connection 10/1 0/32

ATM Connection Table
====================
Outer Inner UDP
Outer Inner UDP
Port VPI/VCI VID
VID
Port Port VPI/VCI VID
VID
Port
-----------------------------------------------------------------1/1
0/32 100
20
--3/1
1/32
200
21
--*Switch@1#
Output items
ATMoP Connection Table

Outer VID: VLAN identifier 1
Inner VID: VLAN identifier 2
Source UDP Port: Source port number
UDP Port: UDP port number
Related
commands
set atmop mode

set pvc connection

12-41
ATM Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clears the path setting between ATMs.
Input format
clear pvc connection P1
Parameter
| PVC name }
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear pvc connection 3/1 0/32

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set atmop mode

set pvc connection
show pvc connection

12-42
ATM-QoS
13 ATM-QoS
13-1
ATM-QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set atm-shaper mode

Setting of rate mode
Sets rate mode.
Input format
set atm-shaper mode P1 P2
Parameters

P2: Rate mode { low | high }
low: Low speed
high: High speed
Default value
P2: low
Usage condition
None
Note
If the set VPPCR or VCPCR value of the ATM shaper is less than 384 kbps, you cannot
set rate mode to high speed.
Input example
*Switch@1# set atm-shaper mode 3/1 high

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show atm-shaper rate

set atm-shaper rate
Display of ATM shaper

Setting of ATM shaper
13-2
ATM-QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set atm-shaper rate

Sets the ATM shaper.
Input formats
- VP mode, Constant Bit Rate or Unspecified Bit Rate specification

set atm-shaper rate P1 P2 (vp) P3 (cbr | ubr) P4
- VP mode, Guaranteed Frame Rate specification
set atm-shaper rate P1 P2 (vp) P3 (gfr) P4 P6
- VC mode, Constant Bit Rate, or Unspecified Bit Rate specification
set atm-shaper rate P1 P2 (vc) P3 (cbr | ubr) P5
- VC mode, Guaranteed Frame Rate specification
set atm-shaper rate P1 P2 (vc) P3 (gfr) P5 P6
- Hierarchical VP mode, Constant Bit Rate, or Unspecified Bit Rate specification
set atm-shaper rate P1 P2 (vpvc) P3 (cbr | ubr) P4 P5
- Hierarchical VP mode, Guaranteed Frame Rate specification
set atm-shaper rate P1 P2 (vpvc) P3 (gfr) P4 P5 P6
13-3
ATM-QoS
Parameters
| PVC name }
- VPI value (only VP connection)
P2: Shaper mode { vp | vc | vpvc }
vp: VP mode
vc: VC mode
vpvc: Hierarchical VP mode
P3: Traffic class { cbr | ubr | gfr }
cbr: Constant Bit Rate
ubr: Unspecified Bit Rate
gfr: Guaranteed Frame Rate
When vp is specified in P2
P4: VPPCR value { vppcr }
vppcr 48, 64, 96, 128, 192, 256, 384, 500
(increments of 500 hereafter) to 150000 (Kbps)
When gfr is specified in P3
P6: MCR value { mcr }
mcr 24, 32, 48, 64, 96, 100, 128, 150, 200
When vc is specified in P2
P5: VCPCR value { vcpcr }
vcpcr 48, 64, 96, 128, 192, 256, 384, 500
mcr 24, 32, 48, 64, 96, 100, 128, 150, 200
When vpvc is specified in P2
P4: VPPCR value { vppcr }
vppcr 48, 64, 96, 128, 192, 256, 384, 500
P5: VCPCR value { vcpcr }
vcpcr 48, 64, 96, 128, 192, 256, 384, 500
mcr 24, 32, 48, 64, 96, 100, 128, 150, 200
Default value
None
Usage condition
13-4
ATM-QoS
Notes
If rate mode is set to high speed, you cannot set a value less than 384 kbps as the
VPPCR or VCPCR value of the ATM shaper.
You can set up to 128 ATM shapers in one port.
If shaper mode is VP mode, you can set up to 256 PVCs in the same ATM shaper.
If shaper mode is VC mode, you can set only one PVC in the ATM shaper.
If shaper mode is hierarchical VP mode, you can set up to 256 PVCs in the same ATM
shaper.
You cannot set different shaper mode as the same VPI value.
You cannot change the shaper mode set in the ATM shaper.
If shaper mode is set to VP mode, you can omit VPPCR value setting when changing
the traffic class or adding a PVC after setting the ATM shaper.
If shaper mode is set to VC mode, you can omit VCPCR value setting when changing
the traffic class after setting the ATM shaper.
If shaper mode is set to hierarchical VP mode, you can omit VPPCR value setting and
VCPCR value setting when changing the traffic class after setting the ATM shaper.
You can also omit VPPCR value setting when adding a PVC.
If shaper mode is VP mode, the total MCR value of the ATM shaper cannot exceed the
VPPCR value.
If shaper mode is VC mode, the MCR value of the ATM shaper cannot exceed the
VCPCR value.
If shaper mode is hierarchical VP mode, the sum of the VCPCR and MCR values of the
ATM shaper whose traffic class is CBR cannot exceed the VPPCR value.
The total effective band of the ATM shaper per port cannot exceed 150000 kbps (except
when all the traffic classes of the ATM shaper in one port are UBR).
The ATM shaper setting is automatically cleared when the PVC is cleared.
If there is a traffic of 200000Kbps or higher in the direction from the Switch module to the
ATM line module, up to PCR settings other than CBR may be unable to be output.
Input examples
*Switch@1# set atm-shaper rate 3/1 0/32 vp cbr vppcr 1000

*Switch@1# set atm-shaper rate 3/1 1/33 vc ubr vcpcr 2000
*Switch@1# set atm-shaper rate 3/1 2/34 vpvc gfr vppcr 100000 vcpcr 50000
mcr 25000
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set pvc static

set atm-shaper mode
clear atm-shaper rate
show atm-shaper information
Registration of PVC
Clearing of ATM shaper
Display of effective band
13-5
ATM-QoS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows an ATM shaper.
Input format
show atm-shaper rate [P1]
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
* When P1 is omitted, the ATM shaper settings of all the VPIs and VCIs set in all the
ports (lines) are shown.
* When VPI value is omitted, the ATM shaper settings of all the VPIs and VCIs set in
the specified port (line) are shown.
* When VPI value is specified, the ATM shaper settings of all the VCIs set in the
specified port (line) and VPI are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show atm-shaper rate

Rate Mode Table
===============
Port Mode
----------------3/1 high
4/1 low
10/1 high
ATM Shaper Table(Kbps)
======================
Port
VPI/VCI Class Shaper VP-PCR VC-PCR
MCR
----------------------------------------------------------------------3/1
0/32 ubr
vp
100000
----4/1
1/10000 cbr
vc
--- 100000
--10/1
3/16383 gfr
vpvc
100000 100000 100000
*Switch@1#
13-6
ATM-QoS
Output items
(Rate Mode Table)

Mode: Rate mode
low: Low speed
high: High speed
(ATM Shaper Table(Kbps))
VPI/VCI: VPI value/VCI value
Class: Traffic class
cbr: constant bit rate
ubr: unspecified bit rate
gfr: guaranteed frame rate
Shaper: Shaper mode
vp: VP mode
vc: VC mode
VP-PCR: VPPCR value
VC-PCR: VCPCR value
MCR: MCR value
Related
commands
set atm-shaper mode

set atm-shaper rate

13-7
ATM-QoS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows an ATM shaper effective band.
Input format
show atm-shaper information [P1]
Parameter
P1: PVC identifier { port (line) number [VPI value] | PVC name }
* When P1 is omitted, the ATM shaper effective bands of all the VPIs and VCIs set in
all the ports (lines) are shown.
* When VPI value is omitted, the ATM shaper effective bands of all the VPIs and VCIs
set in the specified port (line) are shown.
* When VPI value is specified, the ATM shaper effective bands of all the VCIs set in
the specified port (line) and VPI are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show atm-shaper information

ATM Shaper Table
================
Port Registered-Shaper Available-Shaper
----------------------------------------3/1
17
111
ATM Shaper Port Rate Table(Kbps)
================================
Maximum- Available- TotalPort Rate
Rate
Rate
CBR(PCR) UBR(PCR) GFR(PCR) GFR(MCR)
----------------------------------------------------------------------3/1 150000
29000
121000
46000
46000
46000
21000
ATM Shaper Rate Table(Kbps)
===========================
TotalPort VPI
VCI Shaper Rate
CBR(PCR) UBR(PCR) GFR(PCR) GFR(MCR)
----------------------------------------------------------------------3/1
1
--- vp
4000
4000
------3/1
2
--- vp
4000
--4000
----3/1
3
--- vp
4000
----4000
2000
3/1
4
--- vp
4000
4000
4000
----3/1
5
--- vp
4000
4000
--4000
2000
3/1
6
--- vp
4000
--4000
4000
2000
13-8
ATM-QoS
3/1
3/1
3/1
3/1
3/1
3/1
3/1
3/1
3/1
3/1
3/1
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
--32
33
34
---------------
vp
vc
vc
vc
vpvc
vpvc
vpvc
vpvc
vpvc
vpvc
vpvc
4000
10000
10000
10000
9000
9000
9000
9000
9000
9000
9000
4000
10000
----5000
----5000
5000
--5000
4000
--10000
----5000
--5000
--5000
5000
4000
----10000
----5000
--5000
5000
5000
*Switch@1#
Output items
(ATM Shaper Table)

Registered-Shaper: Number of set shapers
Available-Shaper: Number of available shapers
(ATM Shaper Port Rate Table(Kbps))
Maximum-Rate] Maximum band
Available-Rate: Available band
Total-Rate: Total effective bands (per port)
CBR(PCR): Total of PCR values when traffic class is CBR (per port)
UBR(PCR): Total of PCR values when traffic class is UBR (per port)
GFR(PCR): Total of PCR values when traffic class is GFR (per port)
GFR(MCR): Total of MCR values when traffic class is GFR (per port)
(ATM Shaper Rate Table(Kbps))
VPI: VPI
VCI: VCI
Shape: Shaper mode
vp: VP mode
vc: VC mode
Total-Rate: Effective band (per shaper)
CBR(PCR): Total of PCR values when traffic class is CBR (per shaper)
UBR(PCR): Total of PCR values when traffic class is UBR (per shaper)
GFR(PCR): Total of PCR values when traffic class is GFR (per shaper)
GFR(MCR): Total of MCR values when traffic class is GFR (per shaper)
Related
commands
set atm-shaper rate


13-9
2000
----5000
----3000
--3000
3000
3000
ATM-QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clears an ATM shaper.
Input format
clear atm-shaper rate P1
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
* When VPI value is omitted, the ATM shaper settings of all the VPIs and VCIs
registered in the specified port (line) are cleared.
* When VPI value is specified, the ATM shaper settings of all the VCIs registered in
the specified port (line) and VPI are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
If VPI value is specified or omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been
entered.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear atm-shaper rate 3/1 1/250

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set atm-shaper rate


13-10
ATM-QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set atm-qos aal5

Setting of AAL5 mode
Sets AAL5 mode.
Input format
set atm-qos aal5 P1 P2
Parameters

P2: AAL5 mode { epd | ppd }
epd: Early Packet Discard
ppd: Partial Packet Discard
Default value
P2: epd
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set atm-qos aal5 3/1 ppd

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show atm-qos aal5
Display of AAL5 mode
13-11
ATM-QoS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show atm-qos aal5

Display of AAL5 mode
Shows AAL5 mode.
Input format
show atm-qos aal5
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show atm-qos aal5

AAL5 Mode Table
===============
Port Mode
--------------------3/1 epd
*Switch@1#
Output items

Mode: AAL5 mode
epd: early packet discard
ppd: partial packet discard
Related
command
set atm-qos aal5
13-12
ATM-QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set atm-qos out-port clp

Setting of CLP
Sets a CLP for Ether over ATM.
Input format
set atm-qos out-port clp P1 P2
Parameters
P2: Priority (0 to 7) (Multiple values can be specified.)
Default value
None
Usage condition
Note
The CLP is automatically cleared when the PVC is cleared.
Input example
*Switch@1# set atm-qos out-port clp 3/1 0/32 0-3

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show atm-qos out-port clp

clear atm-qos out-port clp
Display of CLP setting

Clearing of CLP setting
13-13
ATM-QoS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows a CLP setting for Ether over ATM.
Input format
show atm-qos out-port clp [P1]
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
* When P1 is omitted, the CLP settings of all the VPIs and VCIs set in all the ports
(lines) are shown.
* When VPI value is omitted, the CLP settings of all the VPIs and VCIs set in the
specified port (line) are shown.
* When VPI value is specified, the CLP settings of all the VCIs set in the specified port
(line) and VPI are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show atm-qos out-port clp

Output CLP Priority Mapping Table
=================================
Port VPI/VCI Priority(CLP=1)
-----------------------------10/1 0/16383 0,6
*Switch@1#
Output items
(Output CLP Priority Mapping Table)

Priority(CLP=1): CoS value whose CLP value is to be set to 1
Related
commands

Setting of CLP
13-14
ATM-QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clears a CLP setting for Ether over ATM.
Input format
clear atm-qos out-port clp P1
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
* When VPI value is omitted, the CLP settings of all the VPIs and VCIs registered in
the specified port (line) are cleared.
* When VPI value is specified, the CLP settings of all the VCIs registered in the
specified port (line) and VPI are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
If VPI value is specified or omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been
entered.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear atm-qos out-port clp 3/1 1/250

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

Setting of CLP
13-15
ATM-QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set atmop in-port priority

Setting of CLP-priority mapping
Sets the CoS value to the VLAN tag and the DSCP value to the IP header, based on the CLP value of an
ATM cell when the ATM cell is encapsulated into an Ethernet frame. The values are set on a per-PVC
basis. When the hop count of the VLAN tag is 2, the values can be set for each tag and for each CLP.
Input formats
- CLP0, CLP1 specification

set atmop in-port priority P1 P2 (clp0) [P3] [P4] [P5] [ P6 [P7] [P8] [P9] ]
* At least one of P3 to P5 must be specified.
* When P6 is specified, at least one of P7 to P9 must be specified.
- CLP1 specification
set atmop in-port priority P1 P2 (clp1) [P3] [P4] [P5]
* At least one of P3 to P5 must be specified.
- Default value specification
set atmop in-port priority P1 P2 (initial)
Parameters
| PVC name }
P2: CLP { clp0 | clp1 } or default value specification { initial }
clp0: CLP0
clp1: CLP1
initial: Default value specification
When clp0 is specified in P2
P3: Outer tag mapping CoS value outer (0 to 7)
P4: Inner tag mapping CoS value inner (0 to 7)
P5: IP header DSCP value dscp (0 to 63)
P6: CLP1 specification { clp1 }
clp1: CLP1
When clp1 is specified in P2
Default value
P3, P4, P7, P8: 5

P5, P9: 46
Usage condition
If no PVC is registered, you cannot execute this command.
13-16
ATM-QoS
Notes
The setting is cleared when the PVC is cleared.

If any value is omitted (excluding initial specification) when this command is executed,
the previous value will be obtained for the omitted value.
When initial is specified, the default value is assumed.
Input examples
*Switch@1# set atmop in-port

12 clp1 outer 2 inner 0 dscp
outer 2 dscp 12
priority
priority
priority
priority
priority
priority
priority
set line mode atmp

set pvc static
clear pvc static
set atmop mode
set atmop format
show atmop in-port priority

Registration of PVC
Clearing of PVC
Setting of ATM-Ether conversion format
Display of CLP-priority mapping setting status
priority 3/1 0/32 clp0 outer 7 inner 5 dscp

24
priority 3/1 0/32 clp0 outer 7 dscp 24 clp1
3/1 0/32
3/1 0/32
3/1 0/32
3/1 0/32
3/1 0/32
3/1 0/32
initial
clp0
dscp
clp0
clp0
clp1
clp1
inner 5
30 clp1
outer 7
outer 7
inner 0
dscp 0
clp1 outer 2
outer 2
inner 5
dscp 40
Output item
Related
commands
13-17
ATM-QoS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of CLP-priority mapping setting status
Shows the setting status of the CLP-priority mapping per PVC.
Input format
show atmop in-port priority [P1]
Parameter

| PVC name }
* When a line module is specified in P1, all the priority values set for the specified line
module number are displayed.
* When the VPI value or the VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all the priority values set
for the specified port (line) number are displayed.
* When the port (line) number is omitted, all the priority values set for the device are
displayed.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show atmop in-port priority 5/6

ATMoP Input CLP Priority Mapping Table(c-tag/udp-ip)
====================================================
CLP=0
CLP=1
Port VPI/VCI Outer-tag Inner-tag DSCP Outer-tag Inner-tag DSCP
--------------------------------------------------------------------5/6
2/62
1
7
24
7
7
63
5/6
2/63
1
7
24
7
7
63
5/6
2/64
1
7
24
7
7
63
5/6
2/65
1
7
24
7
7
63
5/6
2/66
1
7
24
7
7
63
*Switch@1#
Output items

Outer-tag: CoS value of the Outer tag
Inner-tag: CoS value of the Inner tag
DSCP: DSCP value of the IP header
13-18
ATM-QoS
Related
commands
Setting of CLP-priority mapping
13-19
ATM-QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set atmop out-port clp mode

Setting of CLP conversion mode
Sets the CLP conversion mode for ATM over Ether.
Input formats
- Transparent setting/per-priority setting

set atmop out-port clp mode P1 P2 (transparent | priority)
- Fixed value setting
set atmop out-port clp mode P1 P2 (fix) P3
Parameters
| PVC name }
P2: Mode setting { transparent | fix | priority }
transparent: Transparent setting
fix: Fixed value setting
priority: per-priority setting
When fix is specified in P2
P3: CLP value (0 or 1)
Default value
P2: transparent
Usage condition
Note
When a PVC is cleared, the CLP conversion mode for ATM over Ether is automatically
cleared.
If priority is specified in this command, the CLP value is determined with reference to the
value set in the set atmop out-port priority command.
Input example
*Switch@1# set atmop out-port clp mode 3/1 0/32 fix 1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set pvc static

set atmop out-port clp priority
clear pvc static
show atmop out-port clp
Registration of PVC
Setting of CLP conversion priority
Clearing of PVC
Display of CLP conversion setting status
13-20
ATM-QoS
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets the CLP conversion priority for ATM over Ether.
Input format
set atmop out-port clp priority P1 P2 P3 P4
Parameters

P2: Packet format { c-tag | udp-ip }
c-tag: Specifying CoS value in c-tag
udp-ip: Specifying DSCP value in UDP/IP header
P3: Priority value (0 to 63) (Multiple values can be specified.)
When c-tag is specified: 0 to 7
When udp-ip is specified: 0 to 63
P4: CLP value (0 or 1)
Default value
P4: 0
Usage condition
None
Note
This command setting is valid only for the packet format specified with the set atmop
mode command.
Input example
*Switch@1# set atmop out-port clp priority 3 c-tag 0-2,7 1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set atmop mode


13-21
ATM-QoS
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows the CLP conversion setting status for ATM over Ether.
Input format
show atmop out-port clp [P1]
Parameter

Line module number (1 to 12) (single specification)
| PVC name }
* When a line module is specified in P1, all the priority values set for the specified line
module number are displayed.
* When VPI value or VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all CLP conversion setting
information of the Egress side for the specified port (line) number is shown.
* When P1 is omitted, all CLP conversion setting information of the Egress side for the
ATMP ports of the entire device is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show atmop out-port clp

Output CLP Mapping Table on Priority Mode (c-tag)
=================================================
Slot CLP CoS
---------------------1
0 0-7
1 none
5
0 0-1,3-4,6-7
1 2,5
8
0 0-3
1 4-7
12
0 1,6
1 0,2-5,7
Output CLP Mapping Table on Priority Mode (udp-ip)
==================================================
Slot CLP DSCP
----------------------------------------------------------------------1
0 0-63
1 none
5
0 2,5,8,11,14,17,20,23,26,29,32,35,38,41,44,47,50,53,56,59,62
1 0-1,3-4,6-7,9-10,12-13,15-16,18-19,21-22,24-25,27-28,30-31,33-34,
36-37,39-40,42-43,45-46,48-49,51-52,54-55,57-58,60-61,63
13-22
ATM-QoS
8
12
0 0-20
1 21-63
0 0-9,20-29,40-49,60-63
1 10-19,30-39,50-59
Output CLP Conversion Table

===========================
Port VPI/VCI Mode
CLP
-----------------------------1/1
1/33 transparent --5/4
0/255 fix
1
5/4 1/16383 priority
--8/6 100/--- priority
--12/8 100/255 priority
--*Switch@1#
Output items
Output CLP Mapping Table on Priority Mode (c-tag)

CLP: CLP value
CoS: CoS value
Output CLP Mapping Table on Priority Mode (udp-ip)
CLP: CLP value
DSCP: DSCP value
Output CLP Conversion Table
Port: Port number
Mode: CLP conversion mode
CLP: CLP value in fixed value mode
Related
commands


13-23
ATM-QoS
(Blank page)
13-24
ATM-OAM
14 ATM-OAM
14-1
ATM-OAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set atm-oam
Setting of ATM-OAM operation
Sets the OAM operation of an ATM transmission path.
Input formats
- F4 level specification
set atm-oam P1 (f4) P2 P3 (disable)
- F4 to F5 transfer specification
set atm-oam P1 (f4) P2 P3 (enable) [P4]
set atm-oam P1 (f5) P2 P3
Parameters
P1: ATM-OAM alarm level setting { f4 | f5 }

f4: F4 level specification
When f4 is specified in P1
P2: PVC identifier { port (line) number VPI value | PVC name }
P3: ATM-OAM alarm level operation setting { enable | disable }
enable: VP-RDI transfer when VP-AIS is received
Trap notification available
Trap notification available when VP-AIS and VP-RDI is received
disable: VP-AIS and VP-RDI discarded
P4: F4 to F5 transfer setting { f5-generate }
f5-generate: Transfers VC-AIS and VC-RDI to the subordinate VC
when VP-AIS is received
* When P4 is omitted, VC-AIS and VC-RDI are not transferred to the
subordinate VC.
P3: ATM-OAM alarm level operation setting { enable | disable }
enable: VC-AIS and VC-RDI transfer when VC-AIS is received
Trap notification available
Trap notification available when VP-AIS and VCRDI is received
disable: VC-AIS and VC-RDI discarded
Default value
P3: enable
P4: disable
14-2
ATM-OAM
Usage conditions
If no PVC is registered, you cannot set this function.

If a VP connection has already been registered for the VPI value/PVC name specified in
P2 and f5-generate is specified in P4 when f4 is specified in P1, an error occurs.
If a VP connection has already been registered for the VPI value/PVC name specified in
P2 when f5 is specified in P1, an error occurs.
Note
ATM-OAM is automatically cleared when the PVC is cleared.
Input examples
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
atm-oam
atm-oam
atm-oam
atm-oam
atm-oam
f4
f4
f4
f5
f5
3/1
3/1
3/1
3/1
3/1
0 enable
1 enable f5-generate
20 disable
0/32 enable
20/10000 disable
Output item
Related
commands
show atm-oam flow

show atm-oam config
show atm-oam status
Setting of ATM-OAM flow point

Display of ATM-OAM setting information
Display of ATM-OAM status information
14-3
ATM-OAM
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set atm-oam flow

Sets the OAM flow point of an ATM transmission path.
Input formats
set atm-oam flow P1 (f4) P2 P3 P4
set atm-oam flow P1 (f5) P2 P3 P4
Parameters
P1: ATM-OAM alarm level setting { f4 | f5 }

P3: Flow type setting { end-end | segment }
end-end: End to End flow
segment: Segment flow
P4: Flow point setting { end-point | connecting-point | none }
end-point: End point
connecting-point: Connecting point
none: No setting
Default value
None
Usage conditions
If a VP connection or PVC has not been registered for the VPI value/PVC name
specified in P2 when f4 is specified in P1, this function cannot be set.
If a PVC has not been registered for the VPI value/PVC name specified in P2 when f5 is
specified in P1, this function cannot be set.
Note
ATM-OAM is automatically cleared when the PVC is cleared.
Input examples
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
atm-oam
atm-oam
atm-oam
atm-oam
atm-oam
flow
flow
flow
flow
flow
f4
f4
f5
f5
f5
14-4
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
0 end-end end-point
1 segment none
0/32 end-end connecting-point
1/100 segment end-point
20/10000 segment none
ATM-OAM
Output item
Related
commands
show atm-oam
show atm-oam config
show atm-oam status

14-5
ATM-OAM
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show atm-oam config

Shows setting information of the specified VPI or VPI/VCI of the specified port.
Input format
show atm-oam config [P1]
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
* When port (line) number is omitted, the setting information of all VPIs/VCIs in the
device is shown.
* When VPI value is omitted, the setting information of all VPIs/VCIs registered for the
* When VCI value is omitted, the setting information of all VCIs registered for the
specified port (line) number and VPI is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show atm-oam config 3/1

ATM OAM Config Table
====================
OAM Config(F4)
==============
Port VPI Config
Option
Segment
End-End
---------------------------------------------------------------------3/1
0 enabled
none
none
end-point
3/1
1 enabled
f5-generation end-point
end-point
3/1 20 disabled ------3/1 30 disabled ------3/1 100 enabled
f5-generation end-point
end-point
3/1 255 enabled
none
none
end-point
OAM Config(F5)
==============
Port VPI/VCI Config
Segment
End-End
----------------------------------------------------------3/1
0/32 enabled
none
connecting-point
3/1
0/100 enabled
end-point
connecting-point
3/1 0/1000 enabled
connecting-point connecting-point
3/1 0/10000 disabled ----3/1
20/32 disabled -----
14-6
ATM-OAM
3/1 20/100
3/1 20/1000
3/1 255/32
3/1 255/100
disabled
disabled
enabled
enabled
--------end-point
connecting-point
connecting-point connecting-point
*Switch@1#
Output items
OAM Config(F4)
VPI: Virtual path number
Config: Configuration
enabled:
VP-AIS and VP-RDI detection enabled
Trap notified when VP-AIS or VP-RDI is detected
VP-RDI transferred when VP-AIS is detected
disabled:
VP-AIS and VP-RDI detection disabled
Option: Expansion setting
f5-generation: VP-RDI and VC-RDI transferred when VP-AIS is detected
none: Not specified
--- : Not set
Segment: Flow point of Segment flow
End-End: Flow point of End to End flow
OAM Config(F5)
VPI/VCI: Virtual path number/virtual channel number
Config:
enabled:
VC-AIS and VC-RDI detection enabled
Trap notified when VC-AIS or VC-RDI is detected
VC-RDI transferred when VC-AIS is detected
disabled:
VC-AIS and VC-RDI detection disabled
Segment: Flow point of Segment flow
End-End: Flow point of End to End flow
Related
commands
set atm-oam
show atm-oam flow
show atm-oam status

14-7
ATM-OAM
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show atm-oam status

Shows ATM-OAM status information.
Input format
show atm-oam status [P1]
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
* When port (line) number is omitted, the status information of all VPIs/VCIs in the
device is shown.
* When VPI value is omitted, the status information of all VPIs/VCIs registered for the
* When VCI value is omitted, the status information of all VCIs registered for the
specified port (line) number and VPI is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
Switch@1# show atm-oam status 3/8

ATM OAM Status Table
====================
OAM Status(F4 Detect/Generate)
==============================
Detect
Generate(gen)
------------------------------ -----------------------------Segment
End-End
Segment
End-End
-------------- -------------- -------------- -------------Port VPI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI
------------------------------------------------------------------------3/8
0 detect
--detect ----------3/8
1 detect
--detect ----gen
--gen
3/8
20 --detect --detect
--------3/8 255 detect --detect
----gen
--gen
==============================
Detect
Generate(gen)
------------------------------ -----------------------------Segment
End-End
Segment
End-End
-------------- ------------- -------------- -------------Port VPI/VCI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI
----------------------------------------------------------------------------3/8
0/32 -----------------
14-8
ATM-OAM
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
0/100
0/1000
0/10000
1/32
1/100
1/1000
1/10000
20/32
20/100
20/1000
30/32
30/100
30/1000
100/32
100/100
255/32
255/100
detect
--detect
--detect
--detect
--detect
----detect
----detect
--detect
--detect
------detect
------detect
----detect
---------
detect ----detect
detect ------detect ----detect
detect ------detect ----detect
----detect ----detect
----detect ------detect ---
-----------------------------------
Switch@1#
Output items

VPI: Virtual path number
Detect VP-AIS:
detect: VP-AIS detected
--- :
Detect VP-RDI:
detect: VP-RDI detected
--- :
Generate VP-AIS:
generate: VP-AIS generated
--- :
Generate VP-RDI:
generate: VP-RDI generated
--- :
VPI/VCI: Virtual path number/virtual channel number
Detect VC-AIS:
detect: VC-AIS detected
--- :
Detect VC-RDI:
detect: VC-RDI detected
--- :
Generate VC-RDI:
generate: VC-RDI generated
--- :
Generate VC-AIS:
generate: VC-AIS generated
--- :
14-9
gen
--gen
--gen
--gen
--gen
----gen
----gen
--gen
-----------------------------------
gen
--gen
--gen
--gen
--gen
----gen
----gen
--gen
ATM-OAM
Related
commands
set port admin

set port clock
set port frame
set atm-oam
show atm-oam flow
show atm-oam config

14-10
ATM-IMA
15 ATM-IMA
15-1
ATM-IMA
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ima group

Setting of IMA group
Sets an IMA group.
Input format
set ima group P1 P2 P3 [P4] [P5] [P6] [P7]
Parameters
P1: IMA group index (1 to 48) (single specification)

P3: IMA ID id (0 to 3)
* Specify unique value within the range of 0 to 3 in one line module.
P4: Number of minimum required links links (1 to 8)
* This value cannot exceed the total number of the ports (lines) specified in P2.
P5: IMA frame length len { 32 | 64 | 128 | 256 }
len 32: 32 Cell
len 64: 64 Cell
len 128: 128 Cell
len 258: 256 Cell
P6: Link differential delay
T1 port (line): delay 25 to 282 (msec)
E1 port (line): delay 25 to 226 (msec)
P7: Root port number root port (line) number (single specification)
* A number which is not included in the P2-specified port (line) cannot be specified.
* When P4 to P7 are omitted, the default values are assumed.
Default values
P4: 1
P5: 128
P6: 25 (msec)
P7: The port (line) with the smallest number in the port (line) numbers specified in P2
Usage condition
None
Notes
A port (line) over multiple IMA groups cannot be registered doubly.

Up to four IMA groups can be registered within one line module.
When P1 is already registered, the value is modified (overwritten).
Specification over line modules is not allowed for P2.
When a PVC is not set for root port, communication is unavailable.
Input examples
*Switch@1# set ima group 1 1/1-3 id 1

*Switch@1# set ima group 2 1/4-8 id 1 links 1 len 25 root 1/4
*Switch@1# set ima group 2 1/4-8 id 1 links 5 root 1/5
*Switch@1# set ima group 48 10/1,10/3,10/5,10/7-8 id 3 links 8 len 256 delay
282 root 10/8
Output item
15-2
ATM-IMA
Related
commands
show ima group config

show ima group status
clear ima group
set ima clock
show ima clock
Display of IMA group setting information

Display of IMA group status information
Clearing of IMA group
Setting of IMA clock mode
Display of IMA clock mode setting information
15-3
ATM-IMA
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows IMA group setting information.
Input format
show ima group config [P1]
Parameter
P1: IMA group index (1 to 48) (Multiple values can be specified.)

* When P1 is omitted, IMA group setting information on all IMA groups is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
Switch@1# show ima group config

IMA Group Configuration Table
=============================
Min-Req- Frame- Link-Diff- RootIndex Ports
ID Links
Length Delay(ms) Port
--------------------------------------------------------------------1 1/1-8
1
8
128
123
1/1
2 10/2,10/4,10/ 6
1
1
32
25
10/4
48 10/1,10/3,10/5,10/7-8 3
2
256
282
10/8
Switch@1#
Output items
Index: IMA index group index

Ports: Port (line) number
ID: IMA ID
Min-Req-Links: Number of minimum required links
Frame-Length: IMA frame length
Link-Diff-Delay(ms): Link differential delay
Root-Port: Root port number
Related
commands
set ima group

clear ima group

15-4
ATM-IMA
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows IMA group status information.
Input format
show ima group status [P1]
Parameter
P1: IMA group index (1 to 48) (Multiple values can be specified.)

* When P1 is omitted, IMA group status information on all IMA groups is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input examples
When IMA group index is omitted or multiple IMAA group indexes are specified
Switch@1# show ima group status
IMA Group Status Table
======================
Index ID GSM-State(NE)
GSM-State(FE)
Failure-State
----------------------------------------------------------------------------1 1 operational
operational
no-failure
3 2 ------7 1 startup
--no-failure
9 2 startup
--no-failure
48 0 insufficient-links insufficient-links insufficient-links-ne
Switch@1#
When single IMA group index is specified.

Switch@1# show ima group status 2
IMA Group Status Table
======================
Index ID GSM-State(NE)
GSM-State(FE)
Failure-State
----------------------------------------------------------------------------2 1 operational
operational
no-failure
IMA Link Status Table
=====================
Port LID TxState(NE) RxState(NE) TxState(FE) RxState(FE) Failure-State
--------------------------------------------------------------------------10/2
1 misconnect misconnect
misconnect misconnect misconnect
10/4
3 active
active
active
active
no-failure
10/6
5 active
active
active
active
no-failure
Switch@1#
15-5
ATM-IMA
Output items
Index: IMA group index

ID: IMA ID
GSM-State(NE): IMA group status
---: Line module uninstalled
not-configured: IMA group unregistered
startup: Waiting for associated IMA activation
startup-ack: Waiting for transition to next status
unsupported-length: Associated IMA mismatch (unsupported frame length)
incompatible-symmetry: Associated IMA mismatch (incompatible symmetry)
unsupported-version: Associated IMA mismatch (unsupported IMA version)
other: Associated IMA mismatch (others)
insufficient-links: Insufficient number of links
blocked: IMA group blocked status
operational: Operation status
GSM-State(FE): Associated IMA group status
* Same as GSM-State(NE) above
Failure-State: IMA group failure status
no-failure: No failure information
startup-ne: Waiting for transition to next status
startup-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA)
invalid-length-ne: Unsupported frame length
invalid-length-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA)
failed-asymmetric-ne: Incompatible symmetry
failed-asymmetric-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA)
invalid-version-ne: Unsupported IMA version
invalid-version-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA)
other-failure: Other failure
insufficient-links-ne: Insufficient links
insufficient-links-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA)
blocked-ne: Group blocked
blocked-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA)
LID: Link ID
TxState(NE): IMA Tx link status
not-group: IMA group unregistered
fault: Failure (user individual)
misconnect: Failure (misconnect)
inhibited: Failure (blocked status)
failed: Failure (LCD, LIF, LODS, etc.)
no-given: Failure (others)
usable: Waiting for transition to next status
active: Link up
RxState(NE): IMA Rx link status
* Same as TxState(NE) above
TxState(FE):
RxState(FE):
15-6
ATM-IMA
Failure-State:
no-failure: No failure information
failure: Failure (others)
LIF-failure: Failure (LIF)
LODS-failure: Failure (LODS)
misconnect: Failure (misconnect)
blocked: Failure (blocked status)
fault: Failure (user individual)
tx-unusable: Waiting for transition to next Tx status
rx-unusable: Waiting for transition to next Rx status
Related
commands
set ima group

clear ima group

15-7
ATM-IMA
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear ima group

Clears an IMA group.
Input format
clear ima group P1
Parameter
P1: IMA group index (1 to 48) (single specification)
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear ima group 48

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ima group


15-8
ATM-IMA
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ima clock

Sets the IMA clock mode.
Input format
set ima clock P1 P2
Parameters

P2: Transmit clock mode { ctc | itc }
ctc: Common Transmit Clock mode
itc: Independent Transmit Clock mode
Default value
P2: ctc
Usage condition
None
Note
If a line module to which an IMA group has already been set is specified, the IMA group
automatically performs the setting again. Communication is suspended until the IMA
group re-setting is completed (i.e., operational state).
Input example
Switch@1# set ima clock 1-3,5 itc

Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ima group

show ima clock

15-9
ATM-IMA
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show ima clock

Shows IMA clock mode setting information.
Input format
show ima clock [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, IMA clock mode information on all line modules whose line
module type is ATMP or to which ATMP line module is installed is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
Switch@1# show ima clock 2-6

Transmit Clock Mode Information
===============================
Slot Mode
---------2 itc
3 itc
4 ctc
5 ctc
6 itc
Switch@1#
Output items

Mode: Transmit clock mode
ctc: Common Transmit Clock mode
itc: Independent Transmit Clock mode
Related
command
set ima clock
15-10
ATM-IMA
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
loopback ima
Starting and result display of IMA loopback test
Starts an IMA loopback test and shows the result.
Input format
loopback ima P1 P2
Parameters

P2: Test pattern (0 to 254) (single specification)
Default value
None
Usage condition
An IMA group must be set in advance for the port (line) to which the loopback test is
performed.
Note
Enter Ctrl+C to suspend the test.
Input example
*Switch@1# loopback ima 10/1 123

result 10/1 time=30ms test ok
result 10/8 time=40ms test ok
result 10/2 timeout
result 10/3 timeout
result 10/4 timeout
result 10/5 timeout
result 10/6 timeout
result 10/7 timeout
loopback information for 10/1
IMA-ID
1
test pattern 123
group ports = 8 : ok = 2 : fail = 6 (75% failure)
minimum = 30msec, maximum = 40msec, average = 35msec
*Switch@1#
15-11
ATM-IMA
Output items
Result display per port

result a/b: Test slot/port number
time=XXXms: Time required for the test
(This item is displayed only when the test result is test ok.1)
{ result message }: Result (see below)
test ok: Normal end
time out: Test result timeout (5 seconds)
abort: Suspension by Ctrl+C entry
Statistics display
loopback information for a/b: Tested slot/port number
IMA ID = N: IMA ID to which the tested port (line) belongs
test pattern = X: Value of test pattern used for test
group ports = Y: Number of tested IMA group ports
(including the loopback start port specified in P1)
ok: Number of ports whose test result is OK
fail: Number of ports whose test result is NG (time out or abort)
(Z% failure): Rate of unsuccessful loopback test
({ fail x 100 }) / ({ group ports })
minimum = XXXmsec: Minimum test time
maximum = YYYmsec: Maximum test time
average = ZZZmsec: Average test time
Related
command
set ima group
15-12
TDM-Path
16 TDM-Path
16-1
TDM-Path
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set tdm group

Setting of TDM group
Sets a TDM group.
Input formats
- For TDMP line module

set tdm group P1 P2 (e1 | t1) P3 P4
- For TDMP155 line module
set tdm group P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 P4 P5
Parameters

P2: Frame type { e1 | t1 | sdh | sonet }
e1: Specification for E1 mode
t1: Specification for T1 mode
sdh: Specification for SDH mode
sonet: Specification for SONET mode
When e1 or t1 is specified in P2
P3: Group number or group name
Group number (single specification)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
Group name: 1 to 32 characters
P4: Time slot number (Multiple values can be specified.)
E1 mode: 1 to 31
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
P5: Time slot number (Multiple values can be specified.)
SDH mode: 1 to 31
SONET mode: 1 to 24
Default value
None
Usage
conditions
tdm must be set in the TDMP line mode setting or the TDMP155 line mode setting in
advance.
Time slot numbers, group numbers, or group names already set to a group within the
same port (line) cannot be used.
16-2
TDM-Path
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
tdm
tdm
tdm
tdm
tdm
group
group
group
group
group
1/1 e1 1 1
2/1 e1 1 1-31
12/8 t1 24 1-24
3/1 sdh 1/1/1 1 1
4/1 sonet 1/7/4 SONET_1 1-24
Output item
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set port impedance
set tdm group-name
set tdm path
show tdm group
clear tdm group

Setting of TDM group name
Setting of TDM path
Display of TDM group setting information
Clearing of TDM group
16-3
TDM-Path
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show tdm group

Shows TDM group setting information.
Input formats

show tdm group [ P1 [ P3 ] ]
show tdm group [ P1 [P2 [P3] ] ]
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
* When P2 is omitted, TDM group setting information on all TDM groups set to the
ports (lines) specified in P1 is shown.
Group number (Multiple values can be specified.)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
* When P3 is omitted in the E1 or T1 mode, TDM group setting information on all TDM
groups set to the port (line) specified in P1 is shown.
* When P3 is omitted in the SDH or SONET mode, TDM group setting information on
all TDM groups set to the port (line) specified in P1 and the logical port number
specified in P2 is shown.
* When all parameters are omitted, TDM group setting information on all ports (lines) set
to the TDM mode is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
Specify P2 when a TDMP155 line module is installed.
16-4
TDM-Path
Input examples
*Switch@1# show tdm group

TDM Group Registration Table
============================
Logical
Port Port
Group Name
Time Slot Type
----------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 --1
1-32
e1
1/2 --1 CX2600_220_MBH_E1_GROUP_AAAAAAAA 1-32
e1
4/1 3/1/1
32 CX2600_220_MBH_SDH_GROUP_BBBBBBB 1
sdh
12/1 1/3/4
24 CX2600_220_MBH_SONET_GROUP_CCCCC 1-24
sonet
*Switch@1#
Output items

Group: Group number
Name: Group name
Time Slot: Time slot number
Type: Frame type
e1/sdh or t1/sonet
Related
commands
set tdm group

clear tdm group

16-5
TDM-Path
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear tdm group

Clears a TDM group.
Input formats

clear tdm group P1 [P2 (e1 | t1) P3]
clear tdm group P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 [P4]
Parameters

E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
* When P2 and P3 are omitted, all TDM groups set to the port (line) specified in
P1 and the frame type specified in P2 are cleared.
SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
* When P4 is omitted, all TDM groups set to the port (line) specified in P1, the
frame type specified in P2, and the logical port number specified in P3 are
cleared.
Default value
None
Usage
conditions
advance.
If a group to which a TDM path is set is specified, an error occurs.
Note
If P2, P3 (when E1 or T1), or P4 (when SDH or SONET) is omitted, execution is verified

after the command entry.
16-6
TDM-Path
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear tdm group 1/1 e1 1

*Switch@1# clear tdm group 1/1 sdh 2/5/1 32
*Switch@1# clear tdm group 8/5 e1 E1_GROUP_1
*Switch@1# clear tdm group 12/8
*Switch@1# clear tdm group 12/1 sonet 1/7/4
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set tdm path
set tdm group-name
set tdm group
show tdm group

Setting of TDM path
16-7
TDM-Path
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set tdm group-name

Sets a group name for a TDM group.
Input formats

set tdm group-name P1 P2 (e1 | t1) P3 P5
set tdm group-name P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 P4 P5
Parameters

P3: Group number
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
P4: Group number
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
P5: Group name (1 to 32 characters)
Default value
None
Usage condition
The TDMP line mode or the TDMP155 line mode must be set in advance.
Note
If a command that changes the frame type is entered in the TDMP line mode setting or
the TDMP155 line mode setting, the TDM group name of the line module is cleared.
Input examples
*Switch@1# set tdm group-name 1/1 e1 1 E1GROUP_1

*Switch@1# set tdm group-name 3/1 sdh 1/1/1 3 SDHGROUP_1
Output item
16-8
TDM-Path
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set tdm path
set tdm group
show tdm group
clear tdm group
show tdm group-name
clear tdm group-name

Setting of TDM path
Display of TDM group name setting
Clearing of TDM group name setting
16-9
TDM-Path
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show tdm group-name

Shows the group name setting for a TDM group.
Input formats

show tdm group-name [P1 [P3]]
show tdm group-name [P1 [P2 [P3]]]
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
* When P2 is omitted, the group name setting on all TDM groups set to the ports
(lines) specified in P1 is shown.
Group number (multiple specification)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
* When P3 is omitted in the E1 or T1 mode, the group name setting on all TDM groups
set to the ports (lines) specified in P1 is shown.
* When P3 is omitted in the SDH or SONET mode, the group name setting on all TDM
groups set to the ports (lines) specified in P1 and the logical port number specified in
P2 is shown.
* When all parameters are omitted, the group name setting on all ports (lines) set to the
TDM mode is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
16-10
TDM-Path
Input example
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show tdm group-name
TDM Group Name Table
====================
Logical
Port Port
Group Name
-----------------------------------------------------1/8
--1 CX2600_220_MBH_GROUP_NAME_AAAAAA
7/1
3/7/3
32 CX2600_220_SDH_GROUP_NAME_BBBBBB
12/1
3/7/4
24 CX2600_220_SONET_GROUP_NAME_CCCC
*Switch@1#
Output items

Group: Group number
Name: Group name
Related
commands
set tdm group

set tdm group-name

16-11
TDM-Path
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clears group name setting for a TDM group.
Input formats

clear tdm group-name P1 [P2 (e1 | t1) P3]
clear tdm group-name P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 [P4]
Parameters

E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
* When P2 and P3 are omitted, all TDM group names set for the port (line)
number specified in P1 and the frame type specified in P2 are cleared.
SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
* When P4 is omitted, all TDM group names set for the port (line) number
specified in P1, the frame type specified in P2, and the logical port number
Default value
None
Usage
conditions
The TDMP line mode or the TDMP155 line mode must be set in advance.
When a group name is specified, an error occurs when the group name does not exist.
Note
None
16-12
TDM-Path
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear tdm group-name 1/1 sdh 1/1/1 1

*Switch@1# clear tdm group-name 1/1 sonet 1/1/1
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set tdm group
show tdm group
set tdm group-name
show tdm group-name

16-13
TDM-Path
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set tdm path

Setting of TDM path
Sets a TDM path.
Input formats
- Path setting between TDMP line modules

set tdm path P1 [P3] P4 [P6]
- Path setting between TDMP155 line modules
set tdm path P1 P2 [P3] P4 P5 [P6]
- Path setting from TDMP line module to TDMP155 line module
set tdm path P1 [P3] P4 P5 [P6]
- Path setting from TDMP155 line module to TDMP line module
set tdm path P1 P2 [P3] P4 [P6]
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
* When group number is omitted, 1 is assumed.
P4: Port (line) number of path destination (single specification)
P5: Logical port (line) number of path destination
SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
P6: Group number or group name of path destination
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
* When group number is omitted, 1 is assumed.
Default value
None
16-14
TDM-Path
Usage
conditions
advance.
If a group number or group name to which a TDM group is not set, an error occurs.
If a group to which a TDM path has already been set is specified, an error occurs.
If a TDM path is set within the same port (line) or the same logical port, an error occurs.
If groups with different frame type each other are specified, an error occurs.
A path can be set only to groups with the same number of time slots.
Note
Two TDM groups are created to set a TDM path.
Input example
*Switch@1# set tdm path 1/1 1 2/1 1

*Switch@1# set tdm path 1/1 2/1 1/1/3
*Switch@1# set tdm path 1/1 GROUP_NUM_1 2/1 2
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set tdm group
set tdm group-name
show tdm path
clear tdm path

Display of TDM path setting information
Clearing of TDM path
16-15
TDM-Path
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show tdm path

Shows TDM path setting information.
Input formats

show tdm path [P1 [P3]]
show tdm path [P1 [P2 [P3]]]
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
* When P2 is omitted, TDM path setting information on all TDM paths set to the port
(line) specified in P1 is shown.
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
* When P3 is omitted in the E1 or T1 mode, TDM path setting information on all TDM
paths set to the port (line) specified in P1 is shown.
* When P3 is omitted in the SDH or SONET mode, TDM path setting information on all
TDM paths set to the port (line) specified in P1 or the logical port number specified in
P2 is shown.
* When all parameters are omitted, TDM path setting information on all ports (lines) set
to the TDM mode is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
Information is displayed based on the small port (line) number with TDM path setting.
side-A and side-B displayed in the side column indicate the pair of the TDM path setting.
16-16
TDM-Path
Input examples
*Switch@1# show tdm path

TDM Path Connection Table
=========================
Logical
Port Port
Group Name
Time Slot Type
Side
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1/1
--1 CX2600_220_MBH_E1_GROUP_NAME_AAA 1-16
e1
side-A
12/1
--32 CX2600_220_123456789012345678901 16-31
e1
side-B
2/1
1/1/1
24 CX2600_220_MBH_SONET_GROUP_BBBBB 1-24
sonet
side-A
4/1
2/2/2
1 CX2600_220_MBH_SONET_GROUP_CCCCC 1-24
sonet
side-B
*Switch@1#
Output items

Group: Group number
Name: TDM group name
Time Slot: Time slot number
Time slot number or unstructured
Type: Frame type
e1/sdh or t1/sonet
Side: side-A or side-B
Related
commands
set tdm group-name

set tdm path
clear tdm path

Setting of TDM path
16-17
TDM-Path
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear tdm path

Clears a TDM path.
Input formats

clear tdm path P1 [ P3 ]
clear tdm path P1 P2 [ P3 ]
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
* When P3 is omitted in the E1 or T1 mode, all TDM paths set to the port (line)
* When P3 is omitted in the SDH or SONET mode, all TDM paths set to the port (line)
specified in P1 or the logical port number specified in P2 are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
advance.
Note
To clear a TDM path setting, specify one from the port (line) number, the group number,
or the group number used for the TDM path setting. (Specifying the port (line) number,
the group number, or the group name clears the TDM path setting.)
If P3 is omitted, execution is verified after the command entry.
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear tdm path 1/1 1

*Switch@1# clear tdm path 1/1 GROUP_NUM_1
*Switch@1# clear tdm path 12/8
Output item
16-18
TDM-Path
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set tdm group
set tdm group-name
set tdm path
show tdm path

Setting of TDM path
16-19
TDM-Path
(Blank page)
16-20
TDM over Packet
17 TDM over Packet
17-1
TDM over Packet

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set tdmop mode

Sets the TDMoP mode.
Input formats
- TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) setting

set tdmop mode P1 P2 P3 (mef) [P6] [P7] [P8]
- TDM over UDP/IP setting
set tdmop mode P1 P2 P3 (udp-ip) P4 [P5] [P6] [P7] [P8]
Parameters

P2: TDMoP operation mode { satop | cesopsn }
satop: SAToP
cesopsn: CESoPSN
P3: Packet format { mef | udp-ip }
mef: TDM over Ethernet (MEF8)
udp-ip: TDM over UDP/IP
When udp-ip is specified in P3
P4: Source IP address
P5: Flow identification method { udp-src | udp-dst }
udp-src: Distribution method by UDP port (src) + IP (src)
udp-dst: Distribution method by UDP port (dst) + IP (src)
* When P5 is omitted, udp-src is assumed.
P6: Number of sent frames (1 to 8)
P7: RTP header setting { rtp_on | rtp_off }
rtp_on: With RTP header
rtp_off: Without RTP header
* When P6 is omitted, rtp_on is assumed.
P8: Jitter buffer control method { static | dynamic }
static: Static mode
dynamic: Dynamic mode
* When P8 is omitted, static is assumed.
Default values
When mef is selected in P3: P6: 8, P7: rtp_on, P8: static

When udp-ip is selected in P3: P5: udp-src, P6: 8, P7: rtp_on, P8: static
Usage
conditions
TDMP/TDMP 155 line mode must have been set to none.

You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the manager IP address. (xxx is any number.)
For a line module for which APS is enabled, specify the smaller slot number. (The
greater slot number cannot be specified.)
Note
None
17-2
TDM over Packet

Input example
*Switch@1# set tdmop mode 1 cesopsn mef 5 rtp_off

*Switch@1# set tdmop mode 12 satop mef rtp_off
*Switch@1# set tdmop mode 11 cesopsn udp-ip 192.168.1.1 4 udp-src rtp_on
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set tdmop group
set tdmop jitter
set tdmop adaptive-clock
set tdmop format
set tdmop connection
set tdmop admin
clear tdmop mode
show tdmop format

Setting of variation tolerance
Setting of adaptive clock
Setting of TDMoP format
Setting of TDMoP connection
Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblocking
Clearing of TDMoP mode setting
Display of TDMoP format setting
17-3
TDM over Packet

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear tdmop mode

Clearing of TDMoP mode setting
Clears the settings of a TDMoP mode.
Input format
clear tdmop mode P1
Parameter
Default value
None
Usage condition
TDMP/TDMP 155 line mode must have been set to none.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear tdmop mode 1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set tdmop mode

17-4
TDM over Packet

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set tdmop group

Sets a TDMoP group.
Input formats

set tdmop group P1 P2 (e1 | t1) P3 P4
set tdmop group P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 P4 P5
Parameters

E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
P4: Time slot number
E1 mode
To specify time slot numbers: 1 to 31 (Multiple values can be specified.)
To specify all the time slots: all
T1 mode
SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
P5: Time slot number
SDH mode
SONET mode
17-5
TDM over Packet

Default value
None
Usage
conditions
TDMP/TDMP 155 line mode must have been set to tdmop.

If 121 or more TDMoP groups are specified for a TDMP line module, an error occurs.
If 85 or more TDMoP groups are specified for a TDMP155 line module, an error occurs.
* Up to 28 groups can be specified for a TUG-3 or a STS-1.
To specify a timeslot number, TDMoP operation mode must be set to CESoPSN mode
by using the set tdmop mode command.
A timeslot number or group number that has been set for another group in an identical
port (line) cannot be specified.
Notes
Variation tolerance is set to the default value.
Input examples
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
tdmop
tdmop
tdmop
tdmop
tdmop
group
group
group
group
group
1/1 e1 1 1-32
12/1 t1 1 1-24
12/7 t1 1 all
2/1 sdh 1/2/1 1 all
6/1 sonet 1/1/1 SONET_1 all
Output item
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set port impedance
set tdmop mode
set tdmop jitter
set tdmop format
set tdmop admin
set tdm group-name
show tdmop information
clear tdmop group

Display of TDMoP group setting information
Clearing of TDMoP group
17-6
TDM over Packet

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows TDMoP group setting information.
Input formats

show tdmop information [P1 [P3]]
show tdmop information [P1 [P2 [P3]]]
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
* When P2 is omitted, TDMoP group setting information on all TDMoP groups set for
the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
* When P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, TDMoP group setting information on all
TDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.
* When P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, TDMoP group setting information on
all TDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1 and for the logical
port number specified in P2 is shown.
* When all the parameters are omitted, TDMoP group setting information on all ports
(lines) set to TDMoP mode is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
17-7
TDM over Packet

Input examples
*Switch@1# show tdmop information

TDMoP Group Count
=================
TUG-3/
Slot STS-1 Enabled Disabled Configured Configurable
--------------------------------------------------------1
1
1
0
1
27
1
2
1
0
1
27
1
3
1
0
1
27
2
--1
0
1
119
3
--0
1
1
119
4
1
1
0
1
27
4
2
0
0
0
28
4
3
0
0
0
28
TDMoP Group Table
=================
Logical
Port Port Group Name
Time Slot
Type
----------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 1/1/1
1 CX2600_220_MBH_CES_MBH_GROUP_001 all
sdh
1/1 2/5/3
32
all
sdh
1/1 3/2/2
10 CX2600_220_MBH_SDH_3_1_1_GROUP10 all
sdh
2/1
--2
all
e1
3/1
--3 CX2600_220_MBH_CES_MBH_GROUP_007 all
t1
4/1 1/7/4
4 CX2600_220_MBH_CES_MBH_GROUP_005 all
sonet
*Switch@1#
Output items

TUG-3 / STS-1: TUG-3 or STS-1
Enabled: Number of groups unblocked
Disabled: Number of groups blocked
Configured: Number of groups that have been set
Configurable: Rest number of groups that allowed to be set
Group: Group number
Name: Group name
Time Slot: Time slot
Timeslot number(s) or all
Type: Frame type
e1/sdh or t1/sonet
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set tdmop admin
set tdm group-name
set tdmop group
clear tdmop group

17-8
TDM over Packet

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear tdmop group

Clears a TDMoP group.
Input formats

clear tdmop group P1 [P2 (e1 | t1) P3]
clear tdmop group P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 [P4]
Parameters

E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 11 to 24
* When both P2 and P3 are omitted, TDMoP group setting information on all
TDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is cleared.
SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
* When P4 is omitted, TDMoP group setting information on all TDMoP groups
set for the port (line) number specified in P1, with the frame type specified in
P2 and for the logical port specified in P3 is cleared.
Default value
None
Usage
conditions

If a group to which any of the following is set is specified, an error occurs.
set tdmop format
17-9
TDM over Packet

Notes
If a group to which variation tolerance has been set is cleared, the variation tolerance
returns to the default value.
If a group to which adaptive clock has been set is cleared, adaptive clock setting for the
group is also cleared automatically.
If P3 and P4 are omitted, execution is verified after the command entry.
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear tdmop group 1/1 e1 1

*Switch@1# clear tdmop group 5/8 t1 T1_01
*Switch@1# clear tdmop group 7/1 sdh 3/3/3
*Switch@1# clear tdmop group 12/8
Output item
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set tdmop format
set tdmop jitter
set reference-clock priority
set tdm group-name
set tdmop group

Setting of reference clock priority
17-10
TDM over Packet

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets a TDMoP connection.
Input formats
- Connection between TDMP line modules

set tdmop connection P1 P3 P4 P5 P7 P8 P9 [P10]
- Connection between TDMP155 line modules
set tdmop connection P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 [P10]
- Connection from a TDMP line module to a TDMP155 line module
set tdmop connection P1 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 [P10]
- Connection from a TDMP155 line module to a TDMP line module
set tdmop connection P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P7 P8 P9 [P10]
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
P4: ECID or UDP port number
ECID: 1 to 1048575
UDP port number: 1024 to 65535
P5: Loopback destination port (line) number (single specification)
P6: Loopback destination logical port number
SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
P7: Group number or group name of Loopback destination
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
When ECID is specified in P4
P8: Loopback destination ECID (1 to 1048575)
When UDP port number is specified in P4
P8: Loopback destination UDP port number (1024 to 65535)
17-11
TDM over Packet

VLAN ID: 1 to 4094
P10: CoS value (0 to 7)
Default value
P10: 5
Usage
conditions
If a group to which no TDMoP group is set is specified, an error occurs.

If connection setting is executed specifying an identical port (line) during a TDMP line
module is installed, an error occurs.
If connection setting is executed specifying an identical port (line) and an identical
logical port during TDMP155 line mode is applied, an error occurs.
If a VLAN ID which is set for ATMoP or the like is specified, an error occurs.
The ECID and the UDP port number must be unique in an identical line module.
set tdmop format
An error occurs if the packet formats (set in the TDMoP mode setting) of the port (line)
numbers specified in P1 and P5 are different.
A TDMoP connection with ECID specification cannot be set when TDM over UDP/IP is
selected as the packet format.
A TDMoP connection with UDP port number specification cannot be set when TDM over
Ethernet is selected as the packet format.
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
tdmop
tdmop
tdmop
tdmop
tdmop
connection
connection
connection
connection
connection
1/1
1/2
4/1
6/1
7/2
1 100 12/8 32 101 1000 7

10 1 1/8 18 2 4094
1/1/1 1 100 5/1 1/2/3 1 10 4094 2
1/1/1 GRP_1 100 10/5 GRP_5 10 3000 2
4 udp 3100 11/1 3/3/3 3 udp 3200 340
Output item
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set tdmop mode
set tdmop group
set tdm group-name
set tdmop jitter
set tdmop format
set tdmop admin
show tdmop connection
clear tdmop connection

Display of TDMoP connection setting
Clearing of TDMoP connection
17-12
TDM over Packet

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows the setting of a TDMoP connection.
Input formats

show tdmop connection [P1 [P3]]
show tdmop connection [P1 [P2 [P3]]]
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
* When P2 is omitted, TDMoP connection setting information on all connections set
for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
* When P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, TDMoP connection setting information on all
connections set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.
* When P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, TDMoP connection setting information
on all connections set for the port (line) number specified in P1 and for the logical
* When all the parameters are omitted, TDMoP connection setting information on all
ports (lines) to which TDMoP connections are set is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
17-13
TDM over Packet

Input example
*Switch@1# show tdmop connection

TDMoP Mode Config Table
=======================
TDMoP
Packet Filter Frame RTP
Jitter
Slot Mode
Format Mode
Count Header Mode
-----------------------------------------------------3 satop
udp-ip udp-src
7 on
dynamic
4 cesopsn mef
--5 off
static
TDMoP Connection L2 Config Table
================================
Logical
Logical
Port Port
Group
ECID Port Port
Group
ECID VID CoS
----------------------------------------------------------------------3/1
--3
--- 3/4
--5
--3000
7
4/1
3/7/3
6 1048575 7/1
3/7/3
7 1000000 2000
7
TDMoP Connection L3 Config Table
================================
Logical
UDP
Logical
UDP
Port Port
Group Port Port Port
Group Port
-------------------------------------------------------3/1
--3 65535 3/4
--5 3000
*Switch@1#
Output items
- TDMoP Mode Config Table

TDMoP Mode: TDMoP operation mode
satop or cesopsn
Packet Format: Packet format
mef or udp-ip
Filter Mode: Flow identification method
udp-src or udp-dst
Frame Count: Number of transmitted frames
RTP Header: RTP header setting
on or off
Jitter Mode: Jitter buffer control method
static or dynamic
- TDMoP Connection L2 Config Table
Group: Group number
ECID: ECID value
Port: Loopback destination port (line) number
Logical Port: Loopback destination logical port number
Group: Loopback destination group number
ECID: Loopback destination ECID value
VID: VLAN ID
CoS: CoS value
17-14
TDM over Packet

- TDMoP Connection L3 Config Table
Group: Group number
UDP Port: UDP port number
Port: Loopback destination port (line) number
Logical Port: Loopback destination logical port number
Group: Loopback destination group number
UDP Port: Loopback destination DDP port (line) number
Related
commands


17-15
TDM over Packet

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clears the setting of a TDMoP connection.
Input formats

clear tdmop connection P1 [P3]
clear tdmop connection P1 P2 [P3]
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
* When P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, all TDMoP connection settings set for the port
(line) number specified in P1 are cleared.
* When P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, all TDMoP connection settings set for
the port (line) number specified in P1 and for the logical port number specified in P2
are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
If P3 is omitted, execution is verified after the command entry.

If setting of a TDMoP connection is cleared, connection setting of the loopback
destination of the cleared connection is also cleared automatically.
If the TDMoP is blocked, it is automatically unblocked.
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear tdmop connection 1/1 1

*Switch@1# clear tdmop connection 12/8
Output item
Related
commands
set tdm group-name

set tdmop admin

17-16
TDM over Packet

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set tdmop jitter

Sets variation tolerance.
Input formats

set tdmop jitter P1 P3 P4
set tdmop jitter P1 P2 P3 P4
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
P4: jitter value (variation) tolerance { 2ms | 4ms | 8ms | 16ms | 32ms | 64ms | 128ms }
2ms: 2 milliseconds
4ms: 4 milliseconds
8ms: 8 milliseconds
16ms: 16 milliseconds
Default value
P4: 4ms
Usage
conditions
Only a group number or a group name to which a TDMoP group is set can be specified.
If variation tolerance is set to a group to which the following commands have been
executed, an error occurs.
set tdmop format
* However, setting is available even under the above conditions when
blocking/unblocking setting of the TDMoP is blocked.
17-17
TDM over Packet

Notes
If a TDMoP group is set, the variation tolerance is set back to the default value.
If a TDMoP group is cleared, the variation tolerance is set back to the default value.
To return to the default value, enter the command specifying 4ms in P4.
If the dynamic mode is selected for the jitter buffer control mode, other than 2ms, 4ms,
or 8ms cannot be set in P4.
Input examples
*Switch@1# set tdmop jitter 1/1 1 16ms

*Switch@1 set tdmop jitter 2/1 2/2/2 1 4ms
Output item
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set tdmop mode
set tdmop group
set tdm group-name
clear tdmop group
set tdmop format
set tdmop admin
show tdmop jitter

Display of variation tolerance
17-18
TDM over Packet

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show tdmop jitter

Display of variation tolerance
Shows variation tolerance.
Input formats

show tdmop jitter [P1 [P3]]
show tdmop jitter [P1 [P2 [P3]]]
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
* When P2 is omitted, all variation tolerance set for the port (line) number specified in
P1 is shown.
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
* When P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, all variation tolerance set for the port (line)
number specified in P1 is shown.
* When P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, all variation tolerance set for the port
(line) number specified in P1 and for the logical port number specified in P2 is
shown.
* When all the parameters are omitted, variation tolerance on all ports (lines) to which
TDMoP groups are set is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
17-19
TDM over Packet

Input examples
*Switch@1# show tdmop jitter

TDMoP Jitter Configuration
==========================
Logical
Port Port
Group Jitter
----------------------------1/1
1/1/1
1
32ms
1/1
1/1/2
2
16ms
1/1
1/1/3
15
8ms
:
:
12/8
--32
2ms
*Switch@1#
Output items

Group: Group number
Jitter: Variation tolerance
Related
commands
set tdmop group

set tdmop group-name
set tdmop jitter

Setting of TDMoP group name
17-20
TDM over Packet

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show tdmop status

Display of TDMoP path setting status information
Shows TDMoP path setting status information.
Input formats

show tdmop status [P1 [P3]]
show tdmop status [P1 [P2 [P3]]]
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
* When P2 is omitted, TDMoP path setting status information on all TDMoP groups
set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
* When P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, TDMoP path setting status information on all
TDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.
* When P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, TDMoP path setting status information
on all TDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1 and for the logical
* When all the parameters are omitted, TDMoP path setting status information on all
ports (lines) to which TDMoP groups are set is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
17-21
TDM over Packet

Input examples
*Switch@1# show tdmop status

TDMoP Status Table
==================
Logical
Port
Port
Group Underrun Admin
---------------------------------------1/1
--1
normal
enabled
5/1
1/1/1
1
normal
enabled
5/1
2/2/2
2
fault
disabled
12/8
--24
fault
disabled
*Switch@1#
Output items

Group: Group number
Underrun: Buffer Underrun status
normal: Buffer Underrun not occurred
fault: Buffer Underrun occurred
Admin: TDMoP blocking/unblocking setting
enabled: Unblocked
disabled: Blocked
Related
commands
set tdmop group-name

set tdmop group
set tdmop admin
Setting of TDMoP group name

Setting of TDMoP blocking
17-22
TDM over Packet

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set tdmop format

Sets a TDMoP format.
Input formats

When TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) is set for the packet format
set tdmop format P1 P3 P4 P5 [P6] P7 (ECID value)
When TDM over UDP/IP is set for the packet format
set tdmop format P1 P3 P4 P5 [P6] P7 (Destination IP address) P8 [P9] [P10]
When TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) is set for the packet format
set tdmop format P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 [P6] P7 (ECID value)
When TDM over UDP/IP is set for the packet format
set tdmop format P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 [P6] P7 (Destination IP address) P8 [P9] [P10]
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
P5: VLAN identifier 1 { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID (1 to 4094)
P6: CoS value (0 to 7)
When TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) is set for the packet format in the TDMoP mode
setting
P7: ECID
ecid 1 to 1048575
When TDM over UDP/IP is set for the packet format in the TDMoP mode setting
P7: Destination IP address
P8: UDP port number udp (1024 to 65535)
P9: TTL ttl (1 to 255)
P10: DSCP dscp (0 to 63)
17-23
TDM over Packet

Default values
- When TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) is set for the packet format in the TDMoP mode
setting
P6: 5
- When TDM over UDP/IP is set for the packet format in the TDMoP mode setting
P6: 5, P9: 128, P10: 46
Usage
conditions
A TDMoP format can be set only to a group number or a group name to which a TDMoP
group is set.
If a VLAN ID which is set for ATMoP is specified, an error occurs.
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx or 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as
the IP address. (xxx is any number.)
You cannot set network address of 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24.
If you specify the same destination IP address as the source IP address, an error
occurs.
The ECID and UDP port number must be unique in an identical line module.
set tdmop format
When TDM over UDP/IP is selected for the packet format, you cannot set the TDMoP
format with ECID specification.
When TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) is selected for the packet format, you cannot set the
TDMoP format with UDP port number specification.
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# set tdmop format 1/1 1 00:00:00:00:00:01 1000 7 ecid 10

*Switch@1# set tdmop format 11/1 2/3/1 10 00:00:00:11:11:11 10 10.40.30.7
udp 2 100
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set tdmop mode
set tdmop group
set tdm group-name
set tdmop jitter
set vlan name
set atmop format
show tdmop format
clear tdmop format

Clearing of TDMoP format
17-24
TDM over Packet

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show tdmop format

Shows the TDMoP format setting.
Input formats

show tdmop format [P1 [P3]]
show tdmop format [P1 [P2 [P3]]]
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
* When P2 is omitted, setting information of all TDMoP formats set for the port (line)
number specified in P1 is shown.
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
* When P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, setting information of all TDMoP formats set
for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.
* When P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, setting information of all TDMoP
formats set for the port (line) number specified in P1 and for the logical port number
specified in P2 is shown.
* When all the parameters are omitted, TDMoP format setting information on all ports
(lines) to which TDMoP formats are set is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
When APS is enabled, the source MAC addresses are displayed in two lines. The
character * is attached to the display of the enabled one.
17-25
TDM over Packet

Input example
*Switch@1# show tdmop format

TDMoP Mode Config Table
=======================
TDMoP
Packet Filter Frame RTP
Jitter
Slot Mode
Format Mode
Count Header Mode
-----------------------------------------------------1 satop
mef
--8 on
dynamic
2 cesopsn udp-ip udp-src
8 off
static
TDMoP Format Address Table
==========================
Source
Source
Slot MAC Address
IP Address
---------------------------------------1 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa --*00:30:13:a1:2a:af
2 00:30:13:a1:2a:ab 192.168.100.100
TDMoP Format L2 Config Table
============================
Logical
Destination
Port Port
Group MAC Address
VID CoS
ECID
----------------------------------------------------------1/1
--1 00:00:00:00:00:01 1000
7 1048575
2/1
1/1/1
2 00:00:00:00:00:02 2000
6
--TDMoP Format L3 Config Table
============================
Logical
Source
Destination
Destination
Port Port
Group UDP Port IP Address
UDP Port
TTL DSCP
----------------------------------------------------------------------2/1
1/1/1
2
65535 172.1.1.1
2142 255
63
*Switch@1#
17-26
TDM over Packet

Output items
- TDMoP Mode Config Table

TDMoP Mode: TDMoP operation mode
satop or cesopsn
Packet Format: Packet format
mef or udp-ip
Filter Mode: Flow identification method
udp-src or udp-dst
Frame Count: Number of transmitted frames
RTP Header: RTP header flag
on or off
Jitter Mode: Jitter buffer control method
static or dynamic
- TDMoP Format Address Table
Source MAC Address: Source MAC address
Source IP Address: Source IP address
- TDMoP Format L2 Config Table
Group: Group number
Destination MAC Address: Destination MAC address
VID: VLAN ID
CoS: CoS value
ECID: ECID value
- TDMoP Format L3 Config Table
Group: Group number
Source UDP Port: Source UDP port number
Destination IP Address: Destination IP address
Destination UDP Port: Destination UDP port number
TTL: TTL value
DSCP: DSCP value
Related
commands
set tdmop mode

set tdm group-name
set tdmop format
clear tdmop format

17-27
TDM over Packet

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear tdmop format

Clears a TDMoP format.
Input formats

clear tdmop format P1 [P3]
clear tdmop format P1 P2 [P3]
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
* When P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, setting information of all TDMoP formats set
for the port (line) number specified in P1 is cleared.
* When P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, setting information of all TDMoP
formats set for the port (line) number specified in P1 and for the logical port number
specified in P2 is cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
If P3 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command is entered.

If the blocking/unblocking setting of TDMoP is blocked, it is changed to unblocked
automatically.
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear tdmop format 1/1 8

*Switch@1# clear tdmop format 1/1
*Switch@1#
Output item
17-28
TDM over Packet

Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set tdm group-name
set tdmop admin
set tdmop format
show tdmop format

17-29
TDM over Packet

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set tdmop admin

Sets whether to block or unblock TDMoP.
Input formats

set tdmop admin P1 P3 P4
set tdmop admin P1 P2 P3 P4
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
P4: Blocking/unblocking setting { enable | disable }
enable: Unblocks TDMoP
disable: Blocks TDMoP
Default value
P4: enable
Usage condition
If a group to which neither a TDMoP format nor a TDMoP connection is set is specified,
an error occurs.
Note
If a TDMoP format or TDMoP connection is cleared when TDMoP is blocked, the

blocking state is automatically cleared.
Input examples
*Switch@1# set tdmop admin 1/1 1/1/1 1 disable

*Switch@1# set tdmop admin 8/8 8 enable
Output item
17-30
TDM over Packet

Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set tdmop mode
set tdmop group
set tdm group-name
set tdmop jitter
set tdmop format
show tdmop status

Display of TDMoP path setting status information
17-31
TDM over Packet

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets the adaptive clock.
Input formats

set tdmop adaptive-clock P1 P3 [P4]
set tdmop adaptive-clock P1 P2 P3 [P4]
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
P4: Network type { narrow | middle | wide }
narrow: Small scale
middle: Medium scale
wide: Large scale
* When P4 is omitted, wide is assumed.
Default value
P4: wide
Usage
conditions

If a group to which neither a TDMoP group number nor a group name is set is specified,
an error occurs.
You cannot set two or more systems of adaptive clock in an identical line module.
If the adaptive clock is set for a group to which any of the following is set, an error
occurs.
set tdmop format
* However, if TDMoP is blocked, it can be set.
Notes
Up to two systems of adaptive clock can be set in the entire system.

However, when APS setting is enabled, only one system of adaptive clock can be set in
the entire system.
If a group to which adaptive clock is set is cleared, its adaptive clock setting is also
cleared automatically.
17-32
TDM over Packet

Input examples
*Switch@1# set tdmop adaptive-clock 1/1 1 middle

*Switch@1# set tdmop adaptive-clock 2/1 2/2/2 2 narrow
Output item
Related
commands
set line mode tdmp

set tdmop mode
set tdmop group
set tdm group-name
set tdmop jitter
set tdmop format
set tdmop admin
show tdmop adaptive-clock
clear tdmop adaptive-clock

Display of adaptive clock setting
Clearing of adaptive clock
17-33
TDM over Packet

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows the adaptive clock setting.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
When APS is enabled, this command also shows the operation status of the greater port
number.
Input example
*Switch@1# show tdmop adaptive-clock

TDMoP Adaptive-Clock Table
==========================
Logical
Port Port
Group Network Type Status
--------------------------------------------1/1
3/7/3
1 narrow
acquiring
3/1
3/7/3
1 narrow
holdover
*Switch@1#
Output items

Logical Port:
Group: Group number
Network Type: Network type
narrow: Small
middle: Medium
wide: Large
Status: Operation status of the adaptive clock
freerun: Lock Out state (operating with the freerun clock of the device)
holdover: Lock Out state (operating with the clock most recently synchronized)
acquiring: Lock Out state (collecting adaptive clock information)
acquired: Lock state
Related
commands


17-34
TDM over Packet

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clears the adaptive clock.
Input formats

clear tdmop adaptive-clock P1 P3
clear tdmop adaptive-clock P1 P2 P3
Parameters

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3
SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
SDH mode: 1 to 32
SONET mode: 1 to 24
Default value
None
Usage
conditions

If the reference clock priority is set, an error occurs.
If a group to which neither a TDMoP format nor a TDMoP connection is set is specified,
an error occurs.
If the specified group name does not exist, an error occurs.
If any of the following is set for a group to which the adaptive clock is set, an error
occurs.
set tdmop format
* However, if TDMoP is blocked, it can be cleared.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear tdmop adaptive-clock 1/1 1

*Switch@1#
Output item
17-35
TDM over Packet

Related
commands

show reference-clock information
set tdmop group
set tdm group-name
set tdmop format
set tdmop admin
17-36

Display of reference clock information
Clock Control
18 Clock Control
18-1
Clock Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set external-clock mode

Setting of external clock mode
Sets the external clock mode.
Input format
set external-clock mode P1
Parameter
P1: External clock mode { none | dcs | t1-ami-sf | t1-ami-esf | t1-b8zs-sf | t1-b8zs-esf |
e1-ami-crc-75 | e1-ami-crc-120 | e1-ami-fas-75 | e1-ami-fas-120 | e1-hdb3-crc-75 |
e1-hdb3-crc-120 | e1-hdb3-fas-75 | e1-hdb3-fas-120 | e1-sync-75 | e1-sync-120 }
none: Clear indication
dcs: DCS mode
t1-ami-sf: T1/AMI/SF mode
t1-ami-esf: T1/AMI/ESF mode
t1-b8zs-sf: T1/B8ZS/SF mode
t1-b8zs-esf: T1/B8ZS/ESF mode
e1-ami-crc-75: E1/AMI/CRC mode/75
e1-ami-crc-120: E1/AMI/CRC mode/120
e1-ami-fas-75: E1/AMI/FAS mode/75
e1-ami-fas-120: E1/AMI/FAS mode/120
e1-hdb3-crc-75: E1/HDB3/CRC mode/75
e1-hdb3-crc-120: E1/HDB3/CRC mode/120
e1-hdb3-fas-75: E1/HDB3/FAS mode/75
e1-hdb3-fas-120: E1/HDB3/FAS mode/120
e1-sync-75: E1/ Synchronization mode/75
e1-sync-120: E1/ Synchronization mode/120
Default value
P1: none
Usage
conditions
Execute change of external clock mode after a clear indication (specifying none).
External clock mode cannot be cleared while external clock is set in the priority. Set
external clock mode again after clearing external clock from the priority settings.
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# set external-clock mode dcs

*Switch@1# set reference-clock mode none
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
reset reference-clock
set reference-clock mode
change external-clock
18-2
Resetting of reference clock

Setting of reference clock operation
Change of external clock
Clock Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets the reference clock priority.
Input formats
- Clear specification for specified priority

set reference-clock priority P1 P2 (none)
- External clock specification
set reference-clock priority P1 P2 (external)
- Port (line) extraction clock specification
set reference-clock priority P1 P2 (port) P3
- Line module extraction clock specification
set reference-clock priority P1 P2 (adaptive) P3 P4
Parameters
P1: Priority (1 to 5) (single specification)

P2: Clear indication for specified priority { none }, External clock { external }, port (line)
extraction clock { port }, or RTP packet regeneration clock { adaptive }
none: Clear indication for specified priority
external: External clock
port: port (line) extraction clock
adaptive: RTP packet regeneration clock
When external is specified in P2.
P3: Switch module number (1 to 2) (single specification)
When port is specified in P2.
P3: Port (line) type { atmp | tdmp | atmp155 | tdmp155 }
atmp: ATMP line module
tdmp: TDMP line module
atmp155: ATMP155 line module
tdmp155: TDMP155 line module
When adaptive is specified in P2.
P3: Port (line) number { tdmp | tdmp155 }
tdmp: TDMP port
Default value
None
18-3
Clock Control
Usage
conditions
Port (line) extraction clock can be set to ATMP/TDMP/ ATMP155/TDMP155 line

modules.
Line module extraction clock can be set to TDMP/TDMP155 line modules.
Modification of the priority that has already been set needs to be done after executing
the clear indication (none specification).
Priority of the line module whose priority has already been set cannot be changed.
When 1 or 2 is set to the priority, only external clock can be set.
When 3 to 5 is set to the priority, port (line) extraction clock or line module extraction
clock can be set.
To specify external clock, setting of external clock mode is required in advance.
To specify Line module extraction clock, Adaptive-clock setting of TDMoP is required in
advance.
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
reference-clock
reference-clock
reference-clock
reference-clock
reference-clock
priority
priority
priority
priority
priority
1
2
4
3
1
external 1
external 2
port tdmp 12/8
adaptive tdmp 3
none
Output item
Related
commands

18-4

Clock Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets the reference clock operation mode.
Input format
set reference-clock mode P1
Parameter
P1: Operation mode { revertive | non-revertive }

revertive: Autonomous switching enabled/autonomous reverting enabled
non-revertive: Autonomous switching enabled/autonomous reverting disabled
Default value
P1: non-revertive
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# set reference-clock mode revertive

*Switch@1# set reference-clock mode non-revertive
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

18-5

Clock Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Displays the reference clock settings and status.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show reference-clock information

Reference Clock Information
===========================
Reference Clock Mode
====================
mode : revertive
External Clock Configuration
============================
External Clock : dcs
Clock Supply Status Table(Switch#1)
===================================
Priority Source
Status
-----------------------------------------*
1 external 1
normal
2 external 2
normal
3 adaptive tdmp 5
normal
4 port tdmp155 7/1
normal
5 port atmp155 6/1
normal
Clock Supply Status Table(Switch#2)
===================================
Priority Source
Status
-----------------------------------------*
1 external 1
normal
2 external 2
normal
3 adaptive tdmp 5
normal
4 port tdmp155 7/1
normal
5 port atmp155 6/1
normal
*Switch@1#
18-6
Clock Control
Output items
Mode: Reference clock operation mode

revertive: Autonomous reverting setting enabled
non-revertive: Autonomous reverting setting disabled
* Clock source currently selected as reference clock (* is not put for freerun clock or
holdover)
Priority: Clock switching priority (1 to)
Source: Clock supply source
external switch number: External clock
port atmp port (line) number: Port (line) extraction ATMP port
port tdmp port (line) number: Port (line) extraction TDMP port
port atmp155 port (line) number: Port (line) extraction ATMP155 port
port tdmp155 port (line) number: Port (line) extraction TDMP155 port
adaptive tdmp line number: Line module extraction TDMP port
adaptive tdmp155 line number: Line module extraction TDMP155 port
Status: Clock supply source status
normal: Clock input
acquiring: Currently synchronizing with reference clock
fail: No clock input
---: (only when switch module of other system is uninstalled/being initialized/OUS/CR
failure)
Related
commands


18-7
Clock Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
Selectively resets the reference clock.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
When a clock is supplied to the source clock with higher priority over the reference clock
that is currently selected, the reference clock is switched over to the source clock with
higher priority.
Input example
*Switch@1# reset reference-clock

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

18-8

Clock Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
Changes external clocks.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
This command is available in the following conditions only:

- During UGSW redundant operation and external clock is supplied to both UGSW
systems.
- The external clock used for both UGSW systems has been set in the clock priority.
- External clock is selected as the reference clock.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# change external-clock

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

18-9

Clock Control
(Blank page)
18-10
Network Management
19 Network Management
19-11
Network Management
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set snmp
Setting of SNMP enable/disable
Sets SNMP security access.
Input format
set snmp P1
Parameter
P1: SNMP setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables SNMP
disable: Disables SNMP
Default value
P1: disable
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set snmp enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

set snmp manager
set snmp trap-manager
set snmp authen-trap
show snmp

Setting of SNMP manager
Setting of SNMP trap manager
Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission
Display of SNMP setting information
19-12
Network Management
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set snmp manager

Sets an SNMP manager.
Input format
set snmp manager P1 P2 P3 P4 [P5]
Parameters
P1: Manager number (1 to 20)

P2: Community name (1 to 255 characters)
P3: IP address
P4: Access authority { read-only | read-write }
read-only: General user
read-write: Privileged user
P5: Memo (1 to 31 characters)
Default value
None
Usage conditions
When using the same community, you cannot set a different access authority.
Notes

If an SNMP manager exists at the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or
192.168.129.0/24, you can set the manager. This setting, however, does not provide
Input example
*Switch@1# set snmp manager 1 a 1.2.3.4 read-only

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

set snmp
show snmp
clear snmp manager

Clearing of SNMP manager
19-13
Network Management
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets an SNMP trap manager.
Input format
set snmp trap-manager P1 P2 P3 P4 [P5]
Parameters
P1: Trap manager number (1 to 10)

P2: Community name (1 to 255 characters)
P3: IP address
P4: Trap format { v1 | v2c }
v1: V1 Trap
v2c: V2C Trap
P5: Memo (1 to 31 characters)
Default value
None
Usage conditions

If an SNMP manager exists at the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or
192.168.129.0/24, you can set the manager. This setting, however, does not provide
Notes
Set a community name and memo with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control
character].
Input example
*Switch@1# set snmp trap-manager 1 a 50.60.70.80 v1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

set snmp
show snmp
clear snmp trap-manager

Clearing of SNMP trap manager
19-14
Network Management
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear snmp manager

Clearing of SNMP manager settings
Clears SNMP manager settings.
Input format
clear snmp manager P1
Parameter
P1: Manager number (1 to 20)
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear snmp manager 1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set snmp
set snmp manager
show snmp

19-15
Network Management
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clearing of SNMP trap manager settings
Clears SNMP trap manager settings.
Input format
clear snmp trap-manager P1
Parameter
P1: Trap manager number (1 to 10)
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear snmp trap-manager 1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set snmp
show snmp

19-16
Network Management
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission.
Input format
set snmp authen-trap P1
Parameter
P1: SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission
disable: Disables SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission
Default value
P1: enable
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set snmp authen-trap enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

show snmp

19-17
Network Management
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show snmp
Shows SNMP setting information.
Input format
show snmp
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show snmp

SNMP Access Configuration
=========================
SNMP Access : disabled
Manager Configuration
=====================
Manager Index 1
Community Name: a
IP Address
: 1.2.3.4
Authority
: read-only
Note
:
Manager Index 2
Community Name: cx2600-2
IP Address
: 192.168.0.3
Authority
: read-write
Note
: right
Manager Index 20
Community Name: b
IP Address
: 10.20.30.40
Authority
: read-write
Note
:
Authentication Failure Trap Configuration
=========================================
Authen Trap : enabled
Trap Manager Configuration
==========================
Trap Manager Index 1
Community Name: a
IP Address
: 50.60.70.80
19-18
Network Management
Trap Mode
Note
: v1
:
Trap Manager Index 2

Community Name: cx2600-2
IP Address
: 192.168.0.3
Trap Mode
: v2c
Note
: right
<Omission>
Output items
SNMP Access: SNMP security access setting

Manager Index: Manager number
Community Name: Community name
Authority: Access authority
Note: Memo
Authen Trap: Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission
Trap Manager Index: Trap manager number
Community Name: Community name
Trap Mode: Trap format
Note: Memo
Related
commands
set snmp
set snmp manager
show snmp
clear snmp manager

Clearing of SNMP trap manager
Clearing of SNMP manager
19-19
Network Management
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set session ip-permit

Setting of access list
Sets a telnet connection access list.
Input format
set session ip-permit P1 P2 [P3]
Parameters
P1: Access list number (1 to 4)

P2: IP address
P3: Subnet mask
Default value
None
Usage conditions

as the manager IP address. (xxx is any number.) You can set the network
addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the network address but this
setting does not provide correct communication.
* When P3 is omitted, the following subnet mask is applied.
When 1.0.0.0 to 126.255.255.254 is specified in P2
Subnet mask: 255.0.0.0
Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set session ip-permit 1 10.20.30.40 255.255.255.0

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show session ip-permit

clear session ip-permit
Display of access list

Clearing of access list
19-20
Network Management
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows a telnet connection access list.
Input format
show session ip-permit [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, all access list numbers are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show session ip-permit

Telnet Filter Table
===================
No IP Address
Netmask
-----------------------------------1 192.168.2.211
255.255.255.0
*Switch@1#
Output items
No: Access list number

Netmask: Subnet mask
Related
commands


19-21
Network Management
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clears a telnet connection access list.
Input format
clear session ip-permit P1
Parameter
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear session ip-permit 1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands


19-22
Network Management
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show session
Display of session
Shows terminal port (line) information.
Input format
show session
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show session

Terminal Session Table
======================
Session ID Terminal IP Address
User Name Status
----------------------------------------------------------------------*
0 local
----established
1 remote
192.168.2.138
--established
2 remote
listen
3 remote
listen
4 remote
listen
*Switch@1#
Output items
*: Console showing terminal port (line) information

Session ID: Session ID
Terminal: Console type
local: Local console
remote: Remote console
IP Address: Connection source IP address
User Name: Account name
Status: Connection status
established: Session connected
listen: Session not connected
busy: Resource busy
authenticating: During login authentication
Related
command
clear session
Clearing of session
19-23
Network Management
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear session
Clearing of session
Clears a telnet session.
Input format
clear session P1
Parameter
P1: Session number (1 to 4)
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear session 1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show session
Display of session
19-24
Network Management
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set syslog remote

Setting of remote log enable/disable
Sets whether to enable or disable a remote log.
Input format
set syslog remote P1
Parameter
P1: Remote log setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables remote log
disable: Disables remote log
Default value
P1: disable
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set syslog remote enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

set syslog server
clear syslog server
show syslog server

Setting of syslog server and message facility
Clearing of syslog server
Display of syslog server configuration information
19-25
Network Management
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set syslog server

Sets a syslog server and message facility.
Input format
set syslog server P1 P2 P3
Parameters
P1: syslog server number (1 to 5)

P2: IP address
P3: Facility { local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7 }
local0: Log type local user 0
local5: Log typ3 local user 5
Default value
None
Usage conditions

as the server IP address. (xxx is any number.)
If a syslog server exists at the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24,
you can set the server. This setting, however, does not provide correct
communication.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set syslog server 1 1.2.3.4 local0

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

set syslog remote
show syslog server
clear syslog server

19-26
Network Management
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show syslog server

Shows syslog server configuration information.
Input format
show syslog server
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show syslog server

Syslog Remote Configuration
===========================
Syslog Remote: enabled
Syslog Server Table
===================
Index IP Address
Facility
--------------------------------------------------------1 10.20.30.40
LOG_LOCAL7
2 192.168.0.3
LOG_LOCAL1
5 5.6.7.8
LOG_LOCAL7
*Switch@1#
Output items
Syslog Remote: Remote log enable/disable setting

enabled: Remote log enabled
disabled: Remote log disabled
Index: syslog server number
Facility: syslog facility
Related
commands
set syslog remote

set syslog server
clear syslog server

19-27
Network Management
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear syslog server

Clears a syslog server.
Input format
clear syslog server P1
Parameter
P1: syslog server number (1 to 5)
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear syslog server 1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set syslog remote

set syslog server
show syslog server

19-28
Network Management
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set syslog map

Setting of syslog message level remapping
Sets syslog message level remapping.
Input format
set syslog map P1 P2
Parameters
P1: Group
For the group parameter, refer to Mapping of syslog Functions of Method of
P2: syslog level
For the syslog level parameter, refer to Mapping of syslog Functions" of Method of
Default value
For the default values, refer to Mapping of syslog Functions of Method of Operating
Maintenance and Management Functions in the Instruction Manual.
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set syslog map TRAP_SYSINF information

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
clear syslog map

show syslog map
show syslog local
Clearing of syslog message level remapping

Display of syslog message level mapping status
Display of local log
19-29
Network Management
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show syslog map

Shows the syslog message level mapping status.
Input format
show syslog map
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show syslog map

Syslog Map Configuration
========================
TRAP_SYSFLT
: LOG_CRIT
TRAP_SYSMJR
: LOG_ERR
TRAP_SYSMNR
: LOG_ERR
TRAP_SYSWAR
: LOG_WARNING
TRAP_SYSCLR
: LOG_INFO
TRAP_SYSINF
: LOG_INFO
TRAP_LINEFLT
: LOG_CRIT
TRAP_LINEMJR
: LOG_ERR
TRAP_LINEMNR
: LOG_ERR
TRAP_LINEWAR
: LOG_WARNING
TRAP_LINECLR
: LOG_INFO
TRAP_LINEINF
: LOG_INFO
TRAP_ROUTEMJR : LOG_ERR
TRAP_ROUTEMNR : LOG_ERR
TRAP_ROUTEWAR : LOG_WARNING
TRAP_ROUTECLR
: LOG_INFO
TRAP_ROUTEINF
: LOG_INFO
TRAP_PORTMJR
: LOG_ERR
TRAP_PORTCLR
: LOG_INFO
TRAP_PORTINF
: LOG_INFO
COMMAND_LOG
: LOG_INFO
*Switch@1#
Output items
For the output items, refer to Mapping of syslog Functions of Method of Operating
Related
commands
set syslog map

clear syslog map

19-30
Network Management
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear syslog map

Sets syslog message level remapping.
Input format
clear syslog map P1
Parameter
P1: Group
For the group parameter, refer to Mapping of syslog Functions of Method of
Default value
For the default value, refer to Mapping of syslog Functions of Method of Operating
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear syslog map TRAP_LINEMNR

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set syslog map

show syslog map

19-31
Network Management
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show syslog local

Shows a local log.
Input format
show syslog local [P1] [P2] [P3]
Parameters
P1: Log group { all | system | line | command | route | port }

all: Shows all local logs
system: Shows local logs related to system status notification
line: Shows local logs related to line module status notification
command: Shows local logs related to commands
route: Shows local logs related to route status notification
port: Shows local logs related to port status notification
* When P1 is omitted, all is assumed.
P2: Order in which to show local logs { oldest | newest }
oldest: Shows saved local logs, starting at the oldest local log
newest: Shows saved local logs, starting at the newest local log
* When P2 is omitted, oldest is assumed.
P3: Terminal type { terminal | free }
terminal: Forcibly begins a new line at column 80 and shows local logs
free: Shows local logs without forcibly beginning a new line
* When P3 is omitted, free is assumed.
Default value
None
Usage condition
You can save local logs up to about 1MB.
Note
None
19-32
Network Management
Input example
*Switch@1# show syslog local

Syslog Local Table
==================
Index Date
Time
Log Text
----------------------------------------------------------------------1 01/01/2000 00:06:25 #1 local_console:0 clear syslog local
2 01/01/2000 00:06:39 #1 local_console:0 write memory
3 01/01/2000 00:10:33 #1 local_console:0 set terminal prompt Switch
4 01/01/2000 00:11:05 #1 local_console:0 set terminal prompt a
5 01/01/2000 00:11:05 #1 local_console:0 set terminal prompt abcd
6 01/01/2000 00:11:06 #1 local_console:0 set terminal prompt Switch
7 01/01/2000 00:11:06 #1 local_console:0 set terminal scroll system
off
on
on 1
on 99
11 01/01/2000 00:11:11 #1 local_console:0 set terminal logout 0
12 01/01/2000 00:11:11 #1 local_console:0 set terminal logout 60
13 01/01/2000 00:11:12 #1 local_console:0 set system contact sit
14 01/01/2000 00:11:12 #1 local_console:0 set system name CX2600/220
15 01/01/2000 00:11:13 #1 local_console:0 set system location NEC
16 01/01/2000 00:00:00 #1 local_console:0 date 01/01/00 00:00:00
17 12/31/2099 23:59:59 #1 local_console:0 date 12/31/99 23:59:59
18 12/31/2099 23:59:59 #1 local
*Switch@1#
Output items
Index: syslog number

Date: Date
Time: Time
Log Text: Log information
Related
commands
set syslog map

clear syslog local
upload local-syslog

Clearing of local log
Uploading of system log to ftp server
19-33
Network Management
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear syslog local

Clears a local log.
Input format
clear syslog local
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear syslog local

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show syslog local

upload local-syslog

19-34
Network Management
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ntp access-time

Setting of NTP access time
Sets NTP server access cycle time.
Input format
set ntp access-time P1
Parameter
P1: Access time (0 to 168 hours)

0: Disables NTP server access
Default value
P1: 0 (hour)
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set ntp access-time 168

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

set ntp server
clear ntp server
show ntp

Setting of IP address of NTP server
Clearing of IP address of NTP server
Display of NTP server setting information
19-35
Network Management
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set ntp server

Sets the IP address of an NTP server.
Input format
set ntp server [P1] P2
Parameters
P1: Server priority { primary | secondary }

primary: Priority server
secondary: Alternate server
* When P1 is omitted, primary is assumed.
P2: IP address
Default value
None
Usage conditions

If an NTP server exists at the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24,
communication.
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set ntp server 10.20.30.40

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

set ntp access-time
clear ntp server
show ntp

19-36
Network Management
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show ntp
Shows NTP server setting information.
Input format
show ntp
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show ntp

NTP Server Configuration
========================
Primary IP Address : 10.20.30.40
Secondary IP Address : 10.20.30.41
Retrieval time (hour): 168
*Switch@1#
Output items
Primary IP Address: IP address of primary priority server

Secondary IP Address: IP address of secondary priority server
Retrieval Time (hour): Access time
Related
commands
set ntp access-time

set ntp server
clear ntp server

19-37
Network Management
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear ntp server

Clears the IP address of an NTP server.
Input format
clear ntp server P1
Parameter
P1: Server priority { primary | secondary }

primary: Priority server
secondary: Alternate server
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear ntp server

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set ntp access-time

set ntp server
show ntp

19-38
Network Test
20 Network Test
20-1
Network Test
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set mc management
Setting of M/C management function basics
Sets terminal M/C management function basics. Enabling this setting allows you to perform a loopback
test and collect terminal M/C information.
Input formats
- Enabling UTP mode

set mc management P1 P2 (enable) [P3]
- Disabling UTP mode
set mc management P1 P2 (disable)
Parameters
P1: Port (line) number (1/1 to 4/8) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: UTP mode setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables setting M/C management function basics
disable: Disables setting M/C management function basics
P3: UTP mode setting { utp }
utp: UTP mode
Default value
P2: enable
Usage condition
You can use only 100BASE-FX line modules.
Note
When P3 is omitted, UTP mode setting will be disabled.
Note
Input example
*Switch@1# set mc management 1/1 enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show mc information
Display of M/C status
20-2
Network Test
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
loopback mc
Starting of M/C loopback test
Starts the media converter (M/C) loopback test when the 100BASE-FX line module is used. To perform
this loopback test, you must enable setting M/C management function basics in the set mc management
command in advance.
Input format
loopback mc P1 [P2] [P3] [P4]
Parameters
P1: Port (line) number (1/1 to 4/8) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Test count count (1 to 1000)
P3: Frame size frame { 64 | 1518 } (bytes)
frame 64: 64 bytes
frame 1518: 1518 bytes
P4: Response wait time wait (610 to 2000) (msec)
error.
Default value
None
Usage conditions
Since frames cannot be transferred between this device and the user during the
loopback test, do not conduct this test on a port (line) in use. Depending on the M/C to
be used, the UTP side may link down during the loopback test. In this case, the user
side detects network disconnection.
Note
You can set response wait time within the range from 610 to 2000 (msec) in increments
of 10 (msec). For how to look at the test result, refer to the Instruction Manual.
20-3
Network Test
Input example
*Switch@1#
result 9/3
result 9/3
result 9/3
result 9/3
loopback mc 9/3 count 4

<seq=1> time=465ms test
frame 1518 wait 610

ok
ok
ok
ok
loopback statistics for 9/3

request = 4 : test ok = 4 : test fail = 0 (0% failure)
minimum = 460msec, maximum = 465msec, average = 460msec
test ok
4
test timeout
0
test terminate receive
0
test close request timeout
0
frame timeout
0
frame fail
0
test start request timeout
0
other error
0
*Switch@1#
Output items
Result display per loopback test

result a/b: Test slot number/port number
<seq=N>: Test count
time=XXXms: Time required for test (*1)
This item is displayed only when the test result is test ok or frame fail.
{ result message }: Result (see below)
test ok: Normal end
test time out: Test time (T1) timeout occurrence
test terminate receive: Forced termination based on termination notification received
from terminal MC
test close request timeout: Response wait timeout from terminal MC in test
termination negotiation
frame timeout: Loopback frame reception wait timeout
frame fail: Loopback frame error detection (e.g., data mismatch)
test start request timeout: Response wait timeout from terminal MC in test start
negotiation
other error: Other errors (including a HW failure or terminal MC sequence error)
Statistics display
loopback statistics for a/b:
Slot number/port number to be displayed in loopback statistics display
request = N: Number of times loopback test was performed
test ok = X: Number of times loopback test succeeded
test fail = Y: Number of times loopback test failed (other than test ok)
(Z% failure): Rate of unsuccessful loopback test
{ test fail } / { request } x 100
minimum = XXXmsec: Minimum test time (*1) (*2)
maximum = YYYmsec: Maximum test time (*1) (*2)
average = ZZZmsec Average test time (*1) (*2)
(*1) This time includes the time required for terminal MC negotiation performed before
and after the loopback test.
(*2) This item is collected only when the test result is test ok or frame fail.
20-4
Network Test
Related
command
set mc management
20-5
Network Test
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
update mc information
Prompting of M/C to send M/C status notification
Prompts the M/C to send an M/C status notification.
Input format
update mc information P1
Parameter
Default value
None
Usage condition
You can enter this command when the FX8/FX8-PV line module is inserted into the
specified slot or FX8 is specified as the line module type.
Notes
This command prompts the M/C to send an M/C status notification when the M/C may
not autonomously send it.
Originally, the M/C status is automatically collected when link-up is established.
Usually, you need not use this command because the M/C autonomously sends the M/C
status notification when the M/C status changes.
If a failure may have occurred, use the loopback mc command separately.
Input example
Switch@1# update mc information 1/1

Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
loopback mc
show mc information
Starting of M/C loopback test

Display of M/C information
20-6
Network Test
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show mc information
Display of M/C information
Shows terminal M/C information.
Input format
show mc information [P1]
Parameter
P1: Line module number or port (line) number

Port (line) number: 1/1 to 4/8 (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When P1 is omitted, terminal M/C information for all line modules is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
Some terminal M/C information is shown only when a port (line) number is specified.
Input examples
*Switch@1# show mc information 1/5

Remote MC Information
=====================
Port
: 1/5
MC management
: enabled
Option
: utp
Power Status
: normal
UTP Link Status
: up
MC Fail
: normal
Rx-OPT Status
: normal
Notice Rx-OPT Down : frame
LoopTest Status
: idle
Option B support
: support
Vendor Code
: 0x00004c
Model-ID
: 0x000001
UTP I/F
: single
UTP Auto-negotiation
: enabled
UTP Link Speed (Mbps) : 100
UTP Duplex Mode
: full
*Switch@1# show mc information 1
MC ManPower UTP MC
Rx-OPT Notice LoopTest
Port agement Option Status Link Fail
Status Rx-OPT Status
----------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 disabled --------------1/2 enabled none
1/3 enabled utp
1/4 enabled none
1/5 enabled utp
normal up
normal
normal frame idle
1/6 enabled none
normal up
normal
normal frame idle
1/7 enabled utp
20-7
Network Test
1/8 enabled
none
*Switch@1#
Output items

MC management: Setting terminal M/C management function basics
enabled: Setting terminal M/C management function basics is enabled
disabled: Setting terminal M/C management function basics is disabled
Option: UTP mode setting information
none: UTP mode is not set
utp: UTP mode is set
Power Status: Terminal M/C power information
normal: Normal
fail: Power interruption
UTP Link: Terminal M/C UTP information
up: Normal
down: UTP interruption
MC Fail: Terminal M/C failure information
normal: Normal
fail: Failure occurred
Rx-OPT Status: Information for receive optical error detected by terminal M/C
normal: Normal
fail: Failure occurred
Notice Rx-OPT: Method for notifying terminal M/C receive optical error
frame: Maintenance frame
fefi: FEFI signal
LoopTest Status: Loopback test status
Idle: Loopback test not yet performed
testing: Loopback test being performed
Option B support: Support of option B of terminal M/C complying with TS1000 standard
support: Option B supported
not support: Option B not supported
Vendor Code: Vendor code of terminal M/C
Model-ID: Module ID of terminal M/C
UTP I/F: Number of UTP interfaces of terminal M/C
Single: Single
Multi: Multiple
UTP Auto-negotiation: UTP port auto-negotiation status of terminal M/C
enabled: Auto-negotiation enabled
disabled: Auto-negotiation disabled
UTP Link Speed (Mbps): UTP physical line speed information of terminal M/C
10: 10 Mbps
100: 100Mbps
1000: 1000Mbps
other: Others
UTP Duplex Mode: UTP communication mode information for terminal M/C
Half: Half Duplex
Full: Full Duplex
Related
command
set mc management
Set M/C management function basics
20-8
Network Test
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
loopback atm
Starting of ATM loopback test
Starts the ATM transmission path loopback test.
Input formats
- Specifying F4 level
loopback atm P1 (f4) P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] [P6] [P7] [P8]
loopback atm P1 (f5) P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] [P6] [P7] [P8]
Parameters
P1: Level { f4 | f5 }
f4: F4 (VP) level
f5: F5 (VC) level
Port (line) number (single specification)
PVC name: 1 to 32 characters
P3: Test section { segment | end-end }
segment: Between nodes
end-end: End
* When P3 is omitted, end-end is assumed.
P4: Location ID (0x1 to 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff) (hexadecimal)
* When P4 is omitted, 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff is assumed.
P5: Indication check { enable | disable }
enable: Enables indication check
disable: Disables indication check
* When P5 is omitted, enable is assumed.
P6: Test count count (1 to 1000)
P7: Response wait time wait (5 to 10) (seconds)
P8: Test direction { outside | inside }
outside: Port (line) side (Output direction from UGSW to ATM line modules)
inside: SW side (Output direction from ATM line modules to UGSW)
* When P8 is omitted, outside is assumed.
20-9
Network Test
Default values
P3: end-end
P4: 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
P5: enable
P6: 1
P7: 5
P8: outside
Usage conditions
When f4 is specified in P1, this function cannot be executed if the VP connection or the
PVC that includes the targeted VPI has not been registered.
When f5 is specified in P1, this function cannot be executed if the targeted PVC has not
been registered.
You cannot execute two or more of this function simultaneously.
This function cannot be executed if ATM-OAM flow point is set to none (no setting).
To execute a test specifying inside in P8, you need to set the ATMoP format.
When inside is specified in P8, this function cannot be executed if ATM-OAM flow point
of the targeted VPI or PVC is set to end-point.
To execute a test to the inside direction for an ATMP155 line module, you need to set
the ATM shaper.
You cannot execute a test to the inside direction for an ATM155 line module.
You cannot execute multiple loopback test (specifying 0x0 for the location ID).
* Refer to the set atm-oam flow command for ATM-OAM flow point setting.
* Refer to the set atmop format command for ATMoP format setting.
* Refer to the set atm-shaper rate command for ATM shaper setting.
Note
To cancel this test halfway, press Ctrl+C.
20-10
Network Test
Input examples
*Switch@1#
result 3/1
result 3/1
result 3/1
loopback atm f4 3/1 0 segment 0x1234 count 3 wait 10

<seq=1> time=465ms ok
<seq=2> time=460ms ok
<seq=3> timeout
loopback statistics for 3/1 0

level
f4
section
segment
indication-check enabled
wait
10(s)
location-ID
0x00000000000000000000000000001234
direction
outside
test count = 3 : ok = 2 : fail = 1 (33% failure)
minimum = 460, maximum = 465, average = 460
Switch@1# loopback
result 3/1 <seq=1>
result 3/1 <seq=2>
result 3/1 <seq=3>
atm f5 3/1 0/200 segment 0x1234 count 3 wait 10

time=465ms ok
time=460ms ok
timeout
loopback statistics for 3/1 0/200

level
f5
section
segment
indication-check enabled
wait
10(s)
location-ID
0x00000000000000000000000000001234
direction
outside
test count = 3 : ok = 2 : fail = 1 (33% failure)
minimum = 460, maximum = 465, average = 460
*Switch@1#
Output items
Result display per loopback test

result a/b x/z: Test slot number/port number and VPI/VCI
If the test level is f4, only VPI is displayed, not VPI/VCI.
<seq=N>: Test count
time=XXXms: Time required for test
This item is displayed only when the test result is test ok or frame fail.
Statistics display
loopback statistics for a/b x/z:
Slot number/port number and VPI/VCI in loopback statistics display
If the test level is f4, only VPI is displayed, not VPI/VCI.
level: Test level
section: Test section
indication-check: Indication check setting
wait: Response wait time
location-ID: Location ID
direction: Test direction
test count: Number of times loopback test was performed
ok: Number of times loopback test succeeded (normal termination)
fail: Number of times loopback test failed (other than normal termination)
(X% failure): Rate of unsuccessful loopback test
{ fail } / { test count } x 100
minimum: Minimum test time (*1)
20-11
Network Test
maximum: Maximum test time (*1)
average: Average test time (*1)
(*1) This item is collected only when the test result is ok or sell fail.
Related
commands
set loopback atm source-id

show loopback atm source-id
set atm-oam flow
show atm-oam config
set atmop format
show atmop format
set atm-shaper rate
Setting of ATM loopback source ID

Display of ATM loopback source ID
20-12
Network Test
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets an ATM loopback source ID.
Input format
set loopback atm source-id P1
Parameter
P1: Source ID (1 to 32 digits) (hexadecimal)

0x1 to 0xfffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffe
Default value
P1: 0x00000000000000000000000000000001
Usage condition
Bits set in P1 must not be entirely zero or 1 (0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff).
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set loopback atm source-id 0x1234

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
Loopback atm

20-13
Network Test
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows an ATM loopback source ID.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show loopback atm source-id

ATM Loopback Source-ID Table
============================
Source-ID : 0x00000000000000000000000000FFAA33
*Switch@1#
Output item
ATM Loopback Source-ID Table

source-ID: Source ID
Related
commands
Loopback atm

20-14
Network Test
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set loopback atm keepalive-mode

Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode
Sets whether to enable or disable ATM loopback monitoring for registered connections.
Input format
set loopback atm keepalive-mode P1
Parameter
P1: Loopback monitoring mode { enable | disable }

enable: Enables loopback monitoring
disable: Disables loopback monitoring
Default value
P1: disable
Usage condition
None
Notes
Timeout for each PVC is 5 seconds and the monitoring period for all PVCs is 5 minutes.
When loopback monitoring is enabled, monitoring statistical information is cleared.
Input example
*Switch@1# set loopback atm keepalive-mode enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set loopback atm keepalive

show loopback atm keepalive config
show loopback atm keepalive information
clear loopback atm keepalive
20-15
Setting of ATM loopback monitoring

function
Display of ATM loopback monitoring
configuration
information
Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring
function
Network Test
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of ATM loopback monitoring configuration
Shows an ATM loopback monitoring configuration.
Input format
show loopback atm keepalive config [P1]
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
* When the VCI value is omitted, the loopback monitoring configurations set for the
specified VPI value are shown.
* When the VPI value is omitted, the loopback monitoring configurations set for the
specified port (line) number are shown.
* When P1 is omitted, the loopback monitoring configurations of all ports are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show loopback atm keepalive config

ATM Loopback Config Table
=========================
Keepalive-Mode : enabled
ATM Loopback Cell F4 Config Table
=================================
Port VPI Section Direction Success Threshold Fail Threshold
---------------------------------------------------------------1/8 200 segment outside
1
1
ATM Loopback Cell F4 Location-ID
================================
Port VPI Location-ID
--------------------------------------------1/8 200 0x00000000000000000000000000000001
=================================
20-16
Network Test
*Switch@1# show loopback atm keepalive config
=========================
=================================
=================================
Port VPI/VCI Section Direction Success Threshold Fail Threshold
-------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 100/100 segment outside
1
1
Input example

================================
Port VPI/VCI Location-ID
------------------------------------------------1/1 100/100 0x00000000000000000000000000000001
*Switch@1#
Output items
ATM Loopback Config Table:

keepalive-mode: Loopback monitoring mode
ATM Loopback Cell F4 Config Table:
VPI: VPI value
Section: Test section
Direction: Test direction
Success Threshold: Threshold for monitoring result change
Fail Threshold: Threshold for monitoring result change
VPI: VPI value
Location-ID: Location ID
ATM Loopback Cell F5 Config Table:
Success Threshold: Threshold for monitoring result change
Fail Threshold: Threshold for monitoring result change
Location-ID: Location ID
20-17
Network Test
Related
commands

20-18

mode
function
information
function
Network Test
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Setting of ATM loopback monitoring function
Sets a PVC for which ATM loopback monitoring is performed.
Also sets a level, location ID, test section, and thresholds for changing the loopback monitoring result.
Input formats
set loopback atm keepalive P1 (f4) P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] [P6] [P7]
set loopback atm keepalive P1 (f5) P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] [P6] [P7]
Parameters
P1: Level { f4 | f5 }
f4: F4 (VP) level
f5: F5 (VC) level
VPI value/VCI value (Multiple specification is allowed for VCI value only.)
P3: Test section { segment | end-end }
segment: Between nodes
end-end: End
* When P3 is omitted, end-end is assumed.
P4: Location ID (0x1 to 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff)
* When P4 is omitted, 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff is assumed.
P5: Threshold for changing loopback monitoring result (success) success (1 to 10)
P6: Threshold for changing loopback monitoring result (fail) fail (1 to 10)
P7: Monitoring direction { outside | inside }
outside: Port (line) side (Output direction from UGSW to ATM line modules)
inside: SW side (Output direction from ATM line modules to UGSW)
* When P7 is omitted, outside is assumed.
Default values
P3: end-end
P4: 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
P5: 1
P6: 1
20-19
Network Test
Usage conditions
When f4 is specified in P1, this function cannot be executed if the VP connection or the
PVC that includes the targeted VPI has not been registered.
When f5 is specified in P1, this function cannot be executed if the targeted PVC has not
been registered.
You cannot simultaneously set F4 monitoring and F5 monitoring specifying an identical
VPI.
You cannot simultaneously set monitoring to both outside and inside directions for an
identical VPI and VCI.
If the loopback monitoring configuration is changed, monitoring statistical information
for the PVC for which ATM loopback monitoring is performed is cleared.
This function cannot be executed if ATM-OAM flow point is set to none (no setting).
To execute a test specifying inside in P7, you need to set the ATMoP format.
When inside is specified in P7, this function cannot be executed if ATM-OAM flow point
of the targeted VPI or PVC is set to end-point.
To execute a test to the inside direction for an ATMP155 line module, you need to set
the ATM shaper.
You cannot execute a test to the inside direction for an ATM155 line module.
You cannot execute multiple loopback test (specifying 0x0 for the location ID).
* Refer to the set atm-oam flow command for ATM-OAM flow point setting.
* Refer to the set atmop format command for ATMoP format setting.
* Refer to the set atm-shaper rate command for ATM shaper setting.
Notes
If the PVC is cleared, the monitoring settings of this function for the PVC are also
cleared.
If all the PVCs that include a certain VPI are cleared, the monitoring settings of this
function for the VP are also cleared.
The monitoring settings changed during loopback monitoring are reflected in the next
period.
Input examples
*Switch@1# set loopback atm keepalive f4 3/1 10 segment 0x1234 success 10

fail 5
*Switch@1# set loopback atm keepalive f5 4/1 10/20
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

set atm-oam flow
show atm-oam config
set atmop format
show atmop format
set atm-shaper rate
20-20

configuration
information
function
Network Test
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of ATM loopback monitoring information
Shows ATM loopback monitoring information.
Input format
show loopback atm keepalive information [P1]
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
* When the VCI value is omitted, the loopback monitoring information set for the
specified VPI value is shown.
* When the VPI value is omitted, the loopback monitoring information set for the
* When P1 is omitted, the loopback monitoring information of all ports is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
switch@1# show loopback atm keepalive information

=========================
ATM Loopback F4 Status Table
============================
Port VPI Section Direction Test Status Last Result Count(ok/test)
----------------------------------------------------------------------5/1
0 segment outside
fail
timeout
0/10
12/1
1 end
inside
----0/0
ATM Loopback F5 Status Table
============================
Port VPI/VCI Section Direction Test Status Last Result Count(ok/test)
----------------------------------------------------------------------5/1
1/32 segment outside
fail
timeout
0/100
5/1
1/33 end
inside
success
ok
10/10
Switch@1#
20-21
Network Test
Output items
ATM Loopback Config Table:

keepalive-mode: Loopback monitoring mode
ATM Loopback F4 Status Table:
VPI: VPI value
Test Status: Monitoring status (success/fail)
Last Result: Last loopback test result (ok/timeout)
Count: Number of times loopback test succeeded/total number of loopback
transmissions
ATM Loopback F5 Status Table:
Test Status: Monitoring status (success/fail)
Last Result: Last loopback test result (ok/timeout)
Count: Number of times loopback test succeeded/total number of loopback
transmissions
Related
commands

20-22

Setting of ATM loopback monitoring function
Display of ATM loopback monitoring configuration
Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring function
Network Test
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring function
Clears a PVC for which ATM loopback monitoring is performed.
Input formats
clear loopback atm keepalive P1 (f4) P2
clear loopback atm keepalive P1 (f5) P2
- Specifying port (line) number
clear loopback atm keepalive P1 (port (line) number)
Parameters
P1: Level { f4 | f5 } or port (line) number

f4: F4 (VP) level
f5: F5 (VC) level
* All F4- and F5-level loopback monitoring configurations of the specified port (line)
are cleared.
P2: PVC identifier { port (line) number [VPI value] | PVC name }
* When VPI value is omitted, all monitoring settings for the specified port at the
P1-specified level are cleared.
P2: PVC identifier { port (line) number [VPI value/VCI value] | PVC name }
* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all monitoring settings for the specified
port at the P1-specified level are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
The monitoring settings cleared during loopback monitoring are not reflected right after
execution of the command. Reflection requires up to 5 minutes because loopback
monitoring is executed in 5 minute periods.
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear loopback atm keepalive f4 10/1 10

*Switch@1# clear loopback atm keepalive f5 10/1
*Switch@1# clear loopback atm keepalive 10/1
Output item
20-23
Network Test
Related
commands

20-24

function
configuration
information
Monitors
21 Monitors
21-1
Monitors
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show counter port

Display of port counter
Shows various counter information for transmission and reception per port.
Input formats
- Realtime showing
show counter port P1 (real) P2 (up to 24 port (line) numbers)
- Detailed showing
show counter port P1 (detail) P2 (single port (line) number)
Parameters
P1: Showing type { real | detail }

real: Realtime showing
* When detail is specified in P1, you can specify only one port.
* When real is specified in P1, you can specify multiple ports (up to 24).
Default value
None
Usage condition
This command cannot be used for ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155 line modules.
Notes
If the specified port (line) is in line module duplex operation, counter information of the
greater number port is also shown.
In realtime showing, you can simultaneously show up to 24 ports (lines). However,
only 20 ports (lines) will be displayed in the case of specification that exceeds the
maximum number of ports (lines).
Pressing [Ctrl]+[C] in realtime showing enables you to end port counter showing.
If the counter value exceeds either of 32 bits or 64 bits (*), the value will be returned to
zero and then incremented from zero again.
* 32 bits = 4294967295, 64 bits = 18446744073709551615
The counter value may be unable to be collected during UGSW module system
switching.
If discarding is caused by an FCS error or a frame size violation, even the output port
may increment the discard counter value.
If a frame is interrupted by a transfer block of the port isolate function, the input port
When it receives a frame of large size (FE: frames of 8 kilobytes or more,
GbE/GbE-MUX: frames of 16 kilobytes or more), the line module may shorten the
frame size and increment the error counter value (e.g., RxJabbers).
Input examples
*Switch@1# show counter port real 9/1,12/1

Port Counter Table
==================
Last All Time Clearing of Port Counter unknown hour
--------------------------------------------------------------------Port Link
Pkts(Rx)
Pkts(Tx) | Port Link
Pkts(Rx)
Pkts(Tx)
===================================+=================================
21-2
Monitors
9/1 down
| 12/1 down
Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c]

*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show counter port detail 1/1
Port Counter Table
==================
Port
: 1/1
Link Status : up
Last Clearing Time of Port Counter 0:00:01
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Item
Counts | Item
Counts
=================================+===================================
RxOctets
:
0 | TxOctets
:
0
RxPkts
:
0 | TxPkts
:
0
RxDropEvents
:
0 |
RxErrors
:
0 | TxErrors
:
0
RxUndersizePkts :
0 |
RxFragments
:
0 |
Rx64octs
:
0 |
Rx65to127octs :
0 |
Rx128to255octs :
0 |
Rx256to511octs :
0 |
Rx512to1023octs :
0 |
Rx1024to1518octs:
0 |
RxCRCErrors
:
0 |
RxOversizePkts :
0 |
RxJabbers
:
0 |
| TxCollisions
:
0
RxUcastPkts
:
0 | TxUcastPkts
:
0
RxMcastPkts
:
0 | TxMcastPkts
:
0
RxBcastPkts
:
0 | TxBcastPkts
:
0
RxUnsupp
:
0 | TxUnsupp
:
0
RxDiscards
:
0 | TxDiscards
:
0
*Switch@1#
Output items
TxOctets Last clearing time of port counter: Elapsed time of counter collection
(Realtime showing)
The elapsed time of counter collection for the entire device is shown in the
hour:minute:second format.
When the elapsed time exceeds 24 hours, over 24 hour is shown.
If the port counter is cleared per port or the line module is reset or if the line module is
inserted, unknown hour is shown.
Clearing all the port counters also clears the elapsed time of counter collection for the
device at the same time.
21-3
Monitors
(Detailed showing)
The elapsed time of counter collection for the specified port is shown in the
hour:minute:second format.
When the elapsed time exceeds 24 hours, over 24 hour is shown.
Clearing the port counter also clears the elapsed time of counter collection for the port
at the same time.
RxOctets:
RxPkts:
RxDropEvents:
RxErrors:
RxUndersizePkts:
Number of receiving octets

Number of receiving frames
Number of times discard event occurred
Number of frames where receiving error occurred
Number of received frames where the data length is less than 64
octets
RxFragments:
Number of received error frames where the data length is less
than 64 octets
Rx64octs:
Number of received frames where the data length is 64 octets
Rx65to127octs:
Number of received frames where the data length is 65 to 127
octets
Rx128to255octs:
octets
Rx256to511octs:
octets
Rx512to1023octs: Number of received frames where the data length is 512 to 1023
octets
Rx1024to1518octs: Number of received frames where the data length is 1024 to
1518 octets
RxCRCErrors:
Number of received alignment/FCS error frames
RxOversizePkts:
Number of received frames where the data length is greater than
or equal to 1519 octets
RxJabbers:
Number of received error frames where the data length is greater
than or equal to 1519 octets
RxUcastPkts:
Number of receiving unicast frames
RxMcastPkts:
Number of receiving multicast frames
RxBcastPkts:
Number of receiving broadcast frames
RxUnsupp:
Number of received and discarded unsupported packages
RxDiscards:
Number of frames discarded for reasons other than receiving
errors
TxOctets:
Number of sent octets
TxPkts:
Number of sent frames
TxErrors:
Number of frames where sending error occurred
TxCollisions:
Number of collision frames at sending
TxUcastPkts:
Number of sent unicast frames
TxMcastPkts:
Number of sent multicast frames
TxBcastPkts:
Number of sent broadcast frames
TxUnsupp:
Number of sent and discarded unsupported frames
TxDiscards:
Number of frames discarded for reasons other than sending
errors
Related
commands
clear counter port

show counter discard
Clearing of port counter

Display of discard counter
21-4
Monitors
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear counter port

Clears various counter information for transmission and reception per port.
Input format
clear counter port [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, counter information of all the ports is cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
This command cannot be used for ATM/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155 line modules.
Notes
If P1 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command is entered.

If APS is enabled for the specified port (line), counter information of the greater number
port is also cleared.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear counter port 1/1

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show counter port


21-5
Monitors
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows discard counter information per port.
Input format
show counter discard P1
Parameter
Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
If the specified port (line) is in line module duplex operation, counter information of the
greater number port is also shown.
If the active slot side increments RxDisOutQoS Pkts and L2SW Discard Counter items
during line module duplex operation, counter items for lines in the both systems will be
incremented.
The counter value may be unable to be collected during UGSW module system
switching.
If discarding is caused by an FCS error or a frame size violation, even the output port
If a frame is interrupted by a transfer block of the port isolate function, the input port may
increment the discard counter value.
GbE-MUX collects RxDisOutQoS Pkts and L2SW Discard Counter items per line
module, so all the ports increment the same counter value without reference to link up
and down.
Input example
*Switch@1# show counter discard 2/1

Discard Counter Table
=====================
Port
: 2/1
Link Status : down
Line Discard Counter Table
==========================
Item
Pkts | Item
Pkts
--------------------------+---------------------------RxUnknownTPID :
0 | TxUnknownTPID
0
RxUnknownVID
:
0 |
QoS Discard Counter Table
=========================
Item
Pkts | Item
Pkts
---------------------------+--------------------------RxDisInQoSPkts :
0 |
RxDisOutQoSPkts :
0 | TxDisOutQoSPkts :
0
RxFilterPkts
:
0 | TxFilterPkts
:
0
21-6
Monitors
RxMACLimitPkts :
RxFairnessPkts :
0 |
0 |
L2SW Discard Counter Table

==========================
Item
Pkts | Item
Pkts
--------------------------+---------------------------RxDropPkts
:
0 | TxDropPkts
:
0
| TxQueue0DisPkts :
0
| TxQueue1DisPkts :
0
| TxQueue2DisPkts :
0
| TxQueue3DisPkts :
0
| TxQueue4DisPkts :
0
| TxQueue5DisPkts :
0
*Switch@1#
Output items

Link Status: Physical link status of port
up: Link up status
down: Link down status
RxUnknownTPID:
Number of unsupported TPID receiving frames or number of
discarded receiving frames whose Ethernet types are 0x8100 on
portbase Untag set port
RxUnknownVID:
Number of received and discarded unsupported VID frames
TxUnknownTPID:
Number of unsupported TPID sending frames or number of
discarded sending frames whose Ethernet types are 0x8100 on
portbase Untag set port
RxDisInQoSPkts:
Number of receiving frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth
limit function of the input port
RxDisOutQoSPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the output fairness
control function
RxFilterPkts:
Number of receiving frames discarded by the input filtering
function
RxMACLimitPkts:
Number of receiving frames discarded by the MAC address
learning count limiting function
RxFairnessPkts:
Number of receiving frames discarded by the input fairness control
function *Unsupported
TxDisOutQoSPkts: Number of sending frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth
limit function of the output port
TxFilterPkts:
RxDropPkts:
TxDropPkts:
TxQueue0DisPkts:
TxQueue1DisPkts:
TxQueue2DisPkts:
TxQueue3DisPkts:
TxQueue4DisPkts:
TxQueue5DisPkts:
Number of sending frames discarded by the output filtering

function
Number of receiving frames discarded as invalid frames by L2SW
Number of frames discarded by L2SW before being enqueued for
sending
Number of sending frames discarded by L2SW (without class)
Number of ClassD sending frames discarded by L2SW
Number of ClassC sending frames discarded by L2SW
Number of ClassB sending frames discarded by L2SW
Number of ClassA sending frames discarded by L2SW
Number of control frame sending frames from CPU discarded by
L2SW
21-7
Monitors
Related
commands
show counter port

clear counter port

21-8
Monitors
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set counter vlan entry

Registration of VLAN counter
Registers counter information collection conditions per VLAN.
Input format
set counter vlan entry P1 P2 P3
Parameters
P1: Counter collection cycle { short | long }

short: Short cycle
long: Long cycle
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple VLAN IDs can be specified.)
Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
If the specified port (line) is in line module duplex operation, VLAN counter collection
conditions for the greater number port are also registered.
Each of the maximum numbers of VLAN counter information collection conditions that
can be registered is as follows:
- Maximum number of VLAN counter information collection conditions that can be
registered when the counter collection cycle is short: 16
registered when the counter collection cycle is long: 256
registered per slot: 64 *
(For the GbE-MUX line module, the maximum number of VLAN counter information
collection conditions that can be registered per slot is 128.)
registered per port: 16 *
* This maximum number is the total of the maximum number of VLAN counter
information collection conditions that can be registered when the counter collection
cycle is short and that when the counter collection cycle is long. The settings of the
same port and VLAN when the counter collection cycle is short and those when the
counter collection cycle is long are counted as 1.
Input example
*Switch@1# set counter vlan entry short 1/8 4094

*Switch@1#
Output item
21-9
Monitors
Related
commands
show counter vlan value

show counter vlan entry
clear counter vlan entry
Display of VLAN counter

Display of VLAN counter registration information
Clearing of registered VLAN counter
21-10
Monitors
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows registered counter collection condition information per VLAN.
Input format
show counter vlan entry P1 [P2 [P3] ]
Parameters

short: Short cycle
long: Long cycle
* When P2 is omitted, registered counter collection condition information of all the
ports is shown.
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple VLAN IDs can be specified.)
* When P3 is omitted, registered counter collection condition information of all the
VLANs is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
The number of counter collection condition information registered per VLAN shown in
Entry Count does not include information of the greater number port.
Input example
*Switch@1# show counter vlan entry long

VLAN Counter Entry (Long Cycle)
===============================
Entry Count : 3
Port VID Name
-------------------------------------------2/1 100 VID-100
9/1 4094 VID-4094
12/1 4094 VID-4094
*Switch@1#
Output items
Entry Count: Number of counter collection condition information registered in the

specified collection cycle
VID: VLAN ID
Name: VLAN name
21-11
Monitors
Related
commands


Clearing of VLAN counter registration
21-12
Monitors
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clearing of VLAN counter registration
Clears registered counter information collection conditions per VLAN.
Input format
clear counter vlan entry P1 P2 [P3]
Parameters

short: Short cycle
long: Long cycle
* When P3 is omitted, the registered counter information collection conditions of all
the VLANs are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes

If the specified port (line) is in line module duplex operation, the VLAN counter collection
conditions of the greater number port are also cleared.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear counter vlan entry short 7/1 100

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands


21-13
Monitors
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows various counter information for transmission and reception per VLAN.
Input formats
- Short-cycle realtime showing

show counter vlan value P1 (short) P2 (real) P3 [P4]
- Short-cycle showing (detailed/realtime detailed)
show counter vlan value P1 (short) P2 (detail | real-detail) P3 P4 [P5]
- Specifying long-cycle showing items
show counter vlan value P1 (long) P3 P4 [P5]
Parameters

short: Short cycle
long: Long cycle
When short is specified in P1
P2: Showing type { real | detail | real-detail }
real-detail: Detailed realtime showing
* Only when real is specified in P2, multiple indexes can be specified (up to 14).
* Only when real is specified in P2, P4 can be omitted.
If P4 is omitted, only the number of lines that can be displayed is shown in
ascending order of registered VLAN IDs.
P5: Display item specification { priority | class }
priority (0 to 7)
class { class-a | class-b | class-c | class-d }
* When P5 is omitted, the integrated value of all the priorities is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
21-14
Monitors
Notes
Using VLAN counter display requires that counter information collection conditions per
VLAN be registered in advance.
If the specified port (line) number is in line module duplex operation when the counter
collection cycle is short and the showing type is detail or when the counter collection
cycle is long, counter information of the greater number port is also shown.
If the specified port (line) is in line module duplex operation when the counter collection
cycle is short and the showing type is real time detail, information of the active port side
counter is also shown.
For detailed showing, specifying priority in P5 enables VLAN counter information to be
shown per priority.
For realtime showing or detailed realtime showing, pressing [Ctrl]+[C] enables you to
end counter information showing.
If the counter value exceeds either of 32 bits or 64 bits (*), the value will be returned to
zero and then incremented from zero again.
If the active slot side increments RxDisOutQoS Octs and RxDisOutQoSPkts counter
items during line module duplex operation, counter items for lines in the both systems
will be incremented.
VLAN counter values may be unable to be collected during UGSW module system
switching or VLAN settings change.
When VLAN tag swapping is set, the VLAN counter is incremented based on the
swapping source VLAN ID.
The CoS priority mapping setup port shows post-mapping priority values.
The portbase VLAN setup port increments the VLAN counter when the priority value is
0. (However, the CoS priority mapping setup port shows post-mapping priority values.)
If no priority is mapped to the specified class, class information and target counter items
are shown by hyphens ---.
There may be a case that some of counters cannot be displayed when the specification
exceeds the maximum display number of VIDs or when a slot in line module duplex
operation is specified. If there is any counter not displayed, a sentence will be
displayed to indicate it.
Input examples
*Switch@1# show counter vlan value short real 5/8 4094

VLAN Counter Table (Short Cycle)
================================
Port : 5/1
----------------------------------------------------------------------VID
Pkts(Rx)
Pkts(Tx)
================================================
4094
0
0
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show counter vlan value short real-detail 5/8 4094 0
VLAN Counter Table (Short Cycle)
================================
Port : 5/1
VID : 4094
Name : VID-4094
Kind : Priority.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------Item
Counts | Item
Counts
=================================+=====================================
RxOcts
:
0 | TxOcts
:
0
RxUcastOcts
:
0 | TxUcastOcts
:
0
RxMcastOcts
:
0 | TxMcastOcts
:
0
21-15
Monitors
RxBcastOcts
:
RxDisInQoSOcts :
RxDisOutQoSOcts :
RxFilterOcts
:
RxMACLimitOcts :
RxPkts
:
RxUcastPkts
:
RxMcastPkts
:
RxBcastPkts
:
RxDisInQoSPkts :
RxDisOutQoSPkts :
RxFilterPkts
:
RxMACLimitPkts :
RxFairnessPkts :
0 | TxBcastOcts
:
0 |
0 | TxDisOutQoSOcts :
0 | TxFilterOcts
:
0 |
0 | TxPkts
:
0 | TxUcastPkts
:
0 | TxMcastPkts
:
0 | TxBcastPkts
:
0 |
0 | TxFilterPkts
:
0 |
0 |
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show counter vlan value long 2/1 100 class-a
VLAN Counter Table (Long Cycle)
===============================
Port : 2/1
VID : 100
Name : VID-100
Kind : Class-A
Class Information
=================
In-Maximum
In-Fairness
Out-Fairness
Out-Maximum
Module
(Priority)
(Priority)
(Priority)
(Priority)
----------------------------------------------------------------------Line
: 6,7
6,7
--Switch :
6,7
----------------------------------------------------------------------Item
Counts | Item
Counts
=================================+=====================================
RxOcts
:
0 | TxOcts
:
--RxUcastOcts
:
0 | TxUcastOcts
:
--RxMcastOcts
:
0 | TxMcastOcts
:
--RxBcastOcts
:
0 | TxBcastOcts
:
--RxDisInQoSOcts :
0 |
RxDisOutQoSOcts :
0 | TxDisOutQoSOcts :
--RxFilterOcts
:
0 | TxFilterOcts
:
--RxMACLimitOcts :
0 |
RxPkts
:
0 | TxPkts
:
--RxUcastPkts
:
0 | TxUcastPkts
:
--RxMcastPkts
:
0 | TxMcastPkts
:
--RxBcastPkts
:
0 | TxBcastPkts
:
--RxDisInQoSPkts :
0 |
RxDisOutQoSPkts :
--RxFilterPkts
:
0 | TxFilterPkts
:
--RxMACLimitPkts :
0 |
RxFairnessPkts :
0 |
*Switch@1#
21-16
Monitors
Output items

VID: VLAN ID
Name: VLAN name
[Realtime sowing]
Pkts(Rx): Number of receiving frames
Pkts(Tx): Number of sending frames
[Detailed showing]
Kind:
RxOcts:
RxUcastOcts:
RxMcastOcts:
RxBcastOcts:
RxDisInQoSOcts:
Priority value or class to be shown

Number of receiving octets
*1
Number of receiving unicast octets
*1
Number of receiving multicast octets
*1
Number of receiving broadcast octets
*1
Number of receiving octets discarded by the maximum
bandwidth limit function of the input port
*1
RxDisOutQoSOcts: Number of receiving octets discarded by the output fairness
control function
*4
RxFilterOcts:
Number of receiving octets discarded by the input filtering
function
*1
RxMACLimitOcts:
Number of receiving octets discarded by the MAC address
*1
RxPkts:
Number of receiving frames
*1
RxUcastPkts:
Number of receiving unicast frames
*1
RxMcastPkts:
Number of receiving multicast frames
*1
RxBcastPkts:
Number of receiving broadcast frames
*1
RxDisInQoSPkts:
Number of receiving frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth
limit function of the input port
*1
RxDisOutQoSPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the output fairness
control function
*4
RxFilterPkts:
Number of receiving frames discarded by the input filtering
function
*1
RxMACLimitPkts:
Number of receiving frames discarded by the MAC address
*1
RxFairnessPkts:
Number of receiving frames discarded by the input fairness
control function *Unsupported
*2
TxOcts:
Number of sending octets
*3
TxUcastOcts:
Number of sending unicast octets
*3
TxMcastOcts:
Number of sending multicast octets
*3
TxBcastOcts:
Number of sending broadcast octets
*3
TxDisOutQoSOcts: Number of sending octets discarded by the maximum
bandwidth limit of the output port
*3
TxFilterOcts:
Number of sending octets discarded by the output filtering
function
*3
TxPkts:
Number of sending frames
*3
TxUcastPkts:
Number of sending unicast frames
*3
TxMcastPkts:
Number of sending multicast frames
*3
TxBcastPkts:
Number of sending broadcast frames
*3
TxDisOutQoSPkts: Number of sending frames discarded by the maximum
bandwidth limit function of the output port
*3
TxFilterPkts:
Number of sending frames discarded by the output filtering
function
*3
21-17
Monitors
[Class showing]
Line(In-Maximum):
Line(In-Fairness):
Line(Out-Maximum):
Switch(Out-Fairness):
Related
commands
clear counter vlan value

Priority mapping in the maximum bandwidth limit function of the

line module input port
(This item is shown for the counter items indicated by *1
above.)
Priority mapping in the input fairness control function of the line
module
above.) * Unsupported
Priority mapping in the maximum bandwidth limit function of the
line module output port
above.)
Priority mapping in the output fairness control function of
Switch
above.)
Clearing of VLAN counter
Show VLAN counter registration information
21-18
Monitors
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear counter vlan value

Clearing of VLAN counter
Clears various counter information for transmission and reception per VLAN.
Input format
clear counter vlan value P1 [ P2 [P3] ]
Parameters

short: Short cycle
long: Long cycle
* When P2 is omitted, counter information of all the ports is cleared.
* When P3 is omitted, counter information of all the VLANs is cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
After this command has been entered, execution is confirmed.

If APS is enabled for the specified port (line), counter information of the greater number
port is also cleared.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear counter vlan value short 7/1

Would you like to clear the counter? :(Y/N): y
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands


21-19
Monitors
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set counter pvc entry

Registration of PVC counter
Registers a PVC counter.
Input format
set counter pvc entry P1
Parameter
| PVC name }
- VPI value/VCI value (Only multiple VCI values can be specified.)
Default value
None
Usage condition
This command can be used only for ATM155/ATMP/ATMP155 line modules.

You can use this function only for registered PVCs.
To specify a port set for APS operation, use the smaller slot number.
(The greater slot number cannot be specified.)
Note
Clearing a PVC also clears all the corresponding registered PVC counters.
Input example
*Switch@1# set counter pvc entry 1/1 1/32

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show counter pvc entry

clear counter pvc entry
Display of PVC counter registration information

Clearing of PVC counter registration
21-20
Monitors
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows PVC counter registration information.
Input format
show counter pvc entry [P1]
Parameter

| PVC name }
- VPI value/VCI value (Only multiple VCI values can be specified.)
- VPI value (Multiple VPI values can be specified)
Default value
None
Usage condition

Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show counter pvc entry

PVC Counter Entry
=================
Entry Count : 2
Port VPI/VCI Name
------------------------------------------------5/1 255/100 abc0123456789
10/1 255/123 abc9876543
*Switch@1#
Output items
Entry Count: Number of registered PVC counters

VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI values
Name: PVC name
Related
commands


21-21
Monitors
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clears a registered PVC counter.
Input format
clear counter pvc entry P1
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
Default value
None
Usage condition

To specify VPI value/VCI value or PVC name, you can use registered PVC counters
only.
Notes
If only port (line) number is specified or VPI value is specified, execution is confirmed
after this command is entered.
Also, all the PVC counters subordinated to the specified one will be cleared.
When the PVC is cleared, PVC counter registration is automatically cleared.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear counter pvc entry 10/1 255/123

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands


21-22
Monitors
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show counter pvc value

Display of byte/frame counter information per PVC
Shows byte/frame counter information per PVC.
Input formats
- Showing type (- Realtime showing - Realtime showing on APS active side)

show counter pvc value P1 (real | act-real) P2
- Showing type (-Detailed showing - Detailed showing on APS active side)
show counter pvc value P1 (detail |act-detail) P2
Parameters
P1: Showing type { real | detail | act-real | act-detail }

act-real: Realtime showing on APS active side
act-detail: Detailed showing on APS active side
When real or act-real is specified in P1
P2: PVC identifier { port (line) number VPI value/VCI value | port (line) number
VPI value | PVC name }
* When act-real is specified in P1, you can only specify 1/1, 2/1, 5/1, 6/1, 9/1,
or 10/1 for the port (line) number.
When detail or act-detail is specified in P2
* When act-detail is specified in P1, you can only specify 1/1, 2/1, 5/1, 6/1, 9/1,
or 10/1 for the port (line) number.
Default value
None
Usage condition
This command can be used only for ATM155 line modules.

21-23
Monitors
Notes
Using display of byte/frame counter information per PVC requires that the PVC has
been registered in advance.
If the counter value exceeds the counter bit width, it is cleared to zero and then
incremented.
Counter values may be unable to be collected during system switching of SWITCH or
target PVC settings change.
When real or act-real is specified, up to 14 indexes will be displayed.
Display counters for act-real and act-detail collects count values of APS active side by
the update timing. If APS function is disabled at any update timing, then they collect
the counter value of the smaller number slot.
Input examples
*Switch@1# show counter pvc value real 10/1 30/100-101

PVC Counter Table
=================
Port
: 10/1
VPI/VCI
Pkts(Rx)
Pkts(Tx)
Entry
----------------------------------------------------------------------30/100 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 registered
30/101 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 unregistered
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show counter pvc value detail 10/1 30/100

PVC Counter Table
=================
Port
: 10/1
VPI/VCI : 30/100
Name
: abc0123456
Entry : registered
Item
Counts | Item
Counts
-----------------------------------------------------+----------------RxOcts
: 18446744073709551615 | TxOcts
: 18446744073709551615
RxPkts
: 123456789012345678 | TxPkts
: 123456789012345678
RxErrors :
0 |
*Switch@1#
21-24
Monitors
Output items
[Realtime showing]
Pkts(Rx): Number of receiving frames
Pkts(Tx): Number of sending frames
Entry:
registered: PVC counter registered
unregistered: PVC counter not registered
[Detailed showing]
Name: PVC name
Entry:
RxOcts: Number of receiving octets
RxPkts: Number of receiving frames
RxErrors: Number discarded receiving frames
TxOcts: Number of sending octets
TxPkts: Number of sending frames
Related
commands

clear counter pvc value

Clearing of byte/frame counter information per PVC
21-25
Monitors
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear counter pvc value

Clearing of byte/frame counter information per PVC
Clears byte/frame counter information per PVC.
Input format
clear counter pvc value P1
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
Default value
None
Usage
conditions

However, this command has no effect on ATMP/ATMP155 lines because there is no
information to be displayed for these lines.
only.
Notes
Also, values of all the byte/frame counter per PVC subordinated to the specified one will
be cleared.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear counter pvc value 1/1 0/32

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
Display of byte/frame counter information per PVC
21-26
Monitors
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show counter cell

Display of cell counter information
Shows various cell counter information per port or per IMA group.
Input format
show counter cell P1 P2
Parameters

* You can specify multiple port (line) numbers when real is specified in P1.
Default value
None
Usage
conditions

To specify a port set for an IMA group, use the root port line number.
(If a value other than the root port line number is specified, an error occurs.)
Notes
incremented.
When real is specified, up to 14 indexes will be displayed.
In the case of OAM cell counters, only counters for registered PVCs are collected.
If a root port of an IMA group is specified, counter information will be displayed per IMA
group. To display counter information for each port in an IMA group separately, use
the show counter cell ima-port command.
21-27
Monitors
Input examples
*Switch@1# show counter cell real 10/1

Cell Counter Table
==================
Port
Cells(Rx)
Cells(Tx) Entry
----------------------------------------------------------------10/1 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615
--Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c]
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show counter cell detail 10/1
Cell Counter Table
==================
Port
: 10/1
Item
Counts | Item
Counts
---------------------------------------+------------------------------RxCells
:
1234567890 | TxCells
:
1234567890
RxErrors
:
1 | TxErrors
:
0
RxF4SegAIS
:
0 | TxF4SegAIS
:
0
RxF4SegRDI
:
0 | TxF4SegRDI
:
0
RxF4SegLoopback :
0 | TxF4SegLoopback :
0
RxF4SegOthers :
0 | TxF4SegOthers
:
0
RxF4EndAIS
:
0 | TxF4EndAIS
:
0
RxF4EndRDI
:
0 | TxF4EndRDI
:
0
RxF4EndLoopback :
0 | TxF4EndLoopback :
0
RxF4EndOthers :
0 | TxF4EndOthers
:
0
RxF5SegAIS
:
0 | TxF5SegAIS
:
0
RxF5SegRDI
:
0 | TxF5SegRDI
:
0
RxF5SegLoopback :
0
RxF5SegOthers :
0 | TxF5SegOthers :
0
RxF5EndAIS
:
0 | TxF5EndAIS
:
0
RxF5EndRDI
:
0 | TxF5EndRDI
:
0
RxF5EndLoopback :
0
RxF5EndOthers :
0 | TxF5EndOthers
:
0
*Switch@1#
21-28
Monitors
Output items
[Realtime showing]
Cells(Rx): Number of receiving cells
Cells(Tx): Number of sending cells
Entry: Fixed to ---
[Detailed showing]
Port:
RxCells:
Port (line) number

Number of receiving cells
RxErrors:
Number of discarded receiving cells
RxF4SegAIS:
RxF4SegRDI:
RxF4SegLoopback:
RxF4SegOthers:
RxF4EndAIS:
RxF4EndRDI:
RxF4EndLoopback:
RxF4EndOthers:
RxF5SegAIS:
RxF5SegRDI:
RxF5SegLoopback:
RxF5SegOthers:
RxF5EndAIS:
RxF5EndRDI:
RxF5EndLoopback:
RxF5EndOthers:
TxCells:
TxErrors:
TxF4SegAIS:
TxF4SegRDI:
TxF4SegLoopback:
TxF4SegOthers:
TxF4EndAIS:
TxF4EndRDI:
TxF4EndLoopback:
TxF4EndOthers:
TxF5SegAIS:
TxF5SegRDI:
TxF5SegLoopback:
TxF5SegOthers:
TxF5EndAIS:
TxF5EndRDI:
TxF5EndLoopback:
TxF5EndOthers:
VP-AIS cell of receiving segment

VP-RDI cell of receiving segment
Loopback cell of receiving F4-level segment
Other receiving cells of F4-level segment
VP-AIS cell of receiving end
VP-RDI cell of receiving end
Loopback cell of receiving F4-level end
Other receiving cells of F4-level end
VC-AIS cell of receiving segment
VC-RDI cell of receiving segment
VC-AIS cell of receiving end
VC-RDI cell of receiving end
Number of sending cells
Number of discarded sending cells
VP-AIS cell of sending segment
VP-RDI cell of sending segment
Loopback cell of sending F4-level segment
Other sending cell of F4-level segment
VP-AIS cell of sending end
VP-RDI cell of sending end
Loopback cell of sending F4-level end
Other sending cell of F4-level end
VC-AIS cell of sending segment
VC-RDI cell of sending segment
VC-AIS cell of sending end
VC-RDI cell of sending end
21-29
Monitors
Related
commands

show counter cell f4
show counter cell ima-port
clear counter cell
set ima group
clear ima group

Display of cell counter information per F4
Display of cell counter information per IMA port
Clearing of cell counter information
21-30
Monitors
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows various cell counter information per F4.
Input format
show counter cell f4 P1 P2
Parameters

- PVC name: 1 to 32 characters (VP connection only)
* You can specify multiple VPI values when real is specified in P1.
Default value
None
Usage
conditions

Notes
Using cell counter display requires that a PVC be registered in advance.

incremented.
Values of F5 OAM cell counters for VP connection are fixed to zeros.
Input examples
*Switch@1# show counter cell f4 real 10/1 255

F4-Cell Counter Table
=====================
Port
: 10/1
VPI
Cells(Rx)
Cells(Tx)
Entry
----------------------------------------------------------------------255 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 unregistered
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show counter cell f4 detail 10/1 255
21-31
Monitors
=====================
Port
: 10/1
VPI
: 255
Entry : unregistered
Item
Counts | Item
Counts
----------------------------------------------------------+-----------RxCells
:
1234567890 | TxCells
:
1234567890
RxErrors
:
0 | TxErrors
:
0
RxF4SegAIS
:
0 | TxF4SegAIS
:
0
RxF4SegRDI
:
0 | TxF4SegRDI
:
0
RxF4SegLoopback :
0
RxF4SegOthers :
0 | TxF4SegOthers
:
0
RxF4EndAIS
:
0 | TxF4EndAIS
:
0
RxF4EndRDI
:
0 | TxF4EndRDI
:
0
RxF4EndLoopback :
0
RxF4EndOthers :
0 | TxF4EndOthers
:
0
RxF5SegAIS
:
0 | TxF5SegAIS
:
0
RxF5SegRDI
:
0 | TxF5SegRDI
:
0
RxF5SegLoopback :
0
RxF5SegOthers :
0 | TxF5SegOthers
:
0
RxF5EndAIS
:
0 | TxF5EndAIS
:
0
RxF5EndRDI
:
0 | TxF5EndRDI
:
0
RxF5EndLoopback :
0
RxF5EndOthers :
0 | TxF5EndOthers
:
0
*Switch@1#
Output items
[Realtime showing]
VPI: VPI value
Entry:
[Detailed showing]
VPI: VPI value
Entry:
RxCells:
RxErrors:
RxF4SegAIS:
RxF4SegRDI:
RxF4SegLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F4-level segment
RxF4SegOthers:
RxF4EndAIS:
RxF4EndRDI:
21-32
Monitors
RxF4EndLoopback:
RxF4EndOthers:
RxF5SegAIS:
RxF5SegRDI:
RxF5SegLoopback:
RxF5SegOthers:
RxF5EndAIS:
RxF5EndRDI:
RxF5EndLoopback:
RxF5EndOthers:
TxCells:
TxErrors:
TxF4SegAIS:
TxF4SegRDI:
TxF4SegLoopback:
TxF4SegOthers:
TxF4EndAIS:
TxF4EndRDI:
TxF4EndLoopback:
TxF4EndOthers:
TxF5SegAIS:
TxF5SegRDI:
TxF5SegLoopback:
TxF5SegOthers:
TxF5EndAIS:
TxF5EndRDI:
TxF5EndLoopback:
TxF5EndOthers:
Related
commands


show counter cell
clear counter cell
set ima group
clear ima group

21-33
Monitors
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows various cell counter information per F5.
Input format
show counter cell f5 P1 P2
Parameters

- PVC name: 1 to 32 characters (VC connection only)
* You can specify multiple values for VCI value of VPI value/VCI value when real is
specified in P1.
* You can specify VPI value in P2 only when real or act-real is specified in P1.
Default value
None
Usage
conditions

Notes
Using display of byte/frame counter information per PVC requires that a PVC be
registered in advance.
incremented.
Values of F4 OAM cell counters for VP connection are fixed to zeros.
Input examples
*Switch@1# show counter cell f5 real 10/1 255/100

=====================
Port
: 10/1
VPI/VCI
Cells(Rx)
Cells(Tx) Entry
----------------------------------------------------------------------255/100 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 registered
21-34
Monitors
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show counter cell f5 detail 10/1 255/100
=====================
Port
: 10/1
VPI/VCI : 255/100
Entry : registered
Item
Counts | Item
Counts
----------------------------------------------------------+-----------RxCells
:
1234567890 | TxCells
:
1234567890
RxErrors
:
0 | TxErrors
:
0
RxF4SegAIS
:
0 | TxF4SegAIS
:
0
RxF4SegRDI
:
0 | TxF4SegRDI
:
0
RxF4SegLoopback :
0
RxF4SegOthers :
0 | TxF4SegOthers
:
0
RxF4EndAIS
:
0 | TxF4EndAIS
:
0
RxF4EndRDI
:
0 | TxF4EndRDI
:
0
RxF4EndLoopback :
0
RxF4EndOthers :
0 | TxF4EndOthers
:
0
RxF5SegAIS
:
0 | TxF5SegAIS
:
0
RxF5SegRDI
:
0 | TxF5SegRDI
:
0
RxF5SegLoopback :
0
RxF5SegOthers
:
0 | TxF5SegOthers :
0
RxF5EndAIS
:
0 | TxF5EndAIS
:
0
RxF5EndRDI
:
0 | TxF5EndRDI
:
0
RxF5EndLoopback :
0
RxF5EndOthers :
0 | TxF5EndOthers
:
0
*Switch@1#
Output items
[Realtime showing]
Entry:
[Detailed showing]
Entry:
RxCells:
RxErrors:
RxF4SegAIS:
RxF4SegRDI:
RxF4SegLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F4-level segment
21-35
Monitors
RxF4SegOthers:
RxF4EndAIS:
RxF4EndRDI:
RxF4EndLoopback:
RxF4EndOthers:
RxF5SegAIS:
RxF5SegRDI:
RxF5SegLoopback:
RxF5SegOthers:
RxF5EndAIS:
RxF5EndRDI:
RxF5EndLoopback:
RxF5EndOthers:
TxCells:
TxErrors:
TxF4SegAIS:
TxF4SegRDI:
TxF4SegLoopback:
TxF4SegOthers:
TxF4EndAIS:
TxF4EndRDI:
TxF4EndLoopback:
TxF4EndOthers:
TxF5SegAIS:
TxF5SegRDI:
TxF5SegLoopback:
TxF5SegOthers:
TxF5EndAIS:
TxF5EndRDI:
TxF5EndLoopback:
TxF5EndOthers:
Related
commands


show counter cell
clear counter cell
set ima group
clear ima group

21-36
Monitors
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows various cell counter information per port in an IMA group.
Input format
show counter cell ima-port P1 P2
Parameters

* You can specify multiple port (line) numbers when real is specified in P1.
Default value
None
Usage
conditions
This command can be used only for ATMP line modules.

Only ports set for an IMA group can be displayed.
Notes
incremented.
21-37
Monitors
Input examples
*Switch@1# show counter cell ima-port real 10/1-3

Cell Counter Table
==================
Port
: 10/1-3
Port
Cells(Rx)
Cells(Tx) Entry
----------------------------------------------------------------10/1 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 --10/2 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 --10/3 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 --Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c]
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show counter cell ima-port detail 10/2
Cell Counter Table
==================
Port
: 10/2
Item
Counts | Item
Counts
---------------------------------------+------------------------------RxCells
: 18446744073709551615 | TxCells
: 18446744073709551615
RxErrors
: 18446744073709551615 | TxErrors
:
0
*Switch@1#
Output items
[Realtime showing]
Entry: Fixed to ---
[Detailed showing]
RxCells: Number of receiving cells
RxErrors: Number of discarded receiving cells
TxCells: Number of sending cells
TxErrors: Number of discarded sending cells
Related
commands

show counter cell
clear counter cell
set ima group
clear ima group

21-38
Monitors
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear counter cell

Clears various cell counter information.
Input format
clear counter cell P1
Parameter
value] | PVC name }
Default value
None
Usage
conditions

only.
Notes
Also, all the cell counters included will be cleared.
Input example
*Switch@1# clear counter cell 1/1 0/32

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

show counter cell

21-39
Monitors
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set counter ether-oam entry

Registration of EtherOAM counter
Registers collection conditions for an EtherOAM counter.
Input formats
- Specifying specific EtherOAM frame

set counter ether-oam entry P1 P2 (VLAN ID | untag) P3 P4
- Specifying all EtherOAM frames
set counter ether-oam entry P1 P2 (all)
Parameters

P2: Specifying VLAN ID, Untag { untag }, or all EtherOAM frames { all }
untag: Specifying Untag
all: Specifying all EtherOAM frames
When VLAN ID or untag is specified in P2
P4: EtherOAM type (0 to 255)
Default value
None
Usage condition
Only one counter can be registered for one port (line).
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# set counter ether-oam entry 1/1 1 0 1

*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# set counter ether-oam entry 12/1 all
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show counter ether-oam entry

clear counter ether-oam entry
show counter ether-oam value
Display of EtherOAM counter registration information

Clearing of EtherOAM counter registration
Display of EtherOAM counter
21-40
Monitors
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows registered information of EtherOAM counter collection conditions.
Input format
show counter ether-oam entry [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, the frame counter settings of all ports (lines) to which counter is
set are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# show counter ether-oam entry

Ether OAM Counter Entry
=======================
Port VLAN-ID MEG Level OP-Code
--------------------------------1/1
1
0
1
12/1
all
all
all
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show counter ether-oam entry 1/1
=======================
--------------------------------1/1
1
0
1
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show counter ether-oam entry 12/1
=======================
--------------------------------12/1
all
all
all
*Switch@1#
Output items

VLAN-ID: VLAN ID
untag is displayed for untagMEP
* "all" is displayed when the parameter is omitted.
OP-Code: EtherOAM frame type value
21-41
Monitors
Related
commands


21-42
Monitors
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Clears registered information of EtherOAM counter collection conditions.
Input format
clear counter ether-oam entry [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, the frame counter settings of all ports (lines) to which counter is
set are cleared.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear counter ether-oam entry 1/1

*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# clear counter ether-oam entry
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands


21-43
Monitors
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows the collection information of EtherOAM counter.
Input format
show counter ether-oam value [P1]
Parameter

* When P1 is omitted, the frame counter values of all ports (lines) to which counter is
set are shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input examples
*Switch@1# show counter ether-oam value

Ether OAM Frame Count
=====================
Port
RxPkts
TxPkts
---------------------------1/1
1121
1021
12/1
1021
1121
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show counter ether-oam value 1/1
Ether OAM Frame Count
=====================
Port
RxPkts
TxPkts
---------------------------1/1
121
102
*Switch@1#
Output items

RxPkts: Number of received frames
TxPkts: Number of transmitted frames
Related
commands


21-44
Monitors
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
mirror port
Setting of mirroring start or stop
Sets mirroring start or stop.
Input formats
- Stopping mirroring
mirror port P1 (stop)
- Starting mirroring (with only input-side ports (lines) specified for mirroring
target)
mirror port P1 (start) P2 P3
- Starting mirroring (with only output-side ports (lines) specified for mirroring
target)
mirror port P1 (start) P2 P4
- Starting mirroring (with input- and output-side ports (lines) specified for
mirroring target)
mirror port P1 (start) P2 P3 P4
mirror port P1 (start) P2 P4 P3
Parameters
P1: Mirroring start or stop { start | stop }

start: Mirroring start
stop: Mirroring stop
P2: Mirroring output destination port (line) number (single specification)
P3: Mirroring target port (line) (input-side)
in-port port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)
P4: Mirroring target port (line) (output-side)
out-port port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
In the following cases, you cannot set mirroring start:

- The mirroring output destination port is duplicated with the mirroring target port.
- VLAN is set in the port to be specified as the mirroring output destination.
- Link aggregation is set in the port to be specified as the mirroring output destination.
- In the mirroring setting for GbE-MUX line module, a line module other than the same
line module is specified.
- In the mirroring setting for GbE-MUX line module, multiple mirroring target port (line)
input sides (in-port) are specified.
In the mirroring setting for GbE-MUX line module where mirroring target port (line)
output-side (out-port) is specified, the protocol control frame can perform monitoring
only at the input-side port specified for mirroring target.
Input example
*Switch@1# mirror port start 7/1 in-port 8/1

*Switch@1#
21-45
Monitors
Output item
Related
command
show mirror port
Display of mirroring settings
21-46
Monitors
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show mirror port

Display of mirroring settings
Shows mirroring settings.
Input format
show mirror port
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show mirror port

Mirror Information
==================
Mirror To
---------Port: 7/1
Mirror From
-------------In Port: 8/1
Out Port:
*Switch@1#
Output items
Mirror To: Mirroring output destination port

Mirror From: Mirroring target port
In Port: Port (line) number specified on input side
Out Port: Port (line) number specified on output side
Related
command
mirror port
21-47
Monitors
(Blank page)
21-48
Maintenance and Operation
22 Maintenance and
Operation
22-1

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
upload running-config
Uploading of running configuration to ftp server
Uploads running configuration to the ftp server.
Input format
upload running-config P1 P2
Parameters
P1: IP address
P2: File name or path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)
Default value
None
Usage conditions

communication.
Notes
Set an ftp user name and ftp password interactively.

Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphabets, numeric characters, and
symbols and signs % & , / : = [ ] \ ^ _ { } ~ . .
You can use /, : and \ only when specifying a path name.
You can use . only when specifying a file name.
Configuration information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by
the show running-config command.
Input example
*Switch@1# upload running-config 192.168.2.212 test.txt

FTP Login Name
: cx2600
FTP Login Password :
Data Transferring.....................................
*Switch@1#
Output items
FTP Login Name: User name used to log in to ftp server

FTP Login Password: User password used to log in to ftp server
FTP Information: ftp server error message (Only when a command error occurs)
Related
commands

download running-config
show running-config
write memory

Downloading of running configuration from ftp server
Display of running configuration
Saving of setting information
22-2

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
upload startup-config
Uploading of startup configuration to ftp server
Uploads startup configuration to the ftp server.
Input format
upload startup-config P1 P2
Parameters
P1: IP address
Default value
None
Usage conditions

communication.
Notes

the show startup-config command.
Input example
*Switch@1# upload startup-config 192.168.2.211 test2.txt

FTP Login Name
: cx2600
*Switch@1#
Output items

Related
commands

download startup-config
show startup-config
write memory
clear startup-config

Downloading of startup configuration from ftp server
Display of startup configuration
Clearing of startup configuration
22-3

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
upload local-syslog
Uploads the system log to the ftp server.
Input format
upload local-syslog P1 P2
Parameters
P1: IP address
Default value
None
Usage conditions

communication.
Notes

Local syslog information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by
the show local syslog command.
Input example
*Switch@1# upload local-syslog 192.168.2.211 syslog.txt

FTP Login Name
: cx2600
Information is under collection.
Data Transferring........................
*Switch@1#
Output items

Related
commands

show syslog local
clear syslog local

Display of local syslog
22-4

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
upload all-information
Uploading of setting information to ftp server
Uploads setting information to the ftp server.
Input format
upload all-information P1 P2
Parameters
P1: IP address
Default value
None
Usage conditions

communication.
Notes

Setting information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by the
show all command.
Input example
*Switch@1# upload all-information 192.168.2.211 allinfo.txt

FTP Login Name
: cx2600
*Switch@1#
Output items

Related
commands

show all

Display of setting information
22-5

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
upload fault
Uploading of fault information to ftp server
Uploads fault information to the ftp server.
Input format
upload fault P1 P2
Parameters
P1: IP address
Default value
None
Usage conditions

communication.
Notes

Fault information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by the
show fault present and show fault past commands.
Input example
*Switch@1# upload fault 192.168.2.211 fault.txt

FTP Login Name
: cx2600
Data Transferring...........................
*Switch@1#
Output items

Related
commands

show fault present
show fault past

Display of current fault and alarm information
Display of past fault information
22-6

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
download software
Downloading of software
Downloads software.
Input format
download software P1 P2
Parameters
P1: IP address
Default value
None
Usage conditions

communication.
Notes

Set a file name or a path name + file name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and
[control character]. (However, you can use only the characters that can be recognized
by the ftp server.)
Input example
*Switch@1# download software 10.40.73.200

cx2600_sw/release_lm/cx2600_220_so
Ft_c_010003.dlm
FTP Login Name
: cx2600
Data Transferring.................
Download Data Processing..........................
Writing Flash Memory............
*Switch@1#
Output items

Related
commands


22-7

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
download fpga switch

Downloading of FPGA of UGSW module
Downloads FPGA of a UGSW module.
Input format
download fpga switch P1 P2
Parameters
P1: IP address
Default value
None
Usage conditions

communication.
Notes

To reflect the downloaded data, you must enter the reset switch command specifying
fpga-version-up parameter to reinitialize the switch module.
Input example
*Switch@1# download fpga switch 192.168.1.30

/data/cx2600_220_fpga_UGSWC_020102.dlm
Data Transferring..
Writing Flash Memory......................
Data Transferring..
Data Transferring..
Data Transferring..
Data Transferring..
Data Transferring..
Data Transferring..
Data Transferring..
*Switch@1#
Output items

Related
commands

reset switch

Resetting of UGSW module
22-8

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
download fpga line

Downloading of FPGA of line module
Downloads FPGA of a line module.
Input format
download fpga line P1 P2 P3
Parameters
P1: Line module type { fe | gbe | fe-pv | gbe-pv | gmx | atm | atmp | tdmp | gbe-pv2 |
atmp155 | tdmp155 }
fe: Line module FE8/FX8
gbe: Line module GbE
fe-pv: Line module FE8-PV/FX8-PV
gbe-pv: Line module Gbe-PV
gmx: Line module GM8-T/GM8-X
atm: Line module ATM155
atmp: Line module ATMP
tdmp: Line module TDMP
gbe-pv2: Line module Gbe-PV2
atmp155: Line module ATMP155
tdmp155: Line module TDMP155
P2: IP address
Default value
None
Usage conditions

communication.
Notes
To reflect the downloaded data, you must enter the reset line command to reinitialize
the line module.
Set an ftp user name and FTP password interactively.
by the ftp server.)
22-9

Input example
*Switch@1# download fpga line fe 192.168.1.30

/data/cx2600_220_fpga_FE_FX_020102.dlm
Data Transferring..
Download Data Processing.................................................
Line# 1 : completed
Line# 2 : --Line# 3 : completed
Line# 4 : --Line# 5 : --Line# 6 : --Line# 7 : completed
Line# 8 : --Line# 9 : --Line#10 : --Line#11 : --Line#12 : --*Switch@1#
Output items

Related
commands

reset line

22-10

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
Downloads running configuration from the ftp server.
Input format
download running-config P1 P2
Parameters
P1: IP address
Default value
None
Usage conditions

communication.
Notes
No line module can be initialized during execution of this command. For this reason,
the line modules implemented during execution of this command are incorporated with
OUS state.
Also if a download file contains a command that involves line module initialization (e.g.,
set line type), the specified line module may be incorporated with OUS state.
After this command terminates, use the reset line command to reinitialize the line
module incorporated with OUS state.
ftp transfer may be performed several times according to the configuration size to be
downloaded.
by the ftp server.)
Input example
*Switch@1# download running-config 192.168.2.212 soft_LM/test.txt

FTP Login Name
: cx2600
Data Transferring....
Data setting........
*Switch@1#
Output items

22-11

Related
commands

show running-config
write memory
reset line

22-12

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
Downloads startup configuration from the ftp server.
Input format
download startup-config P1 P2
Parameters
P1: IP address
Default value
None
Usage conditions

communication.
Notes
ftp transfer may be performed several times according to the configuration size to be
downloaded.
by the ftp server.)
Input example
*Switch@1# download startup-config 192.168.2.212 soft_LM/test.txt

FTP Login Name
: cx2600
Data setting........
Writing Flash Memory........
*Switch@1#
Output items

Related
commands

show startup-config
write memory

22-13

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show running-config
Shows the current running configuration.
Input format
show running-config [P1]
Parameter
P1: Scroll control { step | non-step }

step: Enables scroll control
non-step: Disables scroll control (display to the end)
* When P1 is omitted, scroll follows scroll control settings.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show running-config non-step

!System : NEC CX2600/220
!Current Soft Ver.07.05.01
!Present Time : 12/25/2007 21:46:34
set terminal scroll system off
set terminal logout 0
!
set fault auto-reboot disable
!
!
!
!
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
write memory

22-14

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show startup-config
Shows the saved startup configuration.
Input format
show startup-config [P1]
Parameter

Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show startup-config non-step

!System : NEC CX2600/220
!Written Soft Ver.07.05.01
!Written Time : 12/25/2007 21:10:41
set terminal scroll system off
set terminal logout 0
!
set fault auto-reboot disable
!
!
!
!
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
write memory

22-15

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show config difference

Display of configuration difference
Shows whether there is a difference between startup configuration and running configuration.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
Since it takes times to show the result after command input, (dots) are shown.
Input example
Switch@1# show config difference

Configuration Difference Information
===================================
Module
Configuration
----------------------------------Switch#1 : same
Switch#2 : different
Switch@1#
Output items
Module: Module
Config: Difference between startup configuration and running configuration
same: There is no difference between startup configuration and running configuration
difference: There is a difference between startup configuration and running
configuration
Related
commands
write memory

22-16

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set message transmit

Setting of trap transmission selection
Sets trap transmission selection.
Input formats
- Specifying private trap

set message transmit [P1] [P2 (private-trap) [P3] ] P4
- Specifying trap-ID
set message transmit [P1] [P2 (trap-id) [P3] ] P4
- Specifying line message
set message transmit [P1] [P2 (line) [P3] ] P4
- Specifying port message or link change
set message transmit [P1] [P2 (port | link) [P3] ] P4
- Specifying fault message
set message transmit [P1] [P2 (fault) [P3] ] P4
- Specifying telnet message
set message transmit [P1] [P2 (telnet) [P3] ] P4
- Specifying maintenance network message
set message transmit [P1] [P2 (maintenance-network) [P3] ] P4
- Specifying external memory
set message transmit [P1] [P2 (external-memory) [P3] ] P4
- Specifying ATM OAM alarm
set message transmit [P1] [P2 (atm-oam) [P3] ] P4
- Specifying EtherOAM alarm
set message transmit [P1] [P2 (ether-oam) [P3] ] P4
- Controlling STM-1 line
set message transmit [P1] [P2 (stm) [P3] ] P4
22-17

- Specifying group below
MC information
SFP change information
NTP access error
Scheduled configuration upload
Spanning tree
MAC learning
Link aggregation
ATM loopback event
APS event
ATM loop occurrence fault
EtherPS event
T1E1OAM information
TDMoP information
IMA group
EtherRing event
Command
set message transmit [P1] [P2] P4
Parameters
P1: Message type { monitor | trap | remote-log | local-log }

monitor: Autonomous message
trap: Trap message
remote-log: Remote log message
local-log: Local log message
* When P1 is omitted, all message types are set.
P2: Message group
private-trap: Private trap
trap-id: Trap-ID
line: Line message
port: Port message
link: Link change
fault: Fault message
mc: MC information
sfp: SFP change information
ntp: NTP access error
telnet: telnet message
maintenance-network: Maintenance network message
backup: Scheduled configuration upload
external-memory: External memory
spantree: Spanning tree
fdb: MAC learning
aggregation: Link aggregation
atm-oam: ATM OAM alarm
loopback-atm: ATM loopback event
aps: APS event
atm-loop: ATM loop occurrence fault
ether-oam: EtherOAM alarm
ether-ps: EtherPS event
t1e1: T1E1OAM information
tdmop: TDMoP information
ima: IMA group
stm: STM-1 line control
22-18

ether-ring: EtherRing event
command: Command
* When P2 is omitted, all the message groups are set.
When private-trap is specified in P2
P3: Private trap number (1 to 999)
When trap-id is specified in P2
P3: Trap-ID (1 to 999)
When line is specified in P2
When link is specified in P2
When fault is specified in P2
P3: Fault type { critical | major | minor | warning }
critical: Critical error
major: Major error
minor: Minor error
warning: Warning error
When telnet is specified in P2
P3: telnet connection state { connect | fail }
connect: telnet login, logout
fail: telnet error
When maintenance-network is specified in P2
P3: Maintenance network load { out-band | in-band }
out-band: Maintenance network load (OUTBAND)
in-band: Maintenance network load (INBAND)
When external-memory is specified in P2
P3: External memory { status | fault }
status: External memory status change
fault: External memory fault
When atm-oam is specified in P2
P3: ATM OAM alarm { detect-f1f3 | detect-f4f5 | detect-minor }
detect-f1f3: F1/F2/F3 alarm detection
detect-f4f5: F4/F5 alarm detection
detect-minor: MN alarm detection
When ether-oam is specified in P2
P3: EtherOAM alarm { unexpect-level | mismerge | unexpect-mep |
unexpect-period | loc | rdi }
unexpect-level: Unexpect MEG Level
mismerge: Mismerge
unexpect-mep: Unexpect MEP
unexpect-period: Unexpect Period
loc: LOC
rdi: RDI
22-19

When stm is specified in P2
P3: STM-1 line control { detect-rs | detect-ms | detect-hp | detect-lp | detect-pdh }
detect-rs: RS alarm detection
detect-ms: MS alarm detection
detect-hp: High-order path alarm detection
detect-lp: Low-order path alarm detection
detect-pdh: PDH alarm detection
* When P3 is omitted, all the members belonging to the group specified in P2 are set.
P4: Trap transmission selection setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables trap transmission selection
disable: Disables trap transmission selection
Default value
P4: enable
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set message transmit trap telnet disable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show message transmit config
Display of trap transmission selection setting status
22-20

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of trap transmission selection setting status
Shows the trap transmission selection setting status.
Input format
show message transmit config [P1]
Parameter
P1: Message group { private-trap | trap-id | line | port | link | fault | mc | sfp | ntp | telnet |
maintenance-network | backup | external-memory | spantree | fdb | aggregation |
atm-oam | loopback-atm | aps | atm-loop | ether-oam | ether-ps | t1e1 | tdmop | ima | stm
| ether-ring | command }
private-trap: Private trap
trap-id: Trap-ID
line: Line message
port: Port message
link: Link change
fault: Fault message
mc: MC information
sfp: SFP change information
ntp: NTP access error
telnet: telnet message
maintenance-network: Maintenance network message
backup: Scheduled configuration upload
spantree: Spanning tree
fdb: MAC learning
aggregation: Link aggregation
atm-oam: ATM OAM alarm
loopback-atm: ATM loopback event
aps: APS event
atm-loop: ATM loop occurrence fault
ether-oam: EtherOAM alarm
ether-ps: EtherPS event
t1e1: T1E1OAM information
tdmop: TDMoP information
ima: IMA group
stm: STM-1 line control
ether-ring: EtherRing event
command: Command
* When P1 is omitted, all the message groups are set.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
22-21

Input example
*Switch@1# show message transmit config

Message Transmit Configuration(Member)
======================================
Group
Member
Monitor Trap
Remote-log Local-log
----------------------------------------------------------------------fault
: critical
enabled enabled enabled
enabled
major
enabled
minor
enabled
warning
enabled
mc
: --enabled enabled enabled
enabled
sfp
enabled
ntp
enabled
telnet
: connect
enabled
fail
enabled
maintenance-network: out-band
enabled
in-band
enabled
backup
enabled
external-memory : status
enabled
fault
enabled
spantree
enabled
fdb
enabled
aggregation
enabled
atm-oam
: detect-f1f3
enabled
detect-f4f5
enabled
detect-minor
enabled
loopback-atm
enabled
aps
enabled
atm-loop
enabled
ether-oam
: unexpect-level enabled enabled enabled
enabled
mismerge
enabled
unexpect-mep
enabled
unexpect-period enabled enabled enabled
enabled
loc
enabled
rdi
enabled
ether-ps
: --disabled disabled disabled
disabled
t1e1
: --disabled disabled disabled
disabled
tdmop
enabled
stm
: detect-rs
enabled
detect-ms
enabled
detect-hp
enabled
detect-lp
enabled
detect-pdh
enabled
command
: ------enabled
enabled
Message Transmit Configuration(Element)
=======================================
Group
Element Monitor Trap
Remote-log Local-log
----------------------------------------------------------------private-trap :
10 disabled disabled disabled
disabled
trap-id
:
100 disabled disabled disabled
disabled
line
:
1 enabled disabled disabled
disabled
11 disabled disabled enabled
enabled
port
:
1/1 enabled disabled disabled
disabled
11/1 disabled disabled enabled
enabled
link
:
1/1 enabled disabled disabled
disabled
*Switch@1#
22-22

Output items
Message Transmit Configuration(Member)

Group: Group name
Member: Member name
Monitor: Autonomous message
enabled: Autonomous message enabled
disabled: Autonomous message disabled
Trap: Trap message
enabled: Trap message enabled
disabled: Trap message disabled
Remote-log: Remote log message
enabled: Remote log message enabled
disabled: Remote log message disabled
Local-log: Local log message
enabled: Local log message enabled
disabled: Local log message disabled
Message Transmit Configuration(Element)
Group: Group name
Element: Element number
Monitor: Autonomous message
enabled: Autonomous message enabled
disabled: Autonomous message disabled
Trap: Trap message
enabled: Trap message enabled
disabled: Trap message disabled
Remote-log: Remote log message
enabled: Remote log message enabled
disabled: Remote log message disabled
Local-log: Local log message
enabled: Local log message enabled
disabled: Local log message disabled
Related
command
Setting of trap transmission selection
22-23

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show all
Display of all setting information
Shows all setting information.
Input format
show all [P1]
Parameter

Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
For target commands, see Appendix.
Input example
*Switch@1# show all non-step

License Information
===================
User Information
================
System Date
===========
Date
: 10/21/2004
Time
: 21:47:41
Time Zone: GMT +09:00
System Information
==================
SysDescr
: NEC CX2600/220 Ver.02.01.01
System Location: NEC
System Name
: CX2600/220
System Contact : abc
System Up Time : 0 days, 00:45:42.13
Out-Band IP Table
=================
Module
MAC Address
IP Address
Netmask
----------------------------------------------------------------------System : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:94 192.168.1.211
255.255.255.0
Switch#1 : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:94 192.168.1.212
255.255.255.0
Switch#2 : 00:00:00:00:00:00 192.168.1.213
255.255.255.0
22-24

<Omission>
Output item
Related
commands
All show commands

upload all-information
Uploading of all setting information
22-25

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
write memory
Saves the setting information.
Input format
write memory [P1]
Parameter
P1: Running slot { self | mate | system }

self: Self slot
mate: Mate slot
system: Both-system slot
* When P1 is omitted, self is assumed.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
Switch@1# write memory

Writing Flash Memory....
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show running-config
show startup-config

22-26

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear running-config line

Clearing of line module configuration
Clears line module configuration.
Input format
clear running-config line P1
Parameter
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
Input example
*Switch@1# clear running-config line 1

Clearing Line Config...
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set port admin

set port speed
set port type
set port link-trap
set port clock
set port frame
set vlan tagbase
set vlan portbase
set vlan swap
set vlan ethertype
22-27

Setting of ATM transmission path framing
mode
Setting of cable length
Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag
recognition
Setting of maximum bandwidth limit
operation mode
Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function
per input VLAN
Setting of priority mapping function per
input VLAN
Setting of priority discard function per input
VLAN

set qos class-map
set spantree port
set isolate port
set filter in-port
set filter out-port
set fdb limiter
set pvc static
set pvc name
set pvc admin
set pvc port admin
set pvc-vlan mode
set pvc-vlan table
set pvc connection
set isolate pvc
set atm-loop
set atm-shaper mode
set atm-shaper rate
set atm-qos aal5
set atm-oam
set atm-oam flow
set mc management
mirror port
set line type
set aps
set aps time
22-28
Setting of priority mapping per output VLAN

Setting of priority discard function per
output VLAN
Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function
per output VLAN
Setting of burst tolerance of output-side
Set upper threshold of output-side fairness
control function of output port
Set spanning tree enable/disable per port
Setting /clearing of port isolate
Setting of MAC address learning count
limiting function
Setting of static MAC address of MAC
address learning count limiting function
Registration of PVC
Setting of VLAN VC
Setting/clearing of PVC isolate
Setting of CLP
function
Setting of VLAN counter collection
conditions

set atmop mode
set atmop format
set atmop table
set atmop in-port cos
set ima clock
set ima group
set tdm group
set tdm path
set tdmop mode
set tdmop group
set tdmop format
set tdmop jitter
set tdmop admin
set ether-oam mep
set ether-oam cc
set ether-oam mip
set ether-oam rdi
set ether-oam lm
set line mode atmp
set line mode tdmp
set line mode gbe
set ether-ps
set ether-ps time

Setting of ATM-Ether conversion
Setting of CLP-CoS mapping
Setting of TDM path
Setting of MEP
Setting of ETH-CC transmission
Setting of MIP
Setting of GbE line mode
22-29

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
Clears startup configuration.
Input format
clear startup-config P1 [P2]
Parameters
P1: Initialization mode { all | exip }

all: Clears all configurations
exip: Clears all configurations other than IP configuration
P2: Running slot { self | mate | system }
self: Self slot
mate: Mate slot
system: Both-system slot
* When P2 is omitted, self is assumed.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear startup-config

Would you like to delete config
Clearing Flash Memory...
*Switch@1# clear startup-config
Would you like to delete config
Clearing Flash Memory...
*Switch@1#
all
data? :(Y/N): y
exip
data? :(Y/N): y
Output item
Related
commands
show startup-config
write memory
Uploading of startup configuration from ftp server

22-30

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set backup server

Setting of backup server
Sets a backup server.
Input format
set backup server P1 P2
Parameters
P1: IP address
P2: FTP login name (1 to 16 characters)
Default value
None
Usage conditions

If a backup server exists at the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24,
communication.
Notes
Enter an ftp password interactively.

Set an ftp login name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character].
(However, you can use only the characters that can be recognized by the ftp server.)
Set an ftp password (0 to 16 characters) with ASCII characters other than [space], [!],
[?], and [control character].
Input example
*Switch@1# set backup server 192.168.2.200 cx2600

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands

set backup schedule
show backup information
clear backup server

Setting of backup schedule
Display of backup information
Clearing of backup server
22-31

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear backup server

Clears a backup server.
Input format
clear backup server
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# clear backup server

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
set backup server
22-32

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set backup schedule

Sets backup schedule.
Input formats
- Specifying 1-week cycle

set backup schedule P1 P2 P3 (week) P4 P5
- Specifying 1-day cycle
set backup schedule P1 P2 P3 (day) P4
- Specifying fixed cycle
set backup schedule P1 P2 P3 (cycle) P4
Parameters
P1: Backup type { running-config }

P2: Storage directory
P3: Backup start type { week | day | cycle }
week: 1 week cycle
day: 1 day cycle
cycle: Fixed cycle
When week is specified in P3
P4: Day of week specification { sunday | monday | tuesday | wednesday |
thursday | friday | saturday }
sunday: Sunday
monday: Monday
tuesday: Tuesday
thursday: Thursday
friday: Friday
saturday: Saturday
P5: Time specification (0 to 23 hours)
When day is specified in P3
P4: Time specification (0 to 23 hours)
When cycle is specified in P3
P4: Time cycle specification (0 to 168)
0: Sets backup start disable
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
Set a storage directory with alphabets and numeric characters.
Input example
*Switch@1# set backup schedule running-config /config/backup week sunday

12
*Switch@1#
22-33

Output item
Related
commands
set backup server


22-34

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Shows backup information.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show backup information

Backup Server Configuration
===========================
Backup Data
: running-config
IP Address
: 192.168.2.200
FTP Login Name : CX2600
FTP Directory : /config/backup
Retrieval time : weekly(sunday) 12:00:00
Backup status : waiting
*Switch@1#
Output items
Backup Data: Backup type

IP Address: FTP server address
FTP Login Name: FTP login name
Related
commands
set backup server

clear backup server
set backup schedule
FTP Directory: FTP directory

Retrieval time: Backup cycle
Backup Status: Backup status

22-35

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show fault present

Shows the device fault and alarm information that has occurred so far.
Input format
show fault present [P1]
Parameter
P1: Detailed showing { detail }

detail: Detailed showing specification
* When P1 is omitted, the outline of the device fault and alarm information that has
occurred so far is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show fault present

Device Fault Information
========================
Module
Type
Status
---------------------------------------------------------Switch#1 : ugswc
normal
: ----Switch#2 : ugswc
temperature fault(wr:4100,01000001)
: ext-m
device
fault(wr:4201,01000000)
Line#1
: gbe
normal
Line#2
: gbe
normal
Line#3
: ----Line#4
: ----Line#5
: tdmp
device
fault(cr:1290,05000000)
Line#6
: tdmp
normal
Line#7
: ----Line#8
: ----Line#9
: ----Line#10 : ----Line#11 : ----Line#12 : ----Power#1 : dc
normal
Power#2 : dc
device
fault(mj:2202,01000000)
Fan
: fan#1
normal
fan#2
normal
fan#3
device
fault(mj:2201,01000000)
*Switch@1#
22-36

Output items
[1] Fault occurrence status

normal: Normal status
device: Device fault
software: Software failure
temperature: Temperature failure
processor: CPU failure
For description of fault information, refer to Fault List of Appendix in the Instruction
Manual.
Type: Module type
ugswc: UGSW module UGSW A
ext-m: external memory
fe8: Line module FE8
fx8a: Line module Fx8a
fx8b: Line module Fx8b
fx8s: Line module Fx8s
atm155: Line module ATM155
ac: Power module AC
dc: Power module DC
fan: Fan module
Related
commands
show fault past

show system status

Display of device installation status and other various statuses
22-37

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear fault warning

Clearing of WR fault
Clears a WR fault.
Input format
clear fault warning
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
This command clears the following faults:

- Software fault WR (Switch module)
WR SWITCH SOFTWARE FAULT
- Device fault WR (Switch module)
WR SWITCH DEVICE FAULT
- Device fault WR (Line module)
WR LINE DEVICE FAULT
Input example
*Switch@1# clear fault warning

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show fault present
22-38

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show fault past

Shows fault information collected when an exception and WDTOVF occurred.
Input format
show fault past
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
When a self exception or WDTOVF occurs, fault information can be saved every five
Main CPU faces and Sub CPU faces (to 20 faces).
Input example
*Switch@1# show fault past

Exception Information
=====================
Main CPU#1 [1]
----------------------------------------------------------------------S/W : 03.09.04
H/W : 03.09.04
Date : 10/03/2003 17:01:15
<Exception Information>
task name
= MMI_TASK
vector offset = 0x00000200
error number = 0x037f85a8
data exception address register = 0x003d0000
bus error address register
= 0x08000000
bus error syndrome register
= 0x0c000000
general purpose register
00000000 037f8658 00000000 08000000
00001200 00000000 00000000 20202020
<Omission>
.
.
condition register = 0x44220040
fixed-point exception register = 0x00000000
Main CPU#1 [2]
----------------------------------------------------------------------S/W : 03.09.04
H/W : 03.09.04
Date : 10/03/2003 19:00:35
<Exception Information>
22-39

task name
= MMI_TASK
vector offset = 0x00000200
error number = 0x037f85a8
data exception address register = 0x003d0000
bus error address register
= 0x08000000
bus error syndrome register
= 0x0c000000
general purpose register
00000000 037f8658 00000000 08000000
00001200 00000000 00000000 20202020
.
.
.
condition register = 0x44220040
fixed-point exception register = 0x00000000
Error Information
=================
Main CPU#1 [1]
----------------------------------------------------------------------S/W : 03.09.04
H/W : 03.09.04
Date : 10/03/2003 17:01:15
<Task Information>
Name
Entry
TID
PRI Status
PC
SP
ERRNO
Delay
----------------------------------------------------------------------tExcTask excTask
2f784a0 0 PEND
3066e4 2f783c0
0
0
.
.
<Task Trace Information>
Task Name : tExcTask
2df888 vxTaskEntry
+5c : excTask ()
2aaf4c excTask
+38 : msgQReceive ()
2d3040 msgQReceive
+280: qJobGet ()
Task Name : tLogTask
.
.
.
*Switch@1#
Output items
Exception Information: Fault information collected when the exception occurred

Error Information: Fault information collected when the WDTOVF occurred
Related
commands
show fault present

clear fault past

Clearing of past fault information
22-40

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
clear fault past

Clearing of past fault information
Clears all the fault information that was collected when a self exception or WDTOVF occurred and is shown
by the show fault past command.
Input format
clear fault past
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
Input example
*Switch@1# clear fault past

Would you like to clear past fault information? :(Y/N): y
Clearing Flash Memory.....
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show fault past
22-41

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show system status

Shows the device installation status and other various statuses.
Input format
show system status
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
This command also shows the module redundant configuration status and type
information.
Input example
*Switch@1# show system status

System Equipment Information
============================
Module
Type
Status
Redundancy Mode
Assign Install
----------------------------------------------------------------------Switch#1 : ugswc
active
dual-fixed
--ugswc
Switch#2 : --unmount
------Line#1
: fe8
active
single-mode
none
fe8
Line#2
: --unmount
single-mode
none
--Line#3
: --unmount
single-mode
none
--Line#4
: --unmount
single-mode
none
--Line#5
: --unmount
single-mode
none
--Line#6
: --unmount
single-mode
none
--Line#7
: --unmount
single-mode
none
--Line#8
: --unmount
single-mode
none
--Line#9
: --unmount
single-mode
none
--Line#10 : --unmount
single-mode
none
--Line#11 : --unmount
single-mode
----Line#12 : --unmount
single-mode
----Power#1 : dc
mount
----dc
Power#2 : --unmount
------Fan
: fan#1
mount
------fan#2
mount
------fan#3
mount
------*Switch@1#
22-42

Output items
Module: Module
Type: Module type
ugswc: UGSW module UGSWC
fx8: Line module Fx8
ac: Power module AC
dc: Power module DC
Status: Module status
unmount: Unmounted status
initializing: Initialization status
active: ACT status
standby: SBY status
out of service: Out-of-service status
mismatch: Incorrect insertion status
active-fault: ACT-FLT status
standby-fault: SBY-FLT status
Redundancy Mode: Redundancy mode
single-mode: Single mode
dual-fixed: Dual-fixed mode
Related
command
show system revision
Assign: Type setting status

fx8: Line module Fx8
Install: Installation status
ugswc: ugsw module
fe8: Line module fe8
fx8a: Line module fx8a
fx8b: Line module fx8b
fx8s: Line module fx8s
gbe: Line module gbe
fe8-pv: Line module fe8-pv
fx8a-pv: Line module fx8a-pv
fx8b-pv: Line module fx8b-pv
fx8s-pv: Line module fx8s-pv
gbe-pv: Line module gbe-pv
gm8-t: Line module gm8-t
gm8-x: Line module gm8-x
atm155s: Line module atm155s
atm155m: Line module atm155m
atmp: Line module atmp
tdmp: Line module tdmp
tdmp155: Line module tdmp155
atmp155: Line module atmp155
gbe-pv2: Line module GbE-PV2
ac: Power module AC
dc: Power module DC
Display of various version information
22-43

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show system bridge

Display of bridge information for device
Shows the MAC address for the device, total number of line module ports, and L2SW type.
Input format
show system bridge
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show system bridge

System Bridge
=============
Base Bridge Address : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:6c
Base Number Ports : 16ports
Base Type
: Transparent Only
*Switch@1#
Output items
Base Bridge Address: MAC address for device

Base Number Ports: Total number of installed line module ports
Base Type: L2SW type
Related
command
None
22-44

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show system module-id

Display of module ID information
Shows ID information of each UGSW module and line module.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show system module-id

System Module ID
================
Module
Install Module ID
Product Number MAC Address
--------------------------------------------------------------------Switch#1 : ugswc
P-4X6B(002)(430)
NEC755M00086
--Switch#2 : --------Line#1
: --------Line#2
: gbe-pv2 P-4X6G(002)(430) - NEC745M05639
00:30:13:a1:da:84
Line#3
: gbe-pv2 P-4X6G(002)(430) - NEC745M05336
00:30:13:a1:da:b4
Line#4
: --------Line#5
: --------Line#6
: gbe-pv P-4X2Y(002)(432) -B NEC545M00102 --Line#7
: --------Line#8
: --------Line#9
: gbe-pv P-4X2Y(002)(432)
NEC999M88888
--Line#10 : --------Line#11 : atmp
P-4X6D(002)(430)
NEC755M00059
00:30:13:a1:2a:92
Line#12 : atmp
P-4X6D(002)(430)
NEC755M00061
00:30:13:a1:2a:ca
*Switch@1#
22-45

Output items
Module Number: UGSW module/line module number

ugswc: UGSW module
fe8-pv: Line module FE8-PV
fx8a-pv: Line module Fx8a-PV
fx8b-pv: Line module Fx8b-PV
fx8s-pv: Line module Fx8s-PV
gbe-pv: Line module GbE-PV
gm8-t: Line module GM8-T
gm8-x: Line module GM8-X
atm155s: Line module ATM155S
atm155m: Line module ATM155M
Module ID: Module ID
Product Number: Product number
Related
command
show system status
Display of device installation status and various statuses
22-46

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of various version information
Shows the version information of firmware and hardware installed on the various mounted modules.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
Current versions are shown in the Current field.

Previously (finally) downloaded versions are shown in the Latest field.
Last-one-but downloaded versions are shown in the Backup field.
Input example
*Switch@1# show system revision

System Revision
===============
Current
Latest
Backup
Current
Latest
Module
Install Soft Ver Soft Ver Soft Ver
Hard Ver Hard Ver
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Switch#1 : ugswc 00.01.07 00.01.07 00.01.06 01.01.01 01.01.01
Switch#2 : ------------Line#1
: fe8
------01.02.0a
01.02.0a
Line#2
: ------------Line#3
: ------------Line#4
: ------------Line#5
: ------------Line#6
: ------------Line#7
: ------------Line#8
: ------------Line#9
: ------------Line#10 : ------------Line#11 : ------------Line#12 : ------------*Switch@1#
22-47

Output items
Module: Module
ugswc: UGSW module
Ver: Various version information
Related
command
show system status
22-48

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show system temperature

Display of device temperature
Shows a temperature per UGSW module or line module.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show system temperature

System Temperature
==================
Module
Install Temperature
-------------------------------------------------Switch#1 : ugswc
46.5
Switch#2 : ----Line#1
: fe8
36.0
Line#2
: ----Line#3
: ----Line#4
: ----Line#5
: ----Line#6
: ----Line#7
: ----Line#8
: ----Line#9
: ----Line#10 : ----Line#11 : ----Line#12 : ----*Switch@1#
22-49

Output items
Module: Module
ugswc: UGSW module
Temperature: Module temperature
Related
command
show system status
22-50

Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set fault auto-reboot

Setting of autonomous rebooting enable/disable
Sets whether to enable or disable autonomous rebooting when a WDTOVF or EXCEPTION fault that
involves rebooting is detected.
Input format
set fault auto-reboot P1
Parameter
P1: Autonomous rebooting setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables autonomous rebooting
disable: Disables autonomous rebooting
Default value
Enable
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# set fault auto-reboot enable

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show fault auto-reboot
Display of autonomous rebooting settings
22-51

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution

Display of autonomous rebooting settings
Shows autonomous rebooting settings when a WDTOVF or EXCEPTION fault that involves rebooting is
detected.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show fault auto-reboot
Fault AutoReboot Configuration
==============================
AutoReboot: enabled
*Switch@1#
Output item
Mode: Setting status
Related
command
Setting of autonomous rebooting enable/disable
22-52

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show resource cpu

Display of CPU usage
Shows the average CPU usages of 5 seconds, 1 minute, and 5 minutes and the peak values of the average
CPU usages.
Input format
show resource cpu
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show resource cpu

CPU Activity Information
========================
Last Read Time :--/--/---- --:--:-Current Time
:01/01/2004 03:39:27
The Rate of CPU Use
===================
Module Type Measure Time Current(%) Peak(%) (Last Read ->Current)
----------------------------------------------------------------------Switch#1 : main
5 (sec)
7
11 (01/01/2004 03:36:40)
1 (min)
6
7 (01/01/2004 03:39:15)
5 (min)
6
6 (01/01/2004 03:39:04)
Switch#1 : sub
5 (sec)
13
79 (01/01/2004 03:31:29)
1 (min)
12
22 (01/01/2004 03:32:20)
5 (min)
12
14 (01/01/2004 03:36:27)
Switch#2 : main
5 (sec)
----- (--/--/---- --:--:--)
1 (min)
----- (--/--/---- --:--:--)
5 (min)
----- (--/--/---- --:--:--)
Switch#2 : sub
5 (sec)
----- (--/--/---- --:--:--)
1 (min)
----- (--/--/---- --:--:--)
5 (min)
----- (--/--/---- --:--:--)
*Switch@1#
22-53

Output items
Last Read Time: Last read time

Current Time: Current time
Module: Module
Type: Module type
main: Main CPU
sub: Sub CPU
Measure Time: Time required to measure average CPU time
Current(%): Current CPU usage
Peak(%): Peak value of CPU usage
(Last Read ->Current): Peak time at which the peak value was recorded
Related
command
None
22-54

Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show resource memory

Display of memory usage
Shows memory usage.
Input format
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show resource memory

The Rate of Memory Use
======================
Module
Type
Rate(%) Used Size(byte) / Actual Size(byte)
----------------------------------------------------------------------Switch#1 : main
39
17042776 / 42925880
Switch#1 : sub
34
14333992 / 41138696
Switch#2 : main
----- /
--Switch#2 : sub
----- /
--*Switch@1#
Output items
Module: Module
Type: Module type
main: Main CPU
sub: Sub CPU
Rate(%): Memory usage
Used Size(byte): Currently used memory size
Actual Size(byte): Memory size that can be actually used
Related
command
None
22-55
(Blank page)
22-56
Device Control
23 Device Control
23-1
Device Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set line type

Sets a line module type.
Input format
set line type P1 P2
Parameters

P2: Line module type
{ none | fe8 | fx8 | gbe | atm155 | gm8-t | gm8-x | atmp | tdmp | tdmp155 | atmp155 }
none: No line module type specification
fe8: FE8
fx8: FX8
gbe: GbE
atm155: ATM155
gm8-t: GM8-T
gm8-x: GM8-X
atmp: ATMP
tdmp: TDMP
tdmp155: TDMP155
atmp155: ATMP155
Default value
P2: none
Usage conditions
- You cannot change the line module type if a configuration other than the line module
type is already entered.
- You cannot set FE8/FX8 for line modules #5 to #12.
- You cannot set GM8-T/GM8-X.
Notes
Specifying the correct line module type for the slot that is in the MISMATCH status
initializes the line module. However, if the line module cannot be initialized because it
is in contention for another event, it is incorporated with OUS status.
After this command ends, reinitialize the line module incorporated with OUS status using
the reset line command.
Input example
*Switch@1# set line type 9 gbe

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show system status

reset line

23-2
Device Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set line mode tdmp

Sets the TDMP line mode.
Input formats
- Specifying line mode (TDM)

set line mode tdmp P1 P2 (tdm) P3 [P4] [P5]
- Specifying line mode (TDMoP)
set line mode tdmp P1 P2 (tdmop) P3 [P4] [P5]
- Specifying no line mode
set line mode tdmp P1 P2 (none)
Parameters

P2: Line mode { tdm | tdmop | none }
tdm: TDM mode
tdmop: TDMoP mode
none: No line mode setting
When tdm or tdmop is specified in P2
P3: Frame type { e1 | t1 }
e1: E1 mode
t1: T1 mode
When e1 is specified in P3
P4: Line code { hdb3 | ami }
hdb3: HDB3
ami: AMI
* When P4 is omitted, hdb3 is assumed.
unframed: Unframed
When t1 is specified in P3
P4: Line code { b8zs | ami }
b8zs: B8ZS
ami: AMI
* When P4 is omitted, b8zs is assumed.
P5: Frame format { esf | sf | sf-jpn | unframed }
sf: superframe
unframed: Unframed
23-3
Device Control
Default values
P4: hdb3, P5: crc4 (P3=e1)

P4: b8zs, P5: esf (P3=t1)
Usage
conditions
You can set the TDMP line mode only when the line type setting is tdmp, or none with a
TDMP line module installed.
To specify tdmop for P2, an error occurs if no TDMoP mode has been registered.
To specify tdmop for P2, e1 for P3 and unframed for P5, TDMoP operation mode must
have been set to SAToP mode.
To specify tdm for P2 and e1 for P3, unframed cannot be specified for P5.
To specify tdmop for P2, t1 for P3 and unframed for P5, TDMoP operation mode must
have been set to SAToP mode.
If you specify tdm for P2, you cannot specify unframed for P5.
You cannot change the TDMP line mode setting if any of the following commands is
already entered:
set tdm group
set tdmop group
set port impedance
set ether-oam mep
set reference-clock priority (Port (line) extraction clock specification)
To specify tdmop for P2, there is the following restriction on the number of TDMP line
modules and TDMP155 line modules:
(Number of TDMP line modules x 1) + (Number of TDMP155 line modules x 3) < 16
* The above numbers of line modules mean the ones set to TDMoP mode.
Note
If any of the following changes has been made while the line state is ACT, line restart
will be executed:
- Changing line mode from tdm to tdmop or none
- Changing line mode from tdmop to tdm or none
- Changing frame type
If a frame type is changed with this command, TDM group name setting of the line
module will be deleted.
Input examples
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
line
line
line
line
line
mode
mode
mode
mode
mode
tdmp
tdmp
tdmp
tdmp
tdmp
1
2
3
4
5
Output item
23-4
none
tdm e1 hdb3 crc4
tdm t1 b8zs
tdm t1 esf
tdmop e1 hdb3 unframed
Device Control
Related
commands
set line type

set line mode atmp
set tdmop mode
set tdmop group
set tdm group
set tdm group-name
set port impedance
show line mode
show system status

Display of line mode setting
23-5
Device Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set line mode atmp

Sets the ATMP line mode.
Input formats
- Specifying line mode (ATMoP)

set line mode atmp P1 P2 (atmop) P3 [P4] [P5]
set line mode atmp P1 P2 (none)
Parameters

P2: Line mode { atmop | none }
atmop: ATMoP mode
When atmop is specified in P2
P3: Frame type { e1 | t1 }
e1: E1 mode
t1: T1 mode
When e1 is specified in P3
P4: Line code { hdb3 | ami }
hdb3: HDB3
ami: AMI
* When P4 is omitted, hdb3 is assumed.
unframed: Unframed
When t1 is specified in P3
P4: Line code { b8zs | ami }
b8zs: B8ZS
ami: AMI
* When P4 is omitted, b8zs is assumed.
P5: Frame format { esf | sf | sf-jpn }
sf: superframe
Default values
P4: hdb3, P5: crc4 (P3=e1)

P4: b8zs, P5: esf (P3=t1)
23-6
Device Control
Usage
conditions
You can set the ATMP line mode only when the line type setting is atmp, or none with an
ATMP line module installed.
You cannot change the ATMP line mode setting if any of the following commands is
already entered:
set port impedance
set ima group
set ima clock
Note
If any of the following changes has been made while the line state is ACT, line restart
will be executed:
- Changing line mode from atmop to none
Input examples
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
line
line
line
line
line
mode
mode
mode
mode
mode
atmp
atmp
atmp
atmp
atmp
1
2
3
4
5
none
atmop
atmop
atmop
atmop
e1
t1 b8zs
t1 esf
e1 hdb3 unframed
Output item
Related
commands
set line type

set line mode tdmp
set port impedance
show line mode
show system status

23-7
Device Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution

Sets the TDMP155 line mode.
Input formats
- Specifying line mode (TDM/TDMoP)

set line mode tdmp155P1 P2 (tdm | tdmop) P3
set line mode tdmp155P1 P2 (none)
Parameters

P2: Line mode { tdm | tdmop | none }
tdm: TDM mode
tdmop: TDMoP mode
When tdm or tdmop is specified in P2
P3: Frame type { sdh | sonet }
sdh: SDH mode
sonnet: SONET mode
Default value
None
Usage
conditions
You can set the TDMP155 line mode only when the line type setting is tdmp155, or the
line type setting is none and a TDMP155 line module has been installed.
To specify tdmop for P2, an error occurs if no TDMoP mode has been registered.
You cannot change the TDMP155 line mode setting if any of the following commands is
already entered:
set tdm group
set tdmop group
set ether-oam mep
When APS is set to enabled, settings of the line module cannot be changed.
Notes
If any of the following changes has been made while the line state is ACT, line restart will
be executed:
- Changing line mode from tdm to tdmop or none
- Changing line mode from tdmop to tdm or none
If a frame type is changed with this command, TDM group name setting of the line
module will be deleted.
Input example
*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp155 3 tdmop sdh

*Switch@1#
23-8
Device Control
Output item
Related
commands
set line type

set line mode tdmp
set line mode atmp
set tdmop mode
set tdmop group
set tdm group
set tdm group-name
set port impedance
show line mode
show system status

23-9
Device Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
set line mode gbe

Sets the GbE line mode.
Input format
- Specifying line mode (GbE)

set line mode gbe P1 P2
Parameters

P2: Line mode { none | gbe | fe }
gbe: GbE mode
fe: FE mode
Default value
P2: none
Usage
conditions
- You cannot change the line module type if a configuration other than the line module
type is already entered.
- You cannot set the GbE line mode for line modules #5 to #12.
- You can set the GbE line mode only when the line module type is gbe, or the line
module type setting is none and a GbE-PV or GbE-PV2 line module has been installed.
- When a GbE-PV line module is installed, operation in FE mode is not allowed although
setting of each line mode is available. (A link down will occur in the GbE port.)
Note
If any of the following changes has been made while the line state is ACT, line restart will
be executed:
- Changing line mode from none or gbe to fe
- Changing line mode from fe to none or gbe
Input example
*Switch@1# set line mode gbe 1 fe

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
set line type

set port admin
set port speed
set port type
show line mode
show system status

23-10
Device Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show line mode

Shows the line mode setting
Input format
show line mode
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1# show line mode

Line Mode Information
=====================
Line
Line Frame
Slot Type
Mode Type
--------------------------1 fe8
----2 tdmp
tdm
e1
3 atmp
atmop e1
4 gbe
----5 tdmp
tdmop t1
6 tdmp
tdmop e1
7 atmp
atmop t1
8 atm155 ----9 ------10 tdmp
none --11 tdmp155 tdm
sdh
12 tdmp155 tdmop sonet
*Switch@1#
Output items
Slot: Line number

Line Type: Line type
Line Mode: Line mode
Frame Type: Frame type
e1: E1 mode
t1: T1 mode
sdh: SDH mode
sonet: SONET mode
23-11
Device Control
Related
commands
set line mode atmp

set line mode tdmp
set line mode gbe

23-12
Device Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
change switch
Changeover of UGSW module system
Changes the UGSW module system.
Input format
change switch [P1]
Parameter
P1: Forced change { force }

force: Forced change
* When P1 is omitted, a normal system change is performed.
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes
When the UGSW module system is changed forcibly, the old ACT side enters the OUS
status. When the old ACT side is in the ACT-FLT status, the UGSW module system
enters the SBY-FLT status.
Input example
*Switch@1# change switch

*Switch@1##
Output item
Related
command
show system status
23-13
Device Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
reset system
Resetting of entire device
Resets the entire device.
Input format
reset system
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes

After it is rebooted, the system into which this command has been entered is started in
ACT mode.
Input example
*Switch@1# reset system

Would you like to reboot System? :(Y/N): y
System is under closing....
System Reset Process is running. Please wait....
System Boot
Copyright 2001-2002 NEC
CPU: PPC 405GP

Version: 5.4
BSP version: 1.2/5
Boot version: K01.00
Creation date: Mar 31 2004, 14:38:54
Press [Ctrl]+[c] key to enter recover mode...

... coming up latest image
auto-booting...
<Omission>
23-14
Device Control
Output item
Related
commands
reset switch
reset line
show reset

Display of reset factor
23-15
Device Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
reset switch
Reset the UGSW module.
Input format
reset switch P1 [P2]
Parameters

P2: FPGA version upgrade specification { fpga-version-up }, or reset load module
specification { latest | backup }
fpga-version-up: FPGA version upgrade specification
latest: Latest (current) side specification
backup: Backup side specification
* In the case of FPGA version upgrade specification, the latest side is specified.
* In the case of reset load module specification, normal reset is executed.
Default value
None
Usage conditions
You cannot specify the backup side when resetting the mate system.
You cannot reset the ACT system when the UGSW module is in the ACT or SBY status
(including the FLT status).
Notes

If P2 (FPGA version up) is specified, the reset factor is power-on reset.
Input example
*Switch@1# reset switch 1

Would you like to reboot Switch#1? :(Y/N): y
Self Switch is under closing...
Switch Reset Process is running. Please wait....
System Boot
Copyright 2001-2002 NEC
23-16
Device Control
CPU: PPC 405GP
Version: 5.4
BSP version: 1.2/5
Boot version: K01.00
Creation date: Mar 31 2004, 14:38:54
Press [Ctrl]+[c] key to enter recover mode...

... coming up latest image
auto-booting...
<Omission>
Output item
Related
commands
reset system
show reset

23-17
Device Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
reset line
Resets a line module.
Input format
reset line P1
Parameter
Default value
None
Usage conditions
Whether you can enter this command depends on the following line statuses:
Status
Can be entered/
cannot be entered
unmount
initializing
active
standby
out of service
mismatch
active-fault
standby-fault
Note
Input example
*Switch@1# reset line 2

Would you like to reboot 2? :(Y/N): y
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show system status

reset system
ous line

OUS setting of line module
23-18
Device Control
Privilege
General
Synchronize
SBY execution
show reset
Shows a UGSW module reset factor.
Input format
show reset [P1]
Parameter
P1: Detailed showing { detail }

Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
Specifying the detail parameter shows reset factors per CPU, not per UGSW module.
Input example
*Switch@1# show reset detail

Reset Information
=================
Module
Type
Reset Factor
--------------------------------------------------------------------Switch#1 : main
Command Reset(reset system)
Switch#1 : sub
Command Reset(reset system)
Switch#2 : ----*Switch@1#
Output items
Module: Module
Type: Module type
ugswc: UGSW module
main: main CPU
sub: sub CPU
Reset Factor: Reset factor
Power On Reset or Switch Module Insertion: Power-on reset or module insertion
Command Reset(reset system): Command reset by reset system
Command Reset(reset switch):
The status of WDT is abnormal: Reset based on hardware judgment
The fatal error has occurred: Reset based on software judgment
Command Reset by mate(reset system):
Command reset by reset system from mate system
Command Reset by mate(reset switch):
Command reset by reset switch from mate system
Related
commands
reset system
reset switch

23-19
Device Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
ous switch
OUS setting of UGSW module
Sets OUS of the UGSW module.
Input format
ous switch P1
Parameter
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Notes

Note that a trouble may occur if an ACT UGSW module is removed without placing it
OUS status.
Input example
*Switch@1# ous switch 2

Would you like to out of service switch#2? :(Y/N): y
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
show system status
23-20
Device Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
ous line
OUS setting of line module
Sets OUS of a line module.
Input format
ous line P1 P2
Parameter
Default value
None
Usage condition
You cannot set OUS if INS-LED is off.
Note
Input example
*Switch@1# ous line 1

Would you like to out of service 1? :(Y/N): y
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
commands
show system status

reset line

23-21
Device Control
Privilege
General
Save
Synchronize
SBY execution
ous external-memory
Removing of external memory
Removes external memory.
Input format
ous external-memory
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage conditions
You can execute this command only when external memory is inserted.
Operate external memory in maintenance mode.
Note
Entering this command disables external memory access because external memory is
disconnected from the device. If you want to access external memory again, you must
reinsert it.
Input example
*Switch@1# ous external-memory

*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
None
23-22
Maintenance Mode
24 Maintenance Mode
24-1
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution
download software
Downloading of software
Downloads software.
Input format
download software P1 P2
Parameters
P1: Download file location { external-memory }

Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
To reflect downloaded data, you must enter the reset switch or reset system
command to reinitialize the Switch module.
You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relative
path name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolute
path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directory
hierarchies are permissible. No file can be specified beyond 21 directory hierarchies.
If no path is specified, current directory specification is assumed.
[control character].
Input example
*Switch@1% download software external-memory

cx2600_sw/release_lm/cx2600_220_so
ft_c__010003.dlm
Download Data Processing..........................
Writing Flash Memory............
*Switch@1%
Output item
Related
commands
reset system
reset switch
ous external-memory

24-2
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution
download fpga switch

Downloading of FPGA of UGSW module
Downloads FPGA of the UGSW module.
Input format
download fpga switch P1 P2
Parameters

Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
To reflect downloaded data, you must enter the reset switch command specifying
fpga-version-up parameter to reinitialize the Switch module.
Input example
*Switch@1# download fpga switch external-memory

/data/cx2600_220_fpga_UGSWC_020102.dlm
Data Transferring..
Data Transferring..
Data Transferring..
Data Transferring..
Data Transferring..
Data Transferring..
Data Transferring..
Data Transferring..
*Switch@1#
Output item
24-3
Maintenance Mode
Related
commands
reset switch
ous external-memory

24-4
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution
download fpga line

Downloading of FPGA of line module
Downloads FPGA of a line module.
Input format
download fpga line P1 P2 P3
Parameters
P1: Line module type

{ fe | gbe | fe-pv | gbe-pv | gmx | atm | atmp | tdmp | gbe-pv2 | atmp155 | tdmp155 }
fe: Line module FE8/FX8
fe-pv: Line module FE8-PV/FX8-PV
gbe-pv: Line module Gbe-PV
gmx: Line module GM8-T/GM8-X
atm: Line module ATM155
gbe-pv2: Line module Gbe-PV2
Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
To reflect downloaded data, you must enter the reset line command to reinitialize the
line module.
24-5
Maintenance Mode
Input example
*Switch@1% download fpga line fe external-memory

/data/cx2600_220_fpga_FE_FX_020102.dlm
Data Transferring..
Download Data Processing.................................................
Line# 1 : completed
Line# 2 : --Line# 3 : completed
Line# 4 : --Line# 5 : --Line# 6 : --Line# 7 : completed
Line# 8 : --Line# 9 : --Line#10 : --Line#11 : --Line#12 : --*Switch@1%
Output item
Related
commands
reset line
ous external-memory

24-6
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution
upload running-config external-memory

Uploading of running configuration to external memory
Uploads a running configuration to external memory.
Input format
upload running-config external-memory P1
Parameter
Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
hierarchies are permissible. No file can be created beyond 21 directory hierarchies.
The maximum length of a file name is 99 characters.
Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphanumeric characters and % & , / = [
] ^ _ { } ~ . .
You can use / only when specifying a path name, and . only when specifying a file
name.
the show running-config command.
Input example
*Switch@1% upload running-config external-memory test.txt

*Switch@1%
Output item
Related
commands
show running-config
download running-config external-memory
Downloading of running configuration from external
memory
write memory external-memory
Saving of setting information to external memory
ous external-memory
24-7
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution
upload startup-config external-memory

Uploading of startup configuration to external memory
Uploads a startup configuration to external memory.
Input format
upload startup-config external-memory P1
Parameter
Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
] ^ _ { } ~ . .
name.
the show startup-config command.
Input example
*Switch@1% upload startup-config external-memory test2.txt

*Switch@1%
Output item
Related
commands
show startup-config
download startup-config external-memory
Downloading of startup configuration from external
memory
24-8
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution
upload local-syslog
Uploading of system log to external memory
Uploads a system log to external memory.
Input format
upload local-syslog P1 P2
Parameters
P1: Upload location { external-memory }

Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
] ^ _ { } ~ . .
name.
Local syslog information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by
the show local syslog command.
Input example
*Switch@1% upload local-syslog external-memory syslog.txt

*Switch@1%
Output item
Related
commands
show syslog local

clear syslog local
ous external-memory
Display of local syslog

Clearing of local syslog
24-9
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution

Downloading of running configuration from external memory
Downloads a running configuration from external memory.
Input format
download running-config external-memory P1
Parameter
Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
External memory may be accessed several times according to the configuration size to
be downloaded.
Input example
*Switch@1% download running-config external-memory soft_LM/test.txt

Data Transferring...
Data setting..........
*Switch@1%
Output item
Related
commands
show running-config
Uploading of running configuration to external
memory
ous external-memory
24-10
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution

Downloading of startup configuration from external memory
Downloads a startup configuration from external memory.
Input format
download startup-config external-memory P1
Parameter
Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
External memory may be accessed several times according to the configuration size to
be downloaded.
Input example
*Switch@1% download startup-config external-memory test3.txt

Data Transferring..
Data setting.
Writing Flash Memory........
*Switch@1%
Output item
Related
commands
Uploading of startup configuration to external
memory
ous external-memory
24-11
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution
upload fault
Uploading of fault information to external memory
Uploads fault information to external memory.
Input format
upload fault P1 P2
Parameters
P1: Upload location { external-memory }

Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
] ^ _ { } ~ . .
name.
Fault information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by the
show fault present and show fault past commands.
Input example
*Switch@1# upload fault external-memory fault.txt

Data Transferring...........................
*Switch@1%
Output item
Related
commands
show fault present

show fault past
ous external-memory

24-12
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution
upload all-information external-memory

Uploading of setting information
Uploads setting information to external memory.
Input format
upload all-information external-memory P1
Parameter
Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
] ^ _ { } ~ . .
name.
Setting information which is uploaded is the same as the information shown by the
show all command.
Input example
*Switch@1% upload all-information external-memory allinfo.txt

*Switch@1%
Output item
Related
command
show all
Display of setting information
24-13
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution
write memory
Saving of setting status to external memory
Saves the setting status to external memory.
Input format
write memory P1 [P2]
Parameters
P1: Save location { external-memory }

P2: Save format { text-config | binary-config }
text-config: Text configuration
binary-config: Binary configuration
* When P2 is omitted, text-config is assumed.
Default value
None
Usage condition
Note
The setting status is saved to the /auto_reflect directory in external memory under the
startup-config.scfg file name. If the /auto_reflect directory does not exist, it is
automatically created.
Input example
*Switch@1% write memory external-memory

*Switch@1%
Output item
Related
commands
show running-config
show startup-config
Uploading of running configuration to external memory
Uploading of startup configuration to external memory
Downloading of running configuration from external memory
Downloading of startup configuration from external memory
ous external-memory
24-14
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution
end
Switch from maintenance mode to privileged mode
Enables you to switch from maintenance mode to privileged mode.
Input format
end
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
*Switch@1% end
*Switch@1#
Output item
Related
command
maintenance
Enabling you to switch from privileged mode to maintenance mode
24-15
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution
dir
Display of list of contents in directory
Shows the list of the contents in a directory.
Input format
dir [P1]
Parameter
P1: Path (1 to 127 characters)

* When P1 is omitted, the list of the contents in the current directory is shown.
Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
path name of 127 characters or less is converted to an absolute path name of more than
246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are
permissible. No directory can be referenced beyond 21 directory hierarchies.
Set a path name with alphabets, numeric characters, and symbols and signs % & , = [ ]
^ _ { } ~ /.
Input example
Switch@1% dir
11/26/2004 15:59:08 <DIR>
11/26/2004 15:59:42 <DIR>
11/26/2004 16:05:18
11/26/2004 16:06:36
4096 cx2600
4096 auto_reflect
246 testConfig.scfg
246 testConfig2.scfg
Switch@1% dir
Output items
Update date and time

<DIR>: Directory
File directory size
File directory name
Related
commands
mkdir
rmdir
cd
ous external-memory
Creating of directory
Removing of directory
Change of current directory
24-16
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution
mkdir
Creates a directory.
Input format
mkdir P1
Parameter
P1: Directory name or path name + directory name (1 to 127 characters)
Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
An error occurs if the directory name is used in a file name in the same directory.
path name of 127 characters or less (including the created directory name) is converted
to an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to
20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No directory can be created beyond 21
directory hierarchies.
The maximum length of a directory name is 99 characters.
Set a directory name or a path name + directory name with alphanumeric characters
and % & , = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ /.
Input example
Switch@1% mkdir cx2600/newdir

Switch@1%
Output item
Related
commands
dir
rmdir
cd
ous external-memory

24-17
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution
rmdir
Removes a directory.
Input format
rmdir P1
Parameter
P1: Directory name or path name + directory name (1 to 127 characters)
Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
path name of 127 characters or less (including the deleted directory name) is converted
to an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. If no path is
specified, current directory specification is assumed. Paths of up to 20 directory
hierarchies are permissible. No directory can be specified beyond 21 directory
hierarchies.
Set a directory name or a path name + directory name with alphanumeric characters
and % & , = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ /.
Input example
Switch@1% rmdir cx2600/deldir

Switch@1%
Output item
Related
commands
mkdir
dir
cd
ous external-memory
24-18
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution
cd
Changes the current directory.
Input format
cd [P1]
Parameter
P1: Path (1 to 127 characters)

* When P1 is omitted, paths are displayed.
Default value
Root directory in external memory
Usage condition
Notes
path name of 127 characters or less is converted to an absolute path name of more than
246 characters, an error occurs. If no path is specified, current directory specification is
assumed. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No directory can
be specified beyond 21 directory hierarchies.
Set a path name with alphanumeric characters and % & , = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ /.
Input example
Switch@1% cd /auto_reflect
Switch@1%
Switch@1% cd
/auto_reflect
Switch@1%
Output item
Path to the current directory
Related
commands
mkdir
dir
rmdir
ous external-memory
24-19
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution
copy
Copying file
Copies a file.
Input format
copy P1 P2
Parameters
P1: Copy source fie name or copy source path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)
P2: Copy destination file name or copy destination path name + file name (1 to 127
characters)
Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
An error occurs if the copy destination file name is used in a directory name in the same
directory.
The maximum length of a copy destination file name is 99 characters.
Set a copy source file name, a copy source path name + file name, or a copy destination
path name + file name with alphanumeric characters and % & , = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ /..
You can use / only when specifying a path name and . only when specifying a file
name.
Input example
Switch@1% copy config/startup_config.scfg

config/backup/backup_config.scfg
Switch@1%
Output item
Related
commands
rename
del
ous external-memory
Change of file name

Deleting file
24-20
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution
rename
Change of file name
Changes a file name.
Input format
rename P1 P2
Parameters
P1: Pre-change file name or pre-change path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)
P2: Post-change file name (1 to 99 characters)
Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
An error occurs if the post-change file name is used in a directory name in the same
directory.
Set a pre-change file name, a pre-change path name + file name, or a post-change file
name with alphanumeric characters and % & , = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ /..
name.
Input example
Switch@1% rename cx2600/old_name.scfg new_name.scfg

Switch@1%
Output item
Related
commands
copy
del
ous external-memory
Copying file
Deleting file
24-21
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution
del
Deleting file
Deletes a file.
Input format
del P1
Parameter
Default value
None
Usage condition
Notes
Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphanumeric characters and % & , = [ ]
^ _ { } ~ /..
name.
Input example
Switch@1% del cx2600/del_file.scfg

Switch@1%
Output item
Related
commands
copy
rename
ous external-memory
Copying file
Change of file name
24-22
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Privilege
Synchro
-nize
Save
SBY
execution
ous external-memory
Removes external memory.
Input format
ous external-memory
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
Note
Entering this command disables external memory access because external memory is
disconnected from the device. If you want to access external memory again, you must
reinsert it.
Input example
Switch@1% ous external-memory

Switch@1%
Output item
Related
commands
mkdir
dir
rmdir
cd
copy
rename
del
Coping file
Change of file name
Deleting file
24-23
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance
Save
Synchro
-nize
SBY
execution
show switch status

Display of asynchronous switch status of UGSW module
Shows the asynchronous switch status of the UGSW module.
Input format
show switch status
Parameter
None
Default value
None
Usage condition
None
Note
None
Input example
!Switch@1% show switch status

Switch Status
=============
Mode : synchronous
Output item
Related
command
None
24-24
Appendix
25 Appendix
25-1
Appendix
Appendix 1
Commands shown by configuration display and show all
The table below lists the commands shown by configuration display (show running-config and show
startup-config) and show all.
Shown by
show running-config or
show startup-config
(write memory)
Command
Shown by show all
change aps
change aps reset
change ether-ps
change switch
date
dm ether-oam
linktrace ether-oam
lm ether-oam
loopback atm
loopback ether-oam
loopback ima
loopback mc
mirror port
ous line
ous switch
reset line
reset switch
reset system
set aps
set aps lockout
set aps time
set atm-loop
set atm-oam
set atm-oam flow
set atmop format
25-2
Appendix
Shown by
show startup-config
(write memory)
Command
Shown by show all
set atmop mode
set atm-qos aal5
set atm-shaper mode
set atm-shaper rate
set backup schedule
set backup server
set command-mode
set enable password
set ether-oam cc
set ether-oam frame
set ether-oam lm
set ether-oam meg
set ether-oam mep
set ether-oam mip
set ether-oam rdi
set ether-ps
set ether-ps time
set ether-ring
set ether-ring time
set fdb agingtime
set fdb limiter
set fdb table mode
set filter in-port
25-3
Appendix
Shown by
show startup-config
(write memory)
Command
Shown by show all
set filter out-port
set filter profile
set frame-size
set ifg over-rate
set igmp
set ima clock
set ima group
set in-band admin
set in-band vid
set ip in-band mode
set ip route
set isolate port
set isolate pvc
set line mode atmp
set line mode gbe
set line mode tdmp
set line type
set login password
set mc management
set ntp access-time
set ntp server
set out-band speed
set port admin
set port clock
25-4
Appendix
Shown by
show startup-config
(write memory)
Command
Shown by show all
set port frame
set port impedance
set port link-trap
set port path-trace
set port speed
set port type
set pvc admin
set pvc connection
set pvc name
set pvc port admin
set pvc static
set pvc-vlan mode
set pvc-vlan table
set qos class-map
set qos out-rate fairness

maximum-port
{ *1
25-5
Appendix
Shown by
show startup-config
(write memory)
Command
Shown by show all
set snmp
set snmp manager
set spantree
set spantree mode
set spantree port
set spantree time
set syslog map
set syslog remote
set syslog server
set system contact
set system location
set system name
set system timezone
set tdm group
set tdm group-name
set tdm path
set tdmop admin
set tdmop format
set tdmop group
set tdmop jitter
set tdmop mode
set terminal logout
set terminal prompt
25-6
Appendix
Shown by
show startup-config
(write memory)
Command
Shown by show all
set user account
set vlan ethertype
set vlan member
set vlan name
set vlan portbase
set vlan swap
set vlan tagbase
show atm-oam config
show atm-oam status
show atmop format
show atm-qos aal5
show command-mode
show counter cell
show counter port
25-7
Appendix
Shown by
show startup-config
(write memory)
Command
Shown by show all
show ether-oam lm
show ether-oam meg
show ether-oam mep
show ether-oam mip
show fault past
show fault present
{ (Detailed showing)
show fdb agingtime
show fdb count all
show fdb count port
show fdb count vid
show fdb limiter
show fdb table
show fdb table mode
show fdb table port
show fdb table vid
show filter in-port
show filter profile
show frame-size
show ifg over-rate
show igmp mac
show igmp port
show igmp status
show igmp vid
show ima clock
25-8
Appendix
Shown by
show startup-config
(write memory)
Command
Shown by show all
show ip config
show isolate port
show isolate pvc
show line mode
show loopback atm keepalive

information
show mc information
{ (Outline showing)
show mirror port
show ntp
show port impedance
show port trap
show pvc connection
show qos class-map
25-9
Appendix
Shown by
show startup-config
(write memory)
Command
Shown by show all
show reset
{ (Outline showing)
show resource cpu
show session
show snmp
show spantree info
show spantree mode
show spantree port
show stm status
show switch status
show syslog local
show syslog map
show syslog server
show system bridge
show system date
show system status
show tdm group
show tdm group-name
show tdm path
show tdmop format
show tdmop jitter
show tdmop status
25-10
Appendix
Shown by
show startup-config
(write memory)
Command
Shown by show all
show user account
show vlan ethertype
show vlan summary
show vlan swap
show vlan table vid
*1
{:
:
:
Show running-config and show startup-config are output by set qos out-weight fairness.
Shown
Not shown
Not applicable
25-11
Appendix
Appendix 2
Line module type conditions
The table below lists operation restrictions on commands per line module.
Operation restrictions
Command
GbE-
GbE-
PV
PV2
FE-PV
FX-PV
ATM
ATMP
TDMP
GbE8-
155
MUX
change aps
change aps reset
change ether-ps
change switch
date
dm ether-oam
linktrace ether-oam
155
ATMP
TDMP
155
lm ether-oam
loopback atm
loopback ether-oam
loopback ima
loopback mc
mirror port
ous line
ous switch
reset line
reset switch
reset system
set aps
set aps lockout
set aps time
set atm-loop
set atm-oam
set atm-oam flow
set atmop format
set atmop mode
25-12
Appendix
Command
GbE-
GbE-
FE-PV
FX-PV
ATM
ATMP
TDMP
GbE8-
PV
PV2
155
MUX
set atm-qos aal5
set atm-shaper mode
set atm-shaper rate
set backup schedule
set backup server
set command-mode
set enable password
set ether-oam cc
set ether-oam frame
set ether-oam lm
set ether-oam meg
set ether-oam mep
set ether-oam mip
set ether-oam rdi
155
ATMP
TDMP
155
set ether-ps
set ether-ps time
set ether-ring
set ether-ring time
set fdb agingtime
set fdb limiter
set fdb table mode
set filter in-port
set filter out-port
set filter profile
set frame-size
set ifg over-rate
set igmp
set ima clock
25-13
Appendix
Command
GbE-
GbE-
FE-PV
FX-PV
ATM
ATMP
TDMP
GbE8-
PV
PV2
155
MUX
set ima group
set in-band admin
set in-band vid
set ip in-band mode
set ip route
set isolate port
set isolate pvc
set line mode atmp
set line mode gbe
set line mode tdmp
set line type
set login password
set mc management
set ntp access-time
set ntp server
set out-band speed
set port admin
set port clock
set port frame
set port impedance
set port link-trap
set port path-trace
set port speed
set port type
set pvc admin
155
25-14
ATMP
TDMP
155
Appendix
Command
GbE-
GbE-
FE-PV
FX-PV
ATM
ATMP
TDMP
GbE8-
PV
PV2
155
MUX
set pvc connection
set pvc name
set pvc port admin
set pvc static
set pvc-vlan mode
set pvc-vlan table
set qos class-map
set qos out-rate fairness

maximum-port
set snmp
set snmp manager
set spantree
set spantree mode
155
25-15
ATMP
TDMP
155
Appendix
Command
GbE-
GbE-
FE-PV
FX-PV
ATM
ATMP
TDMP
GbE8-
PV
PV2
155
MUX
set spantree port
set spantree time
set syslog map
set syslog remote
set syslog server
set system contact
set system location
set system name
set system timezone
set tdm group
set tdm group-name
set tdm path
set tdmop admin
set tdmop format
set tdmop group
set tdmop jitter
set tdmop mode
set terminal logout
set terminal prompt
set user account
set vlan ethertype
set vlan member
set vlan name
155
25-16
ATMP
TDMP
155
Appendix
Command
GbE-
GbE-
PV
PV2
set vlan portbase
set vlan swap
set vlan tagbase
{:
U:
:
:
FE-PV
FX-PV
ATM
ATMP
155
Operable
Inoperable (commands can be entered)
Inoperable (commands cannot be entered)
Set in UGSW
25-17
ATMP
TDMP
TDMP
GbE8-
155
MUX
155
Appendix
(Blank page)
25-18
Index
Index
C
cd ............................................................................................................................................... 24-19
change aps .................................................................................................................................. 11-6
change aps reset ......................................................................................................................... 11-8
change ether-ps ......................................................................................................................... 10-47
change ether-ps reset ................................................................................................................ 10-48
change external-clock .................................................................................................................. 18-9
change switch ............................................................................................................................ 23-13
clear aggregation group ............................................................................................................... 8-28
clear atm-fdb table pvc............................................................................................................... 12-26
clear atm-loop ............................................................................................................................ 12-30
clear atmop format ..................................................................................................................... 12-37
clear atm-qos out-port clp .......................................................................................................... 13-15
clear atm-shaper rate................................................................................................................. 13-10
clear backup server.................................................................................................................... 22-32
clear counter cell........................................................................................................................ 21-39
clear counter ether-oam entry.................................................................................................... 21-43
clear counter port ......................................................................................................................... 21-5
clear counter pvc entry............................................................................................................... 21-22
clear counter pvc value .............................................................................................................. 21-26
clear counter vlan entry.............................................................................................................. 21-13
clear counter vlan value ............................................................................................................. 21-19
clear enable password ................................................................................................................... 1-7
clear ether-oam fault reason ...................................................................................................... 10-32
clear ether-oam lm ..................................................................................................................... 10-15
clear ether-oam meg.................................................................................................................... 10-5
clear ether-oam mep.................................................................................................................. 10-12
clear ether-oam mip ................................................................................................................... 10-21
clear ether-oam peer-mep ......................................................................................................... 10-17
clear ether-ring loop-detection ................................................................................................... 10-57
clear fault past............................................................................................................................ 22-41
clear fault warning...................................................................................................................... 22-38
clear fdb limiter............................................................................................................................. 9-20
Index-1
Index
clear fdb limiter static ................................................................................................................... 9-22
clear fdb table port ....................................................................................................................... 7-15
clear fdb table vid......................................................................................................................... 7-17
clear filter in-port .......................................................................................................................... 9-12
clear filter out-port ........................................................................................................................ 9-16
clear filter profile............................................................................................................................. 9-8
clear igmp mac............................................................................................................................. 8-38
clear igmp vid............................................................................................................................... 8-41
clear ima group ............................................................................................................................ 15-8
clear ip address in-band................................................................................................................. 3-6
clear ip address out-band .............................................................................................................. 3-3
clear ip route ................................................................................................................................ 3-12
clear ip route default ...................................................................................................................... 3-8
clear ip virtual-address................................................................................................................. 3-21
clear login password ...................................................................................................................... 1-9
clear loopback atm keepalive..................................................................................................... 20-23
clear ntp server .......................................................................................................................... 19-38
clear pvc connection .................................................................................................................. 12-42
clear pvc name............................................................................................................................. 12-5
clear pvc static ............................................................................................................................. 12-3
clear pvc-vlan table .................................................................................................................... 12-12
clear qos cos-map profile............................................................................................................. 6-48
clear qos in-port cos-map ............................................................................................................ 6-51
clear qos in-rate maximum........................................................................................................... 6-19
clear qos out-port cos-map .......................................................................................................... 6-54
clear qos out-rate maximum ........................................................................................................ 6-35
clear qos out-weight fairness ....................................................................................................... 6-69
clear running-config line............................................................................................................. 22-27
clear session .............................................................................................................................. 19-24
clear session ip-permit ............................................................................................................... 19-22
clear snmp manager .................................................................................................................. 19-15
clear snmp trap-manager........................................................................................................... 19-16
clear startup-config .................................................................................................................... 22-30
clear syslog local........................................................................................................................ 19-34
clear syslog map ........................................................................................................................ 19-31
clear syslog server ..................................................................................................................... 19-28
clear system daylight-time ........................................................................................................... 2-12
Index-2
Index
clear tdm group ............................................................................................................................ 16-6
clear tdm group-name................................................................................................................ 16-12
clear tdm path ............................................................................................................................ 16-18
clear tdmop adaptive-clock ........................................................................................................ 17-35
clear tdmop connection.............................................................................................................. 17-16
clear tdmop format ..................................................................................................................... 17-28
clear tdmop group ........................................................................................................................ 17-9
clear tdmop mode ........................................................................................................................ 17-4
clear user account........................................................................................................................ 1-18
clear vlan name............................................................................................................................ 5-16
clear vlan swap ............................................................................................................................ 5-11
clear vlan tagbase.......................................................................................................................... 5-3
copy ........................................................................................................................................... 24-20
D
date ................................................................................................................................................ 2-6
del .............................................................................................................................................. 24-22
dir ............................................................................................................................................... 24-16
disable............................................................................................................................................ 1-4
dm ether-oam............................................................................................................................. 10-37
download fpga line .............................................................................................................. 22-9, 24-5
download fpga switch.......................................................................................................... 22-8, 24-3
download running-config............................................................................................................ 22-11
download running-config external-memory................................................................................ 24-10
download software .............................................................................................................. 22-7, 24-2
download startup-config............................................................................................................. 22-13
download startup-config external-memory ................................................................................. 24-11
E
enable ............................................................................................................................................ 1-3
end ............................................................................................................................................. 24-15
exit ................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Index-3
Index
L
linktrace ether-oam .................................................................................................................... 10-35
lm ether-oam.............................................................................................................................. 10-39
loopback atm................................................................................................................................ 20-9
loopback ether-oam ................................................................................................................... 10-33
loopback ima.............................................................................................................................. 15-11
loopback mc................................................................................................................................. 20-3
M
maintenance .................................................................................................................................. 1-5
mirror port .................................................................................................................................. 21-45
mkdir .......................................................................................................................................... 24-17
O
ous external-memory ...................................................................................................... 23-22, 24-23
ous line....................................................................................................................................... 23-21
ous switch .................................................................................................................................. 23-20
P
ping .............................................................................................................................................. 3-18
R
rename....................................................................................................................................... 24-21
reset line .................................................................................................................................... 23-18
reset reference-clock ................................................................................................................... 18-8
reset switch ................................................................................................................................ 23-16
reset system............................................................................................................................... 23-14
rmdir........................................................................................................................................... 24-18
S
set aggregation group .................................................................................................................. 8-24
set aggregation port priority ......................................................................................................... 8-31
Index-4
Index
set aggregation protection-time ................................................................................................... 8-33
set aggregation system priority .................................................................................................... 8-29
set aps ......................................................................................................................................... 11-2
set aps lockout ............................................................................................................................. 11-4
set aps time.................................................................................................................................. 11-5
set atm-loop ............................................................................................................................... 12-27
set atm-oam ................................................................................................................................. 14-2
set atm-oam flow.......................................................................................................................... 14-4
set atmop format ........................................................................................................................ 12-33
set atmop in-port priority ............................................................................................................ 13-16
set atmop mode ......................................................................................................................... 12-31
set atmop out-port clp mode ...................................................................................................... 13-20
set atmop out-port clp priority .................................................................................................... 13-21
set atm-qos aal5 ........................................................................................................................ 13-11
set atm-qos out-port clp ............................................................................................................. 13-13
set atm-shaper mode ................................................................................................................... 13-2
set atm-shaper rate...................................................................................................................... 13-3
set backup schedule .................................................................................................................. 22-33
set backup server....................................................................................................................... 22-31
set command-mode ..................................................................................................................... 1-19
set counter ether-oam entry....................................................................................................... 21-40
set counter pvc entry.................................................................................................................. 21-20
set counter vlan entry................................................................................................................... 21-9
set enable password ...................................................................................................................... 1-6
set ether-oam cc ........................................................................................................................ 10-26
set ether-oam frame................................................................................................................... 10-22
set ether-oam lm ........................................................................................................................ 10-13
set ether-oam meg....................................................................................................................... 10-2
set ether-oam mep....................................................................................................................... 10-6
set ether-oam mip ...................................................................................................................... 10-18
set ether-oam peer-mep ............................................................................................................ 10-16
set ether-oam rdi........................................................................................................................ 10-28
set ether-oam reply-period......................................................................................................... 10-24
set ether-ps ................................................................................................................................ 10-42
set ether-ps control-vlan ............................................................................................................ 10-44
set ether-ps lockout.................................................................................................................... 10-45
set ether-ps time ........................................................................................................................ 10-46
Index-5
Index
set ether-ring.............................................................................................................................. 10-53
set ether-ring control-vlan .......................................................................................................... 10-54
set ether-ring rpl-owner.............................................................................................................. 10-55
set ether-ring time ...................................................................................................................... 10-56
set external-clock mode ............................................................................................................... 18-2
set fault auto-reboot ................................................................................................................... 22-51
set fdb agingtime............................................................................................................................ 7-6
set fdb limiter................................................................................................................................ 9-17
set fdb limiter static ...................................................................................................................... 9-21
set fdb table mode ......................................................................................................................... 7-4
set filter in-port ............................................................................................................................... 9-9
set filter out-port ........................................................................................................................... 9-13
set filter profile................................................................................................................................ 9-4
set frame-size ................................................................................................................................ 7-2
set ifg over-rate ............................................................................................................................ 7-18
set igmp ....................................................................................................................................... 8-35
set ima clock ................................................................................................................................ 15-9
set ima group ............................................................................................................................... 15-2
set in-band admin ........................................................................................................................ 3-13
set in-band vid.............................................................................................................................. 3-14
set ip address in-band.................................................................................................................... 3-4
set ip address out-band ................................................................................................................. 3-2
set ip in-band mode ..................................................................................................................... 3-22
set ip route ..................................................................................................................................... 3-9
set ip route default ......................................................................................................................... 3-7
set ip virtual-address.................................................................................................................... 3-19
set isolate port................................................................................................................................ 9-2
set isolate pvc ............................................................................................................................ 12-17
set l2p-transparent reserved-mac ................................................................................................ 8-22
set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu ........................................................................................................ 8-20
set line mode atmp....................................................................................................................... 23-6
set line mode gbe....................................................................................................................... 23-10
set line mode tdmp....................................................................................................................... 23-3
set line mode tdmp155................................................................................................................. 23-8
set line type.................................................................................................................................. 23-2
set login password ......................................................................................................................... 1-8
set loopback atm keepalive........................................................................................................ 20-19
Index-6
Index
set loopback atm keepalive-mode ............................................................................................. 20-15
set loopback atm source-id ........................................................................................................ 20-13
set mc management .................................................................................................................... 20-2
set message transmit................................................................................................................. 22-17
set ntp access-time .................................................................................................................... 19-35
set ntp server ............................................................................................................................. 19-36
set out-band flowcontrol............................................................................................................... 3-16
set out-band speed ...................................................................................................................... 3-15
set port admin ................................................................................................................................ 4-2
set port cable-length .................................................................................................................... 4-19
set port clock.................................................................................................................................. 4-9
set port flowcontrol......................................................................................................................... 4-6
set port frame............................................................................................................................... 4-10
set port impedance ...................................................................................................................... 4-26
set port link-trap ............................................................................................................................. 4-8
set port logical-interface............................................................................................................... 4-23
set port path-trace........................................................................................................................ 4-28
set port protection-time .................................................................................................................. 4-7
set port speed ................................................................................................................................ 4-3
set port type ................................................................................................................................... 4-5
set pvc admin............................................................................................................................... 12-6
set pvc connection ..................................................................................................................... 12-38
set pvc name................................................................................................................................ 12-4
set pvc port admin........................................................................................................................ 12-7
set pvc static ................................................................................................................................ 12-2
set pvc-vlan mode...................................................................................................................... 12-10
set pvc-vlan table ....................................................................................................................... 12-11
set qos class-map ........................................................................................................................ 6-37
set qos class-map profile ............................................................................................................. 6-40
set qos cos-map profile................................................................................................................ 6-43
set qos in-class-map maximum ..................................................................................................... 6-9
set qos initial-class-map............................................................................................................... 6-71
set qos initial-priority .................................................................................................................... 6-75
set qos in-port cos-map ............................................................................................................... 6-49
set qos in-priority maximum ......................................................................................................... 6-12
set qos in-rate maximum................................................................................................................ 6-6
set qos maximum-mode................................................................................................................. 6-2
Index-7
Index
set qos measure-cycle ................................................................................................................. 6-80
set qos out-class-map maximum ................................................................................................. 6-24
set qos out-fairness-mode ........................................................................................................... 6-55
set qos out-port cos-map ............................................................................................................. 6-52
set qos out-priority fairness.......................................................................................................... 6-57
set qos out-priority maximum....................................................................................................... 6-27
set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port ...................................................................................... 6-64
set qos out-rate maximum ........................................................................................................... 6-21
set qos out-weight fairness .......................................................................................................... 6-62
set qos out-weight rate................................................................................................................. 6-60
set reference-clock mode............................................................................................................. 18-5
set reference-clock priority........................................................................................................... 18-3
set session ip-permit .................................................................................................................. 19-20
set snmp .................................................................................................................................... 19-12
set snmp authen-trap ................................................................................................................. 19-17
set snmp manager ..................................................................................................................... 19-13
set snmp trap-manager.............................................................................................................. 19-14
set spantree ................................................................................................................................... 8-2
set spantree mode ......................................................................................................................... 8-3
set spantree port .......................................................................................................................... 8-10
set spantree port cost .................................................................................................................. 8-12
set spantree port edge ................................................................................................................. 8-15
set spantree port point-to-point .................................................................................................... 8-17
set spantree port priority .............................................................................................................. 8-11
set spantree priority ....................................................................................................................... 8-5
set spantree time ........................................................................................................................... 8-6
set spantree txholdcount................................................................................................................ 8-7
set syslog map ........................................................................................................................... 19-29
set syslog remote....................................................................................................................... 19-25
set syslog server ........................................................................................................................ 19-26
set system contact ......................................................................................................................... 2-2
set system daylight-time ................................................................................................................ 2-8
set system location ........................................................................................................................ 2-4
set system name............................................................................................................................ 2-3
set system timezone ...................................................................................................................... 2-7
set tdm group ............................................................................................................................... 16-2
set tdm group-name..................................................................................................................... 16-8
Index-8
Index
set tdm path ............................................................................................................................... 16-14
set tdmop adaptive-clock ........................................................................................................... 17-32
set tdmop admin ........................................................................................................................ 17-30
set tdmop connection................................................................................................................. 17-11
set tdmop format ........................................................................................................................ 17-23
set tdmop group ........................................................................................................................... 17-5
set tdmop jitter ........................................................................................................................... 17-17
set tdmop mode ........................................................................................................................... 17-2
set terminal logout........................................................................................................................ 1-14
set terminal monitor ..................................................................................................................... 1-13
set terminal prompt ...................................................................................................................... 1-10
set terminal scroll local................................................................................................................. 1-12
set terminal scroll system............................................................................................................. 1-11
set user account........................................................................................................................... 1-16
set vlan ethertype......................................................................................................................... 5-13
set vlan member ............................................................................................................................ 5-8
set vlan name............................................................................................................................... 5-15
set vlan portbase............................................................................................................................ 5-4
set vlan swap ................................................................................................................................. 5-9
set vlan tagbase............................................................................................................................. 5-2
show aggregation group .............................................................................................................. 8-26
show aggregation port priority...................................................................................................... 8-32
show aggregation protection-time................................................................................................ 8-34
show aggregation system priority ................................................................................................ 8-30
show all ...................................................................................................................................... 22-24
show aps information ................................................................................................................... 11-9
show atm-fdb count pvc ............................................................................................................. 12-22
show atm-fdb count vid .............................................................................................................. 12-24
show atm-fdb table pvc .............................................................................................................. 12-19
show atm-fdb table vid ............................................................................................................... 12-20
show atm-loop config ................................................................................................................. 12-28
show atm-loop information......................................................................................................... 12-29
show atm-oam config................................................................................................................... 14-6
show atm-oam status................................................................................................................... 14-8
show atmop format .................................................................................................................... 12-35
show atmop in-port priority......................................................................................................... 13-18
show atmop out-port clp............................................................................................................. 13-22
Index-9
Index
show atm-qos aal5..................................................................................................................... 13-12
show atm-qos out-port clp.......................................................................................................... 13-14
show atm-shaper information....................................................................................................... 13-8
show atm-shaper rate .................................................................................................................. 13-6
show backup information ........................................................................................................... 22-35
show command-mode.................................................................................................................. 1-20
show config difference ............................................................................................................... 22-16
show counter cell ....................................................................................................................... 21-27
show counter cell f4 ................................................................................................................... 21-31
show counter cell f5 ................................................................................................................... 21-34
show counter cell ima-port ......................................................................................................... 21-37
show counter discard ................................................................................................................... 21-6
show counter ether-oam entry ................................................................................................... 21-41
show counter ether-oam value................................................................................................... 21-44
show counter port ........................................................................................................................ 21-2
show counter pvc entry .............................................................................................................. 21-21
show counter pvc value ............................................................................................................. 21-23
show counter vlan entry ............................................................................................................. 21-11
show counter vlan value ............................................................................................................ 21-14
show ether-oam fault last-change.............................................................................................. 10-29
show ether-oam fault reason ..................................................................................................... 10-30
show ether-oam frame ............................................................................................................... 10-23
show ether-oam lm .................................................................................................................... 10-14
show ether-oam meg ................................................................................................................... 10-3
show ether-oam mep ................................................................................................................... 10-8
show ether-oam mip .................................................................................................................. 10-19
show ether-oam reply-period ..................................................................................................... 10-25
show ether-ps config.................................................................................................................. 10-49
show ether-ps status.................................................................................................................. 10-51
show ether-ring config................................................................................................................ 10-58
show ether-ring status................................................................................................................ 10-60
show fault auto-reboot ............................................................................................................... 22-52
show fault past ........................................................................................................................... 22-39
show fault present...................................................................................................................... 22-36
show fdb agingtime ........................................................................................................................ 7-7
show fdb count all ........................................................................................................................ 7-11
show fdb count port........................................................................................................................ 7-8
Index-10
Index
show fdb count vid ....................................................................................................................... 7-10
show fdb limiter ............................................................................................................................ 9-18
show fdb table.............................................................................................................................. 7-12
show fdb table mode...................................................................................................................... 7-5
show fdb table port....................................................................................................................... 7-13
show fdb table vid ........................................................................................................................ 7-16
show filter in-port.......................................................................................................................... 9-10
show filter out-port ....................................................................................................................... 9-14
show filter profile ............................................................................................................................ 9-6
show frame-size............................................................................................................................. 7-3
show ifg over-rate ........................................................................................................................ 7-19
show igmp mac ............................................................................................................................ 8-37
show igmp port............................................................................................................................. 8-40
show igmp status ......................................................................................................................... 8-36
show igmp vid .............................................................................................................................. 8-39
show ima clock........................................................................................................................... 15-10
show ima group config ................................................................................................................. 15-4
show ima group status ................................................................................................................. 15-5
show in-band information............................................................................................................... 3-5
show ip config .............................................................................................................................. 3-10
show isolate port ............................................................................................................................ 9-3
show isolate pvc......................................................................................................................... 12-18
show l2p-transparent reserved-mac ............................................................................................ 8-23
show l2p-transparent stp-bpdu .................................................................................................... 8-21
show line mode .......................................................................................................................... 23-11
show loopback atm keepalive config ......................................................................................... 20-16
show loopback atm keepalive information ................................................................................. 20-21
show loopback atm source-id .................................................................................................... 20-14
show mc information .................................................................................................................... 20-7
show message transmit config................................................................................................... 22-21
show mirror port ......................................................................................................................... 21-47
show ntp..................................................................................................................................... 19-37
show out-band information........................................................................................................... 3-17
show port cable-length................................................................................................................. 4-21
show port impedance................................................................................................................... 4-27
show port information................................................................................................................... 4-11
show port logical-interface ........................................................................................................... 4-25
Index-11
Index
show port path-trace .................................................................................................................... 4-31
show port protection-time............................................................................................................. 4-18
show port trap .............................................................................................................................. 4-16
show pvc connection.................................................................................................................. 12-41
show pvc information ................................................................................................................... 12-8
show pvc-vlan table pvc............................................................................................................. 12-13
show pvc-vlan table vid.............................................................................................................. 12-15
show qos class-map .................................................................................................................... 6-38
show qos class-map profile.......................................................................................................... 6-42
show qos cos-map profile ............................................................................................................ 6-46
show qos initial-class-map ........................................................................................................... 6-73
show qos initial-priority................................................................................................................. 6-78
show qos in-port cos-map............................................................................................................ 6-50
show qos in-rate maximum .......................................................................................................... 6-16
show qos maximum-mode ............................................................................................................. 6-4
show qos measure-cycle ............................................................................................................. 6-81
show qos out-fairness-mode........................................................................................................ 6-56
show qos out-port cos-map.......................................................................................................... 6-53
show qos out-rate maximum........................................................................................................ 6-32
show qos out-weight fairness....................................................................................................... 6-66
show reference-clock information ................................................................................................ 18-6
show reset.................................................................................................................................. 23-19
show resource cpu..................................................................................................................... 22-53
show resource memory.............................................................................................................. 22-55
show running-config................................................................................................................... 22-14
show session ............................................................................................................................. 19-23
show session ip-permit .............................................................................................................. 19-21
show snmp................................................................................................................................. 19-18
show spantree info......................................................................................................................... 8-8
show spantree mode...................................................................................................................... 8-4
show spantree port ...................................................................................................................... 8-13
show spantree port edge ............................................................................................................. 8-16
show spantree port point-to-point ................................................................................................ 8-18
show startup-config.................................................................................................................... 22-15
show stm status ........................................................................................................................... 4-36
show switch status ..................................................................................................................... 24-24
show syslog local ....................................................................................................................... 19-32
Index-12
Index
show syslog map ....................................................................................................................... 19-30
show syslog server .................................................................................................................... 19-27
show system bridge ................................................................................................................... 22-44
show system date ........................................................................................................................ 2-11
show system information ............................................................................................................... 2-5
show system module-id ............................................................................................................. 22-45
show system revision................................................................................................................. 22-47
show system status.................................................................................................................... 22-42
show system temperature.......................................................................................................... 22-49
show tdm group ........................................................................................................................... 16-4
show tdm group-name ............................................................................................................... 16-10
show tdm path............................................................................................................................ 16-16
show tdmop adaptive-clock........................................................................................................ 17-34
show tdmop connection ............................................................................................................. 17-13
show tdmop format .................................................................................................................... 17-25
show tdmop information............................................................................................................... 17-7
show tdmop jitter........................................................................................................................ 17-19
show tdmop status ..................................................................................................................... 17-21
show terminal config .................................................................................................................... 1-15
show user account ....................................................................................................................... 1-17
show vlan ethertype ..................................................................................................................... 5-14
show vlan summary ..................................................................................................................... 5-12
show vlan swap............................................................................................................................ 5-10
show vlan table port ....................................................................................................................... 5-5
show vlan table vid......................................................................................................................... 5-7
U
update mc information ................................................................................................................. 20-6
upload all-information................................................................................................................... 22-5
upload all-information external-memory..................................................................................... 24-13
upload fault ....................................................................................................................... 22-6, 24-12
upload local-syslog ............................................................................................................. 22-4, 24-9
upload running-config .................................................................................................................. 22-2
upload running-config external-memory ...................................................................................... 24-7
upload startup-config ................................................................................................................... 22-3
upload startup-config external-memory ....................................................................................... 24-8
Index-13
Index
V
virtual-ping ................................................................................................................................... 3-20
W
write memory .................................................................................................................. 22-26, 24-14
Index-14
CX2600/200
Multi-Service Aggregation Switch
Command Reference
NWD-063221-004
Copyright 2004 NEC Corporation
Edition: 7.6
Revision B
May 2009
NEC Corporation
(Unauthorized copying is strictly prohibited.)

CX2600-220 Command Reference v7.6B Eng PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

CX2600-220 Command Reference v7.6B Eng PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

CX2600/200

Multi-Service Aggregation Switch

This device has three types of modes to use commands.

Mode to use all commands related to usual maintenance operation such

Mode to use commands for file operations

Indicates that this command can be used in privileged mode.

Indicates that this command can be used in general mode.

Indicates that this command can be used in maintenance mode.

Indicates that the settings can be saved.

Indicates that the settings automatically synchronize with the other

P1 and P2 can be omitted.

Either one of P1 or P2 cannot be omitted.

: P1 and P2 can be omitted. P2 can be omitted without omitting P1, but P1

When aaa or bbb is specified by P1, specify P2 and P3.

When ccc is specified by P1, specify P4 and P5.

Notation in Parameters includes following meanings.

* indicates a supplement for the parameter.

Line Module Type

fe8-pv, fx8a-pv, fx8b-pv, fx8s-pv

* Line modules in parentheses are not yet supported.

1 Operation Modes ......................................................................1-1

2 Global Configuration ................................................................2-1

3 Administration Ports ................................................................3-1

7 Switch Control ..........................................................................7-1

12 ATM Control ..........................................................................12-1

17 TDM over Packet...................................................................17-1

18 Clock Control ........................................................................18-1

19 Network Management ........................................................19-11

20 Network Test .........................................................................20-1

22 Maintenance and Operation ................................................22-1

23 Device Control ......................................................................23-1

24 Maintenance Mode ...............................................................24-1

Commands shown by configuration display and show all ...................25-2

Appendix 2 Line module type conditions .............................................................25-12

Index ..................................................................................... Index-1

Switch from general mode to privileged mode

Switch from maintenance mode to privileged mode

set enable password

set enable password

Set your privileged mode password interactively.

*Switch@1# set enable password

Switch from general mode to privileged mode

clear enable password

clear enable password

Clear your privileged mode password interactively.

*Switch@1# clear enable password

Switch from general mode to privileged mode

set login password

set login password

Set your login password interactively.

*Switch@1# set login password

clear login password

clear login password

Clear your login password interactively.

*Switch@1# clear login password

set terminal prompt

set terminal prompt P1

P1: Terminal prompt name (1 to 20 characters)

*Switch@1# set terminal prompt CX2600-220

set terminal scroll system

- Specifying that screen scroll stop is off

P1: Scroll control { off | on }